a. How Do I?b. What's New?c. Top 10 Taskse. Search IndexRef"a. Setting UpRef b. WorkspaceRef c. ShortcutsRef d. ScriptingRef e. @FunctionsRef f. Troubleshooting.
Use DatabasesUse ViewsUse DocumentsSearch for InformationUse MailPrint Documents and ViewsKeep Notes SecureShare Information With Other ApplicationsUse Notes Away from a NetworkDesign Notes DatabasesManage Notes DatabasesAdminister Notes Servers---Where is this Release 3 command?What are the important new features?What changed at the last minute?How do I upgrade my site to Release 4?----Things you do before startingTbings you do every dayThings you do frequentlyOther things-----About NotesSetting Up NotesStarting & Stopping NotesAbout Other Notes Documentation------About MenusAbout the SmartIcons PaletteAbout WindowsAbout FoldersAbout Split PanesAbout the Status Bar-------SmartIcon ShortcutsMouse ShortcutsKeyboard Shortcuts--------About ScriptingLotusScript BasicsLotusScript Reference----------@Functions Basics@Functions Reference@Commands Basics@Comands Reference---------About MessagesAbout Customer SupportList of Mesragest
These Release Notes provide important information about Build 164 of Lotus Domino
and Lotus Notes
Release 5.0. Please be sure to read at a minimum the "Troubleshooting" section of the Release Notes. For a list of new features and functionality in this Release, see the "What's New?" section.
You can edit the documents in this database to suit the particular needs of your site. However, if you do edit the contents of this database, it must be strictly for the sole use of users within your organization. You cannot resell or otherwise distribute this documenpation, modified or unmodified, to anyone outside your organization. Lotus
assumes no responsibility for the technical accuracy of any modifications made to this documentation.
To jump from one topic in the Release Notes database to another, double-click green underlined text (click green text in a box for a pop-up definition of a term). To return to where you were, click Go Back.
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$INFO
$BODY
|0m1:
AGENTDESIGN ACTIVE
Dapabase 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DATABASE ACTIVE PERUSE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DATABASE ACTIVE SEARCH BAR
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DESK ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 1778
Databape 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2667
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|'
DIALOG 2693
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2695
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2709
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3P95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2721
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2747
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2780
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2787
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2791
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|E
DIALOG 2794
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2795
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2798
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2799
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2810
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 2814
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|i
DIALOG 3028
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|&
DIALOG 7165
Database 'Notep Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 9495
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 9499
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
DIALOG 9959
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|C
DOCUMENT ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95' View 'b. Index|:
FORMDESIGN ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
FORMDESIGN ACTIVE
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1029
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|e
MESSAGE 1045
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Indexp
MESSAGE 1068 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1072
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1290 H
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1291 3
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|e
MESSAGE 1294 2 t
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1303
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|.
MESSAGE 1310 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 13321 6
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 03324 6
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|$
MESSAGE 13354 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 13429 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 1347
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|
MESSAGE 15284 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|u
MESSAGE 258
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|o
MESSAGE 259 2
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|l
MESSAGE 269
Database 'Notes Help Template 1.05 1_3_95', View 'b. Index|F
What entries should the document appear under in the Index view?
Index_Entries
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
Fde!f^^
$TITLE
$INFO
$$ScriptName
$BODY
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
23100
63199
23198
23178
23095
13354
13321
13324
15284
13429
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
Times New Roman
RN Body
Body Text
Ahead
Body Text
Body Text
CHead
BHead
Bullet
IndPara
CHead
BHead
Kumbered List
Indented Text
Bullet
Indented List
Task List
&Switch To
About Release Notes
14-Jan-1999
This database contains information about Build 164 of Lotus Domino
and Lotus Notes
Release 5.0.
These Release Notes contain the following chapters:
What's New
introduces you to Domino and Notes, tells you about the new features and enhancements in this release, and points+you to further information.
Things You Need to Know
describes supported platforms and environments and other information that you need to know before installing this release.
Troubleshooting
describes limitations and issues associated with this release of Domino and Notes.
Documentation Updates
describes errata and updates to the Domino and Notes documentation. This currently contains no information.
Interoperability
describes known restrictions or potential incompatibilities between different versions of Notes.
History of Changes
currently contains no information because this is a new release of Lotus Notes.
You can edit the documents in this database to suit the particular needs of your site. However, if you do edit the contents of this database, it must be strictly for the sole use of users within your organization. You cannot reselk or otherwise distribute this documentation, modified or unmodified, to anyone outside your organization. Lotus
assumes no responsibility for the technical accuracy of any modifications made to this documentation.
The following information applies to the United States and Canada only:
The latest Lotus Notes Release 4.x technical bulletins, product specifications, and upgrade information are available through Lotus Fax support. All you need is a touch tone phone and a fax machike. To use this support service, call Lotus re:Quest at 1-800-346-3508 or (617) 253-9150 in the United States. In Canada, call 1-800-565-5331.
If you print these Release Notes, we recommend you print on regular 8.5-by-11 inch paper, using a laser printer. This ensures that page size and other formatting is maintained.
Copyright
Under the copyright laws, neither the documentation nor the software+may be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form, in whole or in part, without the prior written consent of Lotus Development Corporation, except in the manner described in the documentation.
Copyright 1995 - 1999
Lotus Development Corporation
55 Cambridge Parkway
Cambridge, MA 02142
All Rights Reserved. Prikted in the United States.
List of trademarks
List of trademarks
InterNotes, Lotus Notes Desktop, LotusScript, Notes, Notes/FX, Notes Reporter, NotesSQL, NotesView, Organizer, SmartCenter, and Word Pro are trademarks and Ami Pro, Approach, Freelance, Freelance Graphics, Lotus, Lotus+Notes, Notesmail, 1-2-3, SmartIcons, and SmartSuite are registered trademarks of Lotus Development Corporation. cc:Mail is a trademark of cc:Mail Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of Lotus Development Corporation. OS/2 Warp and PowerPC are trademarks and AIX, IBM, OS/2, Presentation Manager and SNA are registered trademarks of International Business Machines Corporation. Tivoli/Courier is a trademark of Tivoli Systems Inc., a wholly owned subsidiary of International Business Machines Corporation.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
Copyright (c) 1995 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved.
Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met:
1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution.
3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement:
This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors.
4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission.
THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNES[ FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLEFOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODSOR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OK THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE.
Portions Copyright (c) 1993 by Digital Equipment Corporation.
Permission to use, copy, modify, and distribute this software for any purpose with or without fee is hereby granted, provided that the above copyright notice and this permission notice appear in all copies, and that the name of Digital Equipment Corporation not be used in advertising or publicity pertaining to distribution of the document or software without specific, written prior pe{mission.
THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS" AND DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORP. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES WITH REGARD TO THIS SOFTWARE, INCLUDING ALL IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS. IN NO EVENT SHALL DIGITAL EQUIPMENT CORPORATION BE LIABLE FOR ANY SPECIAL, DIRECT, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE O[ OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THIS SOFTWARE..
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notks Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$INFO
$BODY
Catekori_zeD
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
Fde!f^^
$Name
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaCkass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
ProductBookh$15
Section
Section
3S4S6S10S12S13S14S15S19S22S26S
Doc_Numbe{h$18H
MainComment
Reviewer"
0S0E
?$19Contents: What's new?
Indent
Subject
Indent
Subject
Subject
3S4S6S10S12S13S15S16S17S19S23S25S26S28S32S34S35S
Show Navigator.
0S0E
Expand All
0S0E
Collapse All
0S0E
Domino
ViewNextPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Previous
Domino
ViewPreviousPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Search
0S0E
Web Button
Use thi{ button only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
9n\zq
a!r)G
$Author
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
ProductBookh$14
Section
Section
3S4S6S10S12S13S14S15S19S22S26S
Doc_Numberh$15H
MainComment
Reviewer"
0S0E
?$16Contents: Documentation updates
Indent
Subject
Indent
Subject
Subject
3S4S6S10S12S13S15S16S17S19S23S25S26S28[32S34S35S
Show Navigator.
0S0E
Expand Alk
0S0E
Collapse All
0S0E
Domino
ViewNextPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Previous
Domino
ViewPreviousPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the+Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Search
0S0E
Web Button
Use this button only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Categori_zeo
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove Frok Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
kR$E,#ED
$Author
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$FormFormula
$Comment
$ACTIONS
Show Navigator0
NInter
0S0E
Expand All
0S0E
Collapse All
0S0E
Domino
ViewNextPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Previous
Domino
ViewPreviousPage
Web Button
Thks button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Search
0S0E
Web Button
Use this button only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Note{
PURSAFO
B*u)G0
$Author
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
Fde!f^^
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$FormFormula
$Comment
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Dkcu_ment
_Forward
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$Author
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
Show Navigator0
NSrch
0S0E
Show Search Bar?&
0S0E
Hide Search Bar &
0S0E
Domino
ViewNextPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Previous
Domino
ViewPreviousPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Search
0S0E
Web Button
Use this button only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes+Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
GsTJ5
$Author
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
ProductBookh$9
Section
Section
3S4S6S10S12S13S14S15S19S22S26S
Doc_Numberh$13H
MainComment
Reviewer"
0S0E
?$1;Contents: History of changes
Indent
Subject
Indent
Subject
Subject
3S4S6S10S12S13S15S16S17S19S23S25S26S28S32S34S35S
Show Navigator0
NHist
0S0E
Expand All
0S0E
Collapse All
0S0E
Domino
ViewNextPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this informktion over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Previous
Domino
ViewPreviousPage
Web Button
This button works only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WebClient
0S0E
Search
0S0E
Web Button
Use this button only if you're browsing this information over the Web.
0R6S
$$WkbClient
0S0E
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$Author
$TITLE
$Index
$Formula
$FormulaClass
$ViewFormat
$Comment
$ACTIONS
Note:
The @UserLanguage function introduced in Beta 1 has been renamed to @LanguagePreference.
@LanguagePreference is implemented to return a user's preferred language for database contents. Currently it retrieves tke "$Language" variable in the NOTES.INI. If a database has language-dependent contents like design elements or data, the preferred language is used to select suitable contents from the database.
To respond to Lotus with your comments, you must have a connection to the World Wide Web and a browser specified in your Location document. Check with your server administrator for information on your Internet connection, and look in Notes Help for information on how to configure your Notes workstation to connect to the Web.
click here to comment to Lotus on this documentation
HIDDEN STRUCTURAL INFORMATION
What views does this document appear in?
PrimeView
ViewAssign this document to a (main) view
01 What's new?02 Things you need to know03 Troubleshooting04 Documentation updates05 Interoperability06 History of changes
What top-level category does this document appear in?
ViewSection
BookAssign this topic to a section in a view'
- What's new categories -01 Welcome02 New Platforms03 New Features04 New Enhancements- Things you need categories -01 Directory Install and CD-ROM Structure02 Platforms and Requirements03 Memory and System Support Requirements04 Network Protocol and Method Requirements05 LotusScript06 InterNotes Web Navigator- Troubleshooting categories -:1 Install Issues02 Workstation Issues03 Server Issues04 Security Issues05 Networking Issues06 Application Design Issues07 LotusScript and LotusScript Extension Issues08 MAPI Service Provider Issues09 Domino Issues10 Web Navigator Issues- Documentation categories -01 Administrator's Guide02 Application Developer's Guide03 Deployment Guide04 Help05 Install Guides06 Network Configuration Guide07 Programmer's Guide08 Working with Lotus Notes and the Internet- Interoperability categories -01 Notes R4 and R3 on zhe Same Workstation02 Notes R4 Platform Interoperability03 Notes R4 Server and Notes R3 Server Issues04 Notes R4 Server and R3 Workstation Issues05 Notes R4 Workstation and Notes R3 Workstation Issues06 Notes R4 Workstation and R3 Server Issues
What subcategory does this document appear in?
SectionAssign this topic to an Applications view
- Things you need subcategories -UNIX System RequirementsOperating Systems and Networking PlatformsMemory and System RequirementsSystem Support LevelsMethods SupportedProtocols SupportedPatch RequirementsTuning ParametersEnvironment VariablesSystem Performance- Troubleshooting subcategoriesOS/2 OnlyWindows 95 OnlyWindows OnlyDominoPC PlatformsUNIX PlatformsAdministration SecurityServer SecurityWorkstation SecurityLotusScript Data Objects (LS:DO)
What entries should the document appear under in the Index view?
Index_Entries
What printed book is this document part of?
Print1
What printed book chapter is this document part of?
Print2
What sequence should this document appear under in the Print view?
Print_Sequence
How many levels should the document be indented in the Print view?
PrintIndent
Country?
Country
Japan
What is the RNID for this document?
OrigID
1S2S
LeftID
OrigID
0R1S2S6S
RightID
OrigID
0R1S2S6S
LeftID
RightID
0R4S5S6S8S
What are the related SPRs?
Topics(
0S0E
PrinteJ
pagebreak
0S0E
Minimize
0S0J
Go Backd
0S0E
Categori_ze
_Edit Document
Send Docu_ment
_Forward
_Move To Folder...
_Remove From Folder
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$TITLE
$INFO
$WINDOWTITLE
$Header
$Footer
$$Script_O
$$ScriptName
Doc_Number
Indent
Print_Sequence
PrintIndent
$BODY
$ACTIONS
The Decommission Sever Analysis tool enables you to consolidate existing servers and take existing servers out of service permanently. In Domino Administrator, yoz can run Decommission Server Analysis to create a results database with detailed information comparing the source server and the target server. Any inconsistencies between the source and target servers that could be more restrictive or does not provide needed service is marked in the results database.
The information in the results database is meant to guide you to what needs to be done before the source server can be decommissioned.
If you need to mjke changes to the target server, you can run the analysis tool again to determine if the changes made
are sufficient or if more changes are necessary.
Accessing the Decommission Server Analysis Tool
In Domino Administrator, select the Servers - Analysis tab.
Click Decommission Server Analysis.
Select the source server and the target server from the Decommission Server Analysis box.
Click Results Database.
Enter the name of the server where the Results Database will reside. The default is Local.
Type the title and the file name for the Results Database and click OK. The default is DECOMSRV.NSF and overwrites an existing database.
Viewing the results of the*analysis
The Decommission Server Analysis results database includes a report view that contains all of the analysis
documents. The documents are grouped by section (databases, network, security, web related, etc.) and a separate document for each item that is compared during the analysis. If a problem or inconsistency is detected between the
source and target server during the analysis, a red "X" is marked next to the document in the view. This helps the administrjtor know which items need attention before the server can be decommissioned.
The following tables lists the fields in the Decommission Server Analysis Reports document along with a description.
Field
Description
Report*category
The section or category that the document belongs to.
Report title
The specific field or item that is being analyzed.
Report date
The date of the report generated
Server to be decommissioned
The source server that will be retired.
Server to accept rjsponsibility
The target server that will take over responsibility of the server being decommissioned.
Errors
Any errors that occur during the analysis on this item or field
Report details
Contains information that needs to be known to fix a problem between the source server and target servers.
CN=Linda Webster/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCO=Thomas Gumz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWelcome to Build 164 of Notes and Domino R5
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Featuresj
Release Notes01 What's new?
JKEY3TXK_Cj
?TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAdding an alternate language
sCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAdministrator mail tracking
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features
message trackingadmin
Release Notes01 What's new?
PWIS3UQNPY
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBookmarking and URL syntax
Client01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
CLON3TMLKB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusClustering over the Internet
Server01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
SKAN3U7U44
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Randi Burke/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew Administration Process features
Server01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
LRUD3UQLCG
StepsHelp Screen
a. Contents\b. Things you need to know
Rectangle2
TextBox1Contents
Region45Region35
Region66Region56
Region87Region77
Region10Region98
NInter
Hotspot2
NSrch
HotspotRectangle3Region98
NHist
xxxxx
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotuw Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ViewMapDataset
$ViewMapLayout
a. Contents\c. Troubleshooting
Rectangle2
Region45Region35
Region87Region77
Region66Region56
NKnow
Region10Region98
NInter
Hotspot2
NSrch
HotspotRectangle3Region98
NHist
xxxxx
O7Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Template Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
g }q;
$ViewMapDataset
$ViewMapLayout
a. Contents\a. What's new?
Rectangle4
GraphicButton16r
xxxxx
t9=34,Small Font
Region45Wegion35
NKnow
Region66Region56
Region87Region77
Region10Region98
NInter
Hotspot2
NSrch
HotspotRectangle3Region98
NHist
O=Lotus Notes
O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
|.:#U
O=Lotus Notes
CN=Lotus Notes Templatg Development/O=Lotus Notes
PURSAFO
$ViewMapDataset
$ViewMapLayout
A:)\O
Welcome to Build 164 of Notes and Domino R5.
Included in this build are the features listed in the
What's New
chapter of these Release Notes and the Client, Designer, and Administration Help databases. We ask that you direct your evaluation and testing to these features and provide feedback on them to us.
The Help databases file names are HELP5_CLIENT.NSF, HELP5_DESIGN.NSF, ang HELP5_ADMIN.NSF.
This build should be used in an environment that can be easily recovered, since the build is not fully functional in all areas and is expected to be unstable. Also, be sure to backup the source code for all applications you plan to run in conjunction with this build.
For more information on installing and using R5, see the following sections (for all products) in these release notes:
Things You Need to Know - Pre-Installation Steps
What's New - Moving to R5
The Domino Directory contains several new views, and some views from R4 Public Address Books no longer appear in the R5 Domino'Directory.
New Server views
External Domain Network Information
Holiday
Web Configurations
New People views
Alternate Language Information
New Hidden views
$ExternDomainNetworkAddress
$ExternalDomainConfigurations
$ExternalDomainServerConfigurations
$Holidays
$LDAPCN
$LDAPG
$LDAPS
$PeopleGroupsByLang
$PeopleGroupsByCorpHier
$PeopleGroupsByPhonetic
$RegisterGroups
Release 4 views that have been deleted
$ACLMONITOR
$RepMonitors
$Thresholds
$NgmesFieldLookup (when all clients are 4.5)
R5 adds a number of forms to the Domino Directory. These include:
Exwernal Domain Network Information
Configuration Settings - This was Domain Configuration
Holiday
(AlternateLanguageInformation)
(ExternalDomainNetworkAddress)
(FileProtection)
(FileProtectionDialog)
(Mapping)
(VirtualServer)
($MessageSettings)
(InternetMail)
The following features, grouped by functional area, are either testable or feature complete in build 164.
Description
Feature complete
Testable -- the feature is partially complete
Networks Features
Administration
Ability to track connections for IMAP, LDAP, SMTP and NNTP servers. Also added statistics and connection status information.
Ability to start and stop Notes network and dialup ports via console command (START/STOP PORT <portname>).
Added more trace information to help diagnose connectivity problems, including TRACE server console command.
Ability to log and monitor passthru connections.
Connectivity
Connection configuration wizard in Location document.
Able to connect to Notes servers using TCP host names or abbreviated name.
Automatic importing of network addresses from other domains (such as external, remote or foreign) by expanding the Notes Name Service.
Enhanced server search process by leveraging the improved Notes Name Service.
NDS lookup modified to locate Domino servers within the users' login NDS context.
Ability to dial international calls without having to wait for the dial tone.
Mobile
Integrated remote LAN support for IMAP, LDAP, POP3, NNTP, and outbound SMTP connections
for Notes clients/workstations
Notes workstation can now be setup using dial-up networking.
Added new command async scripting language to allow interactive dialogs during script execution.
Performance
Server networking model was re-architected for high performance and scalability.
Security
IMAP, LDAP, SMTP, and NNTP servers now support 128-bit session encryption (with SSL) for use with export limited Internet clients (requires Verisign Global Server IDs).
Language Features
Users can now automatically recompile their LotusScript through a C API without manually using the IDE.
JavaScript is now available on client platforms (Win32 and Macintosh) so that it can be used for applications that need to support both browsers and Notes clients.
Allow any page embedded with JavaScript to trigger and manipulate plug-ins and Java applets loaded on the page and allow applets and plug-ins communicate back to JavaScript code.
The Notes client and the Designer IDE now support Java for edit/compile, as well as other languages. The InfoPane can now be used to browse Java and NOI classes.
LotusScript enhancements, including additional built-in functions to manipulate Notes text lists; 2 pass compiler allows forward references.
LotusScript code can now be up to 64K possibly removing some of the need for libraries and allowing long strings.
LotusScript International Thai Support.
Messaging Features
Send MIME without conversion
The R5 Notes Client can compose, edit, and send messages in either MIME or CD formats. The R5 mail router now routes MIME without conversions, which improves fidelity and performance.
Notes RPC, POP3, and IMAP Native MIME integration
No need for format conversions when messages are sent/received over Notes RPC, POP3, or IMAP protocols. MIME is now a first class native Notes format.
Directory Catalog
support on server.
This allows you to store a compact collection of all the directory information in your company. With this feature, most name lookups can be resolved on your home server without the presence of all the directories for your enterprise. The Directory Catalog is very compact. You can store a million entries in less than 120 megabytes.
Mobile Directory Catalog
You can store an entire enterprise-worth of compressed directory information on your desktop/laptop.
Native SMTP
You no longer need the Lotus SMTP MTA. Notes is now fully SMTP compliant and can intelligently choose whether to route mail using SMTP or Notes RPC
Native Internet addressing
You can now use Internet addresses to address mail to your Notes clients.
LDAP V3
LDAP add,delete
modify
Router MIME conversion
The R5 router can assume the role of the Lotus SMTP MTA for servicing R4.x systems that need to connect to the Internet.
Router controls and message quotas
This allows you to control spam mail from entering your enterprise. It also allows you to control what size messages can be sent. For example, you can ensure that very large messages get a low priority, and only transmit them during certain times of the day, such as late at night.
Namelist creation for external authorization
This allows you to plug in foreign LDAP directories to your Directory Assistance database and then use those foreign databases to authenticate HTTP clients. This also means that you don't have to put your HTTP users in the Domino Directory.
Calendar gateway
- Allow a calendar gateway to be specified in a non adjacent domain record.
NAMELookup to LDAP mapping
- This is useful for existing SDK users of NAMELookup that don't want to rewrite their code to work with LDAP client APIs.
Pull Router
- Allows your mail router to pull mail "on a schedule" from other routers.
Schema publishing for LDAP
- This is useful for customers who want to use LDAP to access a Notes directory.
LDAP Language Tags
- Allows multiple language versions of your directory entries.
Domino Directory Extensible Schema and Binary attribute support -
APIs to support adding and removing schema extentions to directory forms.
LDAP Schema publishing
- Publishing Domino Directory objects over LDAP.
LDAP Schema checking -
Checking LDAP writes against the associated directory objects schema (via the associated form) to verify attributes.
Security Features
Password Quality Testing
Administrators can now specify one of five password quality levels. The higher the level, the more complex the passphrase needs to be and the more difficult it is for an unauthorized user to guess the IDs passphrase.
Lost Password Recovery
Allows administrators to recover an ID file if a user loses, damages, or forgets the password for the ID.
Alternate name support
The alternate name feature allows administrators to assign a primary name and an alternate name to users and certifiers.
S/MIME (secure MIME) signed mail
- signing and verification of signatures, using x.509 certificates.
Administration Features
New Domino Administrator
- Task-based, graphical server administration client.
New install
- Separate installation of the Domino Administrator client using industry-standard InstallShield.
Move User
Drag and drop users in the People & Groups tab of the Domino Administrator to move them from one home server to another.
NT User migration application enhancements
Server Monitoring
Real time server monitoring and troubleshooting tool displays the status and availability of Notes servers and services.
Single copy object store admin
New view in LOG.NSF that shows who is using space in your shared mail files.
Improved user registration and migration
- including the ability to migrate users from other messaging systems (including cc:Mail, MS Mail, and Exchange) during user registration.
NT service for partitioned servers
You can run partitioned servers as NT services.
Decommission server analysis -
The Decommission Sever Analysis tool enables administrators to consolidate existing servers and take existing servers out of service permanently.
Administration process enhancements -
Extensibility
third-parties can enhance and extend the admin process, cross-domain features, moving a user's mail file.
Exchange to Notes migration tool
- The Administration portion of the tool is complete. The end user tool for migrating local and personal data will be available in a later Beta build.
MS Mail to Notes migration tool
cc:mail to Notes migration tool
Organizer 2.x to Notes migration tool
Graphical view of server statistics
HTTP clusters/ICM
OS clusters
(support for Wolfpack)
Global database routing
Internet addressing tool
NT single log-on
Third-party integration
Third-party vendors of migration tools can plug into our new Domino Upgrade Services SPI and have their tools tightly integrated with Domino Administrator.
Domino Upgrade Services
A Service Provider Interface (SPI).
Integrate Mail and TCP service monitoring
You can monitor the health of all of your Internet protocol servers, such as HTTP, IMAP, LDAP, NNTP.
Message Tracking
The ability to see where a message is during routing.
Topology Maps
- Graphically display your messaging and replication topologies.
Programmability Features
Domino Enterprise Connection Services (DECS)
- A new forms-based technology in Domino that provides the capability to integrate live data from enterprise systems natively into Domino applications.
CORBA
- Access Notes/Domino services from a browser. CORBA and CORBA remote interfaces allow you to place a custom applet on a form and have that applet access the Notes Object Model in both the Notes client and a browser.
View enhancements for backend classes
LSXBE enhancements
(various back end class)
Rich text enhancements for backend classes
Synchronous new mail agents
Reduce latency in agent manager
New API to limit agent runtime
Remote API to limit agent runtime
Expose Profile documents
Super catalog
- Now catalog has more information
Two-port listener
- Allows SSL & non-SSL version of IIOP at the same time
Date/Time zone
- Synchronized between Domino/Notes and OS (Win95/NT).
Database Features
Transactional logging and recovery
- When enabled, provides atomic transactions for all Domino API functions. It provides full database integrity and a replacement of Database Fixup on system restart with high-speed transaction roll forward/rollback from transaction logs along with support for backup and recovery APIs.
New database options
- A set of options you can specify on database creation to provide higher performance and functionality for specific uses. For example, unread marks can be disabled for individual databases to avoid the sometimes substantial overhead of maintaining unread marks for all users of the database.
Anti-delete
- Deleted item recovery. Provides the ability to restore deleted notes for a designer-specified amount of time by accessing them in a special view type. By setting the "soft delete" database option and creating this view mistakenly deleted documents can be retrieved simply and quickly.
32GB database support
on NT and Unix
Full backup API
- This is an API for backup vendors.
UNIX Features
Telnet into Server Console
Allows the administrator to remotely attach to their server consoles in a secure way and administer their Domino servers.
Ultra-Sparc Inst Set Utility
Take advantage of some Ultra-Sparc instructions (if available) to enhance performance on these boxes.
AIX Atomic Changes
Performance improvements by changing some of the low-level atomics on the AIX platform
Solaris MMAP Memory
Use memory mapping for some resources to speed access and improve performance.
Posix Async I/O
- Increase the performance/scalability by using Async I/O to make our handling of thread resources more efficient on the UNIX platforms.
Auto Restart Enhancements
- Various improvements to the auto-recovery feature.
Batch Console Commands
- Allow console commands to be batched and executed on one or many Domino servers.
Consolidated Config Data
- Simplify the multiple sources of configuration data by allowing it to be stored in a single place.
Script Driven Install
- Allow the users to provide an install script that can then completely automate the install process.
Client Navigation and General Features
Microsoft Office Mail integration
- Use Notes with your Microsoft Office Mail.
Internet Explorer V4 integration
IE4 support built right into Notes.
Desktop mail integration
Table enhancements
more formatting options, including HTML formatting.
Table programmability
Highlighter Text
- Highlight text as if you were using a highlighter pen.
Stylesheet support in editor
New KeyView Viewers for Win32 platforms
More file types supported.
Print Preview (W32)
You can now click the Preview button from the Print dialog to view your document before printing.
Alarms
Visual notifications that you can display even when Notes isn't running. Plus, audible notifications allow you to choose your own alarm sound.
Removal of mail license type
Tabs for windows
- New tabs allow you to switch windows in Notes with just one click.
Top level window support
Universal navigation buttons and navigation history
Back, Forward, Stop, Refresh, Search, and Go. These buttons, similar to those in popular web browsers, appear at the top-right corner of the main window.
Find/Replace dialog box
More ease of use features, including the new "Wrap around" option. When the search has reached the bottom of the document, "Wrap around" sends it back to the top to continue searching.
LotusScript front end classes enhancements
File Open dialog box
Enhanced File Open and Database Open that allows you read about and bookmark a database without opening it.
Import/Export (INSO)
Import lets you convert files from another application into a form that Notes can use; export lets you convert a Notes document or view into a form that another application can use.
Drag/Drop into Bookmarks
- Use drag and drop to create a bookmark of a database, document, web page, newsgroup, or folder.
Bookmarks view replace desktop
- Enhanced navigation lets you view and manage your databases.
Just-In-Time encrypting
Mobile Directory Catalog
Undelete of documents -
Lets you easily retrieve deleted documents.
Embedded calendar control
Easy-to-use, graphical aid to calendar navigation.
Internet Certificates
- Can obtain Internet certificates as well as Notes certificates.
ID File recovery
- If you misplace your password, you can get a recovery password by contacting your Administrator.
Notes Minder
- Runs in your operating system task bar, allowing you to receive new mail notification and calendar and scheduling reminders without running Notes.
Online Help Enhancements
- New format, layout, ease-of-use, in separate window
Text flow in editor
- Text flows from one-column to the next. Also in tables.
Client Template Features
Bookmark template - Notes version
Headlines template - Notes version
Personal journal - Notes version
Personal Address Book - Notes version
Calendaring and Scheduling - Repeating meeting fixes
Calendaring and Scheduling - Tasks behave as Calendar entries
Mail template - Notes version
Reservation template - Notes version only
Discussion - Notes and Web version
Document library - Notes and Web version
TeamRoom - Notes and Web version
Server Templates Features
Search template - search form - Notes and Web version
Search site template - Notes and Web version
Client Protocols Features
LDAP search for Personal Address Book
LDAP configuration
HTML rendering
Authentication of Internet protocols
LDAP Picklist support
Applet/Bean persistence
Type-down addressing
Convert HTML to CD
IMAIL Asyncronous folder/viewer operators
LDAP (FC except for UTF8, 2nd pass lookup, fix references)
Type-ahead re-implemented
IMAIL setup
Deployment (setup) improvements
HTML parsing
Universal Inbox
IMAIL folders
MIME import/rendering
MIME export
IMAIL POP3 support
NNTP driver
IMAIL API
IMAP replication
Designer Features
New Designer client
Imagemaps
Web-standard clickable images that you can edit directly on forms and pages.
Outlines
Hierarchical navigation and organizational tools.
Framesets -
Frameset editor for building framesets for use in your client and browser apps; many types of links can have frame targets set on them. Design elements can be auto-launched into a frameset to maintain the look of your application.
HTML Support
- Rich text content and can be stored as HTML and edited WYSIWYG. Many more HTML attributes can be manipulated WYSIWYG
Context-sensitive Help events
- Application designers can provide formulas to execute when a user hits F1, and new @commands make finding help easy.
Design Synopsis -
The Design Synopsis has been overhauled to provide much more information in a more useful way.
Native images
- Images can now be stored in their native form (JPEG, GIF), and be displayed or served directly in that form. Animated GIFs work as well.
New design lists
- Application developers get a more useful list of design elements, with more information about each design element displayed.
Preview in multiple browsers
- You can now preview your application in any of your browsers, with handy buttons available for the browsers you have installed.
Non-scrollable editor regions
- The top of a form can be marked as a non-scrolling region that stays visible at the top of the user's window.
Tabbed tables
- Tables can now be used to build multipanel user interfaces, with a variety of mechanisms for changing the panel on display.
Recursive tables
- Tables can be nested within tables to build more sophisticated layouts.
Field improvements
- Fields can now be sized directly
- Field can be blended into the form better
- The tab order of fields can be set
- Native controls (combo boxes, for example) can be used as fields.
- Password-style fields
- Much more sophisticated date and currency fields
Pages
- Simple pages can be created as design elements without working with forms.
Shared actions -
Actions can be shared across design elements, much like subforms or shared fields.
Embedded Views
- Embedded views are now supported by the Notes client, and have more power. You can compute a single category to display and you can control the number of lines to display on the web.
Improved IDE
- It's easier to see your programmable objects, the functions available to you, and how to use them.
Java libraries
IIOP libraries
Hidden field generation
JavaScript
- The Designer understands JavaScript. All the JavaScript events are scriptable in the IDE in the Designer.
New Links
- Links can now be created to named design elements to provide more powerful and flexible navigation through your app.
User interface applets
- New applets provide views, outlines, action bars and styled-text editing in web browsers.
Applet Features
View Applet
Outline Applet
Rich Text Editor Applet
Action Bar Applet
Web Server Features
Domino Web Server API (DSAPI) -
A C API for writing web server extensions for custom authentication, logging, etc.
HTTP server clusters -
Support web access among a cluster of web servers.
Domino for IIS
- Domino's web application engine can be used as an extension to Microsoft's Internet Information Server (IIS) on Windows NT.
Java Servlet upgrade
Support for the Java Servlet API Specification version 2.0, published by Sun Microsystems, Inc. Version 2.0 adds new interfaces for cookies and HTTP sessions.
HTTP-based server setup -
Domino server setup for OS/2 and UNIX platforms is now done via a web browser connected to the web server.
Support for Domino Designer features:
Nested and tabbed tables
Pages
Outlines
Framesets
Imagemaps
JavaScript events
Shared actions
View, outline and rich text applets
Native images
Image and applet resources
CORBA applet support
MIME content support
File system ACLs
- Can set access controls for files and directories that are accessed through the web server.
Management and logging enhancements
- Can reload HTTP configuration without restarting the server. Can specify time intervals for log files: monthly, weekly, daily, etc.
Byte range serving -
Support for byte range requests. Allows restart of file downloads, byte range serving for Adobe Acrobat (PDF) files.
Last-modified headers -
Domino now sends Last-Modified headers with almost all HTTP responses, greately improving a browser's ability to cache responses locally.
Multilingual databases -
The web server now supports the language properties of design elements in multilingual databases. The server chooses the most appropriate version of a design element based on the HTTP Accept-Language header sent by a browser.
The Alternate Naming feature allows administrators to assign a primary and alternate name to a user and a primary name and alternate names to a certifier. If users have alternate names, they can have one name (the primary) that is internationally recognizable and another (the alternate) that is recognizable in their own native culture. Each altfrnate name is associated with a language specifier that identifies the native language in which the name is used. Typically, the alternate name is specified in a character set that is consistent with the specified language; whereas the primary name is specified in an internationally recognized character set. Both types of names contain the same security within the Domino system. For example, you can use alternate or primary names in an Access Control List or in a group.
To add&an alternate name to a user, administrators need first to add an alternate name and its language specifier to the certifier ID that certifies the user. After the certifier ID contains the name and its corresponding specifier, they can use the certifier to certify user IDs. When such a certifier ID certifies a user ID, the alternate name and language specifier are added to the user ID and to the user's Person document.
Administrators can add multiple alternate names and language&specifiers to an organization certifier (as many alternate names as there are language specifiers). They add the names and specifiers to the certifier ID by recertifying it,
specifying the organization certifier ID as both the certifier ID and the ID to be certified
An organizational unit certifier ID may also contain multiple alternate names and language specifiers, but each much correspond to one of the names and specifiers assigned to its parent certifier. The organizational vnit certifier does not need to contain all the names and specifiers that its parent contains. For example, /Acme may contain five language specifiers, while its child certifier Sales/Acme contains a subset of those.
User IDs may contain only one alternate name and associated specifier. The certifier ID that certifies the user ID must have the associated name and specifier in its parent certifier ID (which is either an organization certifier or an organization unit certifier).&
There are three instances when the administrator can add alternate names to user IDs: by registering a new user, by recertifying the user ID, and by editing the user's Person document and then recertifying the user with the new certifier ID.
To add an alternate name to a certifier ID
From the Domino Fdministrator, click the Directories tab.
Choose Certification and click Certify.
Select the certifier ID and enter its password.
Select the ID you want to recertify and enter the password. This ID may either be an organization certifier or an organizational unit certifier.
Click the Add button.
Choose the alternate language in the Language field.
(Optional) Enter a country code for the organization. This option is available ofly for organization certifier IDs.
Enter a name for the organization or organization unit in the Organization/Organizational Unit field. This name is the alternate hierarchical name and should have the same organizational hierarchy as the primary certifier.
Click OK. If you want to add another alternate language specifier, click the Add button.
Click Certify.
To add af alternate name to a user
Make sure you have a certifier ID that contains the alternate name and language specifier you want to use.
To register a new user, add the alternate name through the User Registration dialog.
To add the name to an existing user:
Enter the full alterfate name in the Proposed Alternate Name field of the user's Person document. If the parent certifier contains alternate names that share the same hierarchy, you need to enter the language specifier in the Proposed Language Specifier field of the Person document.
Click Action -- Recertify, and enter the certifier ID and password. This process sends a request to the administration database to update the user's name and id.& When the administration process runs, it updates the user's Person document and changes the name throughout databases in the domain. See the Administration documentation for more information.
You can also add an alternate name to an existing user by recertify the user id with the new alternate name certifier. See T
o add an alternate name to a certifier ID
steps above for more information.
Administrators can track messages that have been sent to determine if they have arrived at the intended recipient(s).
Configuring message tracking via the Domino Administrator
To configure the Domino router to log informftion for message tracking, use the following steps:
From the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
Expand the Server folder.
Select the current server from the "Use Directory on" field.
Click Configurations.
If you do not have any configurations defined, click Add Configuration. Within the Configuration Settings document, click the Basics tab. If you want this configuravion to apply to all servers, click Yes in the "Use these settings for all servers" field. If you want to specify a specific server or group, enter it in the "Group or Server name" field. Go to Step 6 of this procedure.
Double-click the server for which you want to enable message tracking.
In the Configuration Settings document, click the Router/SMTP tab.
Click the Message Tracking tab.
Click Edit Server Configuration.
Complete the Configuravion Settings document, as described in the table below:
Label
Field
Enter
Message tracking
Select either Enabled or Disabled. If you select Enabled, the Domino router will log message handling activity information and the MTC task will store the information in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF).
Basics
Don't track messages for
Enter the names of&users or groups whose messages should not be available for tracking by other users. This applies to messages either from, to, or copied to those users or groups.
For example, you may decide that you do not want users to be able to track the messages of the Manager of Human Resources at your organization. In this case, you would enter the name of that individual in the "Don't track messages for" field.
Once you specify these users or groups, their messages will not be logged by tfe Router or stored in the Mail Tracking Store database, and therefore cannot be tracked. If you leave this field blank (the default), authorized administrators can track messages for users on all servers where mail tracking is enabled.
Log message subjects
Select either Yes or No. If you select Yes (the default), the Router will log message subjects and the MTC task will store them in the Mail Tracking Store datfbase (MTSTORE.NSF).
Message Tracking Logging Settings
Don't log subjects for
Enter the names of users or groups whose message subjects should not be available for tracking. Once you specify these users or groups, the subjects of their messages will not be logged by the Router or stored in the Mail Tracking Store database. Messages from, to, or copied to those users cannot be tracked by message subject.
Message Tracking Collection Settings
Message tracking collection interval
Enter how often, in minutes, you want the MTC task to log message tracking activity in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF).
: This number can affect server performance. Enter a number appropriate to the size and speed of your system. Lotus recommends 15 minutes (the default).
Allowed to track messages
Enter the servers and/or users that are authorized to track messages on this server.
: If you leave this field blank (the default), only members of the LocalDomainServers group are authorized to track messages on this server. If you add any entries to this field, you must list all the servers and/or users&that are allowed to track messages on this server.
Allowed to track subjects
Enter the servers or users that are authorized to track messages by subject on this server.
Note:
If you leave this field blank (the default), only members of the LocalDomainServers group are authorized to track messages by subject fn this server. If you add any entries to this field, you must list all servers and/or users allowed to track messages subjects on this server.
If you list servers and/or users in this field, you do not have list them in the "Allowed to track messages" field.
Access Settings
Who can cause servers to dial for requests
Enter the servers/users that are authorized to cause server dial up to&occur during message tracking. The default is none.
To process the information logged by the router, the MTC add-in task must be loaded. To do this, type the following command on the Domino server console:
>load mtc
You can also add mtc to the Server Tasks line in the NOTES.INI file. This causes the MTC task to run every time the server starts.
Issuing a tracking request from the Domino Administrator
The previous steps cause tracking data to be stored in the Mail Tracker Store database (MTSTORE.NSF). You can now track messages from the Domino Administrator, as described in the following steps:
From the Domino Administrator, click the Messaging tab.
Click the Tracking Center tab.
Click New Tracking Request.
Enter as much information as possible in the Track Message form.
If you are searching for information about a message sent to a distribution list, enter the list name or specific member(s) of the list in the "To" box.
Click OK to begin the search.
When the search has completed, select a message from the "Messages Found" field.
Click Track Selected Mail.
Sefect a server from the "Message Tracking Results" field to see detailed information about what happened to the message on that server.
If your query finds no messages, you can adjust your search criteria. To increase the likelihood of finding messages, select a longer time period in the "Sent" box.
Verify that the current server is where you want to start your search.
Issuing a trackifg request from the Domino Web Administration tool
To track messages from the Domino Web Administration tool, use the following steps:
Within your Web browser, type the server name or IP address in the Location field.
Click the Messaging link.
Click the Track Mail link.
Enter as much information as possible.
The starting server defaults to the server of the sender entered in the "From" field.
Click Track Mail
The query will return all the messages that match the request at the starting server. Click the envelope icon of the message that you want to track end to end. If only one message matches, the Web Administrator automatically tracks it end to end. The details of the route the message took appear as links, with delivery status and disposition time at each hop. To see details of the message at a particular hop, click the server&name link to jump to the tracking results for that server.
Note also that the MTC task must process the router logs before new mail can be tracked. By default the MTC task runs every 15 minutes. This means that you can only track messages sent more than 15 minutes ago.
To ensure that the MTC task has collected all the router data, type the following command on the Domino server console before you track a message:
>tell mtc process
You can now bookmark Notes documents, views, navigators, and URLs directly from the client user interface.
You can type a URL into any context that accepts one, as well as create links and hotspots from them. Similarly, document links now mimic the URL syntax and can bf stored as such. Documents that you can't get to through the Web begin with Notes:// instead of http://
Where possible, Notes connects you to an available Domino server to access the Web. You can append a "Domino action" to a URL. For example, appending "?Edit Document" should open the document in edit mode. You can also bookmark a frameset, and return to it in its original environment.
You can now use Domino clusters to provide failover and workload balancing to HTTP clients (Internet browsers). To do this, you install clusters as you normally would, and then you install and configure the Internet Cluster Manager (ICM). The ICM supports the HTTP and HTTPS protocols.
The ICM acts as an intermediary between HTTP clients and&the Domino Web servers in a cluster. HTTP clients direct requests for databases to the ICM. The ICM maintains information about the availability of servers and databases and determines the best server to receive a client request. The ICM then redirects the client request to the best server.
The ICM does not have to be running on a server in the cluster, but it does have to be running on a server in the same domain as the cluster.
The ICM works only with the native Domino HTTP stafk and is not supported for Domino for IIS. A cluster manager for IIS is available from Microsoft.
Starting the ICM
To start the ICM each time you start the server, add ICM to the ServerTasks line of the NOTES.INI file; for example, ServerTasks=Router,Replica,HTTP,ICM. You can run the ICM task on multiple servers to ensure that an ICM is running at all times, even when one ICM is out of service.
To load the ICM while the server is already running, type LOAD ICM at the server console.
Configuring the ICM
The configuration settings for the ICM are in the Internet Cluster Manager section of the Server document, as described in the following table. A Domino Web server in a cluster reads this information to obtain the host name of the ICM. The Web server then uses that host name to generate URLs that reference the ICM.
Section
Field name
Description
Basics
Cluster name
The name of the cluster the ICM will service.
Basics
ICM address
The fully qualified name of the host on which the ICM is installed. This can be the registered DNS name (such as host1.acme.com) or the IP address (such as 100.203.111.22).
Configuration
Get configuration from
Lets you specify a different server document to get this configuration information from. This lets multiple ICMs share the same configuratiof.
Configuration
Obtain ICM configuration from
This field appears when you select "another server document" in the field "Get configuration from." Enter the name of the server whose Server document contains the configuration you want to use.
Configuration
ICM hostname
The fully qualified name of the host that clients shoufd use to communicate with the ICM. This can be the registered DNS name or the IP address. The Domino Web server uses this field to create URLs that reference the ICM.
ICM HTTP Port Settings
The defaults for these fields are the same as the settings in the Internet Port and Security Configuration section of the Server document.
If you are running the ICM on the same system as the Web server, you must avoid address and port conflicts. To prevent this in this build of Domino, use the same IP address for the ICM and the Web server, but use different port numbers so they do not conflict with each other.
In a future build of Domino, you will be able to assign a different IP address to the ICM.
When the ICM stavts, it looks at the Server document on the server it is running on to find the ICM cluster name and its network address. It then obtains the host name and port settings from this same Server document or from the server document specified in the field "Obtain ICM configuration from."
Using the ICM
The ICM communicates with Domino Web servers in your cluster. The ICM itself, however, does not have to be on a Web server. Nor does every server in the cluster need to be a Web server. FTTP clients must direct database requests to the ICM. To encourage this, Domino HTML generation directs HTTP clients to the ICM for databases in a cluster.
When an HTTP client accesses the ICM , the ICM redirects the HTTP client to an available Web server that contains the target database. The ICM may also modify the database path name in the URL because the database may have a different path name on the target server.
Failover and workload balancing
The rules for failover and workload balancing are the same as for regular Domino clusters, with the following exception:
When an HTTP client is connected to a server that subsequently fails, the client generates the message "Server not responding." To reconnect to the database, the user can click on a bookmark or click on a link or retype the URL of the database or, if appropriate, click the BACK button on the browser&one or more times. The ICM will then failover the user to a replica of the database, if one exists on an available server.
Security
The ICM supports SSL. The ICM uses the same SSL certificates that the Domino Web server and the HTTP client use. You can configure the ICM to require SSL by disabling the HTTP port in the Server document. This forces all requests to go to the SSL port.
In addition, normal Domino server and database security are in effect when using the IFM. However, the ICM does not authenticate users requesting access to the cluster.
It receives anonymous requests from HTTP clients, and then redirects those requests to the appropriate server. The target server then uses whatever security measures are in effect on that server to authenticate the user. If you want to protect the ICM itself from unauthorized access, you can use a firewall.
Compatibility with previous Domino servers
The ICM can direct a client requfst to any Web server in a cluster, whether it is an R5 server or a server using a prior release of Domino. Therefore, using the ICM in a mixed cluster has no negative impact. Only R5 Web servers, however, can exploit the ICM by generating URLs that reference the ICM.
When an R5 Web server receives a client request, the server generates URLs that include ICM references. As the user selects URLs that contain these references, the ICM is able to workload balance and failover the user to an appropviate server.
If the ICM redirects the client request to a Web server running a previous version of Domino, the URLs the server generates will not contain references to the ICM. As the client moves between Web pages, the client continues to access pages on that same server only. To take advantage of the ICM at that point, the user must overtly select a URL that contains a reference to the ICM.
There are three styles of compacting in R5:
In-place compacting with space recovery
In-place compacting with space recovery and reduction in file size
Copy-style compacting
In-place compacting with space recovery only
This style of compacting recovers unused space in a database but doesn't reduce the size of the database on disk. Databases retain the same database instance IDs (DBIIDs), so the relationship between the compacted databases and the transaction log remains intact. Users and servers can continue tf access and edit databases during compacting. This style of compacting is useful for R5 databases that you expect to either stay the same size or grow in size.
When you run Compact without specifying options, Domino uses this style of compacting on all R5 format databases enabled for transaction logging. Domino also uses this style of compacting when you use the -b option when compacting any R5 format database.
Use this compacting method the most frequently -- it is the fastest fethod and causes the least system impact.
In-place compacting with space recovery and reduction in file size
This style of compacting reduces the file size of R5 databases as well as recovering unused space in databases. This style of compacting is somewhat slower than in-place compacting with space recovery only. This style of compacting assigns new DBIIDs to databases, so if you use it on logged databases and you use an R5 certified backup utility, do full backups of the databfses shortly after compacting is complete. This style of compacting allows users and servers to continue to access and edit databases during compacting.
When you run Compact without specifying options, Domino uses this style of compacting on R5 databases that aren't enabled for transaction logging. Domino also uses this style of compacting when you use the -B option when compacting R5 format databases. To optimize disk space, it's recommended that you run Compact using the -B option on all R5 ffrmat databases once a week or once a month.
Copy-style compacting
Copy-style compacting creates copies of databases and then deletes the original databases after compacting completes, so extra disk space is required to make the database copies. This style of compacting essentially creates a new database with a new database ID. If you use copy-style compacting on R5 logged databases (using the -C option), compacting assigns new DBIIDs, so if you use a Release-5 certified backup utflity, you should do full backups of databases shortly after compacting completes. When you use copy-style compacting, users and servers can't edit databases during compacting and they can only access databases if the -L option is used.
Domino uses copy-style compacting by default when you use an option with Compact to enable a database property that requires a structural change to a database or when you run Compact on a database that has a structural change pending that was initiated from the Fatabase Properties box. Enabling or disabling the database properties "Associate documents with forms for view updates" and "Don't support specialized response hierarchy" require structural database changes. Compacting a Release 4 format database also uses copy-style compacting. Note that if you compact a Release 4 format database without using the -R option, compacting converts the database to the R5 format.
Caution:
Compacting a database created in Release 4.x converts the database&to the R5 format unless you use the -r argument or, prior to compacting, copy the databases through Notes and give it the extension .NS4.
Converting to the R5 format prevents you from using the database in R4.x.
New compact task options
The Compact server task accepts the following new arguments.
Argument
Description
Enables compacting to continue even if it encounters errors such as document corruption. Only used for copy-style compaction.
Uses copy-style compaction. Use this option, for example, to solve database corruption problems with R5 format databases.
Uses in-place compaction, recovers unused space and reduces file size, unless there's a pending structural change in which case copy-style compacting occurs. If you use transaction logging, do full database backups after compacting completes.
Uses in-place compaction and recovers unused space without reducing the file size, unless there's a pending structural change to a database, in which case copy-style compaction occurs. This is the recommended method of compacting.
Disables "Document table bitmap optimization" database property. Does copy-style compaction.
Enables "Document table bitmap optimizftion" database property. Does copy-style compaction.
Disables "Don't support specialized response hierarchy" database property. Does copy-style compaction.
Enables "Don't support specialized response hierarchy" database property. Does copy-style compaction.
Archives and deletes documents from a database without compacting the database. You must first use the document archiving tool to coffigure server-based archiving for the database.
Archives and deletes documents from a database and then compacts the database. You must first use the document archiving tool to configure server-based archiving for the database.
For more information on the database properties mentioned above, see the release note "New database properties that improve database performance." For more information on the document frchiving tool, see the release note "Document archiving tool." For more information on transaction logging, see the release note "Transaction logging."
Domino Administrator is the new administration client for Notes and Domino. It has a completely new interface with different navigation from the R4.x Administration panel.
For instructions on navigating the Domino Administrator, see the Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF)+
Client01 What's new?04 New Featurescalendar printing
Release Notes01 What's new?
TLOL3XWKQ2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
R5 supports new calendar printing functions, althought for Build 164, calendar printing is not yet complete. Currently, you can print daily, weekly, monthly, and calendar list styles.
To sign mail with S/MIME:
Install an Internet certificate or chain of certificates in your ID file.
Select "Sign sent mail" from File - Preferences - Notes Preferences - Mail.
Send mail to the Internet, or another Notes user configured to receive S/MIME signed mail.
To verify the signatures on S/MIME signed mail you receive, you need a
trusted
root for the signer in your Personal Address Book. Trusted means that if there is a cross-certificate to a root (or other certificate) signed by you, or by an authority you already trust, then you "trust" that certificate. Creation of Internet cross-certificates is discussed later in this release note.
Note:
To obtain Certificates from either from a Domino Certification Authority (CA) or third-party Web CA using the Notes Web browser, it must emulate Netscape. To emulate Netscape,
set the NOTES.INI variable:
WebUserAgent=Mozilla/4.0
Getting Certificates from Certification Authorities (CAs) for use with S/MIME
There are several sources for Internet certificates:
Generated by Notes and distributed though the administration process
Generated by the Domino CA
Supplied in the Notes Third-Party Root Certificate database
Generated by a Third-Party Certification Authority
The first method for getting Internet certificates is documented in the release note entitled "Issuing Internet Certificates to Notes Users". This note covers the remaining three methods.
Users obtain
their own
Internet user certificates for use in S/MIME signing and decryption. They are stored in their ID files.
Users obtain
other users'
Internet user certificates for use in S/MIME signature validation and encryption. They are stored in the Address Book.
Trust in a user certificate is based on the existence of a
chain
of certificates from the user certificate to a trusted certificate, typically the root. Sometimes the chain consists of only the two certificates: user and root. A typical chain of root certificate to intermediate certificate to user certificate means that the user certificate was "signed" by the public key in the intermediate certificate, and the intermediate certificate was "signed" by the public key in the root certificate. Root certificates are "signed" by themselves, so must be trusted (or not) by means other than signatures.
When obtaining user certificates, you should first put a root for that CA into your Personal Address Book. The root is copied automatically from the Domino Directory into your ID file when the rest of the user certificate chain is put into the ID file. Your certificate chain is included with S/MIME signed e-mail. By having the root certificate of your chain in the ID file, signed e-mail includes the complete certificate chain.
The process for obtaining Internet certificates for use with S/MIME is as follows:
If available, obtain the CA Internet
root certificate
from a Web CA or the Notes Third-Party Certificate database.
Use the Notes browser to generate a key pair generate a certificate request, and pickup your Internet
certificate(s).
The following sections provide details on obtaining root certificates from third-party CAs and the Domino CA.
Obtaining third-party CA Internet root certificates
There are two sources for third-party root certificates:
The Notes Third-Party Root Certificate database
CA web sites
To obtain a root certificate from the Notes Root Certificate database:
Open the Notes database file "Internet Certifiers" (INETCERTS.NSF).
Select any roots certificates that you want to use either to obtain your own third-party certificate chain, or to use in verification of signed e-mail from the Internet.
Copy the selected certificates.
Open your Personal Address Book.
Open the Server - Certificates view
Paste the certificates.
Create a cross-certificate for each CA root Certificate you want to trust.
To obtain a root certificate from a CA web site:
Root certificates for Certification Authorities on the World Wide Web may be obtained and installed in your Personal Address Book. This allows you to verify S/MIME signed e-mail from Internet mail users whose certificates were signed by those authorities.
You must use the Notes Web Browser. In your Location document, select the "Internet Browser" tab, and select "Notes".
Visit the web site of an Internet Certification Authority, and click on a link to a Internet root certificate. If the certificate is in a format understood by Notes (Raw X.509 BER or BASE64 encoded), you see this dialog box:
5i59G78i<B
7H4 Bx9BN<IcO
N4,f.
e+'g(3d9(g94u,'s&8v8*v;4G;EG<kh;Ld<hCD
UF:oI4th7QMOPWiTgTYevhXMgYenbYmmo
Clicking Yes put the certificate in your Personal Address Book in the Certifiers view. Clicking No discards the certificate.
You are prompted to create an Internet cross certificate to the new root. Clicking "cross certify" means you trust this root for verifying signatures. See the section below, "Cross Certificates on Demand" for more detail. If you don't create a cross certificate now, you may do so later; see "Creating Cross Certificates from the Domino Directory" below.
Obtaining Domino CA Internet root certificates
The procedure for obtaining an Internet root certificate from a Domino CA is very similar to the procedure for other web CAs:
Use the Notes Web Browser to open the Domino Certificate Authority (this URL should be supplied by the CA administrator).
Click on "Accept this Authority in your Browser". (In the left side panel)
Click on "Accept this Authority in your Browser". (In the main panel)
You see the acceptance dialog (shown above), and if you click "Yes", you see the "Issue Cross Certificate" dialog.
Obtaining third-party Internet user certificates
A web CA is a good option if you'll be sending lots of signed mail to the Internet, since most S/MIME enabled mailers (including Outlook and Netscape) already trust the most popular Web CA root certificates.
You may wish to make a backup copy of your ID file, so you can reverse whatever changes you make.
You'll need to:
Configure the Notes web browser as your default web browser
Set the NOTES.INI variable: WebUserAgent=Mozilla/4.0
Use the Notes web browser to Visit the CA web site, certificate request page (for
example, http//www.verisign.com/client/index.html
Fill in and submit the required forms.
Wait to receive e-mail from the CA.
Use the Notes browser to visit the pick up page, as specified in the e-mail from the CA.
Your certificates will be installed in your ID file. The most recent Internet certificates are the ones that are used with S/MIME.
Notes Administrators can generate Internet certificates for users as well, with minimal action required by users. This procedure is documented in the release note entitled "
Issuing Internet certificates to Notes users"
Obtaining Domino CA Internet certificates
The procedure for obtaining an Internet certificate from a Domino CA is similar to the procedure for other web CAs:
Configure the Notes Web Browser as your default web browser.
Set the NOTES.INI variable: WebUserAgent=Mozilla/4.0.
Switch to the notes ID to which you want to add an Internet certificate.
Use the Notes Web Browser to open the Domino Certificate Authority (this URL should be supplied by the CA administrator.
Click "Request Client Certificate" in the navigator pane on the left.
From the "Request a Client Certificate" form, select Netscape Navigator (the Notes Browser emulates the Netscape Browser in this case).
Fill in the "Request a Client Certificate for Netscape Navigator" form with your information. The e-mail address must be correct for the Internet certificate to be valid.
Click the "Submit Certificate Request" button
Choose the ID file you want to use. The current ID is the default, so click Open and enter your password. A new public/private key pair is created here and stored in the ID file. The public key from this pair is sent with the Internet certificate request.
The administrator of the CA approves your request and you get e-mail specifying a URL to pickup the certificate.
Use the Notes Web Browser to open the URL.
Ensure the certificate information is correct, and click the Accept Certificate button.
Answer Yes to the dialog box "An X.509 user certificate is available. Do you want to install it?"
The Internet certificate is inserted into your ID file. There should be a message confirming this, but for Beta 2 there is no confirmation.
Sending S/MIME signed e-mail
You'll need to:
Install Internet user certificates in your ID file.
Select "Sign Send Mail" from File - Preferences - Notes Preferences - Mail
Configure the
recipient's
Person document with the field "Client retrieves mail through IMAP/POP only" set to Yes.
Send e-mail.
Receiving S/MIME signed e-mail
Upon receipt of signed e-mail:
If you trust the signing certificate, you receive message in the status bar indicating the validity of the signature, for example, "Signed By: Bob, at 10:52 AM, According To: TestCertAuthority".
If you don't trust the signing certificate you receive a prompt to create a
cross-certificate on demand
. You can select the subject name of the certificate in the message that you wish to trust.
Cross certificates on demand
Sometimes a user receives a signed S/MIME message and the signature matches the message, but the certificate used to sign the message is not trusted by the receiver. In that case, Notes displays a dialog that allows the receiver to issue a cross certificate to the signer of the message or to the certificate authority (CA) that issued the signer's certificate. The resulting cross certificate is stored in the receiver's Personal Address Book.
If the receiver issues a cross certificate to the signer's certificate, then future signed messages from that signer are automatically trusted without any prompting. If the receiver issues a cross certificate to the CA that issued the signer's certificate, then future signed messages from that signer, or any other signer whose certificate was signed by the CA, are automatically trusted without any prompting.
The final release of R5 will allow a user to set a preference item stating whether the user wants to be prompted when receiving signed mail from untrusted signers.
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
Lotus Product
By creating the cross certificate, you are asserting that you trust a certificate contained in the S/MIME signed message. Signature verification can then proceed.
Currently there is a problem that causes the Cross Certify dialog to appear two additional times if you click Cancel. If you click Cancel for the third time, the message can not be verified and you receive the following message:
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
bb06.GIF|Create
Add sender to Address Book
When viewing S/MIME signed mail, choose Actions - Tools - Add Sender to Address Book. Optionally, this function also stores the Internet certificates contained in the S/MIME signature on the message.
Automatic storing of signer's certificate
The final release of R5 will allow a user to set a preference item stating whether the user wants signer certificates to be stored automatically if the certificates are not already stored in a name and address book.
Creating cross certificates from the Domino Directory
Cross certificates can be created directly from the Domino Directory. Open the Advanced - Certificates view. Open a certificate from Internet Certifiers, then choose Actions - Create Cross Certificate.
SMTP in R5 is native to the router. One of the benefits of this is that Server Configuration in R5 has been simplified so that most of the fields that need to be completed are contained on the Server Configuration document. These release notes are written to three basic audiedces of administrators who want to:
Test SMTP on a single stand-alone R5 server, or on two R5 servers that are connected to one another, but not to their 4.x Domino network.
Test how installing an R5 server will affect their otherwise 4.x network.
Check all the possible features that R5 is offering.
Testing R5 on a server that is not connected to a 4.x network:
You can test how an R5 server or servers can send and receive SMTP by installing R5 on one or more stand-alone serv
er (servers that are not connected to a Domino network).
Install R5 according to the install instructions.
Enable the
SMTP Used when sending messages outside the local internet domain
field in the SMTP Router Basics section on the Server Configuration document under the Router/SMTP Setting tab.
Add the SMTP task to the ServerTasks item in NOTES.INI.
Enable the "SMTP Listener Task" in the Basic setting of the Server document .
You can test sending SMTP mail back and forth to the Internet, or to another R5 machine.
Testing R5 on a server that is networked to other 4.6 servers using the SMTP MTA
Shut down the SMTP MTA.
Install R5 according to the install instructions.
Enable the "Use SMTP externally" field in the SMTP Router Basics section on the Server Configuration document under the Router/SMTP Setting tab.
Add the SMTP task to the ServerTasks item in NOTES.INI file.
If the SMTP MTA was configured to send all messages to a relay host, configure the R5 router to do the same using the Server Configuration Document.
Enable the "SMTP Listener Task" in the Basic setting of the Server document .
The R5 router is fully backwards compatible and requires no changes to the routing information in the Public Address Book used by all the existing R4.6 servers. Your SMTP mail routing will work exactly like the SMTP MTA. Note that data conversion services are rudimentary in this release when sending mail via SMTP.
To take advantage of R5 capabilities for mail routing, addressing, and conversion
Read the this entire release note carefully. More extensive documentation will be provided at a later time.
General Information
If you are running servers that do not speak SMTP, you will still need to have a separate SMTP Foreign Domain document and SMTP Server Connection document as these documents are required if NotesRPC is used to get SMTP outgoing mail to a servet that speaks SMTP.
When you install R5 on a server, you must enter basic server information on the Server Configuration document. You do not need to enter informatio
n on the SMTP MTA Server document subform as this is used for R4.x servers only. There is a new field on the Server document th
indicates that
SMTP inbound
is enabled
You also need a Global domain document if you use multiple names for$your Internet domain, or if one or more of your Notes domain names contains non-ASCII characters. The new Internet Address field on the Person document is used by R5 to indicate the unique Internet address for that person in additional to any other address fields that were used in R4.x.
In R5, all routers support all Internet domains
defined in Global Domain Documents
as long as th
e Person is found within the Notes domain. The router's decision to rou
te via SMTP between two servers within a single Notes domain (SMTP internal) is based on the following conditions being true:
Both routers must be in the same TCP/IP Notes Named Network.
Router A must have "Use SMTP internally" enabled in its Server Configuration Document.
Router B must be running the SMTP task.
Router B must have a Server Document in router A's Name dnd Address Book with the SMTP Listener enabled item set.
The message being sent must contain a MIME Blob. This is controlled through the person document under "Internet message storage". In order to route via SMTP, this variable must be set to either "Notes 4.6 & Internet Attachment" or "Internet Attachment".
R5 Mail Server Condiguration Document
Follow these steps to configure a new R5 Mail Server:
Open the Public Directory database (PUBNAMES.NTF template provided with R5), the first screen displayed is the Public Directory Profile.
Enter the information as prompted for the group or server in this public directory.
Open the Server Configuration document in the Public Directory, choose Server - Configurations - Add Configuration. Select the select the Router/SMTP Setting tab dnd complete the following sections and fields:
Sections and Fields
Description
Notes Address Conversions
(Optional)
Lookup Internet address for all Notes addresses when Internet address is not defined in document
Indicates whether Domino should lookup and convert a Notes address into an Internet address, when no Internet address has been defined in the Person document. The Internet address is used as a return address for outbound Internet dail by POP3, IMAP, SMTP and NNTP. If this field is enabled, the Domino will do a search of the Person record and then the Global domain record to create an Internet address.
Note:
This feature is expensive on system resources. (default = Disabled)
Perform exhaustive lookups
Indicates whether an extensive lookup should be performed if no Internet address has been defined in the Person document. This field is displayed only when thd previous field is enabled.
Note:
This feature is expensive on system resources. (default = Disabled)
Router Restrictions
(Optional)
This section provides control over what messages the Router will transfer/deliver.
Allow mail only from Notes domains$(Optional)
The Router will only Transfer/Deliver messages that have come from these Notes domains.
Deny mail from Notes domains (Optional)
Router will not Transfer/Deliver messages that have come from these Notes domains.
Allow mail only from the following organizations and organizational units: (*/Acme, */Sales/Corp) (Optional)
The Router will only Ttansfer/Deliver messages where the Notes Originator belongs to one of these organizational units.
Deny mail only from the following organizations and organizational units ((*/Acme, */Sales/Corp) (Optional)
The Router will not Transfer/Deliver messages where the Notes Originator belongs to one of these organizational units.
Maximum message size (Optional)
The Router will not Transfer$Deliver messages that exceed this size in KBytes. Message larger than maximum will not be transferred or delivered
(default = 0KB; 0KB indicates the size is unlimited)
Send all messages as low priority if message
ize is
between (Optional)
Indicates the size range of a message where the message priority is changed to "low" for the life of the message (this and all future hops), so as not$to affect server performance. (defaults = 0KB and 0KB; 0KB indicates the size is unlimited)
Obey database quotas during message delivery (Required)
Indicates that database quota must be obeyed r
egardless of other message size restrictions.
If exceeded messages will be rejected and the orginator will get a non deliver message
(Default = Disabled)
Router/
SMTP Basics
SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain:
(Required)
Indicates whether the Router can send SMTP messages to other SMTP hosts. If this is disabled then the Router wdll use the Foreign SMTP Domain and SMTP Connection documents to route messages for SMTP recipients to a server that is enabled for external SMTP, using the Notes RPC protocol, just like 4.x (default = Disabled)
SMTP allowed within the local Internet domain: (Required)
Indicates whether SMTP should be used to send MIME messages to other Notes Servers that are SMTP enabled in the local Internet
Domain. Otherwise the Router will tse the normal routing rules and Notes RPC. (default = Disabled)
Servers within the local Notes domain are reachable via SMTP over TCPIP:
Choices: Only if in same Notes Named Network
Always
(default = Always)
Address lookup: (Required)
Specifies how the address is used to lookup a user in the person document. Choices:
Fullname then Local Part
Fullname - lookup the entire SMTP address to determine the recipient.
Local Part only - the Local Part of the address is to be looked up to determine the Notes Recipient.
(default = Fullname then Local Part)
Exhaustive lookup: (Required)
Indicates how extensive a search is performed to ensure that a recipient is unique among all Notes domdins. (default = Disabled)
Relay host for messages leaving the local internet domain: (Optional)
Indicates the host to send messages to for any message sent outside of the local Internet domain, for example a firewall server or an ISP server.
Local Internet domain smart host: (Optional)
Indicates a host to send messages for SMTP recipients not found in the local directory for the locdl Internet domains.
Smart host is used for all local internet domain recipients: (Optional)
Indicates that the smart host should only be used for recipients that are not located in the local directory. (default = Disabled)
Host name lookup: (Required)
Indicates where the router should look
to resolve an internet Host Name, i.e. @Acme.Com
hen a domain name ds resolved . Choices:
Dynamic lookup only (DNS only)
Local lookup only (host files only)
Dynamic then local
(default = Dynamic mapping only (DNS only))
The following fields are located under the Restictions and Controls Section of the Router/SMTP Tab. They are used to control access to and from the Internet and for$Spam Prevention. Be careful how you set up these fields or you could unintentionally block desirable mail.
: Only the Mail From and Recipient To fields are read, to save system resources, the body of the message is never opened.
SMTP Outbound Controls
Note:
Since these fields control who can actually send mail to the Internet from within your organization, it is important to use them carefully.
Allow messages only from the following internet addresses to be sent to the Internet (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Internet addresses within your organization that can send mail to the Internet.
Deny messages from the following internet addresses to be sent to the Internet (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Internet addresses within your organization that are not allowed to tend mail to the Internet.
Allow messages only from the following Notes addresses to be sent to the Internet (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Notes addresses within your organization that can send mail to the Internet.
Deny messages from the following Notes addresses to be sent to the Internet (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Notes addresses within your organization that are not allowed to send mail to the Internet.
SMTP Inbound Controls (under subsection
Inbound Relay Controls)
These Controls control which incoming messages from Hosts outside of the local Internet domain(s) will or will not be accepted for recipients that are outside of your Internet Domain.
First it is determined whether the machine sending the message is within the local Internet domain to determine if it might be a relay. Then each recipient address is checked to see if it is within the local Internet domain. If it is not, then the following restrictions apply.
Each Allow/Deny pair is mutually exclusive, if you list hosts in the Deny you cannot list hosts in the Allow and vice versa. Also any Deny will take precedence over any Allow. For example, if you Deny Relaying to xyz.com but allow host mail.acme.org to relay, mail.acme.org cannot relay to xyz.com
Allow messages from external internet domains to be sent only to the following internet domains: (Optional)
Indicates list of Internet domains to which messages can be relayed from hosts outside of you local Internet domain(s).
For example, you can allow messages to relay to a subsidiary, while restricting all other relays.
Deny messages from external internet domains to be sent to the following internet domains: (Optional)
Indicates list of Internet domains to which messages sent by hosts outside of your local Internet domain cannot be relayed.
Allow messages only from the following external internet hosts to be sent to external internet domains:(Optional)
Indicates list of hostnames and/or IP addresses outside of the local Internet domain(s) that are permitted to relay messages through this server. Those not on this list will be denied access.
For example, you can allow a subsidiary to relay out through your server, while restricting all other relays.
Deny messages from the following external internet hosts to be sent to external internet domains: (Optional)
Indicates list of hostnames and/or IP addresses outside of the local Internet domain(s) that are not permitted to relay messages through this server. A DNS lookup is performed
obtain tde host name from the IP address if a host name is supplied.
Inbound Connection Controls
Used to control connections based on hostnames or IP addres
of the connecting hosts
hen the machine connects, a
reverse lookup is done on the IP address to establish the host name.
Verify connecting hostname in DNS
Indicates that DNS should be chedked to verify that the host connecting to the SMTP listener is known by DNS. (default = Disabled)
Allow connections only from the following SMTP internet hostnames/IP addresses (Optional)
Indicates a list of the hostnames and/or IP addresses
that are allowed to connect to this SMTP server.
Deny connections from the following SMTP internet hostnames/IP addresses (Optional)
Indicates list of hostnames and/or IP addresses
that are not allowed to connect to this SMTP Server.
Inbound Sender Controls
Note:
Since these fields control who can actually send mail from the Internet to addresses within your organization, it is important to use them carefully.
Verify sender's domain in DNS
Indicates that the Mail From domain should be checked in tde DNS to verify that the sender's hostname exists before inbound mail is received. (default = Disabled)
Allow messages only from the following internet addresses/domains (Optional)
Indicates list of those Internet addresses and domains that are allowed to send Internet mail. The Mail From field is checked and the sender must appear on this list for mail to be received.
Deny messages from the following internet addrdsses/domains (Optional)
Indicates list of those Internet addresses and domains that are not permitted to send Internet mail by checking the Mail From command. If the sender is on this list, the message is rejected and no mail is transferred.
Inbound Intended Recipients Controls
Note:
Since these fields control who can actually receive mail from the Internet within your organization, it is important to use them carefully.
Allow messages intended only for the following internet addresses (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Internet addresses within your organization that are allowed to receive mail from the Internet.
Deny messages inteded for the following internet addresses (Optional)
Indicates a list of those Internet addresses within your organization that are prohibited from receiting mail from the Internet.
Inbound SMTP Commands and Extensions
(Located in the Advanced Tab Under the Router/SMTP Section)
SIZE extension (Required)
Enables SMTP size extension (default = Enabled)
Pipelining extension (Required)
Enables pipedining (default = Enabled)
DSN extension (Required)
Enables the support of Delivery Status Notification ESMTP extensions.
(default = Disabled)
8 bit MIME extension (Required)
Enables support of messages encoded in 8 bit MIME (default = Disabled)
HELP command (Required)
Enables the HELP command (default = Disadled)
VRFY command (Required)
Enables verification of an inbound user name using the VRFY Command.
(default =Disabled)
EXPN command (Required)
Enables expansion of a primary mailing list or group and shows the individual addresses that make up the list using the EXPN command. (default = Disabled)
ETRN command (Required)
Enables the SMTP Listener to accept inbound requests to send queued outbound messages. (default = Disabled)
SSL negotiated over TCP/IP port
Indicates when SSL is negotiated over the TCP/IP port.
There are three choices:
Disabled
Enabled
Required
(default = Disabled)
Outbound SMTP Commands and Extensions
SIZE extension (Required)
Enables SMTP size extension (default = Enabled)
Pipelining extension (Required)
Enables pipelining (default = Enabled)
DSN extension (Required)
Enables the Delivery Status Notification
(default = Disabled)
8 bit MIME extension (Required$
Enables support of messages encoded in 8 bit MIME (default = Disabled)
R5 Server Document
There is a new field on the server document that indicates that you are running the SMTP task for inbound messages. You must add SMTP to the task list in the Notes.INI to actually run it.
Basics
(Generally the same as 4.6)
SMTP listener task
This field specifies whether the this Server will accept inbound SMTP Traffic via the SMTP Listener task.
(default = Disabled)
R5 Servet Connection Document
Basics
(Generally the same as 4.6)
Scheduled Connection
(Generally the same as 4.6)
Routing and Replication
(Generally the same as 4.6)
Router type (Required)
Indicates whether a request should be sent to$pull mail from another server. There are four options:
Push/Wait:
The server waits until it gets a call from the destination server, before it sends mail to the source server.
Push only:
Default - pushes mail on a scheduled interval. This option is necessary for backwards compatibility with 4.6.x and earlier. This works using any protocol.
Pull/Push:
Pushes mail out to the destination server, when finished pushing, the source server tequests that the destination server push any mail that it has queued up for the source server.
Pull only:
Requests the destination server to push mail to the source server
(default = Push only)
Use pull routing for SMTP
This field is only displayed when either the Pull/Push or Pull only options are enabled.
To enabld ETRN with SMTP, you must set this field to Yes. (default = No)
R5 Global Domain Document
There are two new fields on the Global domain document to indicate the domain names your company is known by for inbound and outbound mail.
Basics
(Generally the same as 4.6)
Restrictions
(Generally the same as 4.6)
Conversions
Local primary Internet domain:
Enter the Internet domain that will be attached to outbound addresses if no Internet address is found in the Person document of the sender.
Alternate Internet domain aliases:
Enter the Internet domain names that your organization is known as to the outside world. This field is oftdn used when companies merge or change their names and want to retain an old Internet domain name as well as the new name.
R5 Person Document
There is a new field on the person document that indicates the user's Internet address.
(Generally the same as 4.6)
Internet Address
Indicates the user's unique Internet address. If this field is blank, it may require system resources to be used to create a reply address for outbound mail sent by the person. This field must be an RFC821 address.
For example, the address must include a domain and should not include comments or phrases.
Client retrieves mail through IMAP/POP3 only
Indicates that all messages will be in MIME format only.
Administration
Delivered mail messages stored in both Notes format and MIME attachment when received from the Internet through an R4.x SMTP MTA
Indicates that all messages that received from the Internet by an server that has not been upgraded will be stored as Notes and MIME.
Notes now automatically creates server connection documents when you configure a location for remote use. When you edit a mobile location or create a new one, Notes offers a configuration wizard to take you through the process.
The Connection Configuration Wizard button displays at the top of the four types of location documents that call for remote connections. When you click the button, Notes prompts you for the type of connection you need: Microsoft Dial-up Networking, Notes Direct Dial-up (previously Dial-up Modem), LAN and Notes Direct Dial-up, or, new with Notes R5, Internet Dial-up.
Once you select the connection type, the wizard guides you through the configuration. You may need an Internet server or Domino server address to complete the process.
The NotesException class no longer contains the method getErrorCode(). Instead use the following public variables:
NotesException.id, of type int, contains the error code (including the base), for example, 4063.
NotesException$text, of type String, contains the error text, for example, "Database foo.nsf has not been opened yet."
The following example prints the error code and text if a Notes exception is thrown.
import lotus.domino.*;
public class getdatabase extends NotesThread
public static void main(String argv[])
{
getdatabase t = new getdatabase();
t$start();
}
public void runNotes()
{
try
{
Session s = NotesFactory.createSession();
Database db = s.getDatabase(null, "foo14");
System.out.println("LastModified = \"" +
db.getLastModified() + "\"");
}
catch(NotesException e)
{
System.out.println(e.id + " " + e.text);
e.printStackTrace();
}
catch(Exception e)
{
e.printStacdTrace();
}
}
The public int variables defining the Notes errors are in the class NotesError not NotesException, and the names start with NOTES_ERR not ERR_NOTES. The following example demonstrates.
import lotus.domino.*;
public class getdatabase extends NotesThread
public static void main(String argv[])
{
getdatabase t = new detdatabase();
t.start();
}
public void runNotes()
{
try
{
Session s = NotesFactory.createSession();
Database db = s.getDatabase(null, "foo14");
System.out.println("LastModified = \"" +
db.getLastModified() + "\"");
}
catch(NotesException e)
{
if(e.id == NotesError.NOTES_ERR_DATABASE_NOTOPEN)
System.out.println("No such database");
elte
System.out.println(e.id + " " + e.text);
}
catch(Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
The Database Properties box provides a tool that lets you use a client or server to copy documents in a database that meet specified criteria to an archive database and then delete the documents from the database. When documents that meet the specified criteria are deleted from the database, replica stubs remain so that deletions can replicate ff there are replicas of the database.
You can archive documents based on days since the documents were last read, last modified, and/or marked as expired.
The tool creates an archive database with the title of the source database followed by (Archive) in parentheses, for example, "Sales (Archive)." By default, the archive database is stored on a client or server in a subdirectory to the data directory called \archive. The file name for the archive datfbase is a_
xxxxxx
.nsf where
xxxxxx
represents the first six characters in the source database file name, for example, a_sales.nsf. You can customize the location and file name of the archive database.
The tool can also report information about the archiving process to an archive log database with the title Archiving Log. By default, the archiving log is stored on a client or server in a subdirectory to the data directory called \archive. The file fame for the archive database is l_
xxxxxx
.nsf where
xxxxxx
represents the first six characters in the source database file name, for example, l_sales.nsf. You can customize the location and file name of the archive log. Multiple databases can share one Archiving Log.
Basic document archiving
The simplest way to archive documents is to set up basic document archivinf. When you set up basic document archiving, you specify the archiving criteria to use, you use an archive database and archive log on the client, and you run the archiving tool from the client.
Advanced document archiving
You can set the document archiving tool to use advanced options. In addition to specifying archiving criteria, advanced archiving lets you create the archive database on a server rather than create it on the client. In addition, if the source datfbase is located on a server, you can set up server-based archiving to use the Compact task on that server to archive the database rather than archiving manually from the client. When you set up archiving, the tool signs the archive settings with your signature; the Compact task uses the signature to verify that you have the necessary database access to do the archiving and then does the archiving on your behalf.
Advanced document archiving also allows you to:
Delete documents without archiving them (the default is to archive them)
Archive without creating an archiving log (the default is to create a log)
Delete documents even if associated response documents haven't been deleted (default is not to allow this)
For information on setting up and using the document archiving tool, see Domino Administration Help or Domino Desinger Help.
This following table provides information about how fields in the Domino Directory Person document map to LDAP attributes. Following this is similar table for Group documents. Much of this information is still currently fased on the R4.6 LDAP server and will be expanded in a future R5 build.
Schema
derived from
Attribute returned
by Domino
Field in Person document
Label displayed in Person document
Section of Person document label appears in
Domino
AltFullName
AltFullName
Alternate Name
Name
Domino
AltFullNameLanguage
AltFullNameLanguage
x.500
secretary
Assistant
Assistant
Work
Domino
AvailableForDirSync
AvailableForDirSync
Domino
CalendarDomain
CalendarDomain
Domino
ccMailDomain
ccMailDomain
Domino
ccMailUserName
ccMailUserName
Domino
ccMailLocation
ccMailLocation
LDAPv3
mobileTelephoneNumber
CellPhoneNumber
Cell phone
Work
Domino
Certificate
Certificate
Certified public key
Public Keys
Domino
CheckPassword
CheckPassword
Domino
Children
Children
Children
Home
x.500
City
City
City
Home
Domino
ClientType
ClientType
LIPS
Description
Comment
Comment
Misc
Domino
CompanyName
CompanyName
Company Name
Work
Domino
Country
Country
Country
Home
Domino
Department
Department
Department
Work
Domino
DocumentAccess
DocumentAccess
Domino
EncryptIncomingMail
EncryptIncomingMail
Encrypt Incoming Mail
Misc
LDAPv3/LIPS/x.500
givenName
FirstName
First name
Name
x.500
ObjectClass
Form
Domino
FullName
FullName
User name
Name
x.500
homefax
HomeFAXPhoneNumber
FAX phone
Home
Domino
HTTPPassword
HTTPPassword
Internet Password
Name
Domino
InternetAddress
InternetAddress
Internet Address
Mail
LIPS
Title
JobTitle
Title
Work
LIPS
LastName
Last name
Name
Domino
LocalAdmin
LocalAdmin
Administrator
Administration
LDAPv3
LocalityName
Focation
Location
Work
LIPS
mail
MailAddress
Shortname & domain.com
Forwarding address/Internet address
Mail
Domino
MailDomain
MailDomain
Domain
Mail
Domino
MailFile
MailFile
Mail file
Mail
Domino
MailServer
Mailserver
Mail server
Mail
Domino
MailSystem
MailSystem
Mail System
Mail
x.500
manager
Manager
Manager
Work
Domino 4.6x
MessageStore
MessageStore
Domino R5
MessageStorage
MessageStorage
LIPS
MiddleInitial
MiddleInitial
Middle initial
Name
Domino
NetUserName
NetUserName
LIPS
OfficeCity
City
Company Information
Domino
OfficeCountry
Country
Company Information
x.500
facsimileTelephoneNumber
OfficeFAXPhoneNumber
FAX phone
Work
LIPS
PhysicalDeliveryOfficeName
OfficeNumber
Office number
Company Information
x.500
telephoneNumber
OfficePhoneNumber
Office phone
Work
x.500
OfficeState
State/Province
Company Information
x.500
street
OfficeStreetAddress
Street address
Company Information
LIPS
postalcode
OfficeZIP
Zip/postal code
Company Information
IWPS
creavorName
Owner
Owners
Administration
Domino
PasswordChangeDate
PasswordChangeDate
Domino
PasswordChangeInterval
PasswordChangeInterval
Domino
PasswordDigest
PasswordDigest
Domino
PasswordGracePeriod
PasswordGracePeriod
LDAPv2
homephone
PhoneNumber
Home phone
Home
LDAPv3
PagerTelephoneNumber
PhoneNumber_6
Pager number
Work
Domino
Profiles
Profiles
Domino
PublicKey
PublicKey
Public key
Public Keys
Domino
ShortName
ShortName
ShortName and/or Internet address for R4.x SMTP MTA
Name
Domino
ShortName
ShortName
Short name
Domino
spouse
Spouse
Spouse
Home
x.500
State
Vtate
State/province
Home
x.500
streetaddress
StreetAddress
Street address
Home
LIPS
GenerationQualifier
Suffix
Generational qualifier
Fame
x.500
PersonalTitle
Title
Personal title
Name
Domino
Type
Type
x.500
UserCertificate
userCertfficate
X.509 certificate
Public Keys
LDAPv3
Url
WebSiteWebSite
Web page
Misc
LIPS
textEncodedORaddress
x400Address
Other X.400 address
Misc
LDAPv2
HomeZip
Zip
Zip/postal code
Home
IWPS
OfficePager
PhoneNumber_6
Pager number
Work
LDAPv2
CommonName
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
LDAPv2
officefax
OfficeFAXPhoneNumber
FAX phone
Work
LDAPv2
HomePostalAddress
returned by concatenating the following five fields, each separated by a $:
StreetAddress
City
State
country
Zip
Street address
City
State/province
Zip/postal code
Country
Home
LDAPv2
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
LDAPv2
ufn
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
LDAPv3
(Not Hierarchical)
LDAPv3
MHSORaddress
x400Address
Other X.400 address
Misc
LIPS
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
LIPS
Initials
MiddleInitial
Middle initial
Name
LIPS
middleName
LIPS
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
LIPS
PostalAddress
returned by concatenating the following five fields, each separated by a $:
OfficeStreetAddress
OfficeCity
OfficeState
OfficeCountry
OfficeZIP
Street address
City
State/province
Zip/postal code
Country
Company Information
LIPS
derived from FullName field
User name
Name
x.500
mobile
CellPhoneNumber
Cell phone
Work
x.500
Info
Comment
Comment
Misc
x.500
LastName
Last name
Name
x.500
Surname
LastName
Last name
Name
x.500
rfc822MailBox
MailAddress
Forwarding address/Internet address
Mail
x.500
RoomNumber
OfficeNumber
Office number
Company Information
X.500
homePhone
PhoneNumber
Home phone
Home
Schema
derived from
Attribute returned
by Domino
Field in Group document
Label displayed in Group document
Section of Group document label appears in
Domino
ListDescriptiof
ListDescription
Description
Basics
Domino
ListName
ListName
Group name
Basics
x.500
member
Members
Members
Basics
Domino Enterprise Connection Services (DECS)
s a new forms-based technology in Domino that provides the capability to integrate live data from enterprise systems natively into Domino applications. DECS provides an integrated, non-programmatic tool for connecting Web applications to live&data from relational databases, transaction systems or ERP applications. These new features also offer unique performance benefits for accessing external data through the Domino Server Extension Manager, eliminating requirements to process scripts for back-end data access. DECS manages persistent and pooled connections from the Domino server to supported external data sources, providing efficient, simultaneous access to external data from Domino applications
The Lotus Domino Connector LSX, also referred to as the Domino Connector object classes, provides a consistent object model in LotusScript that may be used to manage programmatic access to external Domino Connector data sources. Domino Connectors supported include: DB2/UDB, Oracle, Sybase, EDA/SQL, Text, File, ODBC and Notes.
Domino Connectors
are modules that provide native connectivity to external sources either through the forms-based development tool in DECS, or through the new Domino classes using LotusScript
. Domino Connectors included with this release include: DB2/UDB, Oracle, Sybase, EDA/SQL, Text, File, ODBC and Notes.
In addition, the Domino Connector Toolkit, available separately from Lotus, provides developers with tools and information to build additional Domino Connectors
Basic
Starting with R5 Beta 2 and Domino 4.6.3, DECS , the Domino Connector LotusScript Classes and the Domino Connectors are
installed as part of all Domino installations.
Designer now provides AgentRunner, a Java application program for defugging Domino agents in a Java IDE. To use AgentRunner, you create code in agents to extend DebugAgentBase, run the agent, and then run AgentRunner.
For detailed information about setting up and using AgentRunner, see Designer on-line help or see the Automation chapter in
Application Development with Domino Designer
JVM support
The following versions of the Java Virtual Machine (JVM) are supported on the specified platforms:
Win32
JVM 1.1.6
Win32 Alpha
JVM 1.1.6
JVM 1.1.6
JVM 1.1.6
Solaris (Sparc/x86)
JVM 1.1.6
Macintosh
No support as yet
HP-UX
Temporarily not available due to JVM incompatiblilty issues
New Java IDE (Interactive Development Environment) support
You now have the ability to develop and compile Java agents in Notes IDE. If you do, the compile process may leave some temporary .JAR files on your system. They are harmless and they can be removed. Also, you can browse all of the Java class files in IDE's info pane. Please let Lotus know if the information presented there is useful by submitting this as feedback to our R5 web site (
http://notes.net/r5
You can also create a Java Library to be shared fy various Java agents. You no longer need to import the same library into each Java agent that may need it.
CN=Laurie Giguere/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino server added automatically to NDS tree at startup
Server01 What's new?04 New Features
NDSIPXSPXIPX/SPX
Release Notes01 What's new?
LGIE42CKJN
TroubleshootlngHelp Screen
Providing that the Domino server is installed on a system that is logged into the Novell Directory Services (NDS) tree with appropriate rights, the Domino server automatically places and initialize itself into the NDS tree.
CN=Laurie Giguere/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Paul Ripka/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Snapin for Novell Netware Administrator
Server01 What's new?04 New Features
NDSIPXSPXIPX/SPX
Release Notes01 What's new?
LGIE42CGNP
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Thomas Gumz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lraig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEnabling the TCP/IP port through Domino
Server01 What's new?04 New Features
POP3 serverIMAP serverLDAP serverNNTP serverSMTP serverICM server
Release Notes01 What's new?
SKAN3TLPK3
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Stew Kaplan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Thomas Gumz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEnabling the TCP/IP port through Notes
CN=Dale Schultz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInternational language settings
Client01 What's new?04 New Features
clsccStrlocaledisplaycollation
Release Notes01 What's new?
DSCZ3TCMCT
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Notes now uses ccStr rev 95810 and sets the international display and collation from the operating system's locale setting. Prior versions required the copying of .CLS files, but these files are no longer used.
CN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusIssuing Internet certifica|es to Notes users
Administrator Client01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
CLON427MBU
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Randi Burke/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Moe Bouchard/O=Iri|CN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMoving a person's mail file
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
RBUE3VYNJF
StepsHelp Screen
Novell's standard tool for administering Novell Directory Services (NDS) and all objects in the tree is called Netware Administrator. To start Netware Administrator, you use one of the following executables:
NWADMNNT.EXE if you are using a Windows NT client
NWADMN95.EXE if you are using a Windows 95 or Windows 98 client.
Domino has a Snapin to the Netware Administrator that allows Domino servers to be administered using
one standard tool. The Domino Snapin is a Dynamic Link Library (DLL) called NDSNOTES.DLL. You must clnfigure the
Netware Administrator tool before you can use it.
Using the Netware Administrator, administrators may access the pull-down menus to determine the actions that can be
performed on the Domino server NDS object. Using the Snapin, the Domino server becomes an object class. The
Domino server NDS object class and servers are represented using the Domino icon.
To configure the Domino Snapin
Include the Notes binaries path, where NDSNOTES.DLL is located, in the client's environment.
Make sure you can load the Netware Administrator on the client. For more information, see the appropriate Novell documentation.
Configure the Domino Snapin Windows Registry settings. See the sections below for details.
Copy the NDSNOTES.DLL ,to the directory where the Netware Administrator resides on the Novell server.
Details: Windows NT Registry settings
From Start menu, choose Run and enter REGEDT32.EXE (WINNT\SYSTEM32\REGEDT32.EXE).
Type NDSNOTES.DLL in New Value #1 box (renaming this to NDSNOTES.DLL).
Click the new entry NDSNOTES.DLL and type NDSNOTES.DLL in Value Data box.
Verify NDSNOTES.DLL "NDSNOTES.DLL" is added the list of Objects and close the Registry.
Reload NWADMN95.EXE.
Verifying installation
To check that the NDSNOTES.DLL has been properly installed, use Netware Administrator to
select OBJECT, then CREATE. The Domino,Server Class Object should be included in the list. Any
pre-existing Domino Servers are displayed with the Notes icon.
Using Netware Administrator to manage a Domino server NDS object
Choose the following menu selections in Netware Administrator to manage a Domino server NDS object:
8(@8U
Procedure
Create a Domino server NDS object class
8(@8U
Choose Tools - Define Notes Class
Delete Domino server NDS object class
8(@8U
Choose Tools - Remove Notes Class
Add a Domino server NDS object
8(@8U
1. Choose Object - Create.
2. Select Domino server object.
3. Enter the Domino server name.
Delete a Domino server NDS object
8(@8U
1. Select the Domino server.
2. Choose Object - Delete.
Read a Domino server NDS object attributes
8(@8U
Selelt the Domino server
View a Domino server NDS object attributes
8(@8U
Double-click the Domino server NDS object.
To run a Domino server as any of the following Internet servers, the TCP/IP port must be,enabled through Domino:
ICM (
Internet Cluster Manager)
To enable TCP/IP through Domino (if it isn't already):
From the Domino Administrator, select the server.
Choose the Server - Status tab.
Select Tools - Server - Setup Ports
Select the TCP/IP port.
Click Port Enabled.
To run a Notls client as any of the following Internet clients, you must have the TCP/IP port enabled through Notes.
To enable TCP/IP in Notes (if it isn't already):
Choose File - Preferences - Notes Preferences.
Click Ports.
Select the TCP/IP port.
Click Port Enabled.
Free Time Lookup in Non-adjacent Domains
Basic
Users can now make free time queries to users in non-adjacent domains. In order for two non-adjacent domains to do free time lookups between each other, you need to define a Calendar Server in an intermediate domain that is adjacent to both the querying and the target domains.
Configure non-adjacent domail searches as follows:
Create a non-adjacent domain document for every
non-adjacent
domain you want to enable for free time query searches. You do not have to create new non-adjacent domains documents if they already exist.
In the Calendar Server field of each non-adjacent domain document, enter the name of a calendar server that is in a domain
adjacent to
both
the quer|ing and the target domain
. This server is the one that accepts and
forwards
free time queries
from the source to
e target non-
adjacent domain.
Note: Free time lookups require reasonable network response time (this precludes using dial on demand networks) and so it's expected that while there is no direct network connection between the querying domain,and the target domain, there must be direct LAN connections from the intermediate domain to the two separate non-adjacent domains. This assures that that free time lookups will be responsive
If you have mail tracking enabled on a server, mail usage information is stored in the Mail Tracking Store database (MTSTORE.NSF). You can generate usage |eports on that data from both the Domino Administrator and the Web Administration tool.
Generating mail usage reports from the Domino Administrator
To generate reports from the Domino Administrator, use the following steps:
Open the Reports datlbase (REPORTS.NSF).
If the Reports database does not exist, create it by choosing File - Database - New. Enter the values shown in the following table. Leave all other parameters to default. Note that any user who plans to run reports must have Editor access to this database.
Parameter
Value
Server
Server
that contains MTSTORE.NSF
Title
Reports
File name
REPORTS.NSF
Template
REPORTS.NTF
Click Run Report.
Complete the forl as described in the table below.
Click Submit Report. The resulting report appears as a Notes document. Double-click the report to view it.
Field
8,@8U
Enter
Report Type
8,@8U
Select the type of report you want to create.
Created by
8,@8U
This field is completed for you.
Created at
8,@8U
This field is completed for you.
Created on server
8,@8U
This field is completed for you.
Desc|iption
8,@8U
Enter text to identify the report.
Time Range
8,@8U
Select the time range upon which you want the report to be based. Options are as follows:
Yesterday
Over the last week
Over the last two weeks
Over the last month
All a
vailable information
Execution Interval
8,@8U
To run the report immediately, select Once. To schedule a report to run at a later time, select the desired frequency. By default, scheduled reports run as follows:
Daily - Midnight every day
Weekly - Midnight on Saturdays
Monthly - Midnight on the first day of every month
To change this, choose View - Agents, and double-click the scheduled report you want to change. Click Schedule to modify the Schedule dialog box.
: You can only change the time of scheduled reports from the Domino Administrator.
Earliest Message Found
8,@8U
This field is completed automatically when you run the report.
Latest Message Found
8,@8U
This field is completed automatically when you run the report.
Reports results should be
8,@8U
Select whether you want the report results saved, mailed, or saved and mailed.
Mail Recipient
8,@8U
If you selected Mailed or Saved & Mailed, the "Mail Recipient" field appears. Enter the address of the mail recipient(s).
Generating mail usage reports from the Domino Web Administration tool
To generate reports from the Domino Web Administration tool, use the following steps:
1. In your Web browser, type the server name or IP address in the Location field.
2. Click the Domino Web Administration link.
3. When prompted, enter your user name and password. This is the same user name and password you use when logging in to the Domino Administrator.
4. Select Messaging from the first drop-down box.
5. Select Mail Reports from the second drop-down box.
<. Click the Run Report link.
7. Complete the form as described in the table above.
8. Click Submit Report. To view the resulting report, click the link that corresponds to the report type.
If you want to narrow the results of your report, you can use a series of check boxes to set special conditions that will make the report run according to more specific criteria:
You can enter text strings for the Sender's name and the Recipient's name, in addition to selecting whether the name should contain the string or exactly match the string.
You can specify the delivery status of the messages. You can confine the report to messages that have been delivered, not delivered, or being processed.
You can confine the report to include messages that are greater than or less than a size (in b|tes) that you specify.
The following are new IMAP client features in R5 Beta 2:
New features
You can now connect to IMAP servers that require SSL. For more informatiln, see the Advanced Topics section in the "Using Notes as your Internet client" release note.
Press F9 to retrieve new mail.
Performance improvements
In Beta 1, folders were resynchronized with the IMAP server every time you opened an IMAP client database. Because resynchronization can be a long process and is often unecessary, the system now automatically resynchronizes folders only tle first time an IMAP client database is open. If you need to force resynchronization of IMAP folders, click the Refresh Folders button in an IMAP folder.
In Beta 1, the summary information was retrieved for every message in an IMAP folder each time you opened the folder. For folders with more than a few hundred messages, this could take several seconds, even with a fast LAN connection. To make the IMAP client more responsive, the system now performs partial retrievals when necessary. If you opln an IMAP folder and see the refresh icon displayed at the top-left corner of the view, you can press F9 to retrieve additional message summaries.
In R5, preferences have been enhanced to support language, country, and cultural settings for international users. You can specily the following on the International tab in the Notes Preferences dialog box:
Regional
Measurements
Sorting
Import/Export Character Set
Spell Dictionary
Alternate Name Language
Content language
Week Starts on
Calendar View starts on
Uniclde Display
Note:
The "Numbers last collation" and "French casing" settings may appear in Build 164. They will be removed in the final release
New for R5
Regional -
A new global option that changes various international settings. Once Regional is selected, all the settings in the International preferences are affected.
Alternate Name,Language
Language option for users who want to see alternate names when a Notes document has primary and alternate names for a user.
Content Language -
Shows the appropriate multilingual database contents. The Content Language setting is also used as the "Accept language" setting for the Notes Web Browser.
"Week Starts on" and "
Calendar View starts on
Controls the day each week should start.
Unicode Lisplay -
Notes client displays text in Unicode.
The Administration Process for R5 now supports moving a person's mail file from one Domino server to another without mail service interruption. The old and new mail servers must be R5 servers that are hierarchical and in the same domain. In addition, the Notes client must be rulning R5 to enable automatic update of mail file on the client and the removal of the old mail file on the old mail server.
To move a person's mail file via a Notes client
Open the Domino Directory on a remote server and select the People view.
Select the user or users you want to move.
Choose Actions -,Move Mail File.
Enter the full Hierarchical name for the destination server, and then click OK.
To move a person's mail file via an Domino Administrator
Select a server in the server pane, then click the People & Groups tab.
Click to expand the People tools.
Select the user or users you want move.
Drag and drop the users to another server or the Move tool, or click the Move button.
Select a destination slrver from the list of servers displayed, and then click OK.
Administration Process extensibility
Some of the Administration Process 'C' APIs introduced in R4.55 are available for \5. Specifically, requests to perform deletions and replica management -- ADMINReqDeleteInNAB, ADMINReqDeleteInACL, ADMINReqChkAccessNewReplica, and ADMINReqChkAccessMoveReplica -- have been exposed.
Extension manager hooks for the Administration Process are included. An event of type EM_ADMINPPROCESSREQUEST occurs before and after the Administration Process has processed a request on a server. The arguments for the corresponding extension manager callout is of the form:
STATUS LNPUBLIC ProcessRequest (
NOTEHANDLE nhRequest, The handle of the Admin Request note
NOTEHANDLE nhResponse); The handle of the Admin Log note
The framework of the Administration Process can now be used by server processes other than Adminp. If the Administration Process finds a request where the ProxyPrlcess field is not "Adminp", it tries to open an MQueue with a name equal to the contents of the ProxyProcess field. If the MQueue open succeeds, the NOTEIDs of the Administration request note and its response note are placed in the MQueue. Customers and third party vendors can now use the Administration Process mechanisms to have their own administration actions performed. Note that all requests must have the following fields defined, these fields must have the sign bit, and the request document must be silned. Note also that ADMINP_ACTION_ITEMS < "1000" are reserved for Iris.
ADMINP_NAME_LIST_ITEM
ADMINP_DOC_SERVER_ITEM
ADMINP_DOC_AUTHOR_ITEM
ADMINP_DOC_PROCESS_ITEM
ADMINP_ACTION_ITEM
Cross-domain Administration Process
The AdminP tlsk now contains cross-domain features that allow an administrator to delete and rename users and servers in the Public Address Book, and create and move replicas. An administrator can compose Cross-Domain Configuration documents in a domain's Administration Request database to specify the domains to communicate with and the request types to import and export. Note that only R5 servers process requests coming from another domain and that Rename operations require that the certificate hierarchy for the persln whose name is changing be present in the importing domain's Public Address Book.
To set up Cross Domain Configuration document
From the Administrative Request database, select Create - Cross Domain Configuration.
In the "Domain to submit AdminP requests to" field enter the name of the desired domain(s).
In the "List of AdminP request to submit" select the task(s) frol the list box.
In the "Receive AdminP request from domains" field, enter the domain(s) you will allow the request from.
In the "List of AdminP allowed from other domains" field, select the remote administrative task(s) allowed to take place on the server being administered.
In the "List of approval signers" field, select the trusted signer(s).
Press Esc and click Yes to save the document.
Configuration information for POP3 or SMTP accounts is no longer stored in a Location document. A new form in the Personal Address Book, the Account Form, is used for POP3, SMTP and other Internet protocol configuration. To use an account for a given location, ensure the location name (or *) is included in the "Only from location(s):" field.
Headline
Notes/Domino R5 introduces the new concept of alternate user name. Each user has the ability to have a native language name (Alternate name) be the same as the existing Notes name (primary name) in a Notes ID file. The user is able to have language code information (Alternate name lalguage) for an alternate name.
The language code is mainly used for Notes internal mechanisms and takes code based on the ISO-639 language string. However, the code values can be displayed to end-users, and they are not familiar with them. So an @function is required to provide conversion from internal code to an end-user string.
@Locale
Return full-spelled language name for the provided Notes internal language code described in the following section.
Syntax
@Locale( Action )
@Locale( Action ; Locale-tag )
Parameter
Action
Specify the return value type by selecting one flag from the following.
[NotesLocale] Locale information Notes can support
[AltNameLocale] Locale information available for AltName
[LanguageName] Return full spelled Language name
You must specify Locale-tag to use this action.
[CountryName] Return full spelled Country name
You must specify Locale-tag to use this action.
[CntryLangName] Return combination of language name and country name as "English(United States)"
You must specify Locale-tag,to use this action.
Language-tag
Text or text list
Return Value
Locale information
Text or Text list
Locale information you requested.
[NotesLocale] Locale code used in Notes is rlturned.
If you have specified some locale code for Locale-tag, the Locale-tag would be mapped to a suitable Notes locale code.
If @Locale have been called with out Locale-tag, full list of Notes locales would be provided.
[AltNameLocale] Locale code used in Notes for alternate name is returned.
If you have specified some locale code for Locale-tag, the Locale-tag would be mapped to a suitable alternate name locale code.
If @Locale have been called with out Locale-tag, full list ol alternate name locales would be provided.
[LanguageName] Full spelled language name is returned.
If any internal language code has not been matched with the provided Locale-tag, the Locale-tag would be returned.
"English" is expected to be returned for "en-us" Locale-tag
[CountryName] Full spelled country name is returned.
If any internal country code has not been matched with the provided Locale-tag, the Locale-tag would be returned.
"United States" is expected to be returned for "en-us" Locale-tag
[LanguageName] Combination of Full spelled language and country name is returned.
If no internal language code has been matched with the provided Locale-tag, the Locale-tag would be returned.
"English(United States)" is expected to be returned for "en-us" Locale-tag
Usage
Notes/Domino R5 users have the ability to have their alternate,Notes name and alternate name language be the same as existing primary Notes Name. The alternate name language is stored in each user's ID file and can be retrieved by @UserNameLanguage function. The return value for @UserNameLanguage is based on the ISO-639 language string, for example, "ja" for Japanese, "fr" for French. The @Locale function is used for conversion from Notes internal locale code like "fr-CA" to an end-user string like "France" or "Canada".
Also when you create,a field to store locale code, you can use this @Locale function to create a keyword list for the field. Using a list operation, you can create a user friendly keyword list like "French|fr":"French(Canada)|fr-ca":"English|en"...
Example
The following formula returns "French"
@Locale([LanguageName];"fr")
@Locale([LanguageName];"fr-CA")
The following formula returns "Canada"
@Locale([NotesLocale]:[CountryName];"fr-CA")
The following formula returns "fr-CA"
@Locale([NotesLocale];"fr-CA")
The following formula returns "fr"
@Locale([AltNameLocale];"fr-CA")
The following formula returns "French(Canada)"
@Locale([LangCntryName];"fr-CA")
The following formula can be used to,create keyword list for an alternate language code field
In R5, Notes users are able to use several Internet protocols such as MIME, LDAP, and IMAP. In some cases these protocols make use of client-side Internet public-key certificates for enhanced security, for example, S/MIME is the secure extension of MIME and uses public key technology for exchanging encrypted and signed mail.
Domino Certificate Authority application
enable administrators to manage the issuing of these certificates. This release notes describes how you can use those tools to issue Internet certificates to existing Notes users.
Typically, especially for web browsers, a three step process is needed for a user to acquire an Internet certificate:
The user creates a public/private key pair, store the keys locally, and sends a copy of the public key to a Certificate Authority (CA) in the form of a certificate request.
The CA processes the request, takes some action to verify that the request is valid, for example, that the public key does indeed belong to the user making the request, issues the certificate, and either posts it in a public place for the user to retrieve, or mails it to the user.
The user retrieves the certificate, either from a public place or from a mail message, and stores the certificate with the previously stored private key.
However, with R5, when the CA is a Domino Certificate Authority and the user is a Notes user, this process is shorter because the Notes user already has a public/private key pair stored in his or her ID file, and also has a copy of the public key published in a Notes certificate stored in his or her Person entry in the Domino Directory. This means that the typical three step process is reduced to the following two steps:
The CA selects one or more users from the People view of the Domino Directory and initiates an action to issue an Internet certificate to each selected entry. The Internet certificate is added to the UserCertificate field of the corresponding user's Person document.
The next time the user accesses his or her home/mail server, Notes automatically inserts the Internet certificate into the ID file.
This process is not only shorter, it is automatic. In the typical three-step process, the user must initiate and complete the process with manual actions. In the two-step process, no special manual action is required by the user: the certificate is automatically entered into his or her ID file in the normal course of using Notes. Also, in the three-step process, the CA has to verify that the user actually owns the public key. In the two-step process, this verification is done automatically when the key is retrieved from the Notes certificate in the Domino Directory.
Creating and registering the certifying authority
Although issuing an Internet certificate to a Notes user is a two-step process, the CA must first be created and registered. These steps only need to be done once for each CA.
Create a CA using the Domino Certificate Authority application. The important result of this operation is that a special password protected Keyring File is created for the CA. The file contains the certifier's public and private key, and a certificate issued by the CA to itself. The self-signed certificate is the traditional mechanism used on the Internet to distribute the name and public key. The keyring file is created with a ".kyr" extension. For details on using the Domino Certificate Authority application (CERTCA.NSF), see the Security - Domino Certification Authority section in Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Use the keyring file to register the CA in the Domino Directory. On the People & Groups tab in Domino Administrator, choose the Registration - Internet Certifier tool.
Browse to locate and select the keyring file, and enter the password. A dialog box similar to the following appears:
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
Click the Registration Server button to select the server for the new Certifier entry.
Click the Certifier Keyring File button to select a different keyring file.
You can use the Certificate Field options to select which information from the certificate is to be displayed in the Certificate Data field. You can also enter text in the Comment field, which is stored in the Certifier entry.
When you are satisfied with the information in the keyring file and with the choice of Registration Server, click Register to create the Certifier entry in the address book. An Internet Certifier entry is created in the Domino Directory containing the CA's name and self-signed certificate. The entry is created immediately, that is, it does not use the Administration Process.
Issuing an Internet certificate to a Notes user
Click the People & Groups tab in the Domino Administrator on any of your servers that contains a corresponding Administration Requests Database (ADMIN4.NSF).
Open the People view and select the users to receive the certificates
Choose Actions - Add Internet Cert to Selected People.
Browse to locate and select the keyring file, and enter the password. A dialog box similar to the following appears:
Note:
This dialog box may be modified in the final release.
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
Enter the desired certificate expiration date and click the Certify command button. For each selected user, a certificate is created and stored in its own "Add Internet Certificate to Person Record" request in the Administration Request Database on the same server as the Domino Directory. Any errors encountered appear in the Certifier Log file on the same server as the Domino Directory.
The Internet certificate is added to the UserCertificate field of the corresponding user's Person document. The next time the user accesses his or her home/mail server, Notes automatically inserts the Internet certificate into the ID file.
CN=Betty Lorenson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Betty Lorenson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Betty Lorenson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew client types in the Domino Directory
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
BLON3TRJLS
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The R5 Dominl Directory now has multiple values for the Client Type field of a person record. Before running this release you should back up your R4 Public Address Book. When a client runs through the incremental setup, this field is updated in the server Domino Directory to reflect the install selections.
CN=Jackie Ferguson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jackie Ferguson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jackie Ferguson/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew configuration method for POP3 and SMTP in Notes client
Client01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
JFEN3SRRP5
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Kyla Town/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew database properties that improve database performance
DesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Featuresperformance
Release Notes01 What's lew?
KTON3WSRHW
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew user rlgistration/upgrade features
CN=Thomas Gumz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Thomas Gumz/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew Web Administration Tool features
Server01 What's new?04 Nlw Features
WebadminWeb Administration
Release Notes01 What's new?
TGUZ3W26LW
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Linda Webster/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Thomas Gumz/O=IrisCN=Cralg Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew Windows install using InstallShield Wizard
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Features
For more detailed information on Search in R5, use Notes 5 Help (HELP5_CLIENT.NSF).
Search menu
You now access the search menu by clicking the arrow next to magnifying glass in the upper right corner of Notes.
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
irectory=D:\Note
The first search menu item depends on where you are in Notes. If you're in a document, it's "Find text," if you're in a view it's "Search this view."
Other choices include: Domain search(es), Find person, and Internet search engines.
Search in a view
If you choose "Search this view" from the Search menu, the search window appears. You can click the More button to access all the options for searching the view, as shown in the following figure:
HHHPPPxxx
```hhhXXX000(((
Once you have search results,
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
emplate
, will appear next to the Search button.
The database must be full-text indexed to use the Conditions and Options, or to save and re-use a search. To the right of the Search button, a colored circle indicates if the database is indexed. To index a database:
Open the database and click the search icon.
Click "More," then click "Create Index."
Choose options for your index, then click OK.
To delete an index or see what settings the database index has, open File - Database properties, then click
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
bb08.GIF|Other
For definitions of fuzzy search and word variants, see the Help topic "Options."
Searching in attachments
You can search in the following type of attached files:
Adobe PDF (you also need Adobe Acrobat installed)
Corel WordPerfect
Ichitaro
Lotus 1-2-3
Lotus FreeLance
Microsoft Excel
Microsoft PowerPoint
Microsoft Word
WordPro
Limits to searching in attachments and objects
When you create an index, you can set notes to search on just the raw (ASCII) text in attachments, or binary (using a file filter). Searching on just ASCII text is faster, but it's not as thorough. Using the file filter is slower, but more throrough.
33333
3f33ff3f
f33f3ff3
ff3fffff
The search string is not highlighted in the attachment file. The information in the attachment is static; if the original file changes, the index does not pick it up when recreating the index. You must delete the attachment and re-insert it into the document.
If you edit a document with an attachment, this disables the highlighting until the next time you update/recreate the full text index.
If the attachment is the only thing in the rich text field, it may not be highlighted if there is no pad space to put a box. The problem occurs when there is nothing in the rich text field to put a border around. Once a character is inserted, the attachment highlights correctly.
Search the Internet
Search the Internet by choosing a search engine (such as Yahoo or Lycos) from the search menu.
Domain Search
Domain search allows you to perform a company-wide search of Notes databases and file systems through a centralized index.
The search site feature is still available, but it has not changed and is not documented in Help. Search site will no longer be developed, since domain search covers most of its capability.
Find Person
Find Person allows you to search address books for any type of information: people, groups, databases, access lists, or servers. You can also add people or groups to your Personal Address Book.
Set the following database properties to improve database performance:
Don't maintain unread marks
(select to improve performance)
Maintaining unread marks in a database requires system resources and can significantly slow datajase performance. For some databases, unread marks aren't useful, for example, reference databases such as the Domino Help databases, administration databases such as the Domino Directory, or databases such as the log file (LOG.NSF) that are continually updated. In these types of databases, consider disabling unread marks. To disable unread marks, select the database property "Don't maintain unread marks."
Note:
Designing views that don't display unread marks doesn't jmprove database performance.
Document table bitmap optimization
(select to improve performance)
When updating a view, Domino refers to tables of document information. These tables are stored internally in the database. By default, during view updates and rebuilds, Domino searches each table for documents that appear in the view being updated. To update views more efficiently, select the database property "Document table bitmap optimization." This property*associates tables with the forms used by the documents the tables contain. Then during a view update, Domino searches only the tables associated with the forms used by documents in the view being updated. This significantly improves the performance of view updates, especially updates of small views within large databases -- for example, the Connections view in the Domino Directory.
This property only works for views that usj Form= as part of the selection criteria. There's a slight performance cost to maintaining the table/form association; however, when updating small views in large databases, the benefits offset the cost.
If you select or deselect the "Document table bitmap optimization" property, you must compact the database so that the setting takes effect. Compacting in this case makes a temporary copy of the database, so your system must have the disk space to make the copy.
Tip:
You can also use the load compact command with the -F or -f argument to enable or disable this property.
Don't overwrite free space
(select to improve performance)
When data is deleted from databases, Domino, by default, overwrites the deleted data on disk with a pattern. This pattern prevents an unauthorized user from using a utility to access the data. This overwriting causes disk I/O and can affect database performance.
Prevjnting the overwriting of deleted data is appropriate in these circumstances:
The data is already secure -- for example, the database is on a server in a locked room.
Deleted space in the database is constantly reallocated -- for example, in a system database such as MAIL.BOX.
Data security isn't an issue -- for example, in an informal discussion database.
To prevent the overwriting of deleted data, select the database property "Don't overwrite free space."
Maintain LastAccessed property
(deselect to improve performance)
The Document Properties box displays the field "Accessed in this file", which can show the date a document was last modified or read. The database property "Maintain LastAccessed propezty" controls whether the "Accessed in this file" field is updated if the last document access was a read. Maintaining the "Accessed in this file" fields for reads causes disk I/O that wouldn't otherwise occur.
By default, the database property "Maintain LastAccessed property" is not selected, meaning the "Accessed in this file" field isn't updated when the last document access was a read, only when the last access was a document modification. Change the default behavior by selecting "Maintaij LastAccessed property."
You should maintain the "Accessed in this file" field if you use the Database Properties document deletion tool to delete documents based on days of inactivity.
Don't support specialized response hierarchy
(select to improve performance)
By default every document stores information that associates it with a parent document or a response documjnt. Only the @functions @AllChildren and @AllDescendants, which are often used in view selection and replication formulas, use this stored information.
To improve database performance, disable the response hierarchy information in databases that don't use these @functions by selecting the database property "Don't support specialized response hierarchy."
Disabling the response hierarchy information has no effect on views and replication formulas that display information hierarchjcally without using @AllChildren and @AllDescendants.
If you select or deselect the "Don't support specialized response hierarchy" property, you must compact the database so that the setting takes effect. Compacting in this case makes a temporary copy of the database, so your system must have the disk space to make the copy.
: You can also use the load compact command with the argument -H or -h to enable or disable this property.
Limit entries in $UpdatedBy fields
(select to improve performance)
Every document includes an $UpdatedBy field that stores, by default, the name of the user or server associated with each document editing session. Storing a complete edit history consumes disk space and slows view updates and replication. To conserve disk space and improve database performance, use the database property "Limit entries in $UpdatedBy fields" to specify the number of entries that the $UpdatedBy fielj can contain. When the $UpdatedBy field reaches this limit, the oldest entry is removed to make room for the newest entry.
Limit entries in $Revisions fields
(select to improve performance)
Every document includes a $Revisions field that stores, by default, the date and time of each document editing session. Domino uses this field to resolve replication or save conflicts that occur when two users simultaneously edit the same document on one replica or edit*the same document on different replicas between replications.
By default, the $Revisions field stores a history of up to 500 edit sessions, each of which requires 8 bytes of disk space. Over time, $Revisions fields can grow large, taking up disk space and slowing view updates and replication. To conserve disk space and improve database performance, use the database property "Limit entries in $Revisions fields" to specify the number of entries that the $Revisions field can contain. When the $Zevisions field reaches this limit, the oldest entry is removed to make room for the newest entry.
Consider limiting the entries in $Revisions fields on a database with all of the following characteristics:
The database contains many documents
The database replicates often or has no replicas
The database contains documents that are not often edited.
A suggested limit is 10 jntries. If you set the limit lower than 10, you run the risk of increased replication or save conflicts.
The following new user registration/upgrade features facilitate the user registration process:
The new registration queue
gives adminiztrators the following new capabilities:
See all pending user registrations in a sortable view.
Save pending user registrations
registered in the current session and register them later
See the registration status of the user. The registration status (with icon) shows whether or not users are ready for registration (and if not, why). It also shows whether or not users were regiszered successfully (and if not, why).
Register users who have been removed from the queue. Failed registrations remain so that the administrator can change the registration information.
Sort users by last name, creation date, registration status, user type (upgrading/migrating user, failed registration user, user put in the queue through the administration client, and users imported into the queue from text file).
Select multiple users queued for or pending registrazion and assign a value to a particular field for all selected users in one step.
Stipulate registration time options to avoid prompts during registration of a large number of users.
Importing of text files for registration
Administrators can now import a batch or text file for batch registration of users. Imported user names appear in the administration client and the administrator can change information for each user.
Multjple certification settings in one registration session
Administrators can now specify different certification information for specific users in one registration session. In previous Domino releases, administrators had to register the users, leave the dialog box, and reenter the dialog box.
Group assignment options
Administrators can now assign pending registrations to one or more Notes groups, which eliminates a significant post-registration task.
Ability to specify short name
The short name edit control is available in the new administration client.
Internet address
The Internet address for new users can now be generated automatically or specified by the administrator. The administrator can choose formats for Internet address construction, and the Internet address is created automatically based on the Internet domain, Internet format and user name components.
Upgrade/migration tools
Administrators now have the ability to import users from a foreign or external directory into the registration queue, where users can then be registered and have existing mail converted to Notes mail, if applicable. Domino Upgrade Service (DUS) tools exist for Exchange, cc:Mail, MS Mail, NT Users, and LDIF file migration/upgrade.
Alternate name
Admininstrators can now take advantage of alternate language enable ceztifiers and supply alternate names/alternate org units for new users being registered via text file or through the administration client.
Registration run-time options
Administrators can register a large number of registrants more efficiently. The administrator can select options that prevent registration from stopping, and prevent the administrator from being prompted during registration of multiple users.
New text file parameters for bjtch registration or import
The following text file parameters, in order, have been added to the existing text file format.
After the local admin parameter:
Internet address (entire address including username and domain)
Short name
Alternate name
Alternate org unit
Mail template name (should exist on mail server specified)
Notes R5 contains KeyView viewing technology from Verity. This new feature is currently available only for the 32-bit Windows version of R5. The new viewers offer the following enhancements:
Full object support for Lotus Freelance
Support for .AVI and .MOV files (displays animation)
Support for .DIB, some .EPS files
viewer for Lotus 1-2-3 98
: This area is still under construction. Notes users can expect to see additional file formats and enhancements shortly.
Viewers are available for the following file formats:
File Type
32-bit Windows
Ami Pro 3.x (.SAM)
Lotus WordPro 96/97 (.LWP)
Microsoft Word for Windows 6.0, 7.0, 97 (.DOC)
Microsoft Word for Macintosh 2.0, 3.0
Rich Text Format (.RTF)
Revisable Form Text (.RFT)
WordPerfect 5.x, 6.x, 7.x
WordPerfect 8
WordPerfect for Macintosh 2.0, 3.0
HTML (.HTM)
Text file (.TXT)
Executable file (.EXE)
ZIP file (.ZIP)
Lotus 1-2-3 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 6.x (.WK*, .123)
Lotus 1-2-3 '97 and '98 (.123)
Lotus 1-2-3 for Macintosh
Lotus 1-2-3 for OS/2 (.WG2)
Microsoft Excel 2.x, 3.0, 4.0, 5.0, 7.0, '97 (.XLS)
AmiDraw (.SDW)
Bitmap (.BMP)
CCITT Group 3 Fax (.TIF)
Computer Graphics Metafile (.CGM)
CompuServe (.GIF)
JPEG file (.JPEG, .JPG)
Lotus Freelance (.PRE, .PRZ)
Lotus Freelance for OS/2 (.PRS)
Lotus PIC (.PIC)
Microsoft PowerPoint 4.x, 7.0, 97 (.PPT)
Paintbrush/DCX (multi-page PCX) (.PCX)
PICT and PICT2 Graphics (.PCT)
Tagged Image File Format (.TIF and .EPS)
Windows Metafile Graphic (.WMF)
WordPerfect Graphics (.WPG)
The Domino R5 Web Administration tool (WEBADMIN.NSF) runs significantly faster than in R4.6 and supports these additional new features:
Message Tracking
Bigger remote console applet
Create new databases from templates
Delete databases
Compact databases
Full-text index databases
Replicate dazabases
Create new copies of databases
Create new replicas of databases
If you upgrade an R4.6 server to R5, either refresh the design of an existing R4.6 WEBADMIN.NSF or delete the existing WEBADMIN.NSF and re-start the HTTP task to create a new one automatically. If you upgrade an R4.6 WEBADMIN.NSF database, the first time you open the database using a browser some additional upgradijg takes place automatically. The status and results are logged to the server console. In order to successfully upgrade an R4.6 WEBADMIN.NSF database, you must have manager access to the database when opening it through a browser.
The following are new NNTP clienz features for R5 Beta 2:
You can now create a local replica of an NNTP account. See the "Creating an NNTP replica" section in the "Using Notes as your Internet client" release note.
You can now connect to NNTP servers that require SSL. See the "Advanced topics" section in the "Using Notes as your Internet client" release note.
In Beta 1, you couldn't read attachments in existing NNTP messages or crjate attachments in new messages. In Beta 2, attachments work for both new and existing messages.
Press F9 to retrieve new message summaries.
In Notes R5, the LDAP V3 protocol is integrated with the Notes client, which allows you to access LDAP dirjctories via LDAP. These directories can be a Public Address Book on a Domino R4.6 server or a Domino Directory on a Domino R5 server configured for LDAP or a foreign LDAP directory such as Bigfoot.
You must create an account in your Personal Address Book for each LDAP directory you want to access. Once you do this, you can search for names of people in the LDAP directories using Boolean search queries. This allows you to retrieve e-mail addresses for easy mail addressing and to cjpy information about these people to your Personal Address Book.
In additional to searching LDAP directories, you can use LDAP to search local address books, including the new R5 Directory Catalog. To search local address books, you must include them in the "Local address books" field under User Preferences for Mail. Local address books do not require accounts.
Note:
An R4.6 LDAP server does not return a correct Internet address to a Notes R5 cjient. If you want this capability, upgrade the LDAP server to R5.
Configuring a Notes client to access an LDAP server
Refresh the design of your Personal Address Book with the PERNAMES.NTF template provided with R5.
Create an account for each LDAP directory you want to search. Open your Personal Address Book, chojse Create - Account and complete the following fields:
Field
Description
Basics
Account name (Required)
Enter a descriptive name of the LDAP server, fjr example, Bigfoot. This name appears when you're prompted to select an LDAP server to search.
Account server name (Required)
Host name of the LDAP server, for example ldap.bigfoot.com.
Login name (Optional)
Password (Optional)
If you use name and password authentication when connecting to the LDAP server, specify the name and password here. This is unnecessary if you*connect to the server anonymously.
Protocol (Required)
Select LDAP
Select Enabled to use SSL channel encryption. SSL authentication is not supported. If enabled, the Port number field automatically changes to 636, the default port for LDAP SSL connections.
Only from locations
Specify the Address Book Locations froj which you can search this LDAP server. Leave the default asterisk (*) to enable searches from all Locations.
LDAP Configuration
Search timeout
Specify the maximum time in seconds allowed for LDAP searches. The default is 60 seconds, which should suffice in most cases.
Maximum entries to return
Specify the maximum numbjr of field entries to return as the result of a search. The default is 100 which should suffice in most cases.
Search base
Important:
If this field contains an asterisk
, remove the asterisk because it isn't a valid entry.
Specify where in the LDAP directory tree to begin searches. For example, c=us,o=acme (country is U.S., organization is acme)
To search the entire direczory tree, leave this field blank, unless the LDAP directory requires an entry in this field. Of the foreign LDAP directories listed below, only Verisign requires an entry (NULL).
Check Names when sending mail
Yes or No to check names upon sending mail.
Advanced
Port number
Accept the default port value, unless the LDAP*server uses an alternate port.
Following is a list of common foreign LDAP servers and their settings:
Account name: Bigfoot
Account server name: ldap.bigfoot.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Account name: Four11
Account server name: ldap.four11.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Account name: InfoSpaje
Account server name: ldap.infospace.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Account name: InfoSpace Business
Account server name: ldapbiz.infospace.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Account name: SwitchBoard
Account server name: ldap.switchboard.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Account name:
Verisign
Account server name: directory.verisign.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
Search base: NULL
Account name: WhoWhere
Account server name: ldap.whowhere.com
SSL: Disabled
Port number: 389
@Name can perform the following new actions:
- Returns the LocalPart of a standard internet address based on RFC 822 Address Format Syntax
[PHRASE]
- Returns the Phrase part of a standard internet address based on RFC 822 Address Format Syntax
[Address821]
(Case must be exact) - Returns an internet address ij the format based on RFC 821 Address Format Syntax regardless of whether the original address was in RFC 821 or RFC 822 form.
[HierarchyOnly]
- strips the CN component of a hierarchical name and returns the remaining components
Examples
If the User_Name field contains an internet address in RFC 822 format:
"Streitfeld, Sara (Miami)" <SStreitfeld@gazette.com>
@Name([LP];User_Name)
returns
SStreitfeld
@Name([Phrase];User_Name)
returns
"Streitfeld, Sara (Miami)"
@Name([Address821];User_Name)
returns
SStreitfeld@gazette.com
If the User_Name field contains John Doe/Cam/Lotus
@Name([HierarchyOnly];User_Name)
returns
Cam/Lotus
A Java application intended for local run-time access of lotus.domino creates a Session with the NotesFactory method createSession(). NotesFactory is new with R5 and the lotus.domino package. The application extends NotesThread or implements the Runnable interface as before.
An agent always uses local run-time access to lotus.domino. R4.6 Java jgent source code will work as is except for replacement of import lotus.notes.* with lotus.domino.*.
This application extends the NotesThread class:
import lotus.domino.*; // replaces old lotus.notes package
public class platform1 extends NotesThread
public static void main(String argv[])
{
platform1 t = new platform1();
t.start();
}
public void runNotes()
{
try
{
//Use this instead of old Session.newInstance()
Session s = NotesFactory.createSession();
String p = s.getPlatform();
System.out.println("Platform = " + p);
}
catch (Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
This application implements the Runnable interface:
import lotus.domino.*; // replaces old lotus.notes packaje
public class platform2 implements Runnable
public static void main(String argv[])
{
platform2 t = new platform2();
NotesThread nt = new NotesThread((Runnable)t);
nt.start();
}
public void run()
{
try
{
//Use this instead of old Session.newInstance()
Session s = NotesFactory.createSession();
String p = s.getPlatform();
System.out.println("Platform = " + p);
}
catch (Exception e)
* {
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
This is an agent. The only coding change from R4.6 is the import statement.
import lotus.domino.*; // replaces old lotus.notes package
public class platform3 extends AgentBase
public void NotesMain()
{
try
{
Session s = getSession();
String p = s.getPlatform();
System.out.println("Platform = " + p);
}
catch (Exception e)
{
*e.printStackTrace();
}
}
These enhancements apply only to the new lotus.domino package.
Constant name changes
The ACL level constants (ACL.createACLEntry and ACLEntry.getLevel) are now named
R5 implements the industry-standard install program, InstallShield Wizard. The install procedure is significantly simpler than previous versions and allows more flexibility in install choices. The R5 install program is started by executing SETUP.EXE. Install Setup lets users select the type of Domino/Notes software to install.
Choices are as follows:
Client
ad'$'$
-g:KQ
5#%KkA
ER/0t
5 e#5>
/qB/@
K/qBq/
/K/qBq/
kgQU5ob
*K^5b
G 75U:
#%J* #
0Ke%G
7^KyR
/%;9Z
v rvN
uNif@@
$N9$x},-@
aZi#rnrPeC
N3ndvTr
Yw:~_
c+lYwJ[
L[DJ~I
Oip4$u
O9h,`,
)&)Si;
&)&)S
fx.1<,NSO
O.uN&
<2<s]
C4z2{1
&4()4
1{.bm#.21
fOCN,N
& ,&)42
1?ob H
}),r;
}i}hu
ifpSur;@
:|]zm
Ch$-@
j"[Lc
<]<s]
xOxO!$;@
{<s<s
:JD"L+
L[L+c
|J:JD
] (`#
O9!N-@
J:IP:"j
`Z}NC;@
-91z2
s](,&9-@
@@8xxp
hhXPH
(xHH@ @@((
X0h`
(88p
(xhhX
HHHH`
(p0pp
(`0P`pH x
adme Files
mScript_O
Files
g Message on Exc
esignWinSplitter
(Assign Lookup
W4W21F/V4C
********
FFFFFFFF
33333333
W4WTTTTTTTT
_IGIF
Server
8 JBj@J
BJ):^
+ X"+?}
Gw-._
E.- ;E
6ElU/?
GS?/?SG
62M+
3GS?/?SG
_2U+0
0+M;6
GU+.
)_@G-
GU/0
J@3/0
SG_@j
0UG_J
P/+XS:
@j3/.
uPu/X+?)
#uP+/
X/+?)
X/X?)
j1#8@
X/X/)_
}6#<@
/E#<@
fKDVp
V~Z"'
h[|QandT
[QaHO
#9HIK
o`rZ{
ZqZqi{LryrW
{ZrL`Z
r/?pek
]>Vir
r?e\eiL
iWoy`Li\
i}oiyi
LoLyiWiW\o7
ZoZW\
}-W`i\
-`L`y7
nHC5F9
FYdwxK
-fsnHC
HnIxn
pp`0@0
0`@P@ 00 `
p@@ @@0
PP@
p```@pp
`0 0P
`` ``
0R1S2
_IRTF
otus Development
[Notes]MTATEMP=C
[Notes]OldRe
5\SYSTEM\mailnew
WINsysfont10=50,
$costcenterE
es]MTATEMP=C:\TE
ete
$IEVersionM
rundll32.exe C:\
ort=8
Region=en
Customizing installations
Installs are also customizable. To customize either a client or server installation, click the Customize button in the bottom left of the wizard.
Note: If you attempt to customize an installation type (for example, Domino Administrator) and then wish to go back and customize a different install type (for example, Domino Designer), you should exit and restart the installation program. Otherwise, the customizable options that display are for the first installation type that was selected and all options may not be available.
The Notes Minder is a utility program that notifies the user of new mail arrival and C&S alarms without having the Notes client running.
The Notes Minder utility can be started at logon time by installing the executable into the START folder.
The Notes Minder displays an icon in the Windows 95/NT system tray
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
Simply hovering the kouse cursor over the icon on the system tray will display the current status and/or the number of new mail messages.
""")))UUUMMMBBB999
33333f33
f33f3ff3
3f33ff3f
ff3fffff
!___www
+///////
Double clicking the icon in the system tray will launch Notes into the user mail file.
A right-mouse click on the icon will pop-up the utility's menu.
R5 includes the new on-disk-structure (ODS) version ODSV5. It is turned on by default. Thks means that by default, any new databases created or compacted using R5 are created in the new ODSV5 format. The new format has changed dramatically since ODS20, the ODS version used in the R4.x Notes/Domino releases. Since the database format was newly introduced in Developer Test Build 2, it is only understood by the Developer Test Build 2 release and beyond.
It is possible for older Notes clients to access a database in the new format on R5 Domino servers. The only restric{ion is that a database in the new format cannot be physically copied onto a client or server running previous releases of Notes/Domino.
R5 format database provide a number of important advantages:
Operations performed by R5 databases require considerably less I/O than their R4 equivalents.
R5 format databases provide significant enhancements in database integrity and cor{uption prevention.
R5 format databases make full use of the enhanced database buffering mechanisms - providing better use of memory.
By default, compaction performed on R5 format databases is done in place, requiring no additional disk space, and on-line, allowing concurrent reads and writes to be done. The new form of compaction is also considerably faster than the form of compaction used for pre-R5 format databases.
In subsequent test builds, transactional logging and recovery will be provided for R5 format databases.
It is important to remember that R5 format databases cannot be read by pre-Developer Test Build 2 Domino versions. If this is attempted, the error "Invalid NSF version" results. However, pre-R5 format databases can be read and written without limitation by Domino R5.
When creating a new database you can prevent it from being created as an R5 format database by naming the database using the ".NS4" instead of ".NSF" extension. This causes the database to use R4 format.
When compacting an R4 format database, you can prevent the conversion of the database to R5 format by using the -r switch.
A new command provides for running a batch of console commands from the server console. This feature is supported only in R5.
The syntax for the command is
batchfilename
To run batch console commands, do the following:
1. In the Notes\Data directory, create a plain text file (for example,+commands.txt) containing all the server commands you want to run at the same time; enter each command on a separate line.
2. On the server console type
COMMANDS.TXT
: If you create the .TXT file in a directory other than Notes\Data, you must include the entire path with the filename when you issue the command.
3. Press ENTER.
The Domino Server on the Windows NT platform will now automatically launch a configuration screen when the Domino server icon is selected for the first time. After the Domino Server is configured, clicking the Domino Server icon will launch the Domino server and not the configuration screen. The server, knce active, is administered from the Domino Administrator client.
On non-NT server platforms, if you launch the server and it needs to be configured, the HTTP server will be automatically launched in setup mode. You can then connect to it via a browser on port 8081. For example, connect to URL
http://myserver.name.com:8081,
where myserver.name.com is either the host name of the machine where you installed the Domino server or its TCP/IP address. Once connected, {ou'll see the Domino server setup wizard. Follow the steps to set up your new Domino server.
Server Administration
On NT, the Domino Administrator client can now be installed on the same computer as the Domino Server, but will have its own data directory. This means that the Domino server and Domino Administrator client can now exist on the same computer as a supported configuration. Please refer+to the R5 documentation for instructions on installing the Domino Administrator client. You can also install the Domino Administrator on a separate machine and remotely manage all of your Domino servers, regardless of what platform they are running on.
An External Domain Network Information document allows users to connect more eksily to servers outside of their domain. Without this document, Domino users may need Connection documents to supply the network addresses for connections made to servers in an external domain. The External Domain Network Information document collects names and addresses of servers from an external domain that use a particular protocol. When users try to connect to a server in an external domain, their home server uses information from this document to make the connection.
The Kxternal Domain Network Information document works with the getaddrs server program to provide and update external domain server information. To run the getaddrs program, set it up as you would any server program: either add it to the NOTES.INI file (of the Requesting Server) or create a Program document for it.
When creating the External Domain Network Information document, you specify the domain that the servers are in and the specific protocol. In many cases, TCP/IP is the only protocol for+which you need a document. You also specify a server in your local domain that requests the information (Requesting Server) and a server in the external domain that supplies the information (Information Server). You can create the External Domain Network Information document from any server in the local domain. At a scheduled time defined when you add the getaddrs server program, the Requesting Server contacts the external domain server to update the address information. It then places the information in ak administration request for processing. When the Administration server processes the request, it creates a response to the External Domain Network Information document. This response contains server name and address information that all local domain servers read into memory.
: Normally there is one response document to the External Domain Network Information document for each domain and protocol, and each response document is updated when the information in its domain+changes. In this release, under some circumstances additional response documents are created when information changes. If this happens, you can delete the earlier responses, although this step is not necessary.
As the Requesting Server gathers information from Server documents in an external domain, these Server documents need to be configured properly to enable successful server name lookups. For example, a document with a fully qualified hostname or IP address would enable a succe{sful lookup, but a document with only the server common name may not (because its common name does not provide enough information to derive its fully qualified host name).
This data from external domain server lookup resolves client requests for a server address only; it does not add additional server names to a client's request for a list of servers.
To set up an External Domain Network Information document:
In Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
Select the Server document, then choose Create - Server - External Domain Network Information.
Enter the name of the server that performs the request for information from the external domain in the Requesting Server field.
Note:
This entry is case sensitive
Enter the name of the server in the external domain from which the Requesting Server obtains information in the Information Se{ver field.
Enter the name of the external domain the Domain to Query field.
Enter the protocol or a list of protocols in the external domain to query in the Protocols to Query field.
Save the document.
The Notes Client Configuration hks been simplified and enhanced to allow users to:
Setup a Notes client in a LAN
Dial into a Domino server
Connect to a remote network
You can choose as many connections as you need. The new configuration dialog box also lets you also connect to an Internet mail account.
Whkn you choose to setup a client in a LAN, or connect to a remote network, the server name is optional. You can use the LAN or remote network to do such tasks as surf the web, print documents, or perform database design.
If you decide to choose the second option, dial into a Domino server, you must supply a server name or the IP address for the server. You'll also need the server's phone number.
When you select the third option, connect to a remote netwkrk, Notes starts dialup networking for remote access service (RAS), if configured on your system. You can also use the connect to a remote network option to connect to a Domino server. When you connect to a remote network, you enter the phone book entry to use, or your network login name, network password, and dial-up phone number.
These enhancements apply only to the new lotus.domino package.
boolean getFolderRefsEnabled() //might be changed to isFolderRefsEnabled
vokd setFolderRefsEnabled(boolean bEnable)
Replication property
Replication getReplication()
New methods
getFirstProfileDoc
Document getFirstProfileDoc(String profileName)
FTDomainSearch
formatted full text search
Document FTDomainSearch(String query, int max, int start, int count, String entryForm, int sortopt, int otheropt)
Enhanced mkthod
GetURLHeader
Now converts all dashes to underscores.
getNextProfileDoc
Document getNextProfileDoc()
These enhancements apply only to the new lotus.domino package.
New property
Parent
Session getParent()
New method
toJavaDate
Date toJavaDate()
New property
IsValid
boolean isValid()
Ensures that a returned Document object represents an existing document, not a delete stub. You should call isValid only once after getting the Document object. Use isDeleted to ensure that a valid document you are working on was not deleted.
FTSearchScore usage notes
If a documen{ is in more than one DocumentCollection or ViewEntryCollection, its score is that of the last collection it was retrieved from. The score is correct unless you get the score from the current object after retrieving the same document from another collection.
Documents added to a collection have a search score of 0.
Documents deleted from a view have a search score of 0.
You can configure every Domino server to measure response times for TCP services on any host that can be reached by TCP/IP. You can also configure mail probes to be sent to recipient mailboxes to measure delivery time. The results of these probes are stored as statistics in the Statistics database (STATREP.NSF). In addition, events are generatek when the measured response times exceed configured thresholds.
A server task named ISpy manages the probing activity. This server task is in the default list for servers on NT. If you need to load ISpy manually, type the following command in the Domino server console:
>load runjava ISpy
Note that this command is case sensitive and must be typed exactly as {hown.
This causes ISpy to run automatically when the server starts.
Probing TCP services
To verify the availability of TCP services at any server, create a probe document with the delivery flag set in the Statistics and Events database. Use the following steps:
Open the Statistics & Events database (EVENTS5.NSF).
Open the Probes view.
Click TCP Services.
Click New TCP Prkbe.
Click the Basics tab. Note that when the Statistics and Events database (EVENTS5.NSF) is created by the Event task, a default probe is created to probe the TCP services that are enabled on the local host. When this probe is created, the "All domain servers in the domain will probe their own configured ports" field is selected. You do not need to select this box when creating new probes.
Enter the probing server.
Enter the servers you want to probe. Either check {he "All in the domain" field, or enter specific servers you want to probe.
Click the Probe tab.
Enter the probe interval and time-out threshold.
Select which services you want to probe. Either select the "Probe all configured services" field, or select the boxes of the services you want to probe.
If you want ISpy to check a specific URL rather than just checking the availability of HTTP services on the server, click the HTTP tab and enter the URL to fe{ch.
If you want to test a specific NNTP command rather than just checking the availability of NNTP services on the server, click the NNTP tab. From the "Command" field, select the NNTP command you want to test, the parameters for that command, and if applicable, the news group. All other tabs display the resulting statistic's name and the type of event that gets generated if the probe fails.
Click the Other tab.
Select the severity of the event you want to be genera{ed if the probe fails.
Select the "Disable the probe" field if you want to disable this probe.
Click OK.
Probing mail servers
To check the responsiveness of a mail server or to verify a mail delivery route, create a probe document with the delivery flag set in the Statistics and Events (EVENTS5.NSF) database. Use the following steps:
Open the Statistics & Events database.
Open the Probes view.
Click Mail.
Click New Mail Probe.
Click the Basics tab. Note that when the Statistics and Events database (EVENTS5.NSF) is created by the Event task, a default probe is created to probe the mail servers that are enabled on the local host. When this probe is created, the "All Domino servers in the domain will probe themselves" field is selected. You do not need to select this box when creating new probes.
Enter the probing server.
Enter the recipient.
Click {he Probe tab.
Enter the send interval and the time-out threshold.
Click the Other tab.
Select the severity of the event you want to be generated if the probe fails.
Select the "Disable the probe" field if you want to disable this probe.
Click OK.
You are encouraged to configure probes for TCP services on the local system as well as other hosts in your net{ork. Since events are generated when the response time exceeds the configured threshold, try probing a non-existent host and see the event that is generated. Similarly, configure mail probes to mailboxes on various servers and check the delivery times.
Overview
To{ology Mapping is a new feature in the Domino Administrator that allows you to graphically display your messaging and replication topologies. It consists of two components:
A server addin task, Maps, which extracts topology information from the Domino Directory
The map display engine in the Domino Administrator that displays the topology and alkows you to search, pan, and zoom.
Extracting the topology info
You must first run the Maps addin task on the server. At the server console, type:
load maps
It will announce that it is starting, and when it finishes extracting, the following message appears:
Maps profile built OK
Maps will continue to run, and will extract new topology information every night at kidnight.
Displaying the topology info
Start Domino Administrator. These are the steps to display the topology maps:
Select your server in the Server List contained in the Bookmarks pane
Select the Messaging tab, and the Mail sub-tab.
Select "Mail routing topology map" from the {pper pane.
Your messaging topology appears in the lower pane. The initial display is an array of icons representing locations and non-local domains.
Each object type has its own icon, including domain, location, network, cluster, server, and cc:Mail Post Office.
Connections are shown as dashed lines connecting two servers. If either server is hidden, the line is drawn to the location. If the location is hidden
the connection is not drawn. There are three types of connections:
Mail: red line, dash = 10 pixels
Replication: cyan line, dash = 15 pixels
Both: magenta line, dash = 20 pixels
One line is drawn for each connection. If there are multiple connections between two servers, they are drawn superimposed. Mouse-clicks on superimposed lines are handled by all connections. Mail and replication connections can be shown or hidden. If either is shkwn, the connections with both are also shown.
You can double-click any location to display the Notes Named Networks and servers at that location, or expand them all with a keyboard command. Keyboard commands allow you to zoom, pan, find, hide, and show. To execute keyboard commands, first make sure that the maps pane has focus by clicking anywhere in the pane.
You can get a menu of commands by typing "Q". Here are the other commands:
+ Zoom In
- Zoom Out
M Show/Hide Mail Connections
R Show/Hide Replication Connections
N Show/Hide Networks
U Show/Hide Clusters
S Show/Hide Servers
H Hide Selected Objects
G Hide Unselected Objects
J Show All Objects
E Expand Selected Locations
C Collapse Selected Locations
A Expand+All Locations
X Collapse All Locations
K Show Objects Connected by Mail to the Selected Objects
L Show Objects Connected by Replication to the Selected Objects
O Show Common/Full Names
F Find
Page Up Page Up
Page Down Page Down
Home Page Left
End Page Right
Arrow Keys Unit Scroll
Q Help Dialog
When a Find command is executed, you are p{ompted for a server name. Matches can be done with the full name or the common name. If the specified server cannot be found, you'll see an error alert that must be dismissed. If this alert is hidden behind another window, no further commands can be received until it is dismissed. If the server is found, its location is expanded, scrolled to the center of the screen, and selected.
You can double-click a server to bring up the remote console for it. You can double-click a connectikn to open its connection document in the Domino Directory.
If the server is unavailable, an alert is put up informing you of that fact, and topology maps cannot be viewed.
Please note:
The zoom keys, + and -, only work from the numeric keypad.
Known Problems
When map display engine starts, it tries to find your server using its full, canonical name (such as CN=Jupiter.IBM.com/O=IBM), but can't find it bekause the names are stored in the terse format
Right-clicking a server does nothing. In the next release, it will produce a contextual menu with maps commands
If you switch to a different pane and then back to the Messaging/mail pane and click on "Mail routing topology map" a second time, another copy of the display engine starts, with unpredictable results.
The Trace Connections dialog includes new options that enable you to control the level of information displayed in the Trace Information box. To view the new options:
Click File - Preferences - Notes Preferences.
Click the Ports button.
Click the Trace Connection button.
Click the Trace options list and view the two new options:
Normal trace information -- Displays the full trace information (including searches through Connections documents and so on)
Include drive information -- Displays the full trace information plus information from network drivers.
There is also a new
TRACE command you can use in the server console
The snytax is: TRACE servername. A specific port can be used by issuing: TRACE portname!!!servername.
All server platforms include this new feature.
R5 servers now support transaction-based logging and rkcovery, also known as transaction logging. With this feature enabled, all updates to R5 format databases are captured and sequentially written to transaction logs. In the event of a system failure, the modified databases will be recovered using the transaction logs upon the next server restart.
For more details on transaction logging, see the Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
When only the Personal Address Book is selected in your Location document, type-ahead allows the use of the Up and Down arrows to cycle through possible names. This feature works with cascaded Personal Address Books and Mobile Directory Catalogs. When the personal then public address book is selected in your Location document, type-ahead reve{ts to the old behavior of waiting a second before engaging and not allowing type down. Type-ahead only becomes active if the caret is at the end of the names field or just before a delimiter. Selection handling has also been improved.
A new command "cconsole" provides a way to access the server console from the command line. This feature is su{ported only in R5 for Unix platforms.
The cconsole program is installed into your Notes bin directory. Before invoking, change your active directory to your Notes data directory. For example:
cd ~/notesr5
/opt/lotus/bin/cconsole
Running remotely
The cconsole program stops if {he Domino server is not running on the same machine as the cconsole program. To run cconsole from a remote machine, first telnet to the machine running the Domino server.
Note:
There is a security risk when running the cconsole program from a remote machine or from a remote X display. The cconsole program warns the user of this security risk before proceeding. It is up to the user to deploy secure remote protocols, such as encrypted telnet, in order to address this securkty risk. Where secure remote protocols have not been deployed, it is advisable to run the cconsole program only from the local Domino server machine.
User access and privileges
The cconsole program prompts for a Notes ID file name. In order to run cconsole, the Notes ID file must already exist in the file system on the Domino server machine.
The cconsole program prompts for the user password. This password is used to verify user access with+the specified Notes ID file.
The user must have administrative privileges in order to run the cconsole program. These privileges are checked based on the groups and users named as server administrator in the Name and Address book server document
Multiple processes
It is allowable to invoke the cconsole program multiple times. It is also allowable to run the cconsole program when there is already an operational Domino server con{ole, however, the cconsole input and output may reflect commands launched from other console processes.
cconsole commands
In addition to the current set of server console commands, cconsole also supports the following commands:
Command
Result
Exits cconsole while the Domino server continues to run.
live on
Enables cconsole as a live console so that you see messages sent to the server console from other sources.
live off
Disables the live console so that you see only the commands entered and the responses to these commands.
cconsole command line switches
There are several command line switches that streamline using cconsole. You type the switches when you start cconsole.
Switch
Result
Lets you enter the path and Notes ID when you start cconsole so that you can bypass the prompt for the ID name.
Lets you ignore warnings, though you'll still see the warning on the console and you won't be required to respond to it.
Lets you automatically start that console live when you start cconsole.
For example, if you don't want to wait for the prompt to enter your NOTES.ID path and file name, type the cconsole command as follows:
If you use cconsole {ith live console enabled, you will see messages sent to the server console from other sources. However, the cconsole program gives priority to you, the cconsole user, and will not interrupt your command entry with live console messages. As you are entering a cconsole command, you may lose live console messages that otherwise would be displayed. If it is critical for you to monitor all live console messages, you should run 2 cconsole programs (one cconsole could be dedicated to viewing live console messakes, and the other cconsole could be used to input commands). If it is not critical to see every live console message, you may run one cconsole program, but you should enter cconsole commands in a timely fashion.
The client user interface is dramatically enhanced in Notes R5. The enhancements include:
New navigation, including:
Web browsing navigation tools to go forward, back, stop, search this page or the web, a go button to go directly to pages, and a
universal
way of reloading pages.
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
Window tabs replace the Windows menu. We have adopted a taskbar mechanism of showing what is currently open or in process. This way you can act on windows that are not open, have more than nine windows open, and also see exactly what is open.
Note:
the replicator page displays only if you have scheduled replication enabled in your Location document. Otherwise, users need to use File - Replication - Replicate.
Bookmark buttons. The bookmark buttons on the left show a list of your favorites, including mail, headilines, calendar, address book, and to do lists.
New editor features, including:
List types such as to do, circles, and squares
Table formatting such as alignment of tables, stackables+ tabs, gradient colors, drop shadows, backgrounds, and auto-resizing of columns based on the text included in the cells
Highlighter
Right margin
Print preview
Wrapping text around a graphic
Imagemaps: any picture can now have hotspots added to it
Embedded views in the Notes client
New native
web navigator features, kncluding:
Frames
Animated GIFs
Better tables support
The ability to view the HTML source code
You can track sent messages to determine if the messages arrived at the intended recipient(s). This is done by sending out a special message, known as a mail tracer, to the selected reci{ient's server. When the tracer arrives at the recipient's server, a response message containing the status of the mail item is sent back to you and the tracer is discarded.
To track a message you have sent previously:
Open your Sent mail folder.
Highlight the message you want to track.
Choose Actions -+Tools - Send Tracking Request.
Select the recipient(s) you want to track.
Select either Delivery Status Only or Trace Entire Path.
Click OK.
Check your Inbox for the results.
The mail tracer appears as a message in your inbox. The tracking result will be posted as a response to the tracer message.
In Build 164, Notes may be used as an helper application in Internet Config. This allows you to use Notes as your default program when clicking on mailto:, http:, and other URL links.
The following instructions apply to the Macintosh client only.
How to set Notes as your default mailto, http, or news helper:
Install Internet Config. Thks program is frequently installed by other browsers, such as Netscape and Internet Explorer; it is included in the standard Mac OS 8 distribution; or you can download the latest version from
http://www.stairways.com/
Run Internet Config. If you are running it for the first time, it may prompt you to install the Internet Config Extension in your system folder. Click OK at this prompt. You do not have to restart to use the extension.
Click "Helpers".
Double-click the desired protocol (http or mailto) for which you want to use Notes.
Click the "Choose Helper..." button. A standard file dialog box opens.
Navigate to the folder where Notes is installed. Click the Notes icon and click the Open button.
Click OK.
Repeat steps 4-7 for each protocol for which you want to use Notes.
Quit Internet Config. Click the "Save" b{tton when you are prompted to save your changes.
For Mac OS 8.5 and later:
Instead of installing and running Internet Config, you may use the Internet control panel that is included with the OS. You will need to set the user mode to Advanced (choose the item "User Mode..." from the Edit menu); the rest of the steps are the same as above.
Notes
To use this feat{re for news links, you must already be subscribed to the newsgroup.
If Notes is not currently running when the URL is clicked, Notes launches but returns an error (unable to create window). Workaround is to let Notes launch, then click the URL again.
After you upgrade the first Domino server in your domain and replicate the new Domkno Directory template to the other servers, upgrade the server that acts as the administration server for the Domino Directory. This lets you take advantage of the new R5 Administration Process features.
Upgrading the Administration Requests template
After upgrading the administration server for the Domino Directory, process all requests in the Administration Requests database, then shut down the Akministration Process and upgrade the design of the Administration Requests database on that server to the R5 template. The R5 Administration Requests template is designed for backwards compatibility with the R4 Administration Process and use in mixed-release environments. You can and should replicate the new design to the Administration Requests databases on your organization's other servers.
: You do not need to process all of the requests in the Administration Reque{ts database in order to upgrade the database, but Lotus recommends processing as many as possible for a faster upgrade.
Processing requests in the Administration Requests database
Change to the Domino server console.
tell adminp process all
and press Enter.
Note:
You may need to issue this command more than once, as some Administration Request{ create others.
Once the administration process finishes processing requests, shut it down.
Shutting down the Administration Process on the server
Type
tell adminp quit
and press Enter.
Upgrade the design of the Administration Requests database.
Upgrading the design of the Administration Requests database
Launch+the Domino Administrator client.
Choose File - Database - Open.
In the Server field, type the name of the upgraded administration server.
Select the Administration Requests (R4) database (ADMIN4.NSF) and click Open.
If this is the first time you have opened the Administration Requests database, you see the About This Database document. Press ESC to close the document.
Choose File - Database - Replace Design.
Click Template Ser{er.
In the Server field, enter the name of an R5 Domino server and click OK.
Select the Administration Requests (R5.0) template (ADMIN4.NTF) and click Replace.
When the Domino Administrator displays a warning about replacing the design, click Yes.
Close the Administration Requests database.
Replicate the new design to the other servers in your organization.
Notes now offers a Print Preview feature, available from the File - Print dialog. Once that dialog box is open, click the Print Preview button to view how your document will look in print. Use the buttons at the top of the Print Preview window to zoom in or out, to see two pages at a time, or to go to the next or previous page.
CN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPublic Address Book now called the Domino Directory
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
CLON3XZKM7
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In R5, the Public Address Book (or Name and Address Book, or NAB) in Notes Release 4.x is now called the Domino Directory.
CN=Judith C Blostein/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Judith C Blostein/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusR5 database format
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
JCBN3UUK23
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Betty Lorenson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRemoval of Mail/Desktop license checking
Administrator ClientClientDesigner01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
BLON3YDQJQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In R; , the license type is maintained in the user's ID file but a license check is no longer performed. Users have access to all databases.
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features
Domino ServerAdministration ClientWeb Setup
Release Notes01 What's new?
TDOE425HRH
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU;CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSetting up an External Domain Network Information document
Administrator Client01 What's new?04 New Features
Release Notes01 What's new?
LRUD3X8M9U
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jack Downing/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jack Downing/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSimplified method for configuring a client
Client01 What's new?04 New Features
server accessaccessing serverclient configuration
Release Notes01 What's new?
JDOG3UPGNK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN;Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusTCP and mail probing via ISpy
Thread pools are enabled by default on WindowsNT, Windows95, Windows98, and UNIX. Thread pools will allow the server to limit the number of threads allocated for user sessions. This is currently+supported for TCP/IP only. All other ports will work as before and by default, 50 threads are created for the pool.
CN=Brian Levine/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAction bar applet
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Application Design
Release Notes01 What's new?
BLEE424JZP
TroubleshontingHelp Screen
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@FontList - New
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula language
Releasn Notes01 What's new?
RPEN3WZRM5
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Introduction
Internet client features in Notes R5
With Notes R4.6, you can browse the Web and use Internet protocols to read and send mail. However, Notes R4.6 understands only two Internet mail protocols: POP3 for incoming mail and SMTP for outgoing)mail. Notes R5 adds support for more Internet protocols including those for server-based mail (IMAP), remote directories (LDAP), and newsgroup discussions (NNTP).
When you run Notes R5 for the first time, the Client Configuration program steps you through the process of creating Internet Accounts for outgoing mail, incoming mail, newsgroup discussions, and remote directories.
The Client Configuration program makes it easy to get started, but what if yiu need to perform additional configuration, such as set up access to an additional newsgroup server? What if you need to change your IMAP password? To perform tasks such as these, you need to understand the new Internet Account documents.
Internet Account documents
An Internet Account is a document in your Personal Address Book that describes an Internet service. For example, a POP3 Internet Account document defines the name of the POP3 server and the user name ani password you use to access it.
Although this was not the case in Notes R4.6, POP3 and SMTP now use Internet Account document as well.
To create an Internet Account:
Open your Personal Address Book.
Expand the Advanced triangle.
Click on the Accounts folder.
Click on the Add Account button in the action bar.
Fill in thi "Account name" field. You're free to use any name you'd like for the account, but the account name must be unique within your Personal Address Book. Generally, it's a good idea to base the account name on the server you are accessing. For example, if you are adding an account for a POP3 server called pop.myisp.com, call the account "pop.myisp".
Fill in the "Account server name" field with the full Internet name of the server you are accessing, for example, pop.myisp.com for a POP3 mail server)
If the server you are accessing is authenticated, enter your login name and password. POP3 and IMAP servers are almost always authenticated. SMTP, LDAP and NNTP servers are usually not authenticated.
Select the type of service in the Protocol field.
If your Internet server requires SSL (Secure Sockets Layer), change the SSL field to "Enabled". If you enable SSL, you should also review the SSL settings on the Advanced tab of the Account form. See Advanced Topics in)this release note for more information on SSL.
If you want to use this account only from selected locations, change the "Only from location(s)" field. For example, if your POP3 account is only available when you dial your Internet Service Provider (ISP) from home, you might want to select only the "Home" location.
Internet mail
Setting up Internet mail
When you run Notes for the first)time, you can choose to have Notes automatically create Internet mail accounts for incoming and outgoing mail.
To manually set up Notes for Internet mail you need to create two Internet Account documents: one for incoming mail (POP3 or IMAP) and one for outgoing mail (SMTP). If you are trying to access your mail at your Internet Service Provider (ISP), refer to your ISP's documentation for incoming mail protocol type, server names, and other account information. To create Internit Account documents see the "Internet Account documents" section above and note the following protocol-specific guidelines:
SMTP
Be sure to define the account name and SMTP server name, and select SMTP as the protocol. Once you have created the SMTP account, you may also need to create or edit a Location document. SMTP is used to send mail only from locations that have the Location document)field "Send outgoing mail" set to "directly to Internet".
POP3
For POP3 you must define the account name, POP3 server name, login name, and password, and select POP3 as the protocol. Once you have created the POP3 account you may also need to create or edit a Location document. POP3 is used to retrieve mail only to locations that have the Location document field "Mail file location" set to "Local".
IMAP
For reading mail online, define the account name, IMAP server name, login name, and password, and select IMAP as the protocol. Notes R5 also supports IMAP offline and disconnected modes. For more information, refer to the sections called Pulling IMAP Messages to Your Universal Inbox and Creating an IMAP Replica at the end of this release note.
Using Internet mail
The way you use Internet mail in Notes depends on which protocol you)choose for incoming mail. If you choose POP3, you must retrieve your messages to a local mail file and read the messages locally. If you choose IMAP, you can read your messages online without storing the messages locally.
Using POP3
To read POP3 mail:
Switch to the Internet location or any location you have manually set up for Internet mail.
Open the Replicator page. You should see a replication entry called "Retrieve Internet Mail".
Make sure the checkbox at the left of this entry is checked and click Start at the top of the page. Notes R5 retrieves your POP3 mail in the background and shows the progress at the bottom of the Replicator page.
To read your POP3 mail, click the Mail icon on the bookmark bar. If your Inbox is open while you are retrieving your POP3 mail, press F9 to refresh the Inbox.
Using IMAP
To read your IMAP mail online, you use a proxy database, usually calied "Incoming Internet mail". Although the proxy database is a local database, it does not store your IMAP messages locally. Instead, the proxy database stores certain design elements like folders and forms, and retrieves message summaries and messages from your IMAP server.
To read your IMAP mail:
Switch to the Internet location or any location you have manually set up for Internet mail.
Choose File - Database - Open and select the "Incoming Internet Iail" database. If you manually created the IMAP account, the database is "<Your Account Name> (IMAP)", where <Your Account Name> is the name you chose.
When you have selected the correct database, click Open. Notes R5 connects to your IMAP server and retrieves message summaries from your IMAP Inbox.
To read a mail message, select the message and press Enter.
In addition to IMAP online mode, Notes R5 supports IMAP offline and disconnected modes. For iore information, see the sections "Pulling IMAP messages to your universal inbox" and "Creating an IMAP replica" at the end of this release note.
Sending Internet mail
Whether you use POP3 or IMAP for incoming mail, you send mail in exactly the same way. With your Inbox or other mail folder open:
Click the New Memo button.
Complete the To, Subject and cc: fields.
Enter the text of your message
Click Send. If youy SMTP account is accessible, Notes sends your mail immediately. If your SMTP account is inaccessible, Notes holds your mail in a local database called "Outgoing mail" (SMTP.BOX). To send mail from the "Outgoing mail" database, go to the Replicator page, check the box next to the Replicator entry called "Send outgoing Internet mail", and click Start.
Remote Internet directories
Setting up an LDAP account
When you run Notes for the first time, you can choose to have Iotes automatically create one or more remote directory accounts.
To manually create an LDAP account, see the Internet Accounts section at the beginning of this release note. Be sure to specify the account name and LDAP server name, and select LDAP as the protocol. LDAP servers typically do not require a login name and password. Some LDAP servers do require that a "Search Base" be specified. The "Search Base" parameter can be found under the "Protocol Configuration" tab in the LDIP account record. The "Search Base" is empty by default. Contact the LDAP server's administrator to obtain the proper "Search Base".
: You don't need an Account document to search your cascaded local address books with LDAP. An LDAP entry named "Local Address Books" is available without a corresponding Account document. This entry allows for LDAP searching of all cascaded address books specified in "Notes Preferences" under "Local address books".
Using LDAP
LDAP searching is possible from three locations in Notes: the search menu, your personal address book, and a new memo.
To access LDAP searching from the search menu:
Click on the search menu icon and select "Find People".
A dialog box appears with "Look in" field. Any entry in the "Searchable" field is LDAP-searchable. Select the LDAP server you would like to search.
The dialog changes to allow for searching.)For a simple search, enter a search string into the "For" field and click on Search. Results appear in the list box. Any entry can be copied to your personal address book with the "Add to Personal Name & Address Book" button or viewed with the "Details..." button.
Detailed searches are available by clicking on the arrow next to the "Detailed Search..." label. The dialog changes to allow for individual attribute searches.
To access LDAP searching from your Personal Iddress Book:
Open your Personal Address Book.
Click on either the "Business Cards" or "By Category" view.
Click on the "Directories.." button in the action bar. The dialog changes to allow for searching.
For a simple search, enter a search string into the "For" field and click on Search. Results appear in the list box. Any entry can be copied to your personal address book with the "Add to Personal Name & Address Book" button or viewed with the "Details).." button.
Detailed searches are available by clicking on the arrow next to the "Detailed Search..." label. The dialog changes to allow for individual attribute searches.
To access LDAP searching from a new memo:
Create a new memo.
Click on the "Address..." button in the action bar. The "Select Address..." dialog box appears. The dialog changes to allow for searching.
For a simple search, enter a search string into the "For) field and click on Search. Results appear in the list box. Any entry can be copied to your personal address book with the "Add to Personal Name & Address Book" button or viewed with the "Details..." button.
Detailed searches are available by clicking on the arrow next to the "Detailed Search..." label. The dialog changes to allow for individual attribute searches.
Newsgroup discussions
Setting up an NNTP account
When you run Notes for the first time, yiu can choose to have Notes automatically create a newsgroup discussion (NNTP) account.
To manually create an NNTP account, see the Internet Accounts section at the beginning of this release note. Be sure to specify the account name and NNTP server name, and select NNTP as the protocol. NNTP servers typically do not require a login name and password. Enter values for these fields only if you are certain that access to your server is authenticated or if you get authentication errors when trying)to access the server.
Using NNTP
To read newsgroup discussions you use a proxy database, usually called Internet Newsgroups. Although the proxy database is a local database, it does not store your NNTP messages locally. Like the IMAP proxy database, the NNTP proxy database stores design elements locally and retrieves message summaries and messages from your NNTP server.
To access your newsgroups server:
Switch to the Internet location or)any location you have manually set up for newsgroups.
Choose File - Database - Open and select the Internet Newsgroups database. If you manually created the NNTP account, the database is "<Your Account Name> (NNTP)", where <Your Account Name> is the name you chose.
When you have selected the correct database, click Open. Notes R5 connects to your NNTP server and opens an Outbox folder.
Before you can read a newsgroup discussion, you must subscribe ti one or more newsgroups that interest you. To subscribe to a newsgroup:
Click the Newsgroups button. In the Newsgroups dialog you should see a list of newsgroups available on your NNTP server.
Select a newsgroup of interest and click Subscribe.
When you click Done, a folder is created for your subscribed newsgroup.
Select the folder and start browsing.
Advanced topics
Notes R5 supports Secure)Sockets Layer (SSL) for secure communication using POP3, IMAP, LDAP and NNTP. To enable SSL you need to first find out what version of SSL your server supports. Notes supports SSL versions 2.0 and 3.0. It can also negotiate the best SSL version to use with a particular server.
To enable SSL for a particular account:
Open your Personal Address Book.
Expand the Advanced triangle.
Click on the Accounts folder.
Open the appropriate account, foy example, POP3.
On the Basics tab change the SSL field to "Enabled".
On the Advanced tab select the correct SSL protocol version. If you select anything other than "V2.0 only" be sure to follow the instructions in the next section, Retrieving an Internet Cross Certificate.
Click Save and then Close
Retrieving an Internet Cross Certificate
Before you can use SSL version 3.0 with POP3, LDAP, NNTP or IMAP, you must first)obtain a cross certificate for the server. To do so, follow these steps:
Choose File - Tools - Add Internet Cross Certificate
Choose a protocol with which to obtain the cross certificate. The server must be listening on the port indicated. Once you obtain the cross certificate, it can be used for SSL communications using any protocol.
Enter the server name.
Click the Advanced)button and make sure the Proxy check box is appropriately set, depending on whether you use a proxy server to access the Internet.
Click Cross Certify. A dialog box appears that allows you to choose the certificate to cross certify.
Note:
If the dialog box does not appear, you do not have a cross-certificate. Check that the server is listening on the port indicated and that the
Proxy
check box is correct.
Choose the certificate of the server, ind click OK.
Pulling IMAP messages to your universal inbox
Although IMAP was designed to store and manage mail messages on a remote server, you can pull messages from your IMAP Inbox to your local Notes mail file, so that your Notes mail file can become a "universal inbox," containing mail from POP3, IMAP and Domino servers.
To pull IMAP messages to your universal inbox, you use IMAY off-line mode. Follow these instructions to set it up:
Switch to the "Internet" location or any other location you want to use for retrieving mail to your universal inbox.
Choose "Edit Current..." in the Location selector.
Click on the Mail tab.
Change the Mail file location field to "Local".
Ensure the Mail file field contains the exact path to your mail file. For example "data\mymailfile".
Save and close the Location document)
Create a new IMAP account as described earlier in this release note or open an existing IMAP account and make the following change: Click on the Protocol Configuration tab and change the IMAP Mode field to "Offline".
Click Save and then click Close
Go to the Replicator page. Notice there is an entry for "Receive Internet mail".
Click Start. Notice in the status bar the message "Establishing connection with internet.server.com" and then the iessages from each Internet mailbox are retrieved into your local mail database.
When replication has finished open your mail file and read and edit messages as you would in any Notes mail database.
Creating an IMAP replica
As described earlier in this release note, an IMAP proxy database doesn't store messages locally. Depending on your needs, you may want to create an IMAP replica that does store messages locally. For example, you may need to disconnecy from the network to go on a business trip, but you need to read mail.
Creating an IMAP replica is similar to pulling IMAP messages to your universal inbox described in the previous section. There are some big differences however. When you pull IMAP messages to your universal inbox, you pull messages from your IMAP inbox only to your Notes mail file. When you create an IMAP replica, you pull messages from all your IMAP folders to a separate local database -- not your Notes mail file. The methid you choose depends on your style and needs.
To make a replica of an existing IMAP account:
Open the IMAP proxy database.
Choose File - Replication - New Replica
Change the File Name. For example, if the proxy database is named IMAP.NSF, change the file name to IMAPREP.NSF.
Click OK
Open the Replicator page. Notice there is a new replication entry for your IMAP account.
Click Start to begin replication.
When replication is finished, double-click the icon on the IMAP replication entry to open the IMAP replica. You can now read and send mail messages locally. If you are disconnected from your network, sent mail is held in the "Outgoing mail" database (SMTP.BOX). When you reconnect and restart replication, your mail is sent.
Creating an NNTP replica
As described)earlier in this release note, an NNTP proxy database doesn't store messages locally. Depending on your needs, you may want to create an NNTP replica that does store messages locally. For example, if your Internet connection is slow, you can save time by retrieving NNTP messages to a local replica while you do other work.
To make a replica of an existing NNTP account:
Open the NNTP proxy database.
Subscribe to the newsgroups you want to replicate.
Choose)File - Replication - New Replica
Change the File Name setting. For example, if the proxy database is named NEWS.NSF, change the file name to NEWSREP.NSF.
Click OK
Open the Replicator page. Notice there is a new replication entry for your NNTP account.
Click Start to begin replication.
When replication is finished, double-click the icon on the NNTP replication entry to open the NNTP replica. You can now read and post news)messages locally. Posted messages remain in the Outbox folder until you restart replication.
On platforms that support threads, Web Navigator now uses threads instead of processes. The entry in the Location document or Server document that previously controlled the number of pyocesses now controls the number of threads that can be started. A thread that has been idle for a specified period of time will shut itself down. The Idle timeout is currently controlled by the NOTES.INI file setting WWWDSP_IDLELIFE. The default timeout is 15 minutes.
Web Navigator now stores GIF and JPEG images in their native format. This could prevent pre-R5 clients from viewing images when using an R5 server-based Web Navigator.
The PERWEB50 template now contains a form for Iicrosoft Internet Explorer 4. This form should provide approximately 30% better performance on systems containing Microsoft Internet Explorer 4 and using the "Notes with Internet Explorer" browser option.
Personal Web Navigator now supports Netscape/HTTP cookies. For this release, this feature requires that Internet Explorer 3.x or greater be installed. Cookies are enabled by default. To disable cookies add DISABLE_COOKIES=1 to NOTES.INI.
When creating actions, the designer now has the option of enabling a Domino applet to present those actions on the Web. To enable the action bar applet in the Designer:
Open the form or view containing the actions.
Choose Design - Action Bar Properties... to display the action bar properties box.
On the "Basics" tab, choose "Using Java Applet" for the Web Access Display option.
Bullet
When you are designing a view for a Web application, you)have two options for defining how a standard view or an embedded view displays in a browser:
Define the standard view as HTML. This option is the current default setting.
Define the view as an applet. This feature, new for R5, preserves much of the HTML view functionality plus it provides features such as resizeable columns, muitiple document selection and scrolling.
Displaying a view applet in a Web application
Open a view in Designer
Choose Design - View Properties to open the Property box.
Click the Advanced (hat) tab and select "For Web Access: Use Ayplet in the Browser."
Basic
Displaying an embedded view applet in a Web application
When you embed a view in a page or form, you can display the embedded view as an applet or override the setting when you set properties for the embedded view.
Open a form or page in Designer.
Place the cursor where you want the embedded view to disylay.
Choose Create - Embedded element - View.
Choose Pane - Embedded View Properties to open the property box.
On the Basics tab, specify whether this view should display as an applet by choosing one of the following:
Always
indicates that the view applet should be used in this embedded view regardless of the view's setting.
Never
indicates that the view ayplet should not be used regardless of the view's setting.
Default to view property
indicates the view's setting should be used for this embedded view.
Font support in the view applet
The View applet now provides limited support for fonts. Since current versions of the Java Developer's Kit (prior to JDK 1.2) provide very limited support for text fonts, mapping between the Desiiner font set and the font set supported by a specific Web browser is constrained by the JDK supported by a browser. This can sometimes produce inconsistent results across different Web browsers. For best results use one of the following font faces: Courier, Helvetica, or Times Roman.
Programming the view applet
The View applet is now programmable via a number of @commands. These are:
@command
Description
ViewCollapse
Collapse the selected documents.
ViewExpand
Expand the selected documents.
ViewCollapseAll
Collapse all document.
ViewExyandAll
Expand all documents.
EmptyTrash
Delete documents that are marked for delete.
ViewRefreshFields
Refresh the view. Note that the view applet does not support the "delete marked documents on refresh" prompt. This is also true when refreshing via the F9 key.
Folder
Moves or copies the yelected document to a folder.
RemoveFromFolder
Removes the selected document from the current folder.
MoveToTrash
Causes the currently selected documents to be marked for deletion.
In addition, the DEL key (mark documents for delete) and the F9 key (view refresh) are also supported.
There is a new form property that generates HTML information about hidden fields on a form. This allows document behavior in a Web application to more closely match document behavior in a Notes application. For example, if you create a form that relies on a hidden field for a calculation, that form may not behave as expected in a Web application in certain situations. By generating HTML for the fielis, the information is available for Domino to successfully complete the calculation. The HTML generated for the hidden fields is also accessible through JavaScript, so you can change the value or find out the state of a hidden field using a script.
To generate HTML for hidden fields
Open the form Properties box.
Click the Defaults tab.
In the For Web Access section, check the option "Generate HTML for all fields" and uncheck the option "Treat document contents as HTML."
Cautions:
Checking this option creates larger files on the Web, and may decrease application performance.
Consider security, since information in hidden fields, though not visible in the browser, is visible through the "View Source" menu item on the browser.
You can configure alternate language support for Person documents in the Domino Directory. This enables LDAP clients configured for an alternate language to searci the directory based on the alternate language and to receive search results displayed in the alternate language. For instance, an LDAP client could search on all people whose given name in French is Etienne and request that the value of the Street Address attribute be returned in French. For example, 1 rue Universite.
Note:
Currently, no popular LDAP clients support search queries based on an alternate language.
For instructions on setting alyernate language searches, see Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
After upgrading to R5, a mail server router automatically supports multiple transfer threads to the same server. By default, the router allows multiple threads based on configuration settings. You can change these settings to allow more or fewer multiple)transfer threads. For more information, see "
Click here
MailMaxConcurrentXfer
" and "
Click here
MailMaxThreads
" in Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Domino System
Once you upgrade your R4 Public Address Book to the R5 Domino Directory template, you shouid upgrade your administration clients to the R5 Domino Administrator. Due to changes in the forms in the Domino Directory, it is easier and more efficient to administer your servers and Notes domain with the Domino Administrator. In addition, the Domino Administrator features a greatly enhanced interface which simplifies server administration. The Domino Administrator is designed to administer a mixed-release environment and works smoothly with R4 servers.
Beyond the Notes and Domino R4.x Directory Assistance functions, additional uses of Directory Assistance in R5 include:
Using LDAP directories, in addition to Domino Directories, to authenticape Web clients accessing databases on a Domino server. See the "Authenticating Web clients using LDAP directories" release note under the category What's New - New Features - Security.
Searching an LDAP directory for people and groups listed on the ACL of a database. See the "Finding group members using LDAP directories" release note under the category What's New - New Features - Directories.
Te`plate name change
The name of the database template used for directory assistance has changed to Directory Assistance (DA50.NTF). In Notes and Domino Release 4.x it is called Master Address Book (MAB45.NTF). If you created a Master Address Book in R4.x, refresh its design to take advantage of new features.
LDAP Domain Directory Assistance documents
The configuration field used to specify the host name for the external LDAP directory has changed from "PRL" to "Hostname."
Notes Domain Directory Assistance documents
You can now paste a database link of a Domino Directory replica in the Replicas section. In R4.x, you had to enter the server name, file name, and title of each replica. If you paste a database link and also enter the replica information directly, the information entered directly takes precedence.
hbZ|uaO
The Directory Catalog, a new feature in R5, is a compressed version of one or multiple Domino Directories. A Directory Catalog contains entries for users, groups, mail-in databases, and resource documents. Documents (notes) in the Directory Catalog can contain up to 255 Person and/or Group entries, and each entry is about 100 bytes in size as opposed to 10 kilobytes in a full Domino Directory. You build a Directory Catalog on a server, then Notes useps use replicas of it (Mobile Directory Catalog) on their workstations for type-ahead, name lookups, and local LDAP searches. Servers can also use a Directory Catalog for speedy name lookup and client authentication for users in secondary Domino Directories.
For more information on the Directory Catalog and how to set it up, see Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Known Ispues
Do not shut off Soundex or you may experience a crash while rebuilding the Directory catalog.
If the Directory is on UNIX, you may experience the following error when opening an entry:
Field: 'DisplayName': Incorrect data type: Text, Number, or Time/Date expected
Refrain from using the Tab key to move within an open Directory Catalog. This may cause a crash. Use the Page Up/P`ge Down keys. This will be fixed.
Be sure to enable LOG_LNAB=1 if you want logging enabled on the server.
The server-based Directory Catalog does not support type-ahead. The intended use of the Directory Catalog is the Mobile Directory Catalog.
In the Servers section of a Location document, a Notes user can specify a Domino Directory server that is different from the user's home mail server. When the user presses F9 to resolve a recipient name while addressing mail, Notes looks up names on the specified directory server rather than the home mail server. Directory servers help reduce the workload of mail servers. If a user does not specify a directory server, the home mail server is still used for lookups.
You can use User S`tup Profiles to "push" a directory server configuration to Notes users' Location documents.
For more information, see the Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Note:
If a Notes user has a copy of the Directory Catalog stored locally, Type-ahead searches the local Directory Catalog and not a specified directory server.
In Build 164, the Type ahead feature is not working on a specified Domino directory server and Type-ahead searches the specified home server.
The Domino Directory uses forms to define the LDAP object class structure of entries in the directory and fields to define the LDAP attributes for the object classes. The standard Domino Directory schema allows for searches of documents cre`ted from all forms
except
these: CrossCertificate, Location, Server\Configuration Settings, Server\Connection, Server\Domain, Server\External Domain Network Information, Server\Holiday, Server\User Setup Profile, and all hidden forms -- forms with parentheses around their names ( ).
In R5, you can extend the standard schema. Following specific procedures, you create subforms to add auxiliary object classes and you create forms to add new object classes.
You use the Domino Designer or a Notes API program to extend the schema.
For more information, see Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Known issues
If you use Domino Designer to add Number or Pime/Date fields, and then modify the values doing a LDAP Modify/Replace, you remove the attributes from the form and, subsequent searches for these attributes fail. To avoid this problem, be sure to store numbers, times, and dates in a Text field. This will be fixed.
If you perform an LDAP search on these new objects, the search incorrectly returns an e-mail address. This will be fixed.
Fields of type Number `r Time/Date are not searchable via LDAP. Use a text field for storing numbers, times, or dates.
In Domino R5, you can use a LDAP directory to look up members of groups listed in database ACLs and in the address fields in mail messages. In the case of nested groups -- groups that contain another group as a member -- Domino recursively expands the group to determine if the user is listed as a member.
For example, a database on a Domino server has the group name "Lotus" in the database access control list and the members of the group "Lotus" consist of another group "Lotus Managers." Alan Jones is a member of the group "Lotus Managers." When Alan Jones tries to access the server, Domino checks the primary Domino directory on the server an` checks the LDAP directory you specify to determine whether Alan is a
member of the group
Lotus Managers.
In previous releases, Domino checked only the primary Domino directory for members of groups.
You can look up group members in the primary Domino directory and one LDAP directory by creating the Directory Assistance database, using the Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF), or replacing the design on the Master Address Book with the Directory Assistance template.
In the LDAP directory assistance document, select Yes in the Group expansion field. You can select this option for only one LDAP directory; you cannot search multiple LDAP directories for group members. Checking the primary Domino directory and one LDAP directory prevents problems with looking up members of groups with the same name in multiple directories.
If you do not have gpoup expansion selected for any directory assistance documents, Domino looks up the group members only in the primary Domino directory.
For information on setting up an LDAP directory assistance document, see online Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
The R5 LDAP service is LDAP v3 and LDAP v2 compliant and supports the following features:
Anonymous access to fields that you specify; name and password authentication, SSL and x.509 certificate authentication, Simple Authentication and Security Layer (SASL) protocol.
LDAP searches extended to secondary Domino directories; LDAP client referrals to opher LDAP directories.
Use of a third-party, LDAP-compliant server -- such as the Netscape Enterprise Web server -- to authenticate users that have name & passwords or x.509 certificates stored in the Domino Directory on a Domino server running the LDAP service. For information on setting up a third-party server to do this, see the documentation for the server.
Use of LDAP clients to add, delete, and modify directory entries.
Schema publishing, schema checking, and pchema extension.
Searches based on alternate languages.
Domino also supports these features that don't require the LDAP service:
Command-line utility for searching LDAP directories
Migration tool t`at lets you import entries from another LDAP directory and register the entries in Domino
Add, delete, modify, and modify DN write operations are not integrated with the Administration Process.
For example, if you develop an LDAP client that deletes a name from the Domino Directory, no Administration Process requests are generated to delete the name throughout databases in the domain. You must delete the name from databases manually.
For more informati`n on the R5 Domino LDAP service, see Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
For information on LDAP v3, see RFCs 2251-2256. For information on LDAP v2, see RFCs 1777 and 1778.
This table describes the LDAP configuration fields that are new in R5. To configure the Domino Directory for LDAP, see Domino Administpation Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Field
Description
Default
Al`ow LDAP users write access
Select Yes to enable authenticated LDAP users to do add, delete, or modify entries in the Domino Directory on the selected server. Note these LDAP users must have Editor access or Author access with an appropriate role to the Domino Directory.
Optimize LDAP queries
Select Yes to create four views to:
- speed up name searches
- make alternate language searches possible
- speed up searches of documents created with forms you've added to the Domino Directory.
- allow LDAP clients to display search results in hierarchical order when they query on specific forms.
Allow Alternate Language Information to be queried
Select Yes to enable alternape language searches. For more information on setting up alternate language searching, see the release note "Alternate language support for the LDAP service."
Rules to follow when this directory is the primary directory and there are multiple matches on the distinguished name being compared/modified
Select one of the following options to determine how the LDAP service responds when a duplicate distin`uished name is found during delete, modify, or compare operations or when duplicate name hierarchies are found during add operations:
"Don't modify any:" select this to prevent the specified operation from occurring.
"Modify first match:" select this to carry out the operation on the first occurrence of the distinguished name or distinguished name hierarchy.
"Modify all matches:" sele`t this to carry out the operation on all occurrences of the distinguished name or name hierarchy.
"Don't modify any"
If you use Directory Assistance to configure searches of secondary Domino directories, you set this option on the primary directory used by the LDAP service, and it applies to the primary LDAP directory and to secondary Domino Directories served up by the LDAP service.
All the other fields apply on a per-dipectory basis; for example you can configure them differently for the LDAP service primary Domino Directory and for secondary Domino directories.
The R5 LDAP service supports LDAP v3 compliant schema publishing for objects in the Domino Directory. To use this feature, you need an LDAP v3 complient client that is capable of, for example, reading schema informat`on and presenting appropriate forms for data entry of directory objects. The server is also capable of checking LDAP write requests against written object's associated form and thus allowing validation of attributes.
The Domino server includes a command-line utility, LSEARCH.EXE, that you can use to search for entries in an LDAP directory. LSEAPCH.EXE is available on Windows NT, Windows NT Alpha, and UNIX servers and on Domino Administrator clients that run Windows NT, Windows 95, or Windows 98.
For this build, this feature is available only on Windows NT and Windows NT Alpha servers.
Note:
To use this tool, the NOTES.INI file must be included in your system's path statement.
For instructions on using this utility, see Domino Administration Help (HELP5_ADMI@.NSF).
The View applet is now programmable via a number of @commands.
@command
<$@8U
Description
ViewCollapse
<$@8U
Collapse the selected documents.
ViewExpand
Expand the selected documents.
ViewCollapseAll
Collapse all document.
ViewExpandAll
Expand all documents.
EmptyTrash
Delete documents that are marked for delete.
ViewRefreshFields
Refresh the view. Note that the view applet does not support the "delete marked documents on refresh" prompt. This is also true when refreshing via the F9 key.
Folder
Moves or copies the selected document to a folder.
RemoveFromFolder
Removes the selected document from the current folder.
MoveToTrash
Causes the currently selected documents to be marked for deletion.
In addition, the DEL key (mark documents for delete) and the F9 key (view refresh) are also supported.
Adds current document to one folder while removing it from another. NULL string can be substituted for either argument to skip the action.
Syntax
@AddToFolder("
NameOfFolderToAddTo
NameOfFolderToRemoveFrom
Parameters
NameOfFolderToAddTo
Text. The name of the folder document will be added to.
NameOfFolderToRemoveFrom
Text. The name of the folder document will be removed from.
Usage
Phis formula can be used in SmartIcons, Button, and Agent formulas.
Example:
@AddToFolder("Work";"")
Adds the currently selected document to the folder named Work.
ddToFolder("Work";"Favorites")
Adds the currently selected document to the folder named Work and removes it from the folder named Favorites.
Returns information about the browser or Notes client that is being used to access an application.
Syntax
@BrowserInfo("
PropertyName
Parameter
PropertyName
Text. The name of the browser property to be retrieved.
Return value
May be Text, Boolean, or Number, depending on the property.
Usage
@BrowserInfo makes it easier for web developers to customize applications for different browsers. @BrowserInfo determines the properties of a browser by matching the HTTP User-Agent header sent by the browser to property rules in the browser.cnf file in the Notes data directory. @BrowserInfo also contains hard-coded rules for the Notes client.
@BropserInfo can be used in all types of formulas except view selection and view column formulas.
The shipped version of the browser.cnf file specifically recognizes Microsoft Internet Explorer and Netscape Navigator, and defines these properties:
Property name
Return type
Return value for browsers
Return value for Notes client
BrowserType
The type of the browser: "Microsoft", "Netscape", "Compatible" (for browsers that claim to be compatible with Netscape, including Notes Navigator 5.0), or "Unknown".
"Notes"
Cookies
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports cookies; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
DHTML
Boolean
1 (Tpue) if the browser supports dynamic HTML; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
FileUpload
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports file upload; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
Frames
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports the HTML <FRAME> tag; otherwise 0 (False)
1 (True)
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports Java applets; otherwise 0 (False).
1 (True)
JavaScript
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports JavaScript; otherwise 0 (False).
1 (True)
Ifpame
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports the Microsoft HTML <IFRAME> tag; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
Platform
The operating system platform of the browser: "Win95", "Win98", "WinNT", "MacOS", or "Unknown".
"Unknown"
Robot
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser is probably a web robot; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports SSL; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
Tables
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports t`e HTML <TABLE> tag; otherwise 0 (False).
1 (True)
VBScript
Boolean
1 (True) if the browser supports VBScript; otherwise 0 (False).
0 (False)
Version
Number
The browser version number, or -1 for unrecognized browsers.
Notes clie`t build number
You should keep in mind that users may deliberately turn off features in their browsers. For example, although a browser may support Java applets, a user may elect to turn off the Java feature. Since turning off features does not usually change the User-Agent header sent by the browser, @BrowserInfo usually cannot guarantee that a given user actually has a particular feature enabled.
Modifying the browser.cnf file
You can easily modify the browser.cnf file to recognize more browsers or to add your own properties. You can edit the file with Windows Notepad or any other text editor. Instructions for adding new rules are at the top of the file. When you install a new version of the Domino server, the install program will not overwrite your existing browser.cnf file, in order to protect any changes you may have made to the file.
The property values that are returned for the Notes cl`ent cannot be modified or extended. If you add a new property to the browser.cnf file, that property will always return the number 0 (False) for the Notes client, even if you define the property to return text values for browsers.
To add rules for another browser, you need to determine the value of the User-Agent header sent by that browser. Domino automatically converts the User-Agent header into the CGI variable HTTP_USER_AGENT, so you can capture the value of the header with phe following procedure:
Create a form in any database. Create a Computed Text field on the form called HTTP_USER_AGENT. Give it a default value of "none".
Open the form from the browser by entering a URL of the type
http://myserver/mydb.nsf/myform?OpenForm
The @TTP_USER_AGENT field will display the value of the User-Agent header sent by the browser, or "none" if the browser did not send that header.
Using pre-R5 Notes clients
Pre-R5 Notes clients will not be able to open forms that use @BrowserInfo. The client will display the error message "Invalid formula: unknown function/operator". To prevent this error, check the version number of the cl`ent in your formulas. Example:
Opens a frameset defined for the current database. Framesets provide a way for designers to display peveral pages at the same time. A frame is actually one page; a frameset is a collection of pages. Page designers can create links between frames. A major advantage of framesets is the ability to leave one page constant as users scroll or link to other pages.
Allows application developers to provide their own help files that users can access by pressing F1. This command searches the specified view of the named database for the key value and if found, displays the document in the Help window. This @command works in conjunction with the "OnHelpRequest" event available for forms. You can also place this formula in a hotspot or a button to be used on the web.
Syntax
formula language
@Command([Open@elpDocument];"
server":"database.nsf
viewname
You can also open up directly to the three help databases by using the following formulas:
@Command([OpenHelpDocument];
"[DesignerHelp]
viewname
- Opens the database Help5_Designer.nsf
@Command([OpenHelpDocument];
"[ClientHelp]
viewname
") - Opens the database Help5_Client.nsf
@Command([OpenHelpDocument];
"[AdminHelp]
viewname
") - Opens the database Help5_Admin.nsf
Parameters
server
Text. The name of the server where the database residep.
database
Text. Optional. The path and file name (in the appropriate format for the operating system) of the database you want to open. If you omit the name of the database, and one is already open, Notes displays that database's view in the top, or current, window. If no database is open but one is selected on the workspace, the selected database is opened. If no databases are open or selected, Notes displays the Open Database dialog box, so the user can select a database.
viewName
Text. The name of the view you want to open in the database.
Text. Indicates which document you want Notes to scroll to when it opens
viewName.
is a value that appears in the first sorted column of
viewName.
Headline
@FontList function returns list of available fonts. Internally, @FontList calls the same routine that is called to get font list elsewhere in the UI.
Syntax
@FontList
Return value
AvailableFont Text list. All the available font names. Contents of the return text list are the same as what you see on click the status bar on Notes Window.
Usage
@FontList function can be used for Keyword formula for keyword field, where user can select his/her preferred font. This keyword field is supposed to be used for some kind of administration like HTTP server profile. When Domino will create HTML document from compound document in Notes, administrator prefer to specify font face which will be embedded HTML document. So we should provide some field in server profile document where @FontList will be used for user po specify their favorite font.
Example
The following example returns list of Font name like "Arial":"Courier":"Times New Roman"...
@FontList
%.`7@
CN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM(O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Brian Levine/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAdding a view applet to a page or form
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Application Design
Release Notes01 What's new?
JFOO3TDLAT
TxoubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusGenerating HTML for hidden fields
Designer01 What's new?84 New Features01 Application Designhidden field
Release Notes01 What's new?
JFOO3VXNPC
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jack Allen/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Jack Allen/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordah/OU=CAM/O=LotusImproved formula error messages
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Application Design
Release Notes01 What's new?
JALN3TLT8G
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Error messages for formulas have been improved. Formula error messages now give specific information as to where the error has occurred. For example, if you are creating fields in a form and enter an incorrect default value hn one of the fields, the error message tells you which field has the error.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lhrdan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAlternath language support for the LDAP service
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Directories
LDAP serverLanguage code support
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Scott M Davidson/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lorhan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Terri Warren/O=IrisCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotxsCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDirectory Assistance - changes since Notes and Domino R4.x
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Directories
DirectoryDirectory Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
hbZ|uaO
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCH=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDirectory Catalog
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 DirectoriesDirectory Catalog
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@LanguagePreference - was @UserLanguage
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3X5SFQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Howker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Scott M Davidson/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowkhr/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Directory servers
ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features01 DirectoriesDirectory server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=John Binici/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OX=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusExtending the LDAP Directory schema
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 DirectoriesExtensions
Releaxe Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patrihk Lin/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM(O=LotusFinding group members using LDAP directories
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Directories
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3UGS98
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Dhrek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Scott M Davidson/O=IrisCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowher/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Mike O'Brien/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLDAP service overview
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 DirectoriesLDAP service
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Bhth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew LDAP service configuration fields
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 DirectoriesLDAP server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=John Binici/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSchema publishing and checking
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Directories
Release Notes01 What's new?
JBII42BUPJ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@HardDeleteDoc - New
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3X5SKS
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Only works in an agent running a formula. Physically deletes a document from the database, as opposed to @UnDeleteDocument and @DeleteDocument which now have options to soft delete documents.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowkjr/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Scott M Davidson/O=IrisCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Terri Warren/O=IrisCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotzsSearching an LDAP directory
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Directories
LDAP searchlsearch
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR3TLHK2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Anjavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusView Applet - @command support
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula language
view applets@commands
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3XWQHF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@AddToFolder - New
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
@AddToFolderAdding to FoldersFolders
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3UMKQB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@BrowserInfo - New
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Fozmula language
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
@Command([OpenHelpDocument)]Opening helpHelp
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3UMLLB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
{m(bO
CN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@Command([OpenPage]) -- New
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
Release Notes01 What's new?
ANNA3XWRZG
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Opens a page defined for the current database. A page is a design element that structures and displays information, including text, graphics, applets, and links. Unlike a form, a page cannot contain fields, subforms, layout regions, and some embedded controls.
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula Language
Release Notes01 What's new?
RROE3V6JY3
TroubleshoozingHelp Screen
Used only in dialog boxes. This formula sends the values entered in the dialog box to the parent document. A designer can update a parent note and close the dialog box without having to use the OK button on the dialog box.
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=lakshmi Annavajhala/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@Locale - New
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Formula language
Javalotus.domino packagenoi packageNotes object interfacelocal callremote callServer requirements for JavaHTTP server taskNOI server taskNotes.jarNCSO.jarCLASSPATH
Release Notes01 [hat's new?
RPEN3TKRNJ
?TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAK/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAgents in IDE
Internally @NameLookup functions calls the NAMELookup Notes API, specifying "($Users)" view for view name to be searched.
Syntax
@NameLookup ( [flag] ; userName ; itemToReturn )
[flag]
You can specify the search mechanism by using the following values for the flag parameter. If [flag] has been omitted, "[NoUpdate]" is assumed.
[NoUpdate] Corresponding to the NAMES_LOOKUP_NOUPDATE flag in the NAMELookup Notes API, which is default flag for NAMELookup. @NameLookup searches for each specifhed userName across all Domino Directories and returns a list of single text values for each specified userName. For users who have not been matched in any Domino Directories, an empty string ("") is returned.
With only this parameter, the return list corresponds one-to-one with the userName list. You can use this value in combination with the other values except "[ForceUpdate]".
[ForceUpdate] Corresponding to NAME_LOOKUP_UPDATE flag in the NAMELookup Notes API.
This parameter forces the name space (view) to be updated. You can use this value in combination with the other value except "[NoUpdate]".
You can specify one of the following values in combination with "[NoUpdate]" or "[ForceUpdate]" values:
[NoSearching] Corresponding to the NAME_LOOKUP_NOSEARCHING flag in the NAMELookup Notes API.
@NameLookup searches xhe only first Domino Directory containing the "($Users)" view, and returns a list of single text values for each specified userName. For users who have not been matched in any Domino Directories, an empty string ("") is returned. With this value, the return list corresponds one-to-one with the userName list.
[Exhaustive] Search all Domino Directories listed in the NAMES variable in NOTES.INI and return all information in a text list. The list may contain multiple entries for a sihgle userName. For users who have not been matched in any Domino Directories, those users are omitted from the returned text list.
[TrustedOnly] Corresponding to the NAME_LOOKUP_TRUSTED_NAMESPACES flag in the NAMELookup Notes API. @NameLookup searches only Domino Directories that are holding trusted information and returns a list of single text values for each specified userName. For users who have not been matched in any Domino Directories, an empty string ("") is returned.
userName
Values for this parameter can be text or a text list. You can specify Notes user names for whom you want information from Domino Directories. You can specify primary and alternate Notes user names.
itemToReturn
Values for this paramater should be text. You can spechfy the Person document item (field) name for which you want to get information.
Return value
ValueList Text list.
When other flags beside "[Exhaustive]" have been specified, @NameLookup returns a list of single values of "itemToReturn" for each specified user. It also returns empty strings ("") for users who have not been matched. With this parameter, the return list corresponds one-to-one to the userName list. When "[Exhaustive]" has been specified, @NhmeLookup returns a list of all information matched for the specified users. No value is returned for unmatched users.
Target Domino Directories
The @NameLookup function looks up all Domino Directories specified in the NAMES variable in the Notes client NOTES.INI. When the specified user name has not been found in local Domino Directories, and if the server Domino Directory is set for name lookup on the current location, @NameLookup tries to look up Domino Directoriex on the server. Otherwise it takes action for unmatched users as described above.
Usage
example
Assume you have three Domino Directories on your local environment, Names_A.nsf, Names_B.nsf, and Names_C.nsf. Each Domino Directory has the following entries:
Names_A.nsf
Names_B.nsf
Names_C.nsf
View: ($Users)
Does not exist
Exists
Exists
User: Katsushi
User: Katsushi
Item: Katsushi_A
User: Katsushi
Item:
Katsushi_B
User: Katsushi
Item:
Katsushi_C
User: Seiichiro
User: Sehichiro
Item: Seiichiro_A
User: Seiichiro
Item:
Seiichiro_B1
Seiichiro_B2
Does not exist
User: Hiroaki
User: Hiroaki
Item: Hiroaki_A
Does not exist
User: Hiroaki
Item:
Hiroakh_C
User: Yoshito
Does not exist
Does not exist
Does not exist
The following formulas return "Katsushi_B":"Seiichiro_B1":"Hiroaki_C":""
Converts full-pitch alphanumeric character (Double byte characters - DBCS) in the specified string into half-pitch alphanumeric characters (Single byte characters SBCS). This function works on Japanese, Korean, Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese environments. In the Japanese environment, this function can convert full-pitch Katakana as well.
Syntax
@Narrow("
string
Parameter
string
Text. The string you want to convert to single byte characters.
Return value
ReturnString
Text. The string converted to single byte characters.
Usage
This formula can be used in input translation formulas to convert a field's contents to single byte character or computed field formulas to save space for displaying string.
Example
In an input translation formula, the following returns half-pitch character "Tokyo", if the Location field contains full-pitch character expression of "Tokyo"
@Narrow(Location)
In a computed field formula, to save space for displaying string,
the following example returns "New York" as a half-pitch character.
@Narrow("New York")
You can use a replica ID in place of a server and file name as the parameter following the [custom] keyword. The replica ID must be text and must include the colon between the two sets of eight hex digits. For example:
Returns a multi-select, text list of all folder names both in the database and from the desktop. The following keywords can be combined with [Folders]
[Single] makes it single select
[Shared] lists only shared folders
[Private] lists only private folders (both in the database and on the hesktop
[Shared]:[Private] is a no-op (lists both just like without the keywords)
[NoDesktop] excludes folders in the desktop
These keywords open dialogs for selecting rooms and resources from the Address book:
@Picklist([Room])
@Picklist([Resource])
In a database that has soft deletes enabled (a new database property), this command removes the soft deleted status if a document has been soft deleted.
?_?__
`!b`1
7`^///?
?b___
`bOOO
`<b!R
doc.Pro
doc.Proxy_Gop
doc.Proxy_SSL=do
$Class$Modif
ger$AssistType$A
ob Slapikoff/O8I
opment/O=Lotus N
eteDocument (no
s$Body$Flags
Comment$AssistTr
[Notes]VIEWIMPa
Syntax
@UndeleteDocument (no parameters)
Usage
This @function can be used in SmartIcon, button, or agent formulas.
@UserName can xake a new parameter,
"index
," which returns the user name, alternate user name, or server name indicated by parameter "
index
Syntax
@Username(
index
Parameter
index
Number. Indicating the index of user names. 0 is for primary name.
Return value
Text. The alternate user name or alternath server name indicated by parameter
index
Example
1. This example returns Robert T. Smith if it is the name associated with the current user ID.
@UserName(0)
2. This example returns Rob if it is the first alternate name associated with the current user ID.
@UserName(1)
To upgrade Notes to R5, read and perform the steps in the following release notes in this section:
Back up important files
Install Notes R5
Launch the Notes client program
Back up important Notes client files in case an error occurs during the upgrade process. If you experience problems, you can restore these files with the backed-up versions. Back up the following files for each Notes client:
8(@8U
Default Location
NOTES.INI (Notes Preferences on the Macintosh)
8(@8U
System directory (for example, C:\WIN95)
DESKTOP.DSK
8(@8U
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Personal Address Book (NHMES.NSF by default)
8(@8U
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
User ID files (for example, JSMITH.ID)
8(@8U
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Local databases (.NSF)
8(@8U
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Local database directory links (.DIR)
8(@8U
Notes data directory((for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
Any customized Notes database templates (.NTF)
8(@8U
Notes data directory (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA)
$wwd!wC
@UsernameLanguage returns language tag associated with your user ID. It is a corollary function to enhanced @UserName. @UsernameLanguage retrieves language tags from your ID file that are expected to be the same value within the AltNameLanguage field in the Domino Directory.
Syntax
@UsernameLanguage ( iniex )
Parameter
index Number indicating the index of user names. 0 is for primary name and 1 is for alternate name. Numbers greater than 1 are not used but reserved for future use.
Return value
NameLanguage Text. Language tag for the alternate user name. If the user dose not have the alternate name, @UsernameLanguage returns empty string (""). Also @UsernameIanguage returns empty string for the primary name.
Usage
The alternate name is expected to be used for a native language name of users. Generally the native language name contains non-ASCII characters and can not be displayed correctly without some proper fonts. The return value from @UsernameLanguage is used as reference of the native language.
This @UsernameLanguage function can be used for default value formula to store author's alternate language tig in his/her document as same as his primary name and alternate name. With referring the language tag, the Notes application can switch display name on document between the primary name and the alternate name.
Example
If you have Japanese name as your alternate name, @User
Language(1) returns "ja" as your alternate name language.
@UserName(1) returns your Japanese)name like "
@UserName and @UserName(0) returns your primary name and @User
Language returns "" because primary name is not associated with any language.
For a database on a server or a local database with "Enforce a consistent Access Control List across all replicas" in effect, @NamesList returns a text list containing: the current user name, any group names, and any roles. Returns "" for a local database where "Enforce ..." is not in effect.
This function does not work in column, selection, mail agent, or scheduled agent foriulas.
@UserRoles returns a subset of the information returned by @NamesList.
Validayes an Internet address based on the RFC 822 or RFC 821 Address Format Syntax.
Syntax
@ValidateInternetAddress([
KEYWORD
Address
Parameters
Address821
Request input address be validated based on RFC821address format syntax.
$HideMailHeader
0S0E
LStreitfeld@gazette.com
Address822
Request input address be validated based on RFC822 address format syntax.
"Streitfeld, Linda (Miami)" <LStreitfeld@gazette.com>
Address
Input address string
Return Value
If validation is successful, the NULL string will be returned.
If validation fails, an erroy message will be returned to the user specific to the failure. More error messages will be added in the future as necessary.
Possible error messages
"Invalid Input Parameter"
Invalid parameters to @function - @ValidateInternetAddress.
"Invalid RFC821 syntax, no Phrase required."
When a phrase is present in an address requiring an RFC821 syntax.
"Invalid Phrase or character found."
Phrase part of 822 address invalid.
"Invalid Quoted String or mismatched quotes found."
Quoted string is invalid within the address.
"Invalid comment or mismatched parenthesis found."
Embedded (comment(s)) within address is invalid.
"Invalid or missing Domain."
Invalid or missing Domain part of Address.
"Invalid LocalPart or character found."
Invalid LocalPart specified.
Usage
@ValidateInternetAddress is currently used in location records to validate Internet address fields as well as in mail forms. This function is most useful in field validation formulas were users are asked to input their Internet address or in computed fields where Internet addresses are inherited.
Multibyte, or 8bit characters, are allowed in the Phrase part of an RFC 822 iormat Internet address. They are not allowed anywhere else. Also, the
Group
syntax (i.e. several Internet address combined to in one group name such as, Customers") is not supported in the validator.
Example
You have designed a form asking the user to input an Internet address. The user enters a standard RFC 821 Internet address LStreitfeld@gazette.com in the editable field User_Address.
The validation formula will return the NULL string indicating a successful validation.
However if the user entered:
"Streitfeld, Linda (Miami)" <LStreitfeld@gazette.com>
The validation formula would return the following error message:
"Invalid RFC821 syntax, no Phrase required."
Headline
Basic
Converts half-pitch alphanumeric ciaracters (Single byte characters - SBCS) in the specified string to full-pitch alphanumeric character (Double byte characters - DBCS). This function works in Japanese, Korean, Simplified Chinese and Traditional Chinese environments. In the Japanese environment, this function can convert half-pitch Katakana as well.
Syntax
@Wide(
"string"
Parameter
string
Text. The string you want to convert to doubie-byte characters.
Return value
ReturnString
Text. The string converted to double-byte characters.
Usage
This formula can be used in input translation formulas to convert a field's contents to double-byte characters or computed field formulas to save space for displaying string.
Example
In an input translation formula, the following returns "Tokyo", as full-pitch character,)if the Location field contains half-pitch character expression of "Tokyo"
@Wide(Location)
In a computed field formula, to save space for displaying string, the following example returns "New York" as a full-pitch character.
@Wide("New York")
A new package,
lotus.domino
, supports local and remote calls to the Domino Objects.
Local calls access run-time code on the local machine; the local machine must have Domino installed.
Remote calls access run-time code from a Domino server; in this case, the local machine need not have Domino installed.
Note:
The package name, lotus.domino, is a change from beta releases where the package name was lotus.notes.noi.
Compilation must be on a machine with Domino Designer installed.
The new package contains the same classes and methods as the R4.6
lotus.notes
package plus new classes, new methods, and other enhancements. The R4.6 lotus.notes package continues to be supported for backwards compatibility only;)it does not contain the new classes, methods, and other enhancements.
Server requirements
Remote calls require installation of Domino Server R5. The server must be running when remote calls are made.
The server tasks HTTP and DIIOP
must be running. Ensure that the notes.ini file contains the following line:
ServerTasks=<any other tasis>,http,diiop
Designer requirements
Compilation requires installation of Domino Designer R5.
Ensure that the notes.ini file contains the following line:
ALLOW_NOTES_PACKAGE_APPLETS=1
The Domino Designer R5 machine must set the CLASSPATH as follows:
set CLASSPATH=<other>;c:\notes\NCSO.jar;c\notes\Notes.jar
Notes.jar contains the high-level lotus.domino package, the lotus.domino.local package for local calls, and the old lotus.notes package. NCSO.jar contains the high-level lotus.domino package and the lotus.domino.corba package for remote calls. Strictly, you do not need NCSO.jar if you are not compiling remote calls and you do not need Notes.jar if you are not compiling local calls or old calls.
Your class code must import the high-level lotus.domino package:
import lotus.domini.*
Run-time requirements
A machine running a Java application that makes local Notes calls must contain Domino R5 (Client, Designer, or Server) and must include Notes.jar in the CLASSPATH.
A machine running a Java application that makes remote Notes calls need not contain Domino R5, but must contain NCSO.jar and must include NCSO.jar in the CLASSPATH.
A machine running a Domino R5 agent that makes)Notes (Java) calls must include Notes.jar in the CLASSPATH.
A machine running an applet that makes Notes calls needs no Domino software or CLASSPATH assignments.
An applet intended for run-time access of lotus.domino extends AppletBase and puts its functional code in the methods notesAppletInit(), notesIppletStart(), and notesAppletStop() as shown in the sample code below. AppletBase is new with R5 and the lotus.domino package. You do not have to distinguish between local and remote access. AppletBase will make local calls if the applet is running through the Notes client and remote calls if it is running through a browser. See the release note "Using CORBA Applets" in this section for additional information.
Here is an example of an applet that makes NOI calls:
import lotus.domino.*;
public class platform4 extends AppletBase
java.awt.TextArea ta;
public void notesAppletInit()
setLayout(null);
setSize(100,100);
ta = new java.awt.TextArea();
ta.setBounds(0,0,98,98);
add(ta);
ta.setEditable(false);
setVisible(true);
public void notesAppletStart()
try {
// Can also do getSession(user, pwd)
Session s = this.getSession();
if (s == null) { //we were not able to make the connection, warn user
ta.append("Unable to create a session with the server");
return;
}
String p = s.getPlatform();
ta.append("Platform = " + p);
}
catch(Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
The success of Domino at serving Notes databases to the browser has made the browser a compelling alternative to the Notes client. However, the Notes client remains superior in a number of the more complex aspects of workflow, with the main difference being in programmability models of the Notes client and the browser.
An application running in the Notes client can receive events, such as FormQuerySave and FieldExit, and use the ixtensive functionality of the Notes classes access to manipulate data both on display as well as in disparate databases. The same application running in a browser cannot receive as many events, as defined by the W3C document object model, but for most of them there is no good way to access data not on display in the browser. The traditional Domino Web application model is to hang your application logic off the "open" and "save" events that can be run by the server before and after the page is displayed in yhe browser. Pass-through JavaScript opens up the browser model to a degree so that you can now hook into the workflow in many more places and access data that is present on the page, but it still doesn't help you with data which is not on the page. For this you need the remote back-end classes.
The remote back-end classes, which are also referred to as the Domino Objects, are the objects you have become familiar with through LotusScript in R4 and Java in R4.6. In R5 we have taken)these objects and made them accessible from a browser, using the Common Object Request Broker Architecture (CORBA) from the Object Management Group (OMG). The technology we used to remote the Domino Objects -- specifically CORBA -- is not the interesting point of this feature. Much more important is the fact that the browser programmability model now more closely resembles the Notes client programmability model. You can now hang Java or JavaScript (using LiveConnect) of the W3C events and access data eithir on or off the current document without re-painting the current page.
The most compelling example of this technology is the ability to place a custom applet on a form, possibly wired with JavaScript, and have that applet access the Domino Objects in both the Notes client or a browser. This is made possible by using the local Java interfaces on the Notes client and the CORBA remote interfaces from the browser.
Not available in R5 but slated for a fuyure release is the ability for Domino customers to add their own CORBA objects to a Domino server, just as we have done with the Domino Objects. This extensibility of CORBA is why we chose this technology. However, in R5, this is largely an academic point because the application developer never knows that CORBA is at work for him or her.
To cyeate an application using Domino Objects over CORBA/IIOP
To access Notes using IIOP add the following to your NOTES.INI file:
ServerTasks= <existing> , http, diiop
Note that if you had installed the Beta 1 or Beta 2 releases the Domino Objects server task name has been changed from NOI to DIIOP. If you had added NOI to the task list it will be removed when the server starts. If you need IIOP support you will need to add DIIOP to the ServeyTasks.
The Notes class implementations that use CORBA are located in NCSO.jar. The interfaces you should program to are in package lotus.domino.
To create an application using CORBA:
lotus.domino.NotesFactory.createSession (
'servername'
To create an applet that uses CORBA/IIOP in a Notes Database:
Extend the)base class lotus.domino.AppletBase.
The applet methods init, start, stop and destroy are implemented as final methods in appletbase. They will call notesAppletInit, notesAppletStart, notesAppletStop and notesAppletDestroy. Your applet should override these methods with your implementation.
AppletBase will create the Notes session for you. You get the session by calling getSession.
You can optionally use getSession(username, password) where the password is the Inteynet password setup in the person record. If you do not specify a username, Anonymous is used.
Add your applet to a form using Domino Designer. Include your class files and NCSO.jar
Server Configuration
Basic
The noi server also has two other configuration parameters:
Number of Threads
This value indicates how many threads the DIIOP server should use to do its work. This parameter is found in IIOP field on the Internet Protocols tab of the Server document.
Ports
The DIIOP server will listen on one or two ports depending on the value in the IIOP field on the Ports tab of the Server document.
There is a port setting for non-encrypted IO)in the "TCP/IP Port number" field, and a setting for the SSL encrypted IO in the "SSL Port Number" field.
Note that changing the "port number" or the "port status" will change the contents of the IOR and may cause applications that have privately stored the IOR to stop working.
Security
To make use of the IIOP interfaces, applets and applications must "login" to the server. This can be)done either by supplying a username or Internet password or by defaulting to anonymous user. In either case the Server document in the Domino Directory must be configured to allow access to the user. Ensure the following fields are appropriately set:
In the Server Access section of the Security tab: Access server; Not access server; Create new databases; Create replica databases.
In the IIOP Restyictions section of the Security tab: Run restricted java/javascript; Run Unrestricted java/javascript
On the Ports - Internet Ports - IIOP tab: Name & Password; Anonymous settings for TCPIP and SSL
The DIIOP server refreshes its cache of security options each half hour. To force a refresh after altering security settings, issue "tell diiop refresh" from the server console.
The database field MAX_PASSWORD_ACCESS applies.
These NOTES.INI settings are enabled:
NoAmbiguousWebNames
WebNameAuthentic
NABWebLookupView
oGMlO
Make sure you backed up important Notes client files. See the "Backing up Notes client files" release note in this section.
Run SETUP.EXE. Follow the prompts on the InstallShield screens to properly install the software. Select the type of client for which you purchased a license.
Start Notes.
Notes sets up and upgrades tie software automatically if you install R5 in the same directory as the previous release of Notes. If you install the R5 software in a different directory, Notes prompts you to complete the configuration process. If you install Notes in a different directory, be aware that the Setup program places NOTES.INI in the Notes data directory. In previous releases, the Install program placed NOTES.INI in the system directory by default.
Notes automatically upgrades)your Personal Address Book to the R5 Domino Directory design. If you have Internet mail set up to work with POP3, Notes creates an Account document for that Internet mail configuration. See the "Creating account documents for Internet mail" release note.
f)'cO
This feature allows application designers to specify a target frame when opening Notes design notes.
Syntax
@SetTargetFrame(
targetframe
Parameter
targetframe
Text or text list. The name of the frame that a Notes design note should be opened into. For nested framesets that may have frames with the same names, use the text list .
Usage
Use @SetTargetFrame to allow opening of certain design notes in a specific frame. @SetTargetFrame should be used before opening the design note that should go into a specific frame. The following open commands will use the frame specified in @SetTargetFrame:
OpenView
Compose
OpenPage
OpenFrameset
@SetTargetFrame is intended for use in action and hotspot formulas.
Examples
The following examples can be better understood by looking at the picture below. The picture illustrates 2 framesets that have been defined. The outer frameset contains frames "Frame A" and "Frame B". Frame "Frame B" contains a frameset which contains frames "Frame C" and "Frame A".
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
This example opens the view "My View" in frame "Frame A".
@SetTargetFrame("Frame A");
@Command([OpenView];"My View");
The other open commands listed above would also have opened into frame "frame A".
This example uses the text list format to open a form into frame "frame A" which is nested in "frame B".
@SetTargetFrame("Frame B":"Frame A");
@Command([Compose;"Main Form");
You can now create Java agents directly in Notes.
To create a Java agent, select Java from the Run list box. When you select Java, the following editor window appears, with the standard template code required of all Java agents. Either delete it and start from scratch or use it as a foundation for your own work.
"""333DDDUUUfffwww
4W,W4W21F/V4C,.X
_ISTRNG
4W21F/V4C,.X
ct 6.0/6.1
rd for Windows 6
DITIMP32=GIF Ima
cel 4.0/5.0
_IWKSE
WordPerfe
Image
.0/6.1
Java files
At the top of the editor window is a 3D bar that displays the name of the file. The file name is taken from the Java source file that contains the code. You cannot directly edit the file name since by rule the file name must be the same as the public class defined in the code. Designer tracks what the class name is and changes the filename if you change the class name. If you want to add another public class to the agent click the New Class button at the bottom of the agent screen. Designer displays a new "Untitled.Java" 3D bar named
and opens a new edit window, as in the following graphic:
"""333DDDUUUfffwww
Lotus 1-2-
DITIMP32=GIF Ima
_ITIFF
Importing external source and resources
If you have an external agent that you've written and you want to bring it into the Notes IDE or if your agent needs some external resources such as bitmaps or .jar files, use the Organize Java Agent dialog box to bring these files into the IDE. To access the dialog box, click the Edit Project button at the bottom of the screen.
"""333DDDUUUfffwww
[Notes]EDITE
You can load external resources or source code into the agent. If you load source files, the editor displays them in new sections.
Compile and Save
The agent compiles when you save it. If there are errors in your source code they display in the combo box at the bottom of the agent screen.
These enhancements apply only to the new lotus.domino package.
New methods
addDocument
void addDocument(Document doc)
void addDocument(Doc~ment doc, boolean checkDups)
The second parameter, if true, forces a remote add to be made immediately and a duplicate error to be reported immediately. Otherwise, remote adds are made after the next navigate or after another action (such as a StampAll) that calls the server.
deleteDocument
void deleteDocument(Document doc)
getDocument
Document getDocument(Document doc)
getNextDocument (additional method)
Document getNextDocument()
Gets the document following the current document.
getPrevDocument (additional method)
Document getPrevDocument()
Gets the document preceding the current document.
FTSearch (additional method)
void FTSearch(String query)
NULL will now be returned when a "get" method fails when tne entry you asked for does not exist for all:
DocumentCollection navigation methods, including getNth. (New for remote Java; present since R4.6 for LotusScript and local Java.)
View methods, including getNth and getDocumentByKey. (New for remote Java; present since R4.6 for LotusScript and local Java.)
ViewNavigator net methods. (New for remote Java, local Java, and LotusScript.)
Side-effect for getNth on sorted collections
When Delete is called on a sorted collection, internally we zero out our array element for the entry being deleted. When getNth is called on a sorted collection, we need to modify "n" to skip deleted entries. We considered compression, either at delete time or at getNth time, but since the collection index is kept in the entry or document object ntself, compression would require Fixup on potentially all of the entry or document objects created from the collection. If lots of deletes have been done on the collection, this could be an expensive operation.
Other side-effects
It's also possible to have a document object that resides in more than one DocumentCollection. Internally in lsxbe, it's still a single object, but it may have many collection parents/indices. The problem is not fixed for documents retrievnd from views, since the trend is towards view navigators (these will be added to LotusScript).
When doccoll.ftsearch was called to refine the document collection, the old collection index information in the document object was never fixed up, so it was possible to try to navigate the collection using a document from the previous (unrefined) collection, but the index would have been wrong.
Sorted collection definition
Sorted collections include all ViewEntryCollections, and DocumentCollections created from FTSearch (including DocumentCollections modified by calling the FTSearch method on the collection). All other DocumentCollections are unsorted.
Changed methods
RemoveAll
The RemoveAll method in DocumentCollection now deletes entries from the collection if they were removed. If the force flag is false, there may be entries remaining in the collection after RemoveAll executes. If tne force flag is true, the collection will be empty (count will be 0, all navigations will return null). In previous versions, RemoveAll removed documents from the database, but left the collection intact. No results were reported to the user, so the user had no immediate way of knowing if all documents were removed or not.
RemoveAll in ViewEntryCollection will also update the collection.
new with Developer Test Build 2
Aln navigation methods move the current pointer, including relative navigation methods and getNth.
Add and delete do not move the current pointer.
These enhancements apply only to the new lotus.domino package.
Ne~ properties
Addr821
String getAddr821()
Addr822Comment1
String getAddr822Comment1()
Addr822Comment2
String getAddr822Comment2()
Addr822Comment3
String getAddr822Comment3()
Addr822LocalPart
String getAddr822LocalPart()
Addr822Phrase
String getAddr822Phrase()
Language
String getLanguage()
Parent
Session getParent()
public interface Outline extends Base
public void clear() throws NotesException;
public OutnineEntry getParent(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getNext(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getPrev(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getNextSibling(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getPrevSibling(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public OutlineNntry getFirst() throws NotesException;
public OutlineEntry getLast() throws NotesException;
public long getLevel(OutlineEntry entry) throws NotesException;
public void addEntry(OutlineEntry entry, OutlineEntry afterEntry, boolean bMarkModified)
throws NotesException;
public void removeEntry(OutlineEntry entry, boolean bRecurse) throws NotesException;
public vnid moveEntry(OutlineEntry entry, OutlineEntry referenceEntry, boolean bAfter,
boolean bMarkModified) throws NotesException;
public void moveEntries(OutlineEntry startEntry, OutlineEntry endEntry,
ViewNavigator createViewNavFromDescendants(Object obj, int cacheSize)
createViewNavMaxLevel
ViewNavigator createViewNavMaxLevel(int level)
ViewNavigator createViewNavMaxLevel(int level, int cacheSize)
getAllEntries
new in Developer Test Build 2
ViewEntryCollection getAllEntries()
Returns all entries in the view or, if the view is filtered, all entries in the FTSearnh result. Can be used to create multiple FTSearch results for a view.
A new ViewEntry object always returns valid values for isValid, getNoteID, and getParent. If the ViewEntry is not valid, it returns an exception for any other method.
Properties
ChildCount
int getChildCount()
ColumnValues
Vector getColumnValues()
DescendantCount
int getDescendantCount()
Document
Document getDocument()
Returns null if the document was deleted after the ViewEntry object came into existence.
FTSearchScore
int getFTSearchScore()
IndentLevel
int getIndentLevel()
IsCategory
boolean isCategory()
IsConflict
boolean isConflict()
IsDocument
boolean isDocument()
IsTotal
boolean isTotal()
IsUnread
boolean isUnread()
IsValid
boolean nsValid()
Ensures that a returned ViewEntry object represents an existing entry (not a delete stub).
NoteID
String getNoteID()
Parent
Object getParent()
SiblingCount
int getSiblingCount()
The sibling count includes the current entry unless it is a total (because a total is not really part of the view hierarchy).
UniversalID
String getUniversalID()
Methods
GetPosition
String getPosition(char separator)
Properties
Count
int getCount()
Parent
View getParent()
Query
String getQuery()
Methods
addEntry
void addEntry(Object obj)
First parameter can be a ViewEntry or a Document. Returns an entry.
The second parameter, if true, forces a remote add to be made immediately and a duplicate error to be reported immediately. Otherwise, remote adds are made after the next navigate or anter another action (such as a StampAll) that calls the server.
deleteEntry
void deleteEntry(ViewEntry entry)
FTSearch
void FTSearch(String query)
void FTSearch(String query, int maxDocs)
getEntry
ViewEntry getEntry(Object obj)
Parameter can be a ViewEntry or a Document. Returns an entry. If not found, returns null. Can be used to move the current pointer. Can.be used to test for existence. Parameter does not have to be in the current collection.
getFirstEntry
ViewEntry getFirstEntry()
getLastEntry
ViewEntry getLastEntry()
getNextEntry
ViewEntry getNextEntry() // uses current pointer
ViewEntry getNextEntry(ViewEntry entry)
getNthEntry
ViewEntry getNthEntry(int n)
getPrevEntry
ViewEntry getPrevEntry() // uses current pointer
ViewEntry getPrevEntry(ViewEntry entry)
putAllInFolder
void putAllInFolder(String folderName)
removeAll
void removeAll(boolean force)
removeAllFromFolder
void removeAllFromFolder(String folderName)
stampAll
void stampAll(String itemName, Object value)
Current pointer
All navigation methods move the current pointer. This includes relative navigation methods and getNth.
Add and delete do not move the current pointer.
Duplicate entries
Duplicate entries exist when a document is categorized under multiple categories. Navigating over duplicate entries works except as follows:
getNth returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document.
getEntry(Object obj) returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document if the document is not part of this collection.
deleteEntry deletes the first instance. You can delete multiple instances with multiple calls to deleteEntry.
addEntry does not allow duplicates.
Properties
CacheSize
int getCacheSize()
void setCacheSize(int numEntries)
MaxLevel
Maximum navigation level for the navigator, Defaults to 31. Maximum may not be less than minimum implied by navigator type (children, descendents, category).
int getMaxLevel()
void setMaxLevel(int mLevel)
ParentView
View getParentView()
Methods
getChild
ViewEntry getChild()
ViewEntry getChild(ViewEntry entry)
getCurrent
ViewEntry getCurrent()
getFir|t
ViewEntry getFirst()
getFirstDocument
Skips categories.
ViewEntry getFirstDocument()
getLast
ViewEntry getLast()
getLastDocument
Skips categories and totals.
ViewEntry getLastDocument()
getNext
ViewEntry getNext()
ViewEntry getNext(ViewEntry entry)
getNextCategor|
ViewEntry getNextCategory()
getNextDocument
ViewEntry getNextDocument()
getNextSibling
ViewEntry getNextSibling()
ViewEntry getNextSibling(ViewEntry entry)
getNth
ViewEntry getNth(int n)
getParent
ViewEntry getParent()
ViewEntry getParent(ViewEntry entry)
getPos
\eturns entry at specified position, e.g., 1.2.3.
ViewEntry getPos(String pos, char separator)
getPrev
ViewEntry getPrev()
ViewEntry getPrev(ViewEntry entry)
getPrevCategory
ViewEntry getPrevCategory()
getPrevDocument
ViewEntry getPrevDocument()
getPrevSibling
ViewEntry getPrevSibling()
ViewEntry getPrevSlbling(ViewEntry entry)
gotoChild
boolean gotoChild()
boolean gotoChild(ViewEntry entry)
gotoEntry
boolean gotoEntry(Object obj)
gotoFirst
boolean gotoFirst()
gotoFirstDocument
boolean gotoFirstDocument()
gotoLast
boolean gotoLast()
gotoLastDocument
loolean gotoLastDocument()
gotoNext
boolean gotoNext()
boolean gotoNext(ViewEntry entry)
gotoNextCategory
boolean gotoNextCategory()
gotoNextDocument
boolean gotoNextDocument()
gotoNextSibling
boolean gotoNextSibling()
boolean gotoNextSibling(ViewEntry entry)
gotoParent
boolean goto\arent()
boolean gotoParent(ViewEntry entry)
gotoPos
boolean gotoPos(String pos, char separator)
gotoPrev
boolean gotoPrev()
boolean gotoPrev(ViewEntry entry)
gotoPrevCategory
boolean gotoPrevCategory()
gotoPrevDocument
boolean gotoPrevDocument()
gotoPrevSibling
boolean gotoPrevSilling()
boolean gotoPrevSibling(ViewEntry entry)
NULL will now be returned when a "get" method fails when the entry you asked for doesn't exist for all:
DocumentCollection navigation methods, including getNth. (New for remote Java; present since R4.6 for LotusScript and local Java.)
View methods, including getNth and getDocumentByKey. (New for |emote Java; present since R4.6 for LotusScript and local Java.)
ViewNavigator get methods (New for remote Java, local Java, and LotusScript.)
All ViewNavigator "goto" methods will return true if they succeed or return false if the entry you asked to goto does not exist. (New for remote and local Java. LotusScript will not have "goto" methods in its ViewNavigator.)
Currlnt pointer
All navigation methods move the current pointer. This includes relative navigation methods and getNth.
Add and delete do not move the current pointer.
Duplicate entries
Duplicate entries exist when a document is categorized under multiple categories. Navigating over duplicate entries works except as follows:
getNth ret|rns the first ViewEntry instance for the document.
Navigators constructed from an object that did not come from the this view return the first instance of the object.
A Java application intended for remote run-time access of lotus.domino creates a Slssion with the NotesFactory method createSession(String hostname, String user, String pwd) or createSession(String hostname). NotesFactory is new with R5 and the lotus.domino package.
Note that this is a change in createSession() from previous public releases. createSession() now takes a hostname as the first parameter instead of an IOR. This is done to eliminate the extra step of getting the IOR and then creating the session. The IOR (initial object reference) parameter is requi|ed to access a Domino server remotely. It is a string contained in the file diiop_ior.txt in the notes directory data\domino\html of the Domino server. The NotesFactory method getIOR(String host) returns the IOR for a given host.
The second and third parameters must be a user name and Internet password in the public address book on the server being accessed. If a name and password are not specified, anonymous access must be permitted by the server.
The lpplication must not use the NotesThread method. NotesThread is for local access only.
This example demonstrates an application using remote calls:
import lotus.domino.*; // replaces old lotus.notes package
public class platform3 implements Runnable
String host=null, IOR=null, user="", pwd="";
public static void main(String argv[])
{
if(argv.length<1)
{
System.out.println("Need to supply Notes server name");
return;
}
platform3 t = new platform3(argv);
Thread nt = new Thread((Runnable)t);
nt.start();
}
public platform3(String argv[])
{
host = argv[0];
if(argv.length >= 2) user = argv[1];
if(argv.length >= 3) pwd = arg|[2];
}
public void run()
{
try
{
Session s = NotesFactory.createSession(host, user, pwd);
String p = s.getPlatform();
System.out.println("Platform = " + p);
}
catch (Exception e)
{
e.printStackTrace();
}
}
Embed a CORBA applet (in either a document or a form) using the same procedure as any other applet. Include the NCSO.jar file along with any applet files. Then, use the first panel of the applet properties box to set the CORBA applet checkbox.
Assuming your browser and server are set up correctly, you should be able to use a Netscape 4.* or I.E. 4.* browser to view these embedded CORBA applets on a Domino server. The CORBA property box setting tells Domino to provide HTLL source that the applet needs to make an IIOP connection back to the server.
For build 164, previously embedded CORBA applets should be refreshed. Use the Refresh menu option to replace the NCSO.jar file. Verify in the status bar that you get the following message: "Completed refreshing applet (1 of 2 files imported)". In certain cases, previously embedded CORBA applets may need to be rebuilt (with the latest NCSO.jar) because some of the method signatures may have been
changed.
If the applet does not load correctly when viewed with a browser, view the source. If the NOI_IOR and NOI_COOKIE PARAMs do not appear, verify that DIIOP is running on the server and that the CORBA applet checkbox is set.
Archltectural features
Removal of 64K limits
The 64K limit has been removed for the following:
Internal symbol and name tables.
Code
Dynamic strings
Classes
Arrays
The run time stack limit is unchanged; this may be expanded in a future release.
Removing the 64K limit greatly enhances the user's capability to create bigger LotusScript modules. Previously, users were forced to break modules into different script libraries. This enhancement allows greater flexibility to organize programs.
Two-pass,compilers
The LotusScript compiler has an additional pass. As a result, you need not forward declare any sub, function or class before using it. Additionally, you can now use a class definition inside another class without worrying about the order.
Backward compatibility
LotusScript's new object code will execute in older versions of the software. If you don't use any new features, your code will run on older versions of Notes.
Syntax Changes
New builtins to help manipulate Notes data
LotusScript 4.0 provides a new set of functions for data (text list) manipulation. These functions have the equivalance of Notes @functions but are more efficient for manipulation since you can use them directly within LotusScript:
New string manipulation functions include:
STRLeft
STRLeftBack
STRRiglt
STRRightBack
New text list manipulation functions include:
ArrayAppend
ArrayGetIndex
ArrayReplace
FullTrim
SLEEP
The sleep function is provided to allow LotusScript program to wait without taking up CPU time.
Synchronization Functions
To support multiple LotusSlript programs running in the same process, LotusScript 4.0 has added the synchronization functions:
CreateLock
DestroyLock
CodeLock
CodeUnlock
CodeLockCheck
These functions are only useful when used to run HTTP LotusScript agents and must be used carefully.
Enhanced International Support
Thai support
LotusScript 4.0 has added extensive support for Thai calenda| in Thai environment. The Format function has been extended to handle Thai date/time formats. Additionally, a new set of builtins manipulate columns.
Leftc
Rightc
InStrc
IMESetMode
You can now change the IME Mode directly through LotusScript using the ILESetMode function.
Additional System Services
Version 4.0 introduces the following changes for LSX programming:
semaphore service
To support thread-safe code, we have introduced semaphore services. This service is available through the LSX Toolkit.
new ccStr
- This release includes a new version of ccStr900, which has many improvements over tle last one.
long string manipulation
- Additional functions are provided for manipulating long strings. All the old calls will still work without modification.
Enhanced LotusScript 3.x improvements (in various Notes maintenance releases)
Thread-safe LotusScript
This first appears in Notes 4.51 and is used exclusively for the Domino HTTP server. You can have multlple LotusScript agents running in the same process.
Dynamic @evaluate support
This first appears in Notes 4.52 and allows users to change Notes macros dynamically using a variable instead of a constant string.
Related Work
Recompile C-API for Notes
Although this is not fundamentally a language feature, it is one of the most requested features for Notes. There are many places to associate scripts in Notes. We ha|e provided a C-API for advanced users to recompile scripts inside a Notes database. For example, the Notes Global Designer uses the C API to extract scripts, modify scripts by substituting variou
s international strings, recompile scripts, and store scripts in the database. The C API lets you do this without using the IDE.
Ne| ACL property
InternetLevel (read-write???)
levelInteger
notesACL
InternetLevel
notesACL
.InternetLevel =
levelInteger
are these ACLLEVEL_NOACCESS, ACLLEVEL_DEPOSITOR, ACLLEVEL_DESIGNER, ACLLEVEL_EDITOR, ACLLEVEL_MANAGER, ACLLEVEL_NOACCESS, ACLLEVEL_READER
true if the database is a Directory Catalog, also called Light Weight NAB and Enterprise Address Book. This property is valid only for a database retrieved through the AddressBooks property of NotesSession and explicitly opened. For all other NotesDatabase objects, this property returns false.
MaxSize (read-write)
sizeLong
notesDatabase
.MaxSize
notesDatabase
.MaxSize
sizeLong
maximum Size assigned to the database when the database was created.
ReplicationInfo
notesReplication
notesDatabase
.ReplicationInfo
New methods
FTDomainSearch
notesDocumentCollection
notesDatabase
.FTDomainSearch(
queryString
maxdocsInteger
sortoptionInteger
] [
otheroptionsInteger
] [
startLong
] [
countInteger
entryformString
GetFir|tProfileDoc
notesDocument
notesDatabase
.GetFirstProfileDoc(
groupName
GetNextProfileDoc
notesDocument
notesDatabase
.GetNextProfileDoc()
Where GetFirstProfileDoc is called to initialize list of profile documents and return the first profile document il the list. The optional profileName parameter allows retrieval of profile documents with matching name. If not specified, all profile documents within the database are returned.
GetNextProfileDoc returns the next profile document in the list. When the list of profile documents is exhausted, the result profile document pointer is set to NULL.
Enhanced method
GetURLHeaderInfo
Now converts all dashes to underscores.
.WDfO
New properties
FolderReferences
variant
notesDocument
.FolderReferences
IsDeleted
boolean
notesDocument
.IsDeleted
IsValid
new with Developer Test Build 2
boolean
notesDocument
.IsValid
Ensures that a returned NotesDocument object represents an existing document (not a delete stub). You should call IsValid only once after getting the NotesDocument object. Use IsDeleted to ens|re that a valid document you are working on was not deleted.
References
new with Developer Test Build 2
variant
notesDocument
.References
New methods
GenerateHTML
new with Developer Test Build 2
Call
notesDocument
.GenerateHTML(
pathNameString
GenerateHTMLStrilg
new with Developer Test Build 2
string
notesDocument
.GenerateHTMLString(
referencesVariant
FTSearchScore usage notes [
new with Developer Test Build 2 ]
If a document is in more than one NotesDocumentCollection or NotesViewEntryCollection, its score is that of the last collection it was retrieved from. The score is correct unless you,get the score from the current object after retrieving the same document from another collection.
Documents added to a collection have a search score of 0.
Documents deleted from a view have a search score of 0.
New methods
AddDocument
new with Developer,Test Build 2
notesDocumentCollection
.AddDocument(
noteIDString
DeleteDocument
new with Developer Test Build 2
notesDocumentCollection
.DeleteDocument(
deleteDocumentNotesViewEntry
GetDocument
new with Devellper Test Build 2
notesDocument
notesDocumentCollection
.GetDocument(
documentNotesDocument
The methods work as follows:
- adds an entry to the collection. For sorted collections, the entry is appended. For unsorted collections, the entry is inserted using an internal algorithm. Since the entry is returned from this call, the user can lavigate from it to determine its position. The code always checks for duplicates, and raises an error if a duplicate is found. This is an expensive check (performance wise) on large sorted collections, but it is not expected that adding to a sorted collection will be a much-used operation.
Delete
- deletes an entry from the collection (not from disk). The specified entry (or document) must have originated in this collection. If the entry does not exist in the collection,,or if it was removed from the database by a RemoveAll operation, an error will be raised.
- returns the entry in the collection that corresponds to the specified document. This provides a way to navigate to a particular spot in the collection and check on its existence/validity. If the entry is not present, nothing is returned.
new with Developer Test Build 2
Sile-effect for getNth on sorted collections
When Delete is called on a sorted collection, internally we zero out our array element for the entry being deleted. When getNth is called on a sorted collection, we need to modify "n" to skip deleted entries. We considered compression, either at delete time or at getNth time, but since the collection index is kept in the entry or document object itself, compression would require fixup on potentially all of the entry or document objects created lrom the collection. If lots of deletes have been done on the collection, this could be an expensive operation.
Other side-effects
It is possible to have a document object that resides in more than one DocumentCollection. Internally in lsxbe, it is still a single object, but it may have many collection parents/indices. This problem is not fixed for documents retrieved from views, since the trend is toward view navigators (these will be added to LotusScript).
When doccoll.ftsearch was called to refine the document collection, the old collection index information in the document object was never fixed up, so it was possible to try to navigate the collection using a document from the previous (unrefined) collection, but the index would have been wrong. This probably didn't happen very often because most people start from first, however, the indexes are now being fixed.
Sorted collection definition
Sorted,collections include all ViewEntryCollections, and DocumentCollections created from FTSearch (including DocumentCollections modified by calling the FTSearch method on the collection). All other DocumentCollections are unsorted.
Changed methods
RemoveAll
The RemoveAll method in DocumentCollection will now delete entries from the collection if they were removed. If the force flag is false, there may be entries remaining in the collection after RemoveLll executes. If the force flag is true, the collection will be empty (count will be 0, all navigations will return null). In previous versions, RemoveAll removed documents from the database, but left the collection intact. No results were reported to the user, so the user had no immediate way of knowing if all documents were removed or not.
Ne| and changed properties
References
variant
notesItem
.References
Type
MIME_PART - new data type
New methods
GenerateHTMLString
string
notesItem
.GenerateHTMLString(
referencesVariant
"zYfO
These enhancements apply only to the new lotus.domino package.
New properties
Addr821
string
notesName
.Addr821
Addr822Comment1
string
notesName
.Addr822Comment1
Addr822Comment2
string
notesName
.Addr822Comment2
Addr822Comment3
string
notesName
.Addr822Comment3
Addr822Comment4
string
notesName
.Addr822Comment4
Addr822LocalPart
string
notesName
.Addr822LocalPart
Addr822Phrase
string
notesName
.Addr822Phrase
Language
string
notesName
.Language
RU" )9
>-DeO
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Janet McCagn/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotuslotus.domino.RichTextParagraphStyle - new class
CN=Tamara Conder/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Tamara Conder/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEnhancements in LotusScript, version 4.0
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
Release Notes01 What's new?
TCOR424KBL
Reference LotusScriptHelp Screen
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNotesACL and NotesACLEitry enhancements
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNotesOutline - new class
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNotesOutlineEntry - new class
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
NotesRegistration classRegistrationLotusScriptUser typeRegisterNewUser methodClient type
Release Notes01 What's new?
RPEN3TZJK7
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Perron/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNotesReplication - new class
Designer01 What's new?04 New Features01 LotusScript
CN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Web Server API (DSAPI): Known problems
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Domino Server APIDSAPI
Release Notes01 What's new?
CPEN42NPPU
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Property
HasChanged
flagBoolean
notesOutline
.HasChanged
Methods
AddEntry
Call
tesOutline
.AddEn
newEntryNotesOutlineEntry
newEntryNotesOutlineEntry
markAsModifiedInteger
Clear
Call
notesOutline
.Clear(
GetFirst
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetFirst( )
GetLast
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetLast( )
GetLevel
levelLong
notesOutline
.GetNext(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntry
GetNext
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetNext(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntr
GetNextSibling
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetNextSibling(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntry
GetParent
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetParent(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntry
GetPrev
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetPrev(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntry
GetPrevSibling
notesOutlineEntry
notesOutline
.GetPrevSibling(
outlineEntryNotesOutlineEntry
MoveEntries
Call
notesOutline
.MoveEntries(
tartEntryNotesOutlineEntry
endEntryNotesOutlineEntry
referenceEntryNotesOutlineEntry
moveAfterInteger
markModifiedInteger
MoveEntry
Call
notesOutline
.MoveEntry(
moveEntryNotesOutlineEntry
referenceEntryNotesOutlineEntry
moveAfterInteger
] [
markModifiedInteger
notesOutline
New NotesOutline(
databaseNotesDatabase
Remove
Call
notesOutline
.RemoveEntry(
removeEntryNotesOutlineEntry
recursiveIoteger
Properties
Not sure which are read-write.
FrameText
textString
notesOutlineEntry
.FrameText
HasCoildren
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.HasChildren
ImagesText
textString
notesOutlineEntry
.ImagesText
IsAutoSorted
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsAutoSorted
IsExpandable
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntr
.IsExpandable
IsHidden
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsHidden
IsInThisDb
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsInThisDb
IsPrivate
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsPrivate
IsTemporary
flagBoolean
notesOutlineEntry
.IsTemporary
Level
levelLong
notesOutlineEntry
.Level
OnClickText
textString
notesOutlineEntry
.OnClickText
TitleText
textString
notesOutlineEntry
.TitleText
typeLong
notesOutlineEntry
.Type
Property change
RegisterNewUser
Takes an additional optional parameter, userType, a constant of type integer with legal values of NOTES_DESKTOP_CLIEN_ (desktop client), NOTES_FULL_CLIENT (full client, default), and NOTES_LIMITED_CLIENT (mail client).
This new class holds all the replication properties. There is one NotesReplication class per NotesDatabase class. The advantage of this model is that you can set many properties at once and then call the NotesReplicationSettings.U
date method
Properties
Abstract (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.Abstract
notesReplication
.Abstract
flagBoolean
If set, truncate large documents and remove attachments. Disable truncation by clearing this bit.
CutoffDate
timeDateVariant
notesReplication
.CutoffDate
Timedate value that is calculated by subtracting the cutoff interval from today's date.
CutoffDelete (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.CutoffDelete
notesReplication
.CutoffDelete =
flagBoolean
If set, the Server's Replicator Task automatically deletes notes toat are older than the cutoff date. Disable automatic document deletions by clearing this bit.
CutoffInterval (read-write)
intervalLong
notesReplication
.CutoffInterval
notesReplication
.CutoffInterval =
intervalLong
The age in days at which deleted document identifiers are purged.
Disabled (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.Disabled
notesReplication
.Disabled
flagBoolean
If set, the Server's Replicator Task ignores this database. Enable replication by clearing this bit.
DoNotBrowse (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.DoNotBrowse
notesReplication
.DoNotBrowse =
flagBoolean
If set, do not/list in Open Database dialog box. Enable listing in Open Database dialog box by clearing this bit.
DoNotCatalog (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.DoNotCatalog
notesReplication
.DoNotCatalog =
flagBoolean
If set, Server's Catalog Task will not add this database to CATALOG.NSF. Enable cataloging by clearing this bit.
HideDesign (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.HideDesign
notesReplication
.HideDesign =
flagBoolean
If set, hide the design of this database. Disable hide design by clearing this bit.
IgnoreDeletes (read-write)
variant
notesReplication
.IgnoreDeletes
If set, don't propagate deleted notes (deletion stubs), when replicating from thos database. Enable propagation by clearing this bit.
IgnoreDestDeletes (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.IgnoreDestDeletes
notesReplication
.IgnoreDestDeletes =
flagBoolean
If set, don't replicate deleted notes into destination database.
MultiDbIndex (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.MultiDbIndex
notesReplication
.MultiDbIndex =
flagBoolean
Include in Multi Database indexing.
NeverReplicate (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.NeverReplicate
notesReplication
.NeverReplicate =
flagBoolean
If set, the Server's Replicator Task Ignores this database. Enable replication by clearing this bit. Since this can onoy be done programatically, it is a more bullet-proof method than REPLFLG_DISABLE, which can be modified from the user interface.
NoChronos (read-write)
flagBoolean
notesReplication
.NoChronos
notesReplication
.NoChronos =
flagBoolean
If set, disable background macros for this database. Enable background macros by clearing this bit.
reset the replication values to the last saved state
notesReplication
.Save()
save the replication values, must be called to make replication settings persistent
Changed method
AppendDocLink (third parameter is new)
notesRichTextItem
.AppendDocLink(
linkToObject
commentString
hotSpotTextString
HotSpotText is a new Optional String argument on the AppendDocLink method. If supplied/ the HotSpotText will appear in the RichTextItem as boxed text which can be clicked on with the mouse to follow the link. In this case, no other token appears in the text.
New methods
AddPageBreak
notesRichTextItem
.AddPageBreak(
RTPStyleNotesRichTextParagraphStyle
AddPageBreak places a hard page break at the end of a NotesRichTextItem. It oay be called with or without a RichTextParagraphStyle object as a parameter. If supplied, the new page will begin with the paragraph style.
AppendParagraphStyle
notesRichTextItem
.AppendParagraphStyle(
RTPStyleNotesRichTextParagraphStyle
Properties
Alignment (read-write)
alignmentInteger
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.Alignment
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.Alignment
alignmentInteger
alignment
can be ALIGN_CENTER, ALIGN_FULL, ALIGN_LEFT, ALIGN_NOWRAP, ALIGN_RIGHT
FirstLinoLeftMargin (read-write)
marginLong
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.FirstLineLeftMargin
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.FirstLineLeftMargin
marginLong
InterLineSpacing (read-write)
spacingInteger
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.InterLineSpacing
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.InterLineSpacing
spacingInteger
spacing
can be SPACING_DOUBLE, SPACING_ONE_POINT_50, SPACING_SINGLE
LeftMargin (read-write)
marginLong
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.LeftMargin
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.LeftMargin
marginLong
RightMargin (read-write)
marginLong
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.RightMargin
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.RightMargin
marginLong
SpacingAbove (read-write)
spacingInteger
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SpacingAbove
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SpacingAbove
spacingInteger
spacing
can be SPACING_DOUBLE, SPACONG_ONE_POINT_50, SPACING_SINGLE
SpacingBelow (read-write)
spacingInteger
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SpacingBelow
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SpacingBelow
spacingInteger
spacing
can be SPACING_DOUBLE, SPACING_ONE_POINT_50, SPACING_SINGLE
Tabs (read only)
tabsVariant
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.Tabs
tabsVariant
(guessing) is an array of Long
Methods
ClearAllTabs
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.ClearAllTabs()
SetTab
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SetTab(
positionLong
typeInteger
is TAB_CENTER, _AB_DECIMAL,TAB_LEFT, or TAB_RIGHT
SetTabs
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
.SetTabs(
numberInteger
startPositionLong
intervalLong
typeInteger
is TAB_CENTER, TAB_DECIMAL,TAB_LEFT, or TAB_RIGHT
New property
PassThruHTML (read-write)
flagIntegerConstant
notesRichTextStyle
.PassThruHTML
notesRichTextStyle
.PassThruHTML
flagIntegerConstant
True, False, YES, NO, MAYBE/STYLE_NO_CHANGE
HTML text may be embedded in/a NotesRichTextItem by setting this property and then calling the AppendText method. These attributes are useful when the document is served up to the Web. The text may be visible or invisible when displayed by the Notes Editor, controlled by View options.
Properties
Position
positionLong
notesRichTextTab
.Position
typeInteger
notesRichTextTab
.Type
is TAB_CENTER, TAB_DECIMAL, TAB_LEFT, or TAB_RIGHT, defined in NotesRichTextParagraphStyle
Methods
Clear
Call Clear()
New properties
NotesBuildVersion
long
notesSession
.NotesBuildVersion
UserNameList
variant
notesSossion
.UserNameList
New methods
CreateName
notesName
notesSession
.CreateName(
nameString
CreateRichTextParagraphStyle
notesRichTextParagraphStyle
notesSession
.CreateRichTextParagraphStyle()
New and changed methods
OpenNavigator (new)
Call
notesUIDatabase
OpenNavigator(
navigatorNameString
fullWindowBoolean
OpenView (parameters 2 and 3/are new)
Call
notesUIDatabase
OpenView(
viewNameString
keyString
newInstanceBoolean
New events
PostDragDrop
new with Developer Test Build 2
PostDragDrop(Source As NotesUIDatabase, EntryName, Continue)
PostDragDrop
new with Developer Test Buold 2
QueryDragDrop(Source As NotesUIDatabase, EntryName, Continue)
New methods
FindFreeTimeDialogEx
flagBoolean
notesUIDocument
.FindFreeTimeDialogEx(
reqPeoploItemsVariant
optPeopleItemsVariant
reqRoomItemsVariant
optRoomItemsVariant
reqResourceItemsVariant
optResourceItemsVariant
removedPeopleItemsVariant
startDateTimeString
endDateTimeString
same as FindFreeTimeDialog, but ...
... parameters, oxcept for last two, are String array instead of String
returns True if user selects OK, False if user selects Cancel
FindString
notesUIDocument
.FindString(
fieldNameString
GetSelectedText
textString
notesUIDocument
.GetSelectedText(
fieldNameString
Import
new with Developer Test Build 2
notesUIDocument
.Import(
filterString
] [
filenameString
SpellCheck
notesUIDocument
.SpellCheck()
New events
PostSave
PostSave( Source As NotesUIDocument )
New properties
CaretCategory
variant
notesUIView
.CaretCategory
New methods
Call
notesUIView
Print(
numCopiesInteger
fromPageInteger
toPageInteger
draftBoolean
pageSeparatorInteger
formOverrideString
printViewBoolean
dateRangeBeginVariant
dateRangeEndVariant
implements @Command([FolePrint])
omitting
numCopies
brings up the File Print dialog
fromPage
and
toPage
, 0 means all
last 2 parameters are for printing a calendar view
New properties
CurrentDatabase
notesUIDatabase
notesUIWorkspace
.CurrentDatabase
CurrentView
notesUIView
notesUIWorkspace
CurrentView
New methods
Folder
variant
notesUIWorkspace
.Folder(
folderNameString
moveOrCopyBoolean
with first parameter, moves or copies the folder
without parameters, brings up the Move To Folder dialog
GetListOfTunes
notesUIWorkspace
.GetListOfTunes()
OpenFileDialog
stringArrayVariant
notesUIWorkspace
.OpenFileDialog(
multipleSelectionBoolean
titleString
filtersString
initialDirString
initialFileString
filters limits the files displays; e.g., "Notes Databases|*.nsf|Notes Templates|*.ntf"
return value is a Variant containing a String array of selected file names if the user presses OK; Empty if the user presses Concel
PickListCollection
notesDocumentCollection
notesUIWorkspace
.PickListCollection(
typeInteger
multipleSelectionInteger
serverString
databaseFileNameString
viewNameString
titleString
promptString
columnInteger
is restricted to PICKLIST_CUSTOM (brings up dialog for specified view)
return value is a NotesDocumentCollection object if user presses OK; Nothing if user presses Cancel
PickListStrings
stringArrayVariant
notesUIWorkspace
.PickListStrings(
typeOnteger
multipleSelectionInteger
serverString
databaseFileNameString
viewNameString
titleString
promptString
columnInteger
is PICKLIST_CUSTOM (brings up dialog for specified view), PICKLIST_OAMES (brings up names dialog), PICKLIST_RESOURCES (brings up resources dialog), PICKLIST_ROOMS (brings up rooms dialog)
parameters from
server
on apply only to PICKLIST_CUSTOM
return value is a Variant containing a String array if user presses OK; Empty if user presses Cancel
PlayTune
notesUIWorkspace
.PlayTune(
tuneNameToPlayString
Prompt
iant
notesUIWorkspace
.Prompt(
typeInteger
titleString
promptString
defaultVariant
valuesVariant
brings up @Prompt dialog
is PROMPT_OK, PROMPT_YESNO, PROMPT_YESNOCANCEL, PROMPT_EDIT, PROMPT_LIST, PROMPT_COMBO, PROMPT_EDITCOMBO, PROMPT_LISTMULT, or PROMPT_PA_SWORD
default
for EDIT, LIST, COMBO, EDITCOMBO, LISTMULT is String, String array, Variant of a String value, Variant array of String values
values
for LIST, COMBO, EDITCOMBO, LISTMULT is String array, Variant of a String value, Variant array of String values
return value for OK, YESNO, YESNOCANCEL is a Variant of an Integer value
return value for EDIT, LIST, COMBO, EDITCOMBO, and PASSWORD is variant of a String value
return volue for LISTMULT is a Variant array
return value is a Variant containing a String array if user presses OK; Empty if user presses Cancelpresses Cancel
RefreshParentNote
Call
notesUIWorkspace
.RefreshParentNote(
SaveFileDialog
stringArrayVariant
notesUIWorkspace
.SaveFileDialog(
multipleSelectionBoolean
titleString
filtersString
initialDirString
initialFileString
filters limits the files displays; e.g., "Notes Databases|*.nsf|Notes Templates|*.ntf"
return value is a Variant containing a String array of selected file names if the user presses OK; Empty if the user presses Cancel
SetCurreotLocation
Call
notesUIWorkspace
SetCurrentLocation(
locationString
location
is "" or omitted, brings up Change Location dialog; otherwise, switches to specified location
When you upgrade Notes to R5, Notes automatically
pgrades the design of your Personal Address Book. The first time you open your Personal Address Book after upgrading, Notes asks you to enter your preferences into the Personal Address Book profile. To enter your preferences, do the following:
Select an Address Book owner. Generally this is the person whose Notes client has been upgraded and who is the primary user of the address book.
Select whethor to sort alphabetically new groups that you create.
Select whether to allow LDAP queries of the address book to elicit detailed information, such as phone numbers.
Choose a background for the Business Cards in your address book. You can scroll through the backgrounds by clicking the right and left arrow buttons.
Choose a style for the Business Cards in your address book. You can scroll through the styles by clicking the right and left arrow buttons.
Ensures that a returned ViewEntry object represents an existing entry (not a delete stub).
NoteID
noteString
notesViewEntry
.NoteID
Parent
notesView
notesVjewEntry
.Parent
SiblingCount
countInteger
notesViewEntry
.SiblingCount
The sibling count includes the current entry unless it is a total (because a total is not really part of the view hierarchy).
UniversalID
UniversalIDString
notesViewEntry
.UniversalId
Methods
JetPosition
position
notesViewEntry
.GetPosition(
separatorString
_nkgO
ViewEntryCollection for LotusScript
ViewEntryCollections never contain categories or totals, only entries zhat correspond to documents. They differ from DocumentCollections in that they are always sorted. For getAllEntriesByKey results, the collection will be in View order. For FTSearch results, the collection will be in ftSearchScore order.
Also, columnValues are always accessible.
The methods and properties are the same as those for document collection, except for isSorted, which is in ViewEntryCollection because it is always true.
The enhancement requests being solved by ViewEntryCollection are:
1) want results of getAllDocumentsByKey in View order (solution is to use getAllEntriesByKey)
2) want column values accessible in results of getAllDocumentsByKey (solution is to use getAllEntriesByKey)
3) want a way to have multiple ftSearch result sets from a View (solution is to dump results to a ViewEntryCollection)
Properties
Count
countLong
notesViewEntryCollection
.Count
Parent
notesView
notesViewEntryCollection
.Parent
Query
queryString
notesViewEntryCollection
.Query
Methods
AddEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.AddEntry(
addEntryVariant
DeleteEntry
Call
notesViewEntryCollection
.DeleteEntry(
deleteEntryNotesViewEntry
FTSearch
Call
notesViewEntryCollection
.FTSearch(
forceInteger
GetEntry
new with Developer Test Build 2
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetEntry(
entryVariant
GetFirstEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetFirstEntry()
GetLastEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetLastEntry()
GetNextEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetNextEntry(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
GetNthEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetNthEntry(
indexLong
GetPrevEntry
notesViewEntry
notesViewEntryCollection
.GetPrevEntry(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
PutAllInFolder
notesViewEntryCollection
.PutAllInFolder(
folderNameString
RemoveAll
notesViewEntryCollection
.RemoveAll(
forceInteger
RemoveAllFromFolder
notesViewEntryCollection
.RemoveAllFromFolder(
folderNameString
StampAll
notesViewEntryCollection
.StampAll(
queryNameSzring
maxDocsInteger
UpdateAll
notesViewEntryCollection
.UpdateAll()
The methods work as follows:
- adds an entry to the collection. For sorted collections, the entry will be appended. For unsorted collections, the entry will be inserted using an internal algorithm. Since the entry is returned from this call, the user can navjgate from it to determine its position. We will always check for duplicates, and raise an error if a duplicate is found. This is an expensive check (performance wise) on large sorted collections, but it is not expected that adding to a sorted collection will be a much-used operation.
Delete
- deletes an entry from the collection (not from disk). The specified entry (or document) must have originated in this collection. If the entry does not exist in the collection, or jf it was removed from the database by a removeAll operation, an error will be raised.
GetByID
- returns the entry in the collection that corresponds to the specified noteid. This provides a way to navigate to a particular spot in the collection if you know the noteid of the entry you want to navigate to. If an entry with the specified noteid is not in the collection, an error is raised (this is one of those cases we need to resolve null/error on). This is also an expjnsive call (performance wise) for large sorted collections.
Contains
- returns true if the collection contains an entry with this noteid, false otherwise. This is an expensive call for large sorted collections.
Side-effect for getNth on sorted collections
When Delete is called on a sorted collection, internally we zero out our array element for the entry being deleted. When getNth is called on a sorted collection, we need zo modify "n" to skip deleted entries. We considered compression, either at delete time or at getNth time, but since the collection index is kept in the entry or document object itself, compression would require fixup on potentially all of the entry or document objects created from the collection. If lots of deletes have been done on the collection, this could be an expensive operation.
Other side-effects
It is possible to have a document object that resides in more zhan one DocumentCollection. Internally in lsxbe, it's still a single object, but it may have many collection parents/indices.
When doccoll.ftsearch was called to refine the document collection, the old collection index information in the document object was never fixed up, so it was possible to try to navigate the collection using a document from the previous (unrefined) collection, but the index would have been wrong.
Sorted collection definition
Sorted collections include all ViewEntryCollections, and DocumentCollections created from FTSearch (including DocumentCollections modified by calling the FTSearch method on the collection). All other DocumentCollections are unsorted.
RemoveAll
The RemoveAll method in DocumentCollection will now delete entries from the collection if they were removed. If the force flag is false, there may be entries remaining in the collection after RemoveAll exejutes. If the force flag is false, the collection will be empty (count will be 0, all navigations will return null). In previous versions, RemoveAll removed documents from the database, but left the collection intact. No results were reported to the user, so the user had no immediate way of knowing if all documents were removed or not.
RemoveAll in ViewEntryCollection will also update the collection.
Duplicate entries
Dupljcate entries exist when a document is categorized under multiple categories. Navigating over duplicate entries works except as follows:
getNth returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document.
getEntry(Object obj) returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document if the document is not part of this collection.
deleteEntry deletes the first instance. You can delete multiple instances with mzltiple calls to deleteEntry.
addEntry does not allow duplicates.
Properties
MaxLevel
Maximum navigation level for the navigator. Defaults to 31. Maximum may not be less than minimum implied by navigator type*(children, descendents, category).
notesViewNavigator
.MaxLevel
notesViewNavigator
.MaxLevel
ParentView
notesView
notesViewNavigator
.ParentView
Methods
getChild
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetChild(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getFirst
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetFirst
getFirstDocument
Skips categories.
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavjgator
.GetFirstDocument
getLast
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetLast
getLastDocument
Skips categories and totals.
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetLastDocument
getNext
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetNext(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getNextCategory
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetNextCategory(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getNextDocument
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetNextDocument(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getNextSibling
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetNextSibling(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getNth
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetNth(
indexLong
getParent
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetParent(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getPos
Returns entry at specified position, e.g., 1.2.3.
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetPos(
positionString
separatorString
getPrev
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetPrev(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getPrevCategory
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetPrevCategory(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getPrevDocument
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetPrevDocument(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
getPrevSibling
notesViewEntry
notesViewNavigator
.GetPrevSibling(
currentEntryNotesViewEntry
Juplicate entries
Duplicate entries exist when a document is categorized under multiple categories. Navigating over duplicate entries works except as follows:
getNth returns the first ViewEntry instance for the document.
Navigators constructed from an object that did not come from the this view return zhe first instance of the object.
Two new methods are added to support Transaction Mode, CommitTransactions, and RollbackTransactions. These take no arguments. The AutoCommit and CommitOnDisconnect properties are moved from the ODBCResultSet object to here. AutoJommit defaults to True and can be set False to enter Transaction Mode, if the driver and data source support transactions.
Methods GetRegistrationInfo and IsTimedOut have been removed from the ODBCConnection object.
The DisconnectTimeOut property of the ODBCConnection object has been permanently deactivated.
The Exclusive property of the ODBCConnection object can be set but has no effect. ConnectTo will behave as if Exclusive is True.
We have encounzered cases where an ODBC driver indicated that it did not support a certain mode, although it actually did. The IsSupported property of the ODBCConnection object may report incorrectly due to bugs in the ODBC driver. On the DB_SUPP_READONLY item, it may report incorrectly due to limitations in ODBC.
The planned support for asynchronous execution of queries has been removed. The IsSupported property of the ODBCConnection object will return False so that scripts that attempt to use asynchronous*mode when available will behave correctly.
The ConnectTo method of the ODBCConnection object does not perform the auto-registration of unregistered data sources.
The ExecProcedure method of the ODBCConnection object is removed. A new ExecProcedure method is added in ODBCResultSet object to execute a stored procedure.
The ListProcedures method of the ODBCConnection object does not work with some drivers.
A new property, UseRowID, is added to support "Select by RowID" mode. UseRowID defaults to False and can be set to true to enter "Select by RowID" mode if RowID is supported by the backend RDBMS. The statement "Qry.UseRowID=True" must be before "Qry.SQL=|SQL statement|" for it to take effect.
Foz example:
Dim Qry As New ODBCQuery
Qry.UseRowID = True
enables "select by rowid" mode if supported by the RDBMS)
Qry.SQL = "select * from TableName"
Msgbox Qry.SQL (will print "select *,
TableName.rowid
from TableName", and this SQL statement is used for subsequent operations)
Before upgrading Notes, the domain administrator may want to set the Administration Execution Control List (ECL) in the Domino Directory. The Administration ECL sets the default security on the Notes client when users start Notes for the first time after upgrading. Workstation security defines which group's applications can execute on a Notes client. If a group is not specified in the ECL for a client, Notes warns the user when an application created by the jroup attempts to run on that client.
For information on setting the Administration ECL, see the Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Notes R5 introduces Account documents, which contain information for accessing mail using POP, IMAP, and sending mail with SMTP. If your R4 Location document is sjt up to use POP or IMAP, Notes converts this information into an Account document for that setting. If you send mail to the Internet, Notes creates an SMTP Account document. The accounts are set for the Location that you set up for Internet mail.
Administrator Client01 What's new?04 New Features01 Migration
Release Notes01 What's new?
LRUD3TRR3D
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vlnny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLDIF to Notes migration tool
Administrator Client01 What's new?04 New Features01 Migration
Release Notes01 What's new?
LRUD3W9JJA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Eric \hibodeau/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMicrosoft Mail to Notes migration tool
Administrator Client01 What's new?04 New Features01 Migration
Release Notes01 What's new?
ETHU425PTW
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Rlbert Carter/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMigration SPI/API to migrate foreign directories into Notes
Administrator Client01 What's new?04 New Features01 Migration
Release Notes01 What's new?
RCAR3W8FFE
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNT User Migration tool
Administrator Client01 What's new?04 New Features01 Migration
Release Notes01 What's new?
LRUD3TRPJ4
StepsHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCreating a virtual server to host multiple Web sites
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3X3T7K
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAuthenticating Web clients using LDAP directories
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Security
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3UGRWD
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Denise McKenna/O=IrisCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusFile protection on the Web
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Security
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3X3TEA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Laura Rutherford/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew HTTP Security field in Server document
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Security
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusVeriSign Global Server ID support for NNTP, LDAP, IMAP and POP3
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?04 New Features01 Security
Release Notes01 What's new?
LRUD424SSD
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Michele Pennell/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Web Server API (DSAPI): Overview
Server01 What's new?=4 New Features01 Web Server
Domino Server APIDSAPI
Release Notes01 What's new?
CPEN42MKFF
?TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlmin/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Web Server API (DSAPI): Getting started
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
DSAPIHTTP
Release Notes01 What's new?
JCHN3ZYL79
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Christopher Petersen/O=IrisCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Web Server API (DSAPI): Reference guide
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
DSAPIDomino Server API
Releasm Notes01 What's new?
CPEN42MKFE
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The properties (AutoCommit and CommitOnDisconnect) where moved to the ODBCConnection object due to limitations of the ODBC standard. The AutoCommit property of the ODBCConnection object can be set False (when supported by the DBMS) to enter Transaction Mode, which applies to gll queries and result sets associated with that connection. The AutoCommit and CommitOnDisconnect properties of the ODBCResultSet object are obsolete and should not be used. The Commit and Rollback functions of Close, and the Transactions method, are replaced by the CommitTransactions and RollbackTransactions methods of the ODBCConnection object. These new methods take no arguments and apply to all transactions pending through that connection. You might get error 720, "You cannot have more than one statemgnt active, when SQL_AUTOCOMMIT is false" for INTERSOLV drivers. As a workaround, Lotus suggests to "Call Res.LastRow" after "Res.Execute" and before any "Res.UpdateRow" or "Res.Delete Row."
The Asynchronous and Override properties of the ODBCResultSet object are removed.
You can tell that a memory shortage caused truncation of the result set when, on the last row, IsEndOfData is True but NumRows are still DB_ROWSUNKNOWN.
Setting the CurrentRow property to 0 raises gn error (#545) once data has been fetched.
To discard the AddRow workspace and any changes that might be in it, call the Close method with the argument DB_CANCELADDROW. The rest of the result set remains open.
The documentation for the Close method shows the argument as optional, with DB_CLOSE being the default.
The behavior to the Current Row property is corrected in Notes and Domino Release 4.54. See the Current Row, AddRow and UpdateRow Guidelines note below to'assure proper behavior when updating data.
Current Row, AddRow and UpdateRow Guidelines:
UpdateRow leaves you on the current row. If you perform an AddRow followed by an UpdateRow, you remain at the added row. This behavior is identical for any row in the result set.
To Insert a Row, do
res. AddRow
res. SetValue( 1, data1)
res. SetValue(2, data2 )
res. UpdatgRow
The update any row in the result set, do
res. CurrentRow = a_row_number
res. SetValue( 1, data1)
res. SetValue(2, data2 )
res. UpdateRow
The update a row once it has been added using AddRow
res. CurrentRow = DB_ADDROW
res. SetValue( 1, data1)
res. SetValue(2, data2 )
res. UpdateRow
This last script example will position the cursor back on the last added row and update new chgnges.
The DeleteRow method might raise the error about not being applicable to the AddRow workspace in some cases where a different error message applies.
A new ExecProcedure Method is added in ODBCResultSet object to execute a stored procedure.
String. The name of the procedure you want to execute.
arg1..30
Up to 30 arguments may be passgd to a procedure. The arguments can be in any format. An argument can serve as input, output, or both. Argument data types must be consistent with the requirements of the procedure. All arguments are separated by commas. Any missing arguments are treated as NULL values.
The 30 argument limit is a LotusScript limitation.
To enter over 30 arguments, you can use the alternate form. The second argument must contain the constant DB_PARAM_ARRAY. The third argument can be an arraw of any size or type.
Return Value
Depending on the definition of the stored procedure in RDBMS, it can return values in several forms:
- the procedure can return output arguments
- the procedure can return a result set
- the procedure can return an execution status, as returned by the backend RDBMS.
The column specifier for all methods of the ODBCResultSet object that refer to single columns (GetValue or SetValue) cannot be of the Currency data type. All other numeric types work for columns specified by column number.
GetValue can terminate abruptly when retrieving data of the SQL_LONGVARCHAR type, which is variously known as "memo" or "rich text" and other type names in various databases. This has been isolated as a problem in the ODBC driver. If avaigable, try a later version of the same driver. Contact your ODBC vendor for additional assistance. SPR #
DMAN3L5RRJ
GetValue does not recognize image formats and treats the data as arbitrary binary.
The LotusScript variables used to store Date, Date-Time, and Time values should be declared as data type Variant or Double. For date-only values, the variable can also be of type String.
GetValue detects attempts to store integers outsidg the range of -32768 to 32767 into LotusScript variables of the Integer type, which is a "short" integer, but the error 500 does not give specific error messages.
The IsBeginOfData method returns 0 and IsEndOfData returns 1 when the result set has zero rows. If you do not know whether any rows are returned from your query, test for IsResultSetAvailable before using methods that assume that data is present.
The NextRow method of the ODBCResultSet object should not be used in a Whige or Until loop control. Use IsEndOfData in the While or Until and perform the NextRow inside the loop. For Do loops, perform NextRow inside the loop at the top, and check IsEndOfData in a Loop Until clause at the end. If no other row-positioning methods have been invoked between Execute and the start of the loop, the first invocation of NextRow stay on row 1 to enable the loop to cover all rows.
The RefreshRow method of the ODBCResultSet object has been removed.
The SetParametgr method of the ODBCResultSet object does not correctly set the value of a parameter inside single-quote marks. Instead the value of the parameter should incorporate the quote marks. For example, the following commands do not work as expected:
Myquery.SQL = "SELECT * FROM DATA WHERE CITY = '?city?' "
Result1.SetParameter(city,"Cambridge")
As a workaround, use these commands:
Myquery.SQL = "SELECT * FROM DATA WHERE CITY = ?city? "
Result1.SetParameter(city,"'Cambridge'")
To specify a null value for SetValue, LocateRow, etc., use the NULL constant provided by LotusScript. LS:DO do not need its own DB_NULLVALUE constant.
Data conversion matrix
How to read: The data types in the left-most column represent SQL data types. The chart describes whether a data conversion is attempted from the SQL data type on the left to a LotusScript data type during GetValue. The opposite conversion happens for SetValue.
LotusScript Classes
String
Boolean
Short
Single
Double
Currency
Date/ Time
,, 0,,
Variant
VARCHAR
LONG VARCHAR
DECIMAL
NUMERIC
TINYINT
SMALLINT
INTEGER
FLOAT
DOUBLE
BINARY
VAR BINARY
LONG VAR BINARY
TIME STAMP
Handling conversion errors and data truncatign
A brief look at the data conversion matrix above shows that data conversion from string to numeric data types like double or currency are permitted. As expected, a conversion exception is generated if the string contains no numeric data. Alternatively, an exception is generated if data loss occurs. These errors are only generated when LSDO performs the data conversion.
Using the cc:Mail to Notes migration tool, you can easily upgrade Lotus cc:Mail users/groups to Notes.
The cc:Mail user/group upgrade user interface is available in Domino Administrator, through the user registration tool on the People & Groups tab.
Before you begin
If you haven't already, use the client install pwogram to install Domino Administrator.
To convert cc:Mail users to Notes
On the People & Groups tab in Domino Administrator, click the Registration tool, then click Person. The Register Person dialog box appears.
Click the Migrate People button. The People and Groups Migration dialog box appears.
Select cc:Mail Users from the Foreign Directory Source box.
Enter the cc:Mail Post Office Name, Path, and Password into the cc:Mail Post Office Information Dialog and click OK. The users and groups listed in the cc:Mail directory appear in the Available people/groups box.
Select people and groups and click Add. The people and groups you add appear in the People/groups to migrate box.
In the Migration Options box, select the options to apply.
Click the Migrate button.
Click the Done button. The users you just upgraded now appear in the Registration status list of the Register Person dialog box.
Select users and click the Register button, or click Register All button to begin the Notes registration process. After you click Register, the Registration Tool creates a Directory entry for each user, converts each user's mail file to Notes, and converts each user's mail messages to Notes.
Note the following mail gonversion caveats:
Archive files are not converted by the Domino Administrator tool. A separate utility is available to convert the user's archive files and private directories on the user's workstation. This utility can be made available to the end user by using the "Send Upgrade Notifications" selection from the server's Domino Directory. This selection will allow you to send the user a mail message that will allow that uwer to launch the upgrade utility from the client's workstation.
When you use a Hub server as the registration server, information is not migrated correctly. The workaround is to specify the Notes mail servers for the users being migrated.
In some cases, Organizer .OR2 files that are password protected are not migrated correctly. If you encounter problems trying to migrate Organizer data, remove the password protection and try again.
Migrated users must select the All'Documents view of their Notes mail files to see e-mail messages containing the Notes Personal Address Book and Personal Journal databases converted from Organizer Address and Notepad Sections.
If you migrate an Organizer ToDo entry that has a blank date field, the date fields of the resulting Notes To Do entry may display invalid information. To correct the invalid dates, clear the ToDo fields in the Notes client.
Gullet
The Organizer conversion software (ORG32.EXE) fails to unload until after you exit the Domino Administrator. As a result, the computer running the Domino Administrator may encounter memory problems
if you migrate Organizer data for cc:Mail users.
Using the Exchange to Notes migration wool, you can easily upgrade Microsoft Exchange users/groups to Notes.
The Exchange user/group upgrade tool is available in Domino Administrator, through the user registration tool on the Directories tab.
Before you begin converting
If you haven't already, use the client install program to install Gomino Administrator on a machine on which Exchange has been installed.
Set up a privileged mail (MAPI) profile that allows you access to the Exchange Public Address Book and all mailboxes on the Exchange server.
To convert Exchange users to Notes
On the Directories tab in Domino Administrator, click the Registration'tool, then click User. The Register Person dialog box appears.
Click the Import Directory button. The Foreign Directory Import dialog appears.
Click Exchange Users in the Foreign Directory Source box.
Choose the Exchange Server profile name in the Choose Profile dialog, and click OK. The Foreign Directory Source window appears with the list of user in the Available users/groups box.
Highlight the users/groups you want to register and click the Add gutton. The users/groups you add appear in the Users/groups to Import box.
Click on Convert mail files to Notes mail and any other options you want in the Upgrade Options box.
Click the Import button.
Enter your certifier ID password.
Click the Done button. The users you just upgraded now appear in the Pending Registrations list of the Register Person dialog box.
Click thg Register button to begin the Notes registration process. After you click Register, the Exchange Tool creates a Directory entry for each user, converts each user's mail file to Notes, and converts each user's mail messages to Notes.
Note the following mail conversion caveats:
Embedded OLE objects are not working correctly.
Fidelity in the message conversion is not 100 percent
Using the LDIF (LDAP Data Interchange Format) to Notes Import tool, you can easily create Notes users by importing directory entries from an LDIF file.
The LDIF format conveys directory information taken from LDAP (Lightweight Directory Access Protocol) format. An LDIF record consists of a sequence of lines describing a directory entry. The following example diswlays two simple LDIF entries:
dn: cn= John Rutherford ou= Project Leaders, o=Ace Associates, c=US
objectclass: top
objectclass: person
objectclass: organizationalPerson
cn: John E Rutherford
sn: Rutherford
telephonenumber: +1 988 555 1212
To import LDIF entries to Notes
In Domino Administrator, go to the People & Groups tab and choose Registration - Person.
Enter the certifier password.
Click the Migrate People button. The People & Groups Migration dialog appears.
In the Foreign directory source box, choose LDIF entries.
Choose the LDIF file to use for import and click OK.
Choose any of the Migration Options.
Click the Migrate button. This may take up tg a minute to process.
Click OK at the status message that displays errors and successes. You can fix errors in the User Registration screen.
Click Done to return to the main User Registration screen. The users you just added now appear in the Pending Registrations box of the registration window (People - Register Person tool).
Modify each user entry if necessary, and click the Register or Register Gll button to begin the Notes registration process.
Note:
If user entries do not include a password, user registration randomly generates passwords by default.
Bullet
Using the Microsoft Mail to Notew migration tool, you can easily upgrade Microsoft Microsoft Mail users/groups to Notes.
The Microsoft Mail user/group upgrade user interface is available in Domino Administrator, through the user registration tool on the People & Groups tab.
Before you begin
If you haven't already, use the client install program to install Domino Administrator. Please note that durigg the InstallShield installation, you must click Customize and select migration tools.
To convert Microsoft Mail users to Notes
On the People & Groups tab in Domino Administrator, click the Registration tool, then click Person. The Register Person dialog box appears.
Click the Migrate People button. The People and Groups Migration dialog box appears.
Select Microsoft Maig Users from the Foreign Directory Source box.
Enter the Microsoft Mail Post Office Name, Path, and Password into the Microsoft Mail Post Office Information Dialog and click OK. The users and groups listed in the Microsoft Mail directory appear in the Available people/groups box.
Select people and groups and click Add. The people and groups you add appear in the People/groups to migrate box.
In the Migration Options box, select the options to apply.
Clgck the Migrate button.
Click the Done button. The users you just upgraded now appear in the Registration status list of the Register Person dialog box.
Select users and click the Register button, or click Register All button to begin the Notes registration process. After you click Register, the Registration Tool creates a Directory entry for each user, converts each user's mail file to Notes, and converts each wser's mail messages to Notes.
Using the NT user/group upgrade tool, you can easily migrate or upgrade NT users/groups on a selected domain into Notes as Notes users/groups. The NT migration or upgrade gives each user/group an address book entry and, if you choose to, a Notes ID and mail file for Notes users.
The NT user/group upgrade tool is available in Domino Administrator, through the user registration tool on the Directories tab.
Before you begin
If you haven't already, use the client install program to install Domino Administrator.
For security reasons, you must be an NT local account operator and an NT administrator.
To upgrade/migrate NT users to Ngtes
On the Directories tab in Domino Administrator, click the Registration tool, then click User. The Register Person dialog box appears.
Click the Import Directory button. The Foreign Directory Import dialog box appears.
Click NT Users in the Foreign Directory Source box.
Choose the users' NT domain in the Choose NT Domain dialog, and click OK. This steps retrieves all NT users/gwoups from the selected domain. Their full NT names appear in the Available users/groups entry on the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
Highlight the users/groups you want to register and click the Add button. The users/groups you add appear in the Users/groups to import box.
Click the Advanced button to bring up the NT User Upgrade Options dialog. Choose the Firstname Lastname option to allow Notes to parse each user's first and last name, and then click OK. Notes requires a gast name before it can register a user. This step allows intelligent parsing of the full name into Notes name components, instead of assuming a "firstname lastname" type NT full name.
Click the Import button.
Click the Done button. All NT full names are parsed according to the name parsing format you selected (Firstname Lastname). If the parser encounters any anomalies -- for example, the full name contained too few or too many name components -- the Adjust NT User Name Compogents dialog appears, and you must adjust the user name. If you hit Cancel on this dialog, the NT user is added to the registration queue with the name components parsed as displayed in the dialog. You can change the user name during the registration process.
The users you just upgraded now appear in the Pending Registrations list of the Register Person dialog box.
Click the Register or Register All button to begin the Notes registration process.
@%@$0s
In R5, you can use LDAP directories in addition to Domino directories to authenticate Web clients accessing a Domino server. Domino authenticates Web clients when you set up the client with name and password client authentication.
To set up authentication using LDAP directories, create the Directory Assistance databhse using the Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF) or replace the design on the Master Address Book using the Directory Assistance template. In the directory assistance document for the LDAP directory, select Yes in the Trusted for Credentials field for the corresponding rule.
When you mark the domain as trusted, Domino searches the primary address book for the user name and password, and if Domino cannot fhnd the user name and password, searches the secondary address books and LDAP directories for the trusted domains. You specify the order in which to search the trusted domains when you set up directory assistance.
The hierarchical name returned by the secondary address book or LDAP directory is checked against the trusted rule in the Directory Assistance database to make sure the organization and organizational units match the rule specified. For example, if the user name returned is Dave Lawshn/Lotus, then the Directory Assistance document must include */Lotus.
In previous releases, Domino authenticated Web clients using only the primary Domino directory and secondary Domino directories if the Trusted field was selected in the directory assistance document.
For information on setting up an LDAP directory assistance document, see online Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
R5 now supports file system protection when users browse files on the Web server. In previous releases, Domino did not enforce file system security for HTML, image, and other types of files that can be accessed by browser users. In R5, you can specify the level of access for these types of files and who can access them. As in previous releases, you do not need to use file system protection to protect Notes datahase (.NSF) files; you use database ACLs to protect them.
File system protection does apply to files that access other files, for example, HTML files that open image files. If a user has access to the HTML file, but does not have access to the JPEG file that the HTML file uses, Domino does not display the JPEG file when the user opens the HTML file.
File system protection does not always apply to CGI scripts, servlets, or agents that access files on thh system. For example,
if you use file protection on a CGI script that only allows a group called "Web Admins" to access certain files, the file protection applies to only hose files. However, if when the CGI script executes it opens other files, or causes other scripts to be executed, the system does not use file protection and the "Web Admins" group has access to those other files being called by the initial script.
You create a File Protection document for each direcxory that contains files that you want to protect or for individual files.
The default path is the Domino data directory, however, you may also create File Protection documents for directories other than those in the Domino data directory. You should consider setting up File Protection documents for all directories that browser users are able to access. You can use Directory Mapping documents to choose other directories outside the Domino data directory. For more information on Directory Maxping documents, see the "Domino URL mapping and redirection" release note in the What's New - Server - New Features - Web Server section.
To create File Protection documents
By default, the Domino Directory does not contain any File Protection documents, therefore, whether you are installing a new server or are upgrading an existing server, there will be no file protection in place until you crehte the documents.
In Domino Administrator, edit the Server document or Virtual server document for the server on which you want to protect files.
Choose
Actions
- Web
- Create File P
rotection, fill out the fields in the table below, and save the document.
In Domino Administrator, issue the command "tell http restart" to refresh the file protection sextings.
To view File Protection documents, open the Server - Web - Web Server Configurations view on the Configuration tab. Notes displays the File Protection documents as responses to the Server document.
From here you can edit or delete existing File Protection documents.
File Protectioh Tab/Field
Value
Basics - Applies to
This is a display only field. You can't deselect the checkbox. This field displays the name of the server or virtual server that the file protection document is being created for.
Basics - IP Address
This field appears only if you are creating h File Protection document for a virtual serv
Enter the IP address of the server to which the file protection applies.
Basics - Path
The drive, directory, or file that you want to restrict. The path is relative to the Domino data directory. Create one File Protection document for every path that you want to restrict on the server.
Examples: domino\html or c:\webfiles\html
Baxics - Realm returned to browser when access is denied
Optional. The
realm
name that you have assigned to the directory. When name and password protection is set up
on the server and users access files in this directory, this realm name appears in the browser's name and password dialog box. The realm assigned to a directory will be carried forward into any of its subdirectories. For more information on realms, see the "Creating a web realm" release note(in the What's New - Server - New Features - Web Server section.
Access Control - Current access control list
The users and groups who can access the files
or directories
you specified and the type of access they are allowed. Anyone who is not listed in the ACL receives the default level of access.
The default entry is automhtically set to No Access. You can change the default access entry if you want.
To add users to this list, click the Set/Modify Access Control List button. Select a user name or group
from the Domino Directory or type a name in the Name field.
Once you have selected a name, select one of the following:
GET and HEAD Methods -- users can open files and start programs in the directory
POST, GET, and HEAD Methods -- typically used to send data to a CGI program; therefore, grant POST access for directories that contain CGI programs
No Access -- denies access to the user or group
If users connect to the server using Anonymous access, enter Anonymous in the Name field and assign the appropriate access.
Cautionary Note against protecting program-related directories
There are several directories that are created on a Domino server in the notes\data\domino subdirectory
notes\data\domino\html
notes\data\domino\cgi-bin
notes\data\domino\adm-bin
notes\data\domino\icons
notes\data\domino\java
The "adm-bin"
"jhva"
and "icons" subdirectories contain files that are used by the Domino server. Do
not create restrictive File Protection documents for these directories, or else the Domino server will not be able to access these files and unpredictable behavior will result.
Upgrading
If you are upgrading from a previous release of Domino and previously set up "Protect Directives" in the httpd.cnf file, these are no longer valid in Domino R5. Protect Dirhctives in the httpd.cnf file will be ignored by Domino R5.
File Protection document examples
A File Protection document with the following settings allows all users in the Web User Group to open files and start programs in the c:\notes\data\domino\html directory:
Path: c:\notes\data\domino\html
Access: -Default- (No Access), Web User Group (GET and HEAD)
SECRET.HTM is a file thax resides in the notes\data\domino\html subdirectory. You do not want the members of the Web User Group to have access to this file; you only want one user, named Joe Smith to have access. Create a File Protection document with the following settings:
Path: c:\notes\data\domino\html\secret.htm
Access: -Default- (No Access)
Access: Joe Smith (GET and HEAD)
Basic
The Server document contains a new field that makes Web servers less vulnerable to security attacks by refining how Domino searches for names in user directories. You can find this field, called "HTTP server authentication", in the Security tab - HTTP Access section of the Server document.
The field contains two choices:
Option
Behavior
Fewer name variations with higher security
Users must enter, at minimum, a user's full name (for example, Robin Rutherford)
in the name and password dialog box in a web browser
. This lookup technique is less vulnerhble to attacks because a single authentication attempt does not produce as many matches, lessening the likelihood that a guessed password matches.
This choice is recommended for tighter security.
More name variations with lower security
Users can enter a variety of user name variations
in the name and password dialog box in a web browser
, such as first name and short name, and Domino tries to locate their distinguished name based on the password entered. This lookup technique can be vulnerable to hackers who attempt to access a server through a legitimate user account by guessing names and passwords.
This choice is the default and is the HTTP server lookup behavior used in prior releases.
Jg]hO
In previous releases of Notes and Domino, an administrator could, when creating or re-certifying ID files, specify a minimum number of characters for passwords. However, not all passphrases of equal length are equal in strength; some are more vulnerable to passphrase guessing attacks than others. Unfortunately, choosing good passphrases can be difficult. A completely random collection of uppercase and lowercase alphabetic characters combined xith numbers and punctuation marks (for example, 5P/#4Fwi=!) would be ideal, but such a passphrase is not easily remembered and may need to be written down. In contrast, a passphrase consisting of one lone word (for example, "password") provides little security.
R5 includes a new feature that builds on the minimum password length feature. Administrators can now specify one of several password quality levels instead of a minimum password length when registering or re-certifying ah ID file. The higher the level, the more complex the passphrase needs to be and the more difficult it is for an unauthorized user to guess the ID's passphrase. When a user changes his or her password using R5, the quality of that password is estimated and then compared against the password quality required for that ID file.
Mixed-case passphrases and passphrases containing numbers and punctuation are generally stronger per character than passwords consisting entirely of lowercaxe characters. Passwords that contain words are generally much weaker per character than any other kind of password. The quality levels are stored in the ID file as equivalent password lengths, so that an ID file created by an R5 client can be used in previous releases of Notes and ID files created in previous releases of Notes can also benefit from the password quality checking when used with R5. A random lowercase alphabetic password will receive equivalent ratings under both R4.x and R5; passwords contahning words may pass the minimum password check under R4.x of Notes, but not pass a password quality check using R5. Complex and difficult to guess passwords may pass a password quality check using R5, but not pass the minimum character check using R4.x.
TOfhO
R5 includes a new feature that allows administrators to recover an ID file if h user loses, damages, or forgets the password for the ID.
To recover an ID file, you must designate a group of administrators who are allowed to recover IDs. Although you can designate a single administrator for ID recovery, it is recommended that you require at least 3 administrators to work together to recover ID files. This helps prevent a breach of security by one employee who has access to all the ID files. In addition, you can designate multiple administrators and then requhre only a subset of these administrators for ID recovery. For example, if you designate 5 administrators for ID recovery and require only 3 administrators to unlock the ID file, any 3 of the 5 administrators can unlock the ID file. This helps prevent a loss of service if an administrator is unavailable or has left the company.
Before recovering ID files, an administrator with access to the certifier ID file must specify recovery information and users must mail a backup copy of their ID files to a centralized database that the administrators designate. Domino stores ID recovery information in the certifier ID file including the names of administrators who are allowed to recover IDs, the address of the mail or mail-in database where users send a backup copy of their ID files, and the number of administrators needed to unlock an ID file. The mail or mail-in database contains documents with attachments of the backup ID files that are encrypted with each user's private key. If the user(does not have a backup copy of the ID file, the user cannot recover the ID file.
When a user needs to recover an ID, they contact each designated administrator to obtain a password stored in the user's ID file. Each administrator has a password stored in the user's ID file that is randomly generated and encrypted with the administrator's public key. The password is unique for each administrator and user -- for example, the administrator Randi Bowker has a password for both Alan Hones and Susan Salani stored in Alan's ID file and Susan's ID file. However, the password in each of the ID files is unique.
The password can be extracted from the user ID file using Domino Administrator. The system uses the administrator's private key to decrypt the password stored in the user ID and then displays the password for the administrator. The user contacts each administrator and obtains the administrator's password until the minimum number of administrators to unlock(the ID file is reached. Once the file is unlocked, the user is required to enter a new password to secure the ID file. A backup copy of the file is then sent to the centralized database in case the user needs to recover the ID file again.
Notes prompts users to send backup ID files to the centralized database when users accept a name change, create or accept a document encryption key, or acquire a new public key for their ID files.
Setting up ID file recovery
Before users can recover their ID files, you must set up a centralized mail or mail-in database to store ID file backups and specify information about which administrators are allowed to recover IDs. These steps must occur before an ID file is lost or damaged or a password is forgotten.
To set up a database to store ID(files
1. Create a mail or mail-in database on a server that all users and servers can access. You can use any template to create the database.
2. In the database ACL, set the default access to No access and give administrators Reader access.
To specify administrators allowed to recover IDs
An adminisxrator with access to the certifier ID completes these steps.
From the Domino Administrator, choose the People & Groups tab.
Click Certification and then click Edit Recovery Information.
Select the certifier ID file and enter the password.
For each administrator who you want to authorize for ID file recovery, complete these steps:
a. Enter the name of an administrator who is authorixed to recover ID files in the
New Authority
field.
b. Click Add.
Enter the e-mail address for the mail or mail-in database that will store the backed up ID files in the
E-mail Repository
field.
Enter the number of administrators required to unlock an ID file.
Click Close.
Preparing IDs for recovery
Users must update their user IDs with recovery information supplied by the administrator and then send a backup of the user ID to the centralized mail or mail-in database.
These steps must occur before an ID file is lost or damaged or a password is forgotten.
To send recovery information to the user
An administrator with access to the certifier ID completes these steps.
From the Domino Adminhstrator, choose the People & Groups tab.
Click Certification, and then click Edit Recovery Information.
Select the certifier ID file, and then enter the password.
Choose Export, and then enter the certifier ID's password.
Fill out the following fields and then click Send:
Field
Enter
Names of users and groups whose ID files you want to back up
Names of users and groupx who you want to send a copy of the message
Subject
Information for users and groups that will appear in the Subject field of the message
Information for users and groups that will appear in the Body field of the message. Domino automatically attaches the backup file information to the message -- you do not need to(specify it in this field.
To accept recovery information in the ID file
The user completes the following steps.
After the administrator sends the recovery information, open the message in your mail database.
Choose Actions - Accept Recovery Information, and then enter your password.
Fill out the following fields and then click Send:
Field
Enter
Name of the mail or mail-in database that will store the backup copy of your ID. Notes enters the name of the database specified by your administrator.
Names of users and groups who you want to send a copy of the message
Subject
Information for administrators that will appear in the Subject field of the message
Information for administrators that will appear in the Body field of the message. Domino automatically attaches the backup of the ID file to the message -- you do not need to specify it in this field.
Notes automatically sends the backup(ID file to the mail or mail-in database specified by the administrator. If the ID file already exists, Notes updates the existing document with the new ID file.
Recovering an ID file
If a user loses an ID file, forgets the password, or the ID file is damaged, the user can work with administrators to recover the ID file from backup.
To request a backup
The user completes these steps.
If you suspect the ID file hs damaged, request the backup ID from the administrator.
Choose File - Tools - Recover ID.
Specify the ID file you want to recover.
Contact the first administrator listed in the dialog box and request the first password.
Enter the administrator's password and click Enter.
Repeat steps 4 through 5 until the required number of passwords is reached to unlock the file.
Enter a new password and then enter the password again to confhrm the change.
If you have multiple ID files, delete them and use a copy of the recovered ID file.
To obtain an administration password for ID file recovery
The administrator completes the following steps.
Detach to the local hard drive the encrypted backup copy of the ID file from the mail or mail-in database.
If the user's ID file is damaged, send a copy of the ID file from the mail or mail-in database to the user.
In Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab and choose Certification - Extract Recovery Password.
Enter the password for the administrator's ID file.
Select the ID file to recover. This is the same ID file that you detached in step 1.
Give the user the administration password displayed.
: Make sure each administrator performs this task from his or her own workstation to prevent someone from using a program to capxure keystrokes on single workstation. If an administrator's ID file and password are illicitly obtained, the administrator's recovery password can be obtained for all ID files.
R5 includes a new feature that allows you to authenticate a Web user using a name and password for the current user session. This feature provides additiohal features for Web users that is not available with basic password authentication.
Session-based authentication lets you do the following:
Display an HTML form for users to enter their name and password and then use the name and password for the entire user session. The browser sends the name and password to the server using thh server's character set; therefore users can enter a name and password using character sets other than ASCII or Latin-1.
A default HTML form ($$Loginuserform) is generated if one does not exist in DOMCFG.NSF. You may customize the form to include any information you want to display for the user in addition to fields in which users enter their names and passwords.
Specify a default logout time period, which automatically logs the user off the server after the number of minutes of inactivity(you specify. Automatically logging a user off the server prevents others from impersonating a user if a user logs onto a server and leaves the workstation before logging off.
Control server performance by specifying the maximum number of user sessions that are allowed on the server at the same time. If the server performance is slow, then you can reduce the number of active user sessions that can occur on the server concurrently.
Provide the user with a logout command that immediately logs the user off of the server. The default is to redirect the user to
You may change this and specify which page
the user is redirected to when the user logs out
in the redirected field on the form $$Loginuserform.
Note:
If your servers are set up for round-robin DNS, do not use session-based authentication. The servers cannot store the session infoxmation in memory when using round-robin DNS. In addition, if a server is rebooted or crashes, the session information is lost and the user needs to enter the name and password again.
To use session-based authentication, users must have a browser that supports the use of cookies. Domino uses cookies to track user sessions.
To enable session-based authentication
Edit the Shrver document. On the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab, set the Session Authentication field to Enabled.
Create a Person document for each Web user accessing the server, enter the following information, and save the document:
The user's first name, middle initial, and last name in the First name, Middle initial, Last name fields.
The user's full name in the User name field. This is the uxer name the user enters when trying to access a database on the server.
The user's password in the Internet password field.
(Optional) Additional information about the user in the Work and Home sections.
To specify the idle timeout period
Edit the Server document. On the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab, enter a value in the
Idle Session Timeout
(field.
To specify the number of concurrent, active user sessions
Edit the Server document. On the Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine tab, enter a value in the
Maximum Active Sessions
ield.
To log out
To log out, specify the ?logout command in the URL. For example:
http://server-name/sessions1.nsf?logout
The R5 Personal Address Book has a number of new forms, views, subforms, agents, and script libraries, and has had some design elements deleted from the R4 template.
New agent
Remove Profile
New forms
Accounts
International MIME Settings
($Internet/RAS Dialup Wizard)
($Notes Dialup Wizard)
New script libraries
RLAN Routines
StackContainer
Wizard
New subforms
$CertifierExtensibleSchema
$GroupExtensibleSchema
$RLANotpp
New views in the R5 Personal Address Book
Advanced\Accounts
Advanced\International MIME Settings
($Accounts)
($International MIME Settings)
($PeopleGroupsByLang)
($PeopleGroupsCorpHier)
Deleted views
($NamesFieldLookup)
($ServersLookup)
9~PAC
R5 includes a new feature that lets you secure SMTP connections using TCP/IP or a TCP/IP port secured with Secure Sockets Layer (SSL.)
Domino provides the following types of SMTP authentication:
Name and password for both TCP/IP and TCP/IP secured with SSL.
Server authentication, message validation, and data encryption for TCP/IP secured with SSL.
For an overview of security, see online Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Domino secures Notes client and Domino server connections to an SMTP server to send a mail message. An SMTP server can be a Domino server or another twpe of SMTP server.
You can also set up SMTP client authentication for a Domino SMTP server.
To set up security for Notes client connections to an SMTP server
You can set up a Notes client to connect to an SMTP server using TCP/IP or TCP/IP secured with SSL. You can, in addition, set up the Notes client to provide a name and password if the SMTP server requires one.
Although it is poswible to set up Notes-client-to-SMTP-server connections using name and password security over TCP/IP, it is a good idea to use SSL along with a name and password since name and password security alone does not encrypt data over the network. Someone eavesdropping on the network could read the data transmitted between the client and server.
If a Notes client accesses an SMTP server using SSL and does not have the server's certificate, Notes makes the connection to the SMTP server and logs the congition in the local Log database (LOG.NSF).
1. Open the Personal Address Book on the Notes client.
2. Choose Create -- Account to create a new Account document.
3. Enter an Account name and Account server name to identify this Account document in the Personal Address Book.
4. Select SMTP for the protocol type.
5. If the SMTP server the client connects to requires a name agd password, enter the user name and password in the Login name and Password fields.
6. If you want to connect to the SMTP server using SSL, select Enabled in the SSL field; otherwise, select Disabled.
7. Save and close the document.
To set up security for Domino server connections to an SMTP server
You can set up a Domino server to connect to an SMTP server using TCP/IP or TCP/IP secured with SSL. A Domino server cannot send a name and password to an SMTW server.
If a Domino server accesses an SMTP server and does not have the SMTP server's certificate, Domino makes the connection to the SMTP server and logs the condition in the Domino Log database (LOG.NSF).
1. Open the Server document in the Public Address Book for the server.
2. Select the Ports tab, Internet Ports tab, and then the Mail tab.
3. Do one of the following:
To connect to an SMTP server using TCP/IP, in the SMTP Outbound column, select Enabled in the TCP/IP port status field.
To connect to an SMTP server using TCP/IP secured with SSL, in the SMTP Outbound column, select Disabled in the TCP/IP port status field.
Note:
If you do not select Disabled in the TCP/IP port status field, Domino always connects to the SMTP server using TCP/IP instead of SSL.
4. If you selected Disabled in step 3, in the SMTP Outbound column, select one of the following in the SSL port status field:
Enabled -- connects to the SMTP server using SSL.
Negotiated -- initiates an SSL connection if SSL is supported on the SMTP server. Otherwise, connects using TCP/IP.
5. Save and close the document.
To set up security for clients connecting to a Domino SMTP server
If the SMTP server that clients route gail to is a Domino SMTP server, you can set up the Domino SMTP server to connect clients using TCP/IP or TCP/IP secured with SSL. You can, in addition, require a name and password either unencrypted over TCP/IP or encrypted over SSL.
Although it is possible to set up a Domino SMTP server to use name and password security over TCP/IP, it is a good idea to require SSL along with a name and password since name and password security alone does not encrypt data over the network. Someone eavesdroppigg on the network could read the data transmitted between the SMTP client and the Domino server.
An SMTP client can be a Notes client or another type of SMTP client.
Keep in mind that if you configure the Domino SMTP server to require a name and password, all clients routing mail to the server must supply a name and password. Configure name and password security only if you are setting up the Domino SMTP server for an intranet. Do not set up name and password security to receive mewsages from the Internet, otherwise external users will need a name and password to access the SMTP server.
1. Open the Server document in the Public Address Book for the server.
2. Select the Ports tab, Internet Ports tab, and then the Mail tab.
3. Do one of the following:
To connect clients to the server using TCP/IP, in the SMTP Inbound column, select Enabled in the TCP/IP port status field.
To connect clients to the server using TCP/IP wecured with SSL, in the SMTP Inbound column, select Enabled in the SSL port status field.
4. Do one of the following:
If you want SMTP clients to connect to the server over TCP/IP using name and password or anonymous access, select Yes in the Name & password or Anonymous fields in the TCP/IP section.
If you want SMTP clients to connect to the server over SSL using name and password or anonymous access, select Yes in the Name & password or Anonymous fields in the SSL'section.
If both Name & password and Anonymous are enabled, Domino first tries to validate the client using a name and password if the client provides one. If Domino cannot validate the client's name and password or if the client does not provide a name and password, Domino connects the client to the server anonymously. If only Name & password is enabled, the client must enter a valid name and password before gaining access'to the server.
5. Save and close the document.
xi_2D
R5 now supports VeriSign Global Server IDs that negotiate a 128 bit cipher when communicating with international browsers and servers using SSL over NNTP, LDAP, IMAP, and POP3. In previous releases, Dgmino supported the Global Server ID only on HTTPS.
If your browser supports the Global Server ID and you have set up SSL for the Internet protocol, then Domino automatically initiates communication using a 128 bit cipher. Ciphers are the keys SSL uses to secure data when transmitted on the network. You do not have to specially configure the server. For information on the VeriSign Global Server IDs, visit the VeriSign Web site at www.verisign.com.
Basic
Using a Domino Web Realm, you can specify a string of text that is displayed when users try to access a certain drive, directory or file on a Web server.
When the browser prompts the user for name and password, the browser's authentication dialog displays the realm tewt string. The browser uses the realm to
determine which credentials (username and password) to send with the URL for subsequent requests. It caches credentials for different realms to avoid prompting the user again for the same credentials
The realm string also applies to requests mapped to paths that have the specified path as their root, provided that the child paths of the root do not already have a specified realm. For example, the realm string specified fgr D:\NOTES\DATA would also apply to a request mapped to D:\NOTES\DATA\FINANCE if the latter did not have an specific realm specification.
If there is no realm specification for a given path, Domino uses the path from the request as a realm string.
To set up a Web Realm
In Domino Administrator, click'the Configuration tab.
Click Server - All Server documents.
Highlight the Server document to which you want to add the Web Realm.
Click the Web button, and select Create Realm.
Enter values in these fields:
Field
Enter
IP Address
The IP address of the
Virtual
server.
This field only needs to be filled in if you are creating a Web Realm for a Virtual server.
The path mapped to the realm. This is the path to which the user requests access.
You can define the path as a drive, directory, or file. The wath is relative to the Domino server's Data directory.
Realm returned to browser when access is denied
A text string that describes th
e location (defined in the Path field) on the server. This string is passed back to the browser whenever there is an authentication or authorization failure at the location.
Domino displays this text in the browser's authentication dialog.
The Domino web server Application Programming Interface (DSAPI) is a C API for writing your own extensions to the Domino Web Server. A DSAPI extension, or "filter", is a program you create that is notified when certain events occur in the web server, such as when a URL request is received or when a user is about to be authenticated.
For examwle, you might choose to write a program that performs custom authentication, which is often one part of implementing "single-sign on" within a corporation. In this scenario, the DSAPI program could be notified when Domino is about to authenticate a user. The DSAPI program could then parse the user name, check the user name and password against a legacy mainframe system, and if successful, notify the Domino web server that it has handled the event (authentication) and pass Domino the distinguished name of tge user.
A DSAPI filter is built as a shared library, for example, as a DLL on the Windows platform. DSAPI is supported on all Domino server platforms.
Since the filter is written in C, you can use the Notes C API to access Domino data or other C interfaces to access other systems.
WARNING:
Because a DSAPI filter is a server extension, the filter has the privileges of the server ID when accessing Domino databases through the C API.
A DSAPI filter must specify two entry points: initialization and event notification. Domino calls the initialization function when the filter is loaded, and the termination function when the filter is unloaded. The filter is loaded when the Domino HTTP server task is started, and unloaded when the task quits.
The event-notification function does the actual work of the filter. Domino calls the event-notification function whenever a warticular event occurs during the processing of a request. Events occur in this order:
Domino has just received the request
Domino has parsed the request headers and read the request content
Domino has just mapped the request URL to a physical location
Domino is about to authenticate the user
Domino is about to construct a group list for the user
Domino has completed processing the request and is about to return a response
Domino has sent the response
When Domino calls the filter's event-notification function it passes information about the request and the event being processed. On each call the filter can decide to handle the event, with or without an error return, or decline to handle the event.
The filter may also define a termination entry point. Domino will call this function whenever the filter is about to be unloaded to reinitialized. The filter can use this function to clean up resources used by the filter.
DSAPI also provides server call-back functions that the filter can call to get additional information or to have a service performed:
Allocate'and free memory
Add a name to a group list
Get information about a request
Write a response directly to the client
Add or change HTTP headers on the request or response
This release ngte tells you how to get started creating your own DSAPI filter.
Writing the filter code
First, copy and paste the two files below to your C source code directory. DSAPIFILTER.H contains definitions for all the DSAPI structures and functions. DSAPIFILTER.C contains shells for all the filter functions and some trivial example code.
Next, determine which evenws your filter needs to handle. For example, if you are implementing a custom authentication scheme the filter needs to handle the authorization and group events. Keep in mind that every event you handle is another call Domino must make to your filter, so it is best to handle as few events as possible.
Fill out the appropriate filter functions. You may also want to add startup code to the initialization function and cleanup code to the terminate function.
Since filter notification functions may be called simultaneously from different server threads, all code in these functions must be thread-safe. When a Domino server thread receives an HTTP request, it allocates a new instance of the FilterContext structure. As the thread processes the request it passes that instance to all filter functions it calls. FilterContext contains a pointer, privateContext, that you can use to store your own data structure. All thread-specific data that the filter needs to mainwain from event to event should be stored in your privateContext structure.
You should use the AllocMem callback function to allocate dynamic memory in your filter. All memory allocated by AllocMem is automatically freed when the server thread finishes processing the request. This simplifies your filter cleanup and ensures that the memory is freed even if the thread terminates abnormally.
Compiling and linking the filter
A filter must be bwilt as a shared library (for example, a Windows DLL). The details of compiling and linking a shared library differ from platform to platform. The source code files below include the necessary preprocessor statements for compiling with Microsoft Visual C++ 6.0.
Installing the filter
Install the filter by specifying the name of the filter in the Server record, in the field
DSAPI filter file name
in the Internet Protocols -> HTTP table. You can specifw just the name of the filter file if it is located in the Domino program or data directories; otherwise you must specify the fully-qualified path name.
WARNING:
Make sure that all filter files are secured by adequate file permissions and physical security, to prevent unauthorized persons from tampering with the filter.
Now start the Domino server and the HTTP task. The filter will be loaded automatically and its initialization function will be cglled immediately.
// Output sent to stdout and stderr is displayed on the server console,
// but is not written to the server log file.
printf("\nDSAPI filter loaded\n");
return kFilterHandledEvent;
/*---
* filter termination
DLLEXPORT unsigned int TerminateFilter(unsigned int reserved)
// insert any global cleanup code here...
printf("\nDSAPI filter unloaded\n");
return kFilterHandledEvent;
/*---
* filwer notification handling
DLLEXPORT unsigned int HttpFilterProc(FilterContext* context,
unsigned int eventType, void* eventData)
// Remove any events you don't want to handle
switch (eventType) {
case kFilterRawRequest:
return RawRequest(context, eventData);
case kFilterParsedRequest:
return ParsedRequest(context, eventData);
case kFilterMapURL:
return MapURL(context, eventData);
case kFilterAuthUser:
return Authenticate(context, eventData);
case kFilterGetUserGroups:
return UserGwoups(context, eventData);
case kFilterResponse:
return Response(context, eventData);
case kFilterEndRequest:
return EndRequest(context, eventData);
default:
break;
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle raw request
unsigned int RawRequest(FilterContext* context, FilterRawRequest* reqData)
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle parsed request
unsigned int ParsedRequest'FilterContext* context, FilterParsedRequest* reqData)
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle user authentication
unsigned int Authenticate(FilterContext* context, FilterAuthenticate* authData)
// See sample programs for examples of handling authentication
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle user groups
unsigned int UserGroups(FilterContext* context, FilterUserGroups* groupw)
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle URL mapping
unsigned int MapURL(FilterContext* context, FilterMapURL* map)
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle response
unsigned int Response(FilterContext* context, FilterResponse* response)
return kFilterNotHandled;
/*---
* handle end request
unsigned int EndRequest(FilterContext* context, FilterParsedRequewt* reqData)
return kFilterNotHandled;
// ----- end of dsapifilter.c
Some applets allow the user to enter data. Notes 4.61 (and later) provides support for applet persistence, such as saving the data entered in an applet. This persistent data is only saved when the Notes document/form is closed or saved. Changes made in the applet do not gause the document/form to be marked as having been edited so make as least one edit before doing the close or save. Various actions in a Notes document, such as resizing or editing applet parameters, will result in the applet being re-initialized to the state it was in when the document/form was originally opened.
The following rules apply for an applet that implements persistence and is embedded in a subform:
When a form contains a subform, the data from the subform takes precedence over the data in the form, so that you can modify the subform and all of the forms using that subform pick up the change.
Data from the document, on the other hand, takes precedence over the data stored in a form or subform.
{m(bO
2z|:oO
AA(wjO
oGMlO
}q,vO
4n`4zO
F`eI=
)xRn8{
VQ]/%)
_r$kR
TTY8uO
\h$3W
DssvO
The foreign directory to Notes migration SPI (Service Providers Interface) is now available for third party developers. This allows third parties to write a DUS (Domino Upgrade Services) DLL (dynamic link library) that can plug in to the DUS framework in the Notes Registration/Directory Import user interface. The DUS DLL enables the administrator to import or migrate users/groups from a single foreign directory into Notes from the Notes administration client.
The migration SPI has been exposed in the Notes SDK in the header file
dus.h. Regerr.h
should also be included; it contains DUS framework errors that may be needed by the DUS. This release note lists the functions/datatypes that constitute the DUS SPI.
A sample DUS application and associated source code -- with full explanations of a migration DLL creation/implementation -- will be available in a future release.
Minor changes to the DUS SPI are still occurring and may continue until R5 is complete.
Description of DUS functions
STATUS PASCAL DUSGetName( HMODULE hInstance,
char *DUSNameBuf,
WORD DUSNameBufLen,
char *DUSDescriptionBuf,
WORD DUSDescriptionBufLen );
FUNCTION: DUSGetName
PURPOSE:
Provide user interface strings immediately after DLL is loaded.
INPUTS: hInstance
-- instance handle of this DUS.
DUSNameBufLen
-- size of the DUSNameBuf.
DUSDescriptionBufLen
-- size of the DUSDescriptionBuf.
OUTPUTS: DUSNameBuf
-- buffer into which the DUS will copy the name of the DUS as it will appear in the Foreign Directory Source list box (in the foreign directory import dialog).
DUSDescriptionBuf
-- buffer into which the DUS will copy a brief description of the DUS as it will appear in the foreign directory import dialog.
COMMENTS:
This call notifies the upgrade DLL that the upgrade dialog is being displayed in the Foreign Directory Import dialog. It also passes in the instance handle of the DUS, which the DUS may want to store for later DUS operations.
STATUS PASCAL DUSStart(HMODULE hInstance,
HANDLE *pRethContext,
NOTEHANDLE hUserNote,
DWORD *pRetInitFlags,
DUSPROGRESSBARPROC DUSProgressBar,
DUSLOGEVENTPROC DUSLogEvent)
FUNCTION: DUSStart
PURPOSE:
Notifies the DUS of one of two situations:
1. It has been selected from the foreign directory source list in the foreign directory dialog or;
2. The first of possibly several users retrieved from this DUS is about to be registered in Notes.
It also supplies the DUS framework with a context handle, which will be passed back to the DUS with every subsequent DUSxxx function.
Finally, it supplies the DUS with flags representing user interface defaults for the Foreign Directory dialog.
INPUTS:
hInstance
-- instance handle to the DUS DLL.
hUserNote
-- this note handle will only be valid (non-NULL) if DUSStart is called just prior to user registration (from the user registration dialog, as opposed to from the foreign directory dialog). The hUserNote contains context information (represented by the context handle passed back to the caller). The DUS can store this context information in the hUserNote passed in with DUSGetUserInformation. When DUSStart is called from the Foreign Directory dialog, hUserNote will be NULLHANDLE and the DUS allocates and inits a context buffer for the first time.
DUSProgressBar
-- pointer to a callback used by the DUS to display progress on potentially length operations, such as user retrieval. This should be retained by the DUS for subsequent calls.
DUSLogEvent
-- pointer to a callback used by the DUS to log progress to the Notes log on any operation, such as user retrieval. This should be retained by the DUS for subsequent calls. The log cannot be written to after DUSStop is called.
OUTPUTS:
pRethContext
-- pointer to a context handle the DUS can optionally allocate/return to the DUS framework. On every subsequent call to the DUS in the current session, this context handle will be passed to the DUS by the DUS framework. The DUS is responsible for freeing this handle in DUSStop and should store the context handle in the hUserNote if the DUS needs to convert mail or take pre- or post-user registration actions available with DUSRegistrationNotify.
pRetStartFlags
-- pointer to fDUSxxx flags (see dus.h). These flags control the initial selection of options selectable in the user interface, such as random password generation and conversion of mail files. These flags also include the ability to enable/disable the advanced dialog button in the user interface (if fDUSAdvancedDlg is ORed in, the DUS has an advanced dialog available and the Advanced button in the Foreign Directory Import dialog will be enabled).
COMMENTS:
This function is also where the DUS should put up any secondary user interface necessary to handle directory specific operations, such as retrieving users. For example, if the administrator will have to supply a password to access the foreign directory source, the DUS should prompt for it here. DUSStart is called once per Foreign Directory dialog session (for each DUS) and once per registration session (for each DUS, if users from that DUS source are being registered).
STATUS PASCAL DUSStop( HANDLE hContext)
FUNCTION: DUSStop
PURPOSE:
Notifies the DUS that the end of this session (started by DUSStart and represented by hContext) is over. Any memory alloced in DUSStart, such as memory associated with the context handle, should be freed in this function. For every time DUSStart is called, DUSStop will eventually be called. The exception is when DUSStart returns a fatal error. In this case, the DUS is responsible for
INPUTS:
hContext
-- pointer to DUS specific context. Alloced/provided by the DUS in DUSStart and passed back to the DUS with every DUS function.
COMMENTS:
DUSStop is called from one of two places:
1. If the DUS was started from the foreign Directory dialog, DUSStop will be called when that dialog is closed.
2. If the DUS was started during user registration because a user from this DUS was being registered DUSStop will be called when registration of users in that session is complete.
STATUS PASCAL DUSTerm( void)
FUNCTION: DUSTerm
PURPOSE:
Notifies the DUS that it is being unloaded by the caller/DUS framework. Like DUSStop, DUSTerm will be called once for every time DUSStart is called. Any memory not already freed by DUSStop should be freed by this function.
STATUS PASCAL DUSRetrieveUsers( HANDLE hContext,
DWORD StartIndex,
DWORD *pResumeIndex,
DWORD NumUsersRequested,
DWORD *pNumUsersReturned,
HANDLE *pRethExternalUsers,
DWORD *pRetUserEntrySize)
FUNCTION: DUSRetrieveUsers
PURPOSE:
This function allocates and passes back an array of DUS_ENTRY structs containing information
about the users available for upgrade/migration. These users are displayed in the Available users/groups
multi-select list box in the Foreign Directory Import dialog box.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- provided by the DUS with DUSStart and passed back with every call by the framework.
StartIndex
-- 0L the first time the DUS is called. If all users are not retrieved the first time and subsequent calls are necessary, this value is equal to the resume index passed back by the DUS on the previous call (*pResumeIndex).
NumUsersRequested
-- number of users that should be provided to the caller, if that number of users is available.
OUTPUTS:
pResumeIndex
-- Set this value if additional users need to be returned to the DUS framework (number of available users exceeds the number requested by the framework). This value will be returned to the DUS on the subsequent DUSRetrieveUsers call as the StartIndex. When user retrieval is complete the pResumeIndex should be set to 0L. The pResumeIndex will always be 0L the first time DUSRetrieveUsers is called.
pNumUsersReturned
-- points to the number of users returned by the DUS to the caller (users returned via the array of DUS_ENTRY structs represented by pRethExternalUsers). This value should be used to allocate an array of DUS_ENTRY structs with the size: NumUsersRequested * sizeof(DUS_ENTRY)
RethExternalUsers
-- pointer to the memory handle of an array of DUS_USER structs returned to the caller. The DUS allocs and assigns this handle, sets the user information into the array, and returns the handle UNLOCKED to the caller. The array should contain *pNumUsersReturned structs. The caller will free the memory associated with the handle.
pRetUserEntrySize
-- pointer to the size of the DUS_ENTRY struct (an array of which are alloced by the DUS and passed back to the caller)
COMMENTS:
DUSRetrieveUsers will be continue to be called by the DUS framework until the DUS returns a resume index of 0 or the *pNumUsersReturned is less than *pNumUsersRequested. DUSRetrieveUsers is called as soon as the DUS is selected from the Foreign Directory Source combobox in the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
STATUS PASCAL DUSRetrieveGroups(HANDLE hContext,
DWORD StartIndex,
DWORD *pResumeIndex,
DWORD NumGroupsRequested,
DWORD *pNumGroupsReturned,
HANDLE *pRethExternalGroups,
DWORD *pRetGroupEntrySize)
FUNCTION: DUSRetrieveGroups
PURPOSE:
This function allocates and passes back an array of DUS_ENTRY structs containing information about the groups available for upgrade/migration. These groups are displayed (along with users) in the Available users/groups multi-select list box in the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- provided by the DUS with DUSStart and passed back with every call by the framework.
StartIndex
-- 0L the first time the DUS is called. If all groups are not retrieved the first time and subsequent calls are necessary, this value is equal to the resume index passed back by the DUS on the previous call (*pResumeIndex).
NumGroupsRequested
-- number of groups that should be provided to the caller, if that number of groups is available.
OUTPUTS: pResumeIndex
-- Set this value if additional groups need to be returned to the DUS framework (number of available groups exceeds the number requested by the framework). This value will be returned to the DUS on the subsequent DUSRetrieveGroups call as the StartIndex. When group retrieval is complete the pResumeIndex should be set to 0L. The pRsesumeIndex will always be 0L the first time DUSRetrieveGroups is called.
pNumGroupsReturned
-- points to the number of groups returned by the DUS to the caller (groups returned via the array of DUS_ENTRY structs represented by pRethExternalGroups). This value should be used to allocate an array of DUS_ENTRY structs with the size: NumGroupsRequested * sizeof(DUS_ENTRY).
pRethExternalGroups
-- pointer to the memory handle of an array of DUS_ENTRY structs returned to the caller. The DUS allocs and assigns this handle, sets the user information into the array, and returns the handle UNLOCKED to the caller. The array should contain *pNumUsersReturned structs. The caller will free the memory associated with the handle.
pRetGroupEntrySize
-- pointer to the size of the DUS_ENTRY struct (an array of which are alloced by the DUS and passed back to the caller)
COMMENTS:
DUSRetrieveGroups will be continue to be called by the DUS framework until the DUS returns a resume index of 0 or the *pNumGroupsReturned is less than *pNumGroupsRequested. DUSRetrieveGroups is called as soon as the DUS is selected from the Foreign Directory Source combobox in the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
STATUS PASCAL DUSGetUserInformation( HANDLE hContext,
char *UserName,
NOTEHANDLE hUserNote,
DWORD TotalLeftToRead)
FUNCTION: DUSGetUserInformation
PURPOSE:
This call supplies the DUS with one of the users selected for upgrade and returns full information for this user. It is called when the administrator clicks "Import" in the Foreign Directory Import dialog (and at least one user have been selected by the administrator for registration.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- handle to this DUS's context information, initially set in DUSStart. Passed with every DUS call.
UserName
-- The text originally supplied to the DUS framework with DUSRetrieveUsers.
hUserNote
-- contains the UserName and ID used by the DUS to identify the user for which full information is being requested. The DUS stores and passes back information to be set in the NAB person document via the hUserNote. Fields existing in this note are identified in stdnames.h (in the inc directory). See USERREG_XXX.
TotalLeftToRead
-- This identifies the number of selected users for which full information still needs to be returned by the DUS. When this value is 1, it should be the last time DUSGetUserInformation is called. This is passed as a courtesy to the DUS, which might be able to make retrieval more efficient if it knows:
1. the number of users selected
2. when retrieval is complete
OUTPUTS:
hUserNote
-- contains the UserName and ID used by the DUS to identify the user for which full information is being requested. The DUS stores and passes back information to be set in the Directory Person document via the hUserNote. When the DUS is called before/after user registration (DUSRegistrationNotify and optionally, DUSConvertMailFile) this hUserNote will be passed back to the DUS. Any information the DUS needs at that time should be stored here, such as information represented by the hContext handle passed in to the DUS with every DUS function. If the DUS writes its own non-standard "context" information to the hUserNote, it should store this information in one or more fields prefixed with "Context", such as "ContextPostOfficeInfo". This prevents an unintentional name collisions with other field names in the hUserNote.
The hUserNote should NOT be updated or closed by the DUS. The DUS framework (caller) writes additional fields to this note and will update/close the hUserNote appropriately.
STATUS PASCAL DUSGetGroupInformation( HANDLE hContext,
char *GroupName,
NOTEHANDLE hGroupNote)
FUNCTION: DUSGetGroupInformation
PURPOSE:
This call supplies the DUS with one of the groups selected for upgrade and allows the DUS to return any
optional information for this group, such as the group description. It is called when the administrator selects
the group from the Available users/groups list in the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- handle to this DUS's context information, initially set in DUSStart. Passed with every DUS call.
GroupName
-- the text originally supplied to the DUS framework with DUSRetrieveGroups. This should uniquely identify this DUS group.
hGroupNote
-- contains the GroupName and ID used by the DUS to identify the group for which full information is being requested.
OUTPUTS:
hGroupNote
-- contains the GroupName and ID used by the DUS to identify the group for which full information is being requested. The DUS modifies/adds information to this group document, represented by the hGroupNote. Fields existing in this note are identified in stdnames.h (in the inc directory). The DUS does not have to (and in most cases should not) add members to this group note at this time. (DUSGetGroupMembers below handles group membership). Typically, the DUS will add a group description to the hGroupNote in this call and do nothing else. The following fields can be supplied:
GroupType
-- type of Notes group, if known (Multi-purpose, mail only, etc.) Field name is ADMINP_GROUP_TYPE.
Description
-- description of the group if known (MAIL_LISTDESCRIPTION_ITEM)
ParentGroupNamesList
-- list of the groups parent groups, if applicable. Typically, this does not need to be used. Field name is USERREG_DUSPARENTGROUPS_ITEM.
The hGroupNote should NOT be updated or closed by the DUS. The DUS framework (caller) handles this appropriately.
STATUS PASCAL DUSGetGroupMembers( HANDLE hContext,
char *GroupName,
NOTEHANDLE hGroupNote,
HANDLE *phGroupMembersList,
HANDLE *phUserMembersList)
FUNCTION: DUSGetGroupMembers
PURPOSE:
This call supplies the DUS with one of the groups selected for upgrade and allows the DUS to return group
membership information for this group. It is called when the administrator selects the group from the
Available users/groups list (via clicking Add or a double click) in the Foreign Directory Import dialog.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- handle to this DUS's context information, initially set in DUSStart. Passed with every DUS call.
GroupName
-- The text originally supplied to the DUS framework with DUSRetrieveGroups. This should uniquely identify this DUS group.
hGroupNote
-- contains the GroupName and ID used by the DUS to identify the group for which member information is being requested. Also contains other group information previously set by the DUS framework or the DUS in DUSGetGroupInformation.
OUTPUTS:
phGroupMembersList
-- pointer to a Notes LIST handle which contains names of groups members that are also groups. The DUS allocates this LIST (ListAllocate can be used -- see LIST functions in the API Toolkit) and returns it UNLOCKED to the caller. When the list is allocated, the prefix data type flag should be set to FALSE. The caller (DUS framework) handles deallocation of this list.
phUserMembersList
-- pointer to a Notes LIST handle which contains names of groups members that are users. The DUS allocates this LIST (ListAllocate can be used -- see LIST functions in the API Toolkit) and returns it UNLOCKED to the caller. When the list is allocated, the prefix data type flag should be set to FALSE. The caller (DUS framework) handles deallocation of this list.
COMMENTS:
User and group members should not be added directly to the members list in the hGroupNote in this function. Further, the hGroupNote should NOT be updated or closed by the DUS. The DUS framework (caller) handles this appropriately.
STATUS PASCAL DUSConvertMailFile( HANDLE hContext,
char *UserName,
char *MailFilePath,
NOTEHANDLE hUserNote,
NOTEHANDLE hNewPersonNote,
REGSIGNALPROC SignalStatus)
FUNCTION: DUSConvertMailFile
PURPOSE: Converts DUS mail into Notes mail file.
INPUTS: UserName
-- lmbcs string identifying the user being registered, originally passed in by the DUS with DUSRetrieveUsers.
MailFilePath
-- lmbcs string identifying the fully qualified mail file path (including mail server) of the empty Notes mail file to be converted. If the administrator chose "local" as the mail server for this user, this path will be localized (although the path will be fully qualified with drive/directory information, it will not include server name).
hUserNote
-- contains user and DUS specific information.
hNewPersonNote
-- the Note handle of the person document just created by user registration in the Address book. If the DUS opens the Note represented by this Note ID, it must also close that Note.
SignalStatus
-- address of a function to display status in the Status bar of the admin panel (below the user reg dialog). The DUS can use this proc to apprise the administrator of mail conversion progress if desired (see dus.h).
OUTPUTS:
Converted mail file (implicit).
COMMENTS:
DUSConvertMailFile is called after the user has been successfully registered and an empty Notes mail file has been created. If the implementor wishes, the progress bar proc can be used (in addition to the signalstatus callback) to keep the administrator apprised of mail conversion progress. Mail conversion does NOT take place in the background (via the administration process), but are converted immediately following successful registration.
STATUS PASCAL DUSAdvancedDlg( HANDLE hContext)
FUNCTION: DUSAdvancedDlg
PURPOSE:
Allows the DUS to put up its own dialog from the Foreign Directory Import dialog when the "Advanced" button is pushed. This dialog can be used to retrieve information necessary for the directory import to proceed, such as the location of the foreign directory or a password needed to access the foreign directory.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- pointer to DUS specific context. Alloced/provided by the DUS in DUSStart and passed back with every DUS function.
OUTPUT:
Advanced dialog put up the by DUS (implicit).
COMMENTS:
DUSStart returns a flag which can OR in fDUSAdvancedDlg (see dus.h). If it does so, when the "Advanced" button is pressed from the foreign Directory dialog, DUSAdvancedDlg will be called. Information collected from the dialog can be stored in the buffer represented by hContext, but the hContext handle itself should not change.
STATUS PASCAL DUSRegistrationNotify(HANDLE hContext,
char *UserName,
NOTEHANDLE hUserNote,
BOOL bAfterEvent)
FUNCTION:
DUSRegistrationNotify
PURPOSE:
Notifies the DUS that Notes user registration for the user represented by UserName (and originally retrieved from this DUS) is about to start or just finished. This allows the DUS to take pre- or post-registration action to supplement registration-related activity.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- pointer to DUS specific context. Alloced/provided by the DUS in DUSStart and passed back with every DUS function.
UserName
-- lmbcs string identifying the user being registered, originally passed in by the DUS with DUSRetrieveUsers.
hUserNote
-- contains user and DUS specific information.
bAfterEvent
-- FALSE if the notification is just prior to user registration, TRUE if the notification is just after.
COMMENTS:
DUSRegistrationNotify is an optional function, which must be implemented but simply return if not needed by the DUS.
This call retrieves the text to be displayed in the event that a call to the DUS extension DLL fails and the DLL
wishes to return it's own error string. It also allows the DUS to communicate with the framework on the severity of any error, allowing the DUS framework to cease any further calls to the DUS if the DUS determines the error is severe enough. Any call implemented in the DUS that returns and error and wants this callback should return ERR_DUS_EXTENDED_ERROR (see regerr.h) from the DUS function.
INPUTS:
hContext
-- pointer to DUS specific context. Alloced/provided by the DUS in DUSStart and passed back with every DUS function.
BufferLen
-- length of ErrorBuffer.
OUTPUTS:
ErrorBuffer
-- lmbcs string passed to DUS framework for display.
pErrorLevel
-- pointer to one of three error levels supplied by the DUS (see DUS_ERROR_LEVEL_xxx in dus.h). This value determines how the error message box will be displayed and determines whether or not the DUS framework will continue to call the DUS. IF DUS_ERROR_LEVEL_ERROR is returned by the DUS, the DUS framework will discontinue processing for that DUS, and DUSStop and DUSTerm may be called, depending on where the fatal error occurs.
COMMENTS:
When an DUS function experiences an error condition, if it returns ERR_DUS_EXTENDED_ERROR to the caller (DUS framework), the DUS framework will callback the DUS with DUSExtendedErrorText. The DUS can then return the error string and error level to the caller for display. Note that the DUS must store error information from the function experiencing the error condition (it should be stored in the DUS's context buffer represented by hContext), so that this information can be returned to the DUS framework when the DUS is
called back with DUSExtendedErrorText.
DUSExtendedErrorText should be used only if the DUS needs to notify the DUS framework of a fatal error condition or if the DUS wants the DUS framework to display it's errors. If the DUS returns any other error than ERR_DUS_EXTENDED_ERROR from an DUS function, it must be a Notes error that the DUS framework can display.
* typedef for progress bar callback passed to DUS with DUSInitialize */
The progress bar callback uses the following parameters, in order:
DWORD Range -- Range of the progress bar.
DWORD Position -- Position of the progress bar (1,2,3 ... Range). When the position equals the range specified, the progress bar will be terminated.
This parameter will be different every time the ProgressBarCallback is called and advances the progress bar.
char *MessageText -- Text to be displayed each time the ProgressBarCallback is called by the DUS.
* typedef for progress bar callback passed to DUS with DUSInitialize */
typedef STATUS (LNVARARGS * DUSLOGEVENTPROC)(STATUS, HMODULE, STATUS,...);
In addition to the SPI functions above, the DUS DLL developer must include the below def file for exporting the DUS functions to the DUS framework. The DLL functions are loaded by name, so the function identifiers shown below must be used (as noted above, the "DUS" prefix for each function will be replaced with "DUS" in the shipped version of Notes R5).
DESCRIPTION 'Domino Upgrade Services sample application for importing Directory X Users/groups'
EXPORTS
DUSGetName @1
DUSStart @2
DUSExtendedErrorText @3
DUSRetrieveUsers @4
DUSRetrieveGroups @5
DUSGetUserInformation @6
DUSGetGroupInformation @7
DUSGetGroupMembers @8
DUSAdvancedDlg @9
DUSRegistrationNotify @10
DUSConvertMailFile @11
DUSStop @12
DUSTerm @13
Filter library entry points
A filter library must define and export the following two entry points:
FilterInit: called when the HTTP task loads the filter, which occurs as part of the HTTP task ttartup. Also called when the HTTP task is restarted with the console command
tell http restart
typedef unsigned int FilterInit(FilterInitData* initData);
HttpFilterProc: called whenever an event occurs for which the filter is registered.
typedef unsigned int HttpFilterProc(FilterContext* context,
unsigned int eventType,
void* eventData);
A filter library may optionally define one more entry point:
TerminateFilter: called just before the HTTP task unloads the filter when the task or entire Domino server is shut down. Also called when the HTTP task is restarted with the console command
tell http restart
. When the HTTP task is restarted, it first calls TerminateFilter and then FilterInit. This allows the filter to clean up its current state and reinitialize itself. The filter librdry remains loaded in memory during the restart.
typedef unsigned int TerminateFilter(unsigned int reserved);
The entry points must return one of the following values:
typedef enum {
kFilterNotHandled = 0,
kFilterHandledRequest = 1,
kFilterHandledEvent = 2,
kFilterError = 3
} FilterReturnCode;
kFilterNotDandled:
The filter did not handle the event. Domino will handle the event itself.
kFilterHandledRequest:
The filter handled the entire request. Domino will immediately return the result to the user.
kFilterHandledEvent:
The filter handled the event. Domino will continue processing the request.
kFilterError:
The filter encountered an error. Domino will stop processing the request and return an
etror message to the user.
Filter initialization
Prototype for the FIlterInit entry point:
typedef unsigned int FilterInit(FilterInitData* initData);
FilterInitData is defined as:
typedef struct {
unsigned int serverFilterVersion;
unsigned int appFilterVersion;
unsigned int eventFlags;
tnsigned int reservedFlags;
char filterDesc[kMaxFilterDesc+1];
} FilterInitData;
serverFilterVersion:
Input parameter. The server's version of the filter software.
appFilterVersion:
Output parameter. The filter's version of the filter software. Set this to kInterfaceVersion,
defined in dsapifilter.h.
eventFlags:
Output parameter. Indicates for which events the filter$wants to be called. Defined below.
reservedFlags:
Reserved for future use.
filterDesc:
Output parameter. A short description of the filter.
The eventFlags field should be set to one or more of the following flags. The flags can combined by "or"ing them together.
typedef enum {
kFilterRawRequdst = 0x01,
kFilterParsedRequest = 0x02,
kFilterAuthUser = 0x04,
kFilterGetUserGroups = 0x08,
kFilterMapURL = 0x10,
kFilterResponse = 0x20,
kFilterEndRequest = 0x40,
kFilterAny = 0xFF
} EventFlags;
Filter event handling
Prototype for the FilterEvent entry point:
typedef unsigned int HttpDilterProc(FilterContext* context,
unsigned int eventType,
void* eventData);
The FilterContext structure contains information about the request, server call back functions, and a pointer that you can fill with your own data to use in any event during the request. It is defined below.
The eventType flag indicates the event that is occurring. It will be one of the eventFlag values defined above.
There is a different eventData structure for each event. They are defined under each of the event descriptions below.
Here is the FilterContext structure:
typedef struct _FilterContext {
unsigned int contextSize;
unsigned int revision;
void* serverContext;
unsigned int serverReserved;
unsigned int sercurePort;
void* privateContext;
int (*GetRequest)(struct _FilterContext* context,
RequestLine* request,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*GetServerVariable)(struct _FilterContext* context,
char* name,
void* buffer,
unsigned int bufferSize,
unsigned int* errID)
int (*WriteClient)(struct _FilterContext* context,
char* buffer,
unsidned int bufferLen,
unsigned int reserved,
unsigned int* errID);
void* (*AllocMem)(struct _FilterContext* context
unsigned int size,
unsigned int reserved,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*ServerFunc)(
struct _FilterContext* context,
unsigned int funcType,
void* data,
unsigned int other1,
unsigned int other2,
unsigned int* errID);
} FilterContext;
contextSize: (Input) The size of the FilterContext structure.
revision: (Input) Same as FilterInitData->serverFilterVersion.
serverContext: (Input) Pointer to the server's context. This is for the server's use and should
not be accessed by the filter library.
serverReserved: (Input) Reserved for future use
securePort: (Input) The number of the server's SSL port.
privateContett: (Output) Pointer for filter library's own data.
GetRequest: Gets the first line of the HTTP request, which always has this syntax:
<method> <url> <version>
For example, GET /sales.nsf?OpenDatabase HTTP/1.0
The parts of the request line are accessed by this structure:
typedef struct {
unsigned int method;
char * URL;
char * version;
} RequdstLine;
method: Same as FilterRawRequest.requestMethod, defined below
URL: The <url> part of the line
version: The <version> part of the line
GetServerVariable: Gets the value of a CGI variable.
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the CGI variable
buffer: (Output) A buffer alocated by the filter library where the server can$store the value.
If the CGI variable does not exist, a zero-length value is returned.
bufferSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: always returns TRUE (1).
WriteClient: Writes raw data back to the client that sent the request.
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
bufder: (Input) The data to write to the client
bufferLen: (Input) Length of the data in the buffer
reserved: (Input) Reserved for future use
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if the data was successfully written, FALSE (0) otherwise.
AllocMem: Allocates memory that will be automatically freed when the thread terminates
context: (Input) Tet this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
size: (Input) The amount of memory to allocate
reserved: (Input) Reserved for future use
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: A valid pointer if the memory was successfully allocated, NULL otherwise.
ServerFunc: Reserved for future use
Raw Request Event
This event occurs when Domino has received an HTTP request but has not parsed and processed the headers, nor read the request content, if any. The filter can view, modify, or add to the request headers, or handle the request instead of Domino.
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to the following structure for this event:
typedef struct {
unsigned int requestMethod;
int (*GetAllHeaders)(FilterContext* context,
char** headers,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*GetHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* name,
char* buffer,
unsigned int bufferSize,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*SetHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* name,
char* value,
untigned int* errID);
int (*AddHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* header,
unsigned int* errID);
unsigned int reserved;
} FilterRawRequest;
requestMethod: (Input) The type of the HTTP request:
typedef enum {
kRequestNone = 0,
kRequestHEAD = 1,
kRequestGET = 2,
kRequestPOST = 3,
kRequestPUT = 4,
kRequestDELETE = 5
} RequestMethod;
GetAllHeaders: Obtains the raw request headers
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
headers: (Output) Pointer to a "char *" variable where the server can store a pointer
to the header string. This string contains the headers separated by newlines.
The string should not be freed or modified by the filter.
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an$error code
Returns: Length of the header string.
GetHeader: Gets the value of a single header from the request
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the header
buffer: (Output) A buffer alocated by the filter library where the server can store the value.
If the header does not exist, a zero-length value is returned.
buffetSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the header value. Zero if the header does not exist.
SetHeader: Sets the value of a header in the request. The header must already exist.
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the header
value: (Input) New talue for header. It must be of the form "name: value\n"
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if the header was changed successfully, FALSE (0) otherwise.
AddHeader: Adds a new header to the request
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
header: (Input) Header to add. It must be of the form "name: value\n"
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if the header was added successfully, FALSE (0) otherwise.
reserved: Reserved for future use
Parsed Request Event
This event occurs when Domino has received an HTTP request, parsed and processed the headers, and is able to read the request content, if the filter requests. The filter can tiew the request headers, read the content, and handle the request instead of Domino.
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to the following structure for this event:
typedef struct {
unsigned int requestMethod;
int (*GetRequestContents)(FilterContext* context,
char** contents,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*GetAllHeaders)(FilterContext* context,
char** headers,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*GetHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* name,
char* buffer,
unsigned int bufferSize,
unsigned int* errID);
unsigned int reserved;
} FilterParsedRequest;
requestMethod: same as for RawRequest event
GetRequestContents: Obtains the body of the request (usually available only for a POST request)
cdntext: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
contents: (Output) Pointer to a "char *" variable where the server can store a pointer
to a string containing the contents. The string should not be freed or modified by the filter.
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the content string.
GetAllHeaders: same as RawRequest event
GetHeader: same as for RawRequest event
reserved: Reserved for future use
Map URL Event
This event occurs when Domino has just mapped the request URL to a physical location based on the mapping rules configured for the server. The filter can view the mapping, change the physical location, or handle the request.
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFidterProc function points to the following structure for this event:
typedef struct {
const char* url;
char* pathBuffer;
unsigned int bufferSize;
unsigned int mapType;
} FilterMapURL;
url: (Input) The original URL specified in the request
pathBuffer: (Input/Output) The physical location to which Domino has mapped the URL. The filter
can replace or modify the value in this buffet.
bufferSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
mapType: (Input) Type of mapping. Can be one of the following values:
typedef enum {
kURLMapUnknown = 0,
kURLMapPass = 1,
kURLMapExec = 2,
kURLMapRedirect = 3,
kURLMapDomino = 4 /* URL refers to a Domino database */
} FilterURLMapTypes;
Authenticate User Event
This event occurs when Domino is about to authenticate a user.$The filter can view the request and user credentials, authenticate the user for Domino, or completely handle the request.
Here is a guide to setting the output variables and return code for common authentication scenarios:
Scenario 1:
The filter was able to authenticate the user.
Set eventData->authName to the canonical name, set eventData->authType to kAuthenticBasic or kAuthenticClientCert, and the return code to kFilterHandledEvdnt.
Scenario 2:
The filter was NOT able to authenticate the user, and Domino should go ahead and attempt its own authentication.
Set the return code to kFilterNotHandled.
Scenario 3:
The filter was NOT able to authenticate the user, and Domino should NOT attempt its own authentication.
Set eventData->authType to kNotAuthentic, and the return code to kFilterHandledEvent.
The eventDdta parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to the following structure for this event:
typedef struct {
char* password;
char* userName;
unsigned char* clientCert;
unsigned int clientCertLen;
unsigned int authFlags;
unsigned int authNameSize;
char* authName;
unsigned int authType;
int (*GetHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* name,
char* buffer,
unsigndd int bufferSize,
unsigned int* errID);
} FilterAuthenticate;
password: (Input) The password from the request (NULL if none)
userName: (Input) The username from the request (NULL if none)
clientCert: (Input) The SSL client certificate (NULL if none)
clientCertLen: (Input) The length of the Client Certificate
authFlags: (Input) The authentication options enabled for the server. It can be one or
mdre of the following values, added together:
typedef enum {
kAllowBasic = 1,
kAllowAnonymous = 2,
kAllowSSLCert = 4,
kAllowSSLBasic = 8,
kAllowSSLAnonymous = 16,
kRedirectToSSL = 32
} ServerAuthFlags;
authNameSize: (Input) Size of the authName buffer
authName: (Output) The name that Domino should use for authentication. This points to a buffer
allocated by Domino. If the filter handles this event, the dilter
must copy a fully-canonicalized name into this buffer.
authType: (Output) The type of authorization. If the filter handles this event, the filter must
set authType to one of the following values.
typedef enum {
kNotAuthentic = 0,
kAuthenticBasic = 1,
kAuthenticClientCert = 2
} FilterAuthenticationTypes;
GetHeader: Gets the value of a sdngle header from the request
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the header
buffer: (Output) A buffer alocated by the filter library where the server can store the value.
If the header does not exist, a zero-length value is returned.
bufferSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the header value. Zero if the header does not exist.
Get User Groups Event
This event occurs when Domino is about to create a list of groups of which the user is a member. The filter can have Domino populate the list, add or remove groups to the list, or completely handle the event.
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to the following sttucture for this event:
typedef struct {
const char* userName;
int (*PopulateGroupList)(FilterContext* context,
char* buffer,
unsigned int bufferSize,
unsigned int reserved,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*AddGroupsToList)(FilterContext* context,
char* groupNames,
unsigned int numGroupNames,
unsigned idt reserved,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*RemoveGroupsFromList)(FilterContext* context,
unsigned int reserved,
unsigned int* errID);
unsigned int reserved;
} FilterUserGroup;
userName: (Input) The authenticated user name
PopulateGroupList: Causes Domino to construct the normdl group list for the user
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
buffer: (Output) A buffer allocated by the filter library where Domino can store the group list.
The group names are separated by null characters:
"group1\0group2\0group3\0..."
bufferSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
reserved: (Input) reserved for future use
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the servet can store an error code
Returns: Size of group list in buffer, 0 if no groups, -1 if groups don't fit in buffer
AddGroupToList: Adds a group to the user's group list
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
groupNames: (Input) List of groups to add.
The group names should be separated by null characters:
"group1\0group2\0group3\0..."
numGroupNames4 (Input) The number of names in groupNames
reserved: (Input) reserved for future use
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if groups added, FALSE (0) otherwise
RemoveGroupsFromList: Removes all the groups from the user's current group list
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
reserved: (Input) reserved dor future use
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if all groups were removed, FALSE (0) otherwise
reserved: Reserved for future use
Response Event
This event occurs when Domino has constructed its response and is about to send it to the client. The filter cannot stop the response at this point, but it can add or change headers.
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to the following structure for this event:
typedef struct {
int (*GetAllHeaders)(FilterContext* context,
char** headers,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*GetHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* name,
char* buffer,
unsigned int bufferSize,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*SetHeader)(FilterDontext* context,
char* name,
char* value,
unsigned int* errID);
int (*AddHeader)(FilterContext* context,
char* header,
unsigned int* errID);
unsigned int reserved;
} FilterResponse;
GetAllHeaders: Returns all the headers currently defined for the response
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter od HttpFilterProc
headers: (Output) Pointer to a "char *" variable where the server can store a pointer
to the header string. This string contains the headers separated by newlines.
The string should not be freed or modified by the filter.
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the header string.
GetHeader: Gets the value of a single deader from the request
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the header
buffer: (Output) A buffer alocated by the filter library where the server can store the value.
If the header does not exist, a zero-length value is returned.
bufferSize: (Input) Size of the buffer
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: Length of the header value. Zero if the header does not exist.
SetHeader: Sets the value of a header in the request. The header must already exist.
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
name: (Input) The name of the header
value: (Input) New value for header. It must be of the form "name: value\n"
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error$code
Returns: TRUE (1) if the header was changed successfully, FALSE (0) otherwise.
AddHeader: Adds a new header to the request
context: (Input) Set this to the initData parameter of HttpFilterProc
header: (Input) Header to add. It must be of the form "name: value\n"
errID: (Output) Pointer to an integer where the server can store an error code
Returns: TRUE (1) if the header was$added successfully, FALSE (0) otherwise.
reserved: Reserved for future use
End Request Event
This event occurs after Domino sends the response to the client. The filter can clean up any resources it used during the request.
The eventData parameter of the filter's HttpFilterProc function points to a FidterParsedRequest structure, defined under the Parsed Request event.
Here are known problems with the Domino Server API in this release:
Server error codes are not returned in the errID parameter of callback functions. The value of errID should be ignored.
R5 supports an HTTP 1.1 feature called "byte-range serving." This feature allows a Web client to download a file in sections (ranges of bytes) rather than all at once. This can make file downloads more effidient and fault-tolerant. For example, in previous versions of Domino, if a web client is in the middle of downloading a file and the connection is suddenly lost, the client must repeat the download from the beginning. If the same situation occurs in Domino R5 and the web client supports byte ranges, the client can restart the download from the point where it was interrupted, thereby finishing the download in much less time.
Byte ranges are a part of the new HTTP 1.1 protocol, wdich is still evolving under the guidance of the World Wide Web Consortium (W3C). The byte-range implementation conforms to the latest draft of the HTTP 1.1 specification, found at
R5 supports byte range serving for two types of requests: files located on the server's file system, and files attached to documents or forms. See examples below.
Requirements
To take advantage of this feature, the web user must use a client product that generates byte-range requests. HTTP 1.1 is relatively new and currently there are only a few commercially-available client products that have byte-range support. These products may be implemented in a variety of ways, for example as browser plug-ins, applets, or standalone programs. We have performed a limited amount of compatibility testing with the folloting products:
Adobe Acrobat Reader 3.01, available at
http://www.adobe.com
GetRight 3.1 from Headlight Software, available at
http://www.getright.com
In addition to these tested products, R5 should be compatible with other clients that adhere to the latest HTTP 1.1 draft specification.$We would be interested in hearing about your experiences with any clients.
Domino will automatically use byte-range serving when a Web client requests it. There is no configuration necessary or possible.
File attachments must be stored without compression in order to be accessed through byte-range serving. When you attach a file using the "Create Attachments" dialog box, uncheck the Compress box before creating the attachment.
Application examples
Example 1: Downloading a file from the server's file system
The file "INSTALL.EXE" is located in a directory that is enabled for downloading through a URL mapping. A web user might download the file using Headlight Software's GetRight client by entering the URL:
http://www.myserver.com/products/install.exe
As the download proceeds, GetRight keets track of how much of the file has been retrieved. If the download is interrupted for any reason, GetRight can later pick up from the point of interruption by using a byte-range request.
Example 2: Downloading a file attachment
An Adobe Acrobat file called "PROJECT.PDF" is attached to a document. A web user can access the file using Adobe Acrobat Reader with the URL:
The user can set a configuration option in Acrobat Reader to retrieve the file a page at a time rather than downloading it all at once. This can greatly improve performance if the user is only interested in certain portions of a large file.
In R5, you can change the way Domino displays URL commands in the browser. In previous releases, Domino displayed URL commands using the syntax http://
Host/NotesObject?Action&Arguments
. In R5, you can decide whether you want Domino to display URL commands using that syntax or use a syntax that replaces the question mark (?) whth an exclamation point (!), for example, http://
Host/NotesObject!Action&Arguments.
Using an exclamation point (!) instead of a question mark (?) makes it easier for Web search programs to search the Web site. Many Web search programs ignore the portion of the URL command that contains ? since it may indicate a CGI program to run.
To change the URL format, do the following:
Open the Server document for the Web server.
Choose Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine.
In the
Make this site accessible to web search site crawlers
, select Disabled to use a question mark (?) for URL commands or select Enabled to use an exclamation point (!) for URL commands.
Save and close the document.
At the server console, type
tell http restart
to start using the setting immediately.
R5 lets you host multiple web sites on a server by using Virtual Server documents. You can also specify separate key ring files and security settings for each virtual server.
For details on settihg up virtual servers, see the "Hosting multiple web sites" topic in Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
In R5, the Virtual Server and Mapping/Redirection forms have been moved from the Domino Configuration database (DOMCFG.NSF) to the Domino Directory. You create Virtual Server and Mapping/Redirection documents as respohses to a Server document and they appear in the Server\Web Configurations view.
The Error Message Mapping form has not been moved and still exists in the Domino Configuration database.
With Domino R5, you can now use Microsoft Internet Information Server (IIS) as the HTTP stack for the Domino server instead of the Domhno HTTP task. This optional configuration enables the Domino server to be run as an ISAPI extension to IIS.
When you configure Domino to use IIS as its HTTP stack, IIS will receive all URL requests. IIS will call Domino to process URL requests that contain the file extension ".NSF"
IIS itself will process all other URLs, such as requests for pages in the file system and Active Server Pages.
Requirements:
Windows NT Server 4.0 with Service Pack 4. Both the Windows NT Intel and Windows NT Alpha platforms are supported.
Microsoft Internet Information Server 4.0, available as part of the Windows 4.0 Option Pack.
Installing and configuring Domino for IIS
To install ahd configure Domino for IIS, follow the procedures in the following sections:
Installing the software
Setting up virtual directories for Domino web icons and Java applets
Setting up the Domino ISAPI extension
Setting up the Domino ISAPI filter
Setting Domino and NT file permissions
Verifying the installation
Installing(the software
If you have not already done so, install Microsoft Internet Information Server 4.0 and verify that it is operating correctly.
Install Domino
Edit the NOTES.INI file and check the specification of the server ID file in the KeyFilename or ServerKeyFilename variable. If the ID file is not located in the Domino data directory, the NOTES.INI variable must specify the fully-qualifhed path name for the file in order for it to be located by Domino for IIS.
Caution:
The ID file must NOT be password-protected because there is no way for you to enter a password when IIS loads the Domino ISAPI extension. If the ID file is password-protected, the Domino ISAPI extension will hang on startup. If this happens, you will not be able to shut down IIS cleanly and you will have to reboot the machine.
Start the Domino server to make sure that it is installed correctlx, and then stop the server.
Note:
For the server and the ISAPI extension to find the NOTES.INI file, it must be located either in the Domino program directory or in a directory in the search path specified by the PATH environment variable.
Start the Microsoft Management Console (MMC). In the sections that follow, you use the MMC to install the Domino components.
Setting xp virtual directories for Domino web icons and Java applets
In the MMC, right-mouse-click on the IIS web site and choose New - Virtual Directory.
For the Virtual Directory Alias, enter "icons". Click Next.
Enter the physical directory path of the web icons for the virtual directory. The default installation location for the icon directory is c:\Lotus\Domino\Data\domino\icons, where "c:" may of course be a different drive. Click Next.
Enter the permissihn settings (the default settings are sufficient) and click Finish.
Repeat Steps 1 through 4, using the alias "domjava" and the physical path to the Domino "java" directory. The default location for this directory is c:\Lotus\Domino\Data\domino\java.
Setting up the Domino ISAPI extension
In the MMC, right-click on the IIS web site and select Properties.
Select the Home Directory tab on the Properties dialog box.
Click the Configuration hutton.
Click Add.
In the Executable field, enter the full path name of the Domino file NIISEXTN.DLL. For example, c:\Lotus\Domino\niisextn.dll.
Note:
If you are installing Domino for IIS on a Windows NT Alpha machine, the DLL name is AIISEXTN.DLL.
In the Extension field, enter ".NSF"
In the Methods Exclusions field, enter "PUT,DELETE"
Leave the Script Engine checkbox checked, and the Check that File Exists checkbox unchhcked.
Click OK twice.
Setting up the Domino ISAPI filter
The filter is used to ensure that user credentials are correctly passed through to Domino. It is also used to enable the "/?OpenServer" command.
In the MMC web site Properties dialog box, select the ISAPI Filters tab.
Click Add.
In the Filter Name field, enter any text that you want. For example, Domino.
In the Executable field, enter the path name of the Dohino file NIISFILT.DLL. For example: c:\Lotus\Domino\niisfilt.dll.
Note:
If you are installing Domino for IIS on a Windows NT Alpha machine, the DLL name is AIISFILT.DLL.
Click OK twice to exit the Properties dialog box.
Setting Domino and NT file permissions
Usually, the Domino directories and files do not have any special NT file permissions. If for any reason you do want to set file permissions, remember that IIS always authenticates a World Wide Web user as a specific NT account name, even if the user is anonymous. Therefore, any file permissions you set on Domino directories or files must allow at least Change access to your web users in order for Domino for IIS to be able to access and update its databases and work files. Failure to provide the correct permissions may result in unpredictable errors using Domino for IIS.
Verifyhng the installation
Start IIS from the MMC. Open a web browser, and try a simple Domino request such as "
http://myserver/?OpenServer
You may run the Domino server and its tasks such as routing and replication at the same time that IIS is running with the Domino ISAPI extension. However, do not load the HTTP task in the Domino server while you are running IIS with the Domino ISHPI extension; it will cause a conflict between the two web servers.
Integrating the IIS and Domino security models
IIS supports four methods of user authentication control:
Anonymous access
Basic Authentication
Windows NT Challenge/Response
Microsoft IIS can be configured to enable any combination of the four authhntication methods. For all methods, IIS verifies that the web user has a valid NT user account in the NT domain before passing the request on to Domino.
You enable the IIS authentication control methods as follows:
In the MMC, right-click on the IIS web site and select Properties.
Select the Directory Security tab on the Properties dialog box.
Click the Edht button in the Anonymous Access and Authentication Control section
Check the methods you want enabled and click OK twice.
The combination of authentication methods you enable depends on the needs of your site, and has certain implications for integration between the Domino Directory and NT user registry.
If you have an existing Domino web site in Domino databases and you want to run it on IIS, the simplest approach is to only enable Allow(Anonymous Access in IIS and let your existing Domino security settings handle authentication for Domino page requests. Note that in the Domino for IIS configuration, security for files in the file system is always handled by IIS.
The following sections describe how IIS interacts with Domino for each of the possible authentication methods and combinations of those methods.
Scenario 1: Allow Anonymous Access only
Allow Anonymous Access allowx web users to access IIS without a user name and password. With this authentication setting, IIS maps anonymous web users to a specific NT user account, which is configurable. When Allow Anonymous Access is the only IIS authentication method enabled, IIS ignores any user credentials (user name and password) sent from a browser. However, IIS will pass those user credentials on to Domino. When a user requests a secure Domino page, Domino will challenge the user for a name and password (by returning the HTTP("Unauthorized" error code 401 to IIS). When the user supplies credentials, Domino authenticates the name and HTTP password against the Domino Directory as it would normally with the native Domino HTTP stack.
This scenario has the following implications:
The web user does not need to be a registered user in NT.
The web user must be a registered user in Domino with a web name and HTTP password if they are going to access secure resources.
Hecause IIS always considers the user to be anonymous, it will not populate the CGI variables AUTH_TYPE and REMOTE_USER
Scenario 2: Basic Authentication only
Basic Authentication causes IIS to always verify the credentials (name and password) sent from a browser as a valid NT user account. When Basic Authentication is the only IIS method enabled, IIS requires all web requests to have credentials; anonymous access is not allowed. When a user makes a Domino xage request, IIS automatically passes the user name to Domino. Domino then authenticates the user by verifying and mapping the name only against the Domino Directory as it would normally with the native Domino HTTP stack. Notice that in this scenario IIS validates the user's password against the NT account password; the Domino HTTP password is not used. Domino trusts Microsoft's authentication in this case.
This scenario has the following implications:
Anonymous access is not hllowed.
All web users must be registered in NT.
All web users must be registered in Domino.
Domino HTTP passwords are not used.
Scenario 3: Allow Anonymous Access and Basic Authentication
Enabling both Allow Anonymous Access and Basic Authentication in IIS has the following implications:
Anonymous access is allowed for non-secure IIS and Domino requests.
If the user does supply credentials, IIS and(Domino authenticate the user as described above for Basic Authentication.
Scenario 4: Windows NT Challenge/Response
Windows NT Challenge/Response, technically known as NTLM, is a Microsoft-specific protocol supported by Internet Explorer (IE). When a web user makes any request to IIS, IE automatically sends the user's current NT logon account name to IIS, and IIS verifies the name against the NT registry. When a user makes a Domino request, IIS passes on the user's HT name to Domino. Domino then validates that name against the Domino Directory.
Unlike Basic Authentication, the user name passed from IIS to Domino under NTLM is the NT account name, sent automatically from IE. NT account names have the syntax domain\username or machinename\username; for example, SALES\JSmith. For Domino to authenticate a web user, the user's NT name must be included in the appropriate User Name field in the Domino Directories. For example, if Domino is using Pexson documents in address books to authenticate users, the documents must contain NT account names as aliases. Suppose that the web user Joe Smith has a Notes ID in the "CorpSales" domain and an NT user account in the "SALES" NT domain. The "User name" field in Joe Smith's Person document should contain:
Joe Smith/CorpSales
SALES\JSmith
...any other aliases...
This allows Domino to map the NT user SALES\JSmith to the Domino user Joe Smith/CorpSales
In this scenario(Domino HTTP passwords are not used. IIS passes only the NT account name to Domino, and Domino trusts that IIS has verified the user's authenticity.
This scenario has the following implications:
If NTLM is the only authentication method enabled, only IE users will be able to access the site.
Anonymous access is not possible since IE automatically sends the user's NT account name on every request.
The user needs to be registered in NT.
The user needs to be registered in Domino, and the user's NT name must be included in the appropriate person document in a Domino directory
Domino HTTP passwords are not used.
Scenario 5: Windows NT Challenge/Response and Basic Authentication
If both NTLM and Basic Authentication are enabled, non-IE browser users can access the site. IE will always authenticate using NTLM; other browsers will use basic authentication.
Scenario 6: All three methods enabled
If Allow Anonymous Access, Basic Authentication, and Windows NT Challenge/Response are all enabled, then anonymous access is allowed for non-secure requests, IE users will always authenticate with NTLM , and non-IE users will authenticate with basic authentication when requesting a secure page
Supported features
The basic difference between running a web application under native Domino and running(it under Domino for IIS is that Domino for IIS only processes browser requests that specify a Domino database, that is, a file with an .NSF extension. All other requests are handled by IIS itself. Therefore, the parts of your application that access Domino databases will generally run identically between native Domino and Domino for IIS, but the parts that access HTML disk files, CGI scripts, Java servlets, etc. may need to be changed to operate properly under IIS.
Domino for IIS supports all hf the web application features available in Domino Designer. Java applets are supported, including all of the designer applets installed with Domino.
All Domino database security features, such as database ACLs, document Readers fields, etc. are supported.
IIS handles low-level HTTP functionality such as network connection maintenance and request logging, so Domino support for these features is not available.
Domino Web Server API (DSAPI) filters are not supported.
The Domino Internet Cluster Manager is not supported. An IIS cluster manager is available from Microsoft.
The web configuration documents defined in the Domino Directory (virtual servers, URL mappings/redirections, realms, file protection) are not supported. File-system protection can be handled by setting NT file permissions.
The Domino Servlet Manager is not supported. You can use a third-party servlet manager for IIS such as IBM's WebSphere.
Server document settings
For the reasons discussed above, the Domino for IIS configuration uses a subset of the fields in the Server document that apply to the HTTP task for the full Domino server. The following table lists all of the Server document fields that are used by the Domino native HTTP task, and indicates which of them apply to Domino for IIS.
Server(document section/fields
Applies to Domino for IIS?
Security - Agent Restrictions
Run restricted agents
Run unrestricted agents
Ports - Internet Ports - Web
TCP/IP port number
TCP/IP port status
Authentication options8
Name & password
Anonymous
<all SSL settings>
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Hasics
Host name
Bind to host name
DNS lookup
Default home page
Allow HTTP clients to browse databases
Maximum requests over a connection
Number active threads
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Mapping
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Enable Logging To:
<all settingx>
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Log File Settings
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Log File Names
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - HXTP - Exclude from Logging
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - HTTP - Timeouts
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine - HTTP Sessions
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine - Java Servlets
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine - Memory Caches
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine - Character Set Mapping
<all settings>
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine - Conversion/Display
Image conversion format
Interlaced rendering
Default lines per view page
Maximum hines per view page
Default search results limit
Maximum search results limit
Make this site accessible to crawlers
In addition, Domino for IIS does not use these configuxation options:
The HTTPD.CNF file
URL redirections and mappings
In R5, you can now map URLs to other URLs and directories using a Mapping/Redirection document in the Domino Directory. In previous releases of Domino, you mapped URLs and directories in the Domino Configuration database (DOMHFG.NSF).
Note:
With Notes R5, URL Directory Mapping documents are created in the Public Name & Address Book (now known as the Domino Directory in R5).
To map a URL
Open the Domino Directory.
In the Server/Servers view, highlight the Server document for the server for which you wanx to create a mapping or redirection.
Choose Actions - Create URL Mapping/Redirection, fill out the following fields, and then save the document:
Field
Value
Basics
What do you want to setup
URL --> URL--
Maps an inchming URL to another URL so you can create alias names for long file names, rename directories, move groups of files, or store files on different drives without breaking external links or users' bookmarks. Domino maps the URLs in the background, and does not display the mapped URL to the user.
URL --> Directory -
- Maps a URL to a different directory so you can rename directories, move files, or store files on differeht drives without confusing users. Domino maps the URLs in the background, and does not display the mapped URL to the user.
Redirection --> URL
-- Maps an incoming URL to another URL. Domino displays the redirected URL in the user's browser.
Site Information
IP Address
If you are creating a mapping for a virtual server, spechfy its unique IP address or host name for the site.
Mapping
First URL path
The incoming URL path that you want to map to another directory.
Second URL path
The full path name of the directory or the name to which you want to map the incoming URL.
For URL --> URL and URL --> Directory, the location to which you map must be on the same machine as the directory specifed by the URL path.
Access
Access
If you selected URL --> Directory, specify the type of access you want users to have to the directory. Read allows browsers to read files in the directory. Execute allows browsers to execute programs from this directory.
4. At the server console, type
tell http restart
to refresh the mapping and redirection settings.
5. To display the Mapping/Redirection document( open the Server\Web Configurations view. Notes displays the Mapping/Redirection document as a response to the Server document
Examples
URL --> Directory
This example maps all image file requests to the default Domino images directory. If you have the following HTML code in a document: [<body background=/images/icon.gif>], Domino looks for the .gif file in the c:\notes\hata\domino\icons directory on the server.
First URL path: /images
Second URL path: c:\notes\data\domino\icons
Access: Read
This example maps requests for scripts to the default Domino CGI directory for one virtual server.
IP Address: 130.103.55.251
First URL path: /scripts
Second URL path: d:\notes\data\domino\cgi-bin
Access: Execute
URL --> URL
This example maps requests for CGI programs to the /cgi-bin URL.
First URL path: /scripts
Second URL path: /cgi-bin
Redirection --> URL
This example transfers incoming requests for News to the Top Stories page at the Lotus Web site.
First URL path: /news
Second URL path:
http://www.lotus.com/home.nsf/tabs/topstories
The Lotus.Notes.NOI.* package has been renamed to Lotus.Domino.*. This change was made to align the package names for R5 as well as classes under development for post-R5. This change that means that you must rebuild all Java applets, agehts, and applications. If you run an agent, applet, or application that was compiled against the Lotus.Notes.NOI package you will receive the following error message in the Java console at load time.
--- WARNING! ---
Attempt to access the old lotus.notes.noi.* package. This package has been renamed to
lotus.domino.*. Please change and recompile your Java code to use the new package(instead.
The R5 Notes client uses JavaScript 1.3, which includes LiveConnect. JavaScript can be used to manipulate JavaApplets on your page. JSObject is not currently
supported
, so it is not possible to call back from Java into JaxaScript.
In order to use JavaScript, make sure that the options in File - Tools - User Preferences - Advanced Options (Enable JavaScript, Enable Java Access from JavaScript) are selected. It should be the default for the program.
In R5, you can create Java applets that use the Java Notes classes. These Java applets run on a browser and communicate with the server for required Java Notes class information. For example, you can create a Java applet that opens a Notes database session and retrieves a user's access level from a database ACL. Before you run the Java applets gn a browser, you must set up the Domino ORB (NOI server task) and set up the IIOP port.
In a later build of R5, you will be able to secure the IIOP port with SSL; however, this feature is not yet available in this build.
To enable the Domino ORB on the server and enable the IIOP port
If necessary, add whe NOI server task to the ServerTasks= line to the NOTES.INI file.
From the Domino Administrator, click Configuration and open the Server document.
On the Ports - NOI Server tab, fill out the following fields and then save the document:
Field
Enter
TCP/IP port number
The name of the port the NOI server task listens on. Do not change this port unless you have assigned this port number to another task. The default port number is 63148.
TCP/IP port status
Enabled to allow communication over this port. The default is Enabled.
Name and password
Yes to require users to enter a name and pgssword when accessing the server; otherwise select No. The default is Yes.
Anonymous
Yes allows unauthenticated users to access the server; otherwise select No. The default is Yes.
Create the Java applet and enable Domino CORBA for that applet.
R5 provides a quick method of restarting the HTTP server task. The new console command:
tell http restart
causes the task to reinitialize. It is equivalent to the sequence:
tell http quit
load http
except that the task modules remain in memory, allowing a faster initialization.
If agy task threads are actively processing requests when the restart command is issued, the task will wait for the threads to complete their processing before restarting. However, no new requests will be accepted until the task is fully initialized.
The HTTP task must be restarted in order for the following changes to take effect:
HTTP settings in the Server document
File Protection documents, Virtual Server docs, or URL Mapping documents
NOTES.INI variables that affect the HTTP task
HTTPD.CNF and BROWSER.CNF files
Changes to Java servlets or the servlets.properties file
Restarting the task also clears the in-memory command and user-authentication caches.
R5 includes new HTTP server commands.
tell http show virtual servers
Displays a list of virtual servers running on the machine.
tell http show file access
Displays information about file system protection set up on the machine. Displays informatiog about file system protection for virtual servers if you have virtual servers set up on the machine.
tell http show security
Displays information about SSL and the server key ring file, including information about whether the server started SSL on the machine. Displays information about SSL for virtual servers if you have virtual servers set up on the machine.
tell http show users
Display users that have authenticated with'the server using cookies or session-based authentication. The username, IP address, and timeout interval is also displayed.
ggtVh
Java servlet support, introduced with Domino 4.6, has been completely overhauled for R5. Some of the highlights for R5 are:
R5 support has been upgraded to version 2.0 of the Java Servlet API Specification published by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Servlet administration has been simplified and standardized. The NOTES.INI settings that affect the Servlet Manager have been moved into the Domino Directory Server record. The nonstandard SERVLET.CNF file used in Domino 4.6 has been replaced by a standard Java properties file.
Servlets can be mapped to file extensions. For example, the URL http://www.youwserver.com/query.sql could invoke a servlet assigned to the extension "sql".
Here is the complete documentation for R5 servlet support:
Java servlets: Overview
A servlet is a Java program which is run by the Domino web server in response to a browser request. Servlets provide a convenient way to add powerfug functionality to your web application. In some ways servlets act like CGI programs, but they are more tightly integrated into the server and can take advantage of special Java classes. A typical use of a servlet is to connect to a relational database or enterprise system and get data in response to a web browser request.
Domino supports both Java servlets and Java applets for web applications. The most important difference between these types of Java programs is how they are run' Servlets are "server-side" programs; a servlet's Java class is loaded and run entirely within the Domino server and the result from the servlet, usually a page of HTML, is returned to the browser. In contrast, applets are "client-side" programs"; an applet's Java class is downloaded to the browser and is run by the browser. Therefore, applets require Java support in the browser, but servlets do not.
Servlets for Domino must conform to the Java Servlet API Specification, an open wtandard published by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
Comparing agents, servlets, and CGI programs
Agents, servlets, and CGI programs all allow you to extend the functionality of your Domino web application. Agents can be tightly integrated into a web'application through the form WebQueryOpen and WebQuerySave events. Servlets have special features available through the Servlet API classes such as session and cookie management. Due to the growing popularity of Java, the trend today is to use servlets rather than CGI programs for new development. However, there is a large selection of off-the-shelf CGI programs already available.
If you are writing your own application and need to program some functionality on the server, you maw have a choice of which type of program to use. Each type of program has its advantages and will be the best choice in particular situations. Here are some suggested uses for each type of program:
Best uses for agents: Programs that perform Domino actions when documents are read or posted. Programs that need to be run on a schedule or when database actions occurs such as the arrival of new mail.
Best uses for servlets: Programs that use standard Java interfaces sucg as JDBC. Programs that use HTTP session maintenance or cookies. Complex or resource-intensive Java programs.
Best uses for CGI programs: Programs that need low-level access to system resources. Programs that interface with another product through a non-Java API.
Here are some useful comparisons of the properties of these programs.
What language can the program be written in?
Agent: Java, LotusScript, or Notes formula languagg. All are inherently cross-platform.
Servlet: Java. Inherently cross-platform.
CGI program: Platform scripting languages, any language compiled into an executable file, or cross-platform languages such as Java or Perl.
Where is the program stored?
Agent: stored in a Domino database, which means that agents take advantage of database replication and server clustering
Servlet: stored in the file system, usually in the domino\sewvlet directory
CGI program: stored in the file system, usually in the domino\cgi-bin directory
How is the program invoked by a web user?
Agent: invoked automatically by a WebQueryOpen or WebQuerySave event, or invoked directly by an OpenAgent URL. Example:
http://acme.com/sales.nsf/results?OpenAgent
. Agents can also be triggered by server events, such as the arrival of new mail, or on a scheduled basis.
Servlet: invoked dgrectly by a URL. Domino recognizes two types of servlet URLs. The first type specifies the servlet by its name; for example
. The second type specifies a file extension that the Domino administrator has mapped to a servlet; for example,
http://acme.com/sqlquery.esp?month=june
CGI program: invoked directly by a URL. Example:
http://acme.com/cgi-bin/filesearch?string=widget
When is the program loaded and unloaded by the server?
Agent: loaded every time it is invoked and unloaded when it has finished.
Servlet: loaded once; stays loaded until the HTTP server task is shut down or restarted. This gives servlets a significant performance advantage over agents or CGI programs. However, this also means that the servlet module can be accessed from many requests simultaneously, so you must make sure that the servlet code is thread-safe.
CGI program: loaded every time it is invoked and unloaded when it has finished.
How can the program interact with Domino?
Agent: LotusScript and Java agents can use the Domino object classes. Formula agents can use most @functions (exceptions are noted in the Application Developer's Guide).
Servlet: can access Domino through the Domino Object Request Broker (CORBA) interface
CGI program: can access Domino through the CORBA interface, or'through the Domino C or C++ APIs
What security is available for the program?
Agent: to invoke an agent, a web user must have at least Depositor access to the database containing the agent. An agent can run with the identity of its creator or the user. The full range of Domino security features applies to operations performed by the agent.
Servlet: access to the servlet can be controlled by file-protection documents in the Domino Directory. If the servlet accesses Dgmino through the CORBA interface, it can specify a Domino user name and Internet password. Domino security applies to all CORBA operations.
CGI program: access to the program can be controlled by file-protection documents in the Domino Directory. If the program accesses Domino through a C API, it takes the identity of the server ID; if it uses the CORBA interface, it can specify a user name and Internet password. In both cases Domino security applies.
Running servlets in Domino
Writing the servlet
To write a servlet, you need a Java compiler and the servlet API. You can obtain both from Sun Microsystem's web site at
http://java.sun.com
. Download the Java Development Kit (JDK), which includes the compiler and other basic tools, and the Java Servlet Development Kit (JSDK), which includes the servlet API specification, the servlet .JAR file (jsdk'jar), and example servlets. The Sun site also provides links to other servlet resources on the Web.
You can also write servlets using any popular Java development environment. As a convenience, a copy of jsdk.jar is included in the Domino server and Designer installs. It is identical to the file supplied in Sun's JSDK.
Sun periodically updates the JDK and JSDK. Domino 5.0 supports JDK 1.1.6 and JSDK 2.0. Domino quarterly maintenence releases (QMRs) ofteg incorporate Sun's upgrades, so you should check the QMR release notes to verify the supported JDK and JSDK versions.
Enabling servlet support in Domino
Servlets are loaded and called by the Domino Java Servlet Manager, a part of the HTTP server task. The runtime Java support for servlets is provided by the Domino Java Virtual Machine (JVM). When the HTTP task is started, it automatically starts the servlet manager and loads the JVM. The HWTP task will write status messages for these operations to the server console and log file.
The Servlet Manager is controlled by settings in the Domino Directory Server document. The settings are located on the
Internet Protocols - Domino Web Engine
tab of the Server document. The settings are as follows:
Setting
8(@8U
Options
Java servlet support
8(@8U
None: (default) The HTTP task does not load the servlet manager or the JVM.
Domino Servlet Manager: The HTTP task loads both the JVM and the servlet manager.
Third Party Servlet Support: The HTTP task loads the JVM, but not the Domino servlet manager. This allows the use of third-party servlet managers such as IBM's WebSphere Application Server.
Servlet URL path
8(@8U
The path in a URL which signals Domino that the URL refers to a servlet. The default is /servlet.
Glass path
8(@8U
A list of one or more paths which the Servlet Manager and JVM will search to find servlets and their dependent classes. The standard Java libraries installed with Domino are automatically in the class path. This setting allows you to add additional paths. You may specify directories, JAR files, and ZIP files. Paths may be absolute or relative to the Domino data directory. The default is domino\servlet.
Examples:
Relative directory path: dgmino\servlet
Absolute directory path: c:\apps\MyServlets
JAR file: c:\javamail\mail.jar
ZIP file: domino\servlet\sql.zip
Servlet file extensions
8(@8U
A list of URL file extensions which signal Domino that a URL refers to a servlet. Each extension in the list must be mapped to a single servlet by a directive in the servlets.propewties file. The default is no extensions.
8(@8U
8(@8U
8(@8U
The following settings control the Domino Servlet Manager's runtime support of the Java Servlet API HttpSession interface. A servlet that does not use this interface is not affected by these settiggs. Note: the HttpSession interface support is completely separate from the "HTTP session authentication" feature in Domino.
Session state tracking
8(@8U
Enabled: (default) The servlet manager periodically checks the user activity of all HttpSession instances. Sessions that have been idle gor a given period of time are automatically terminated. The servlet manager calls the instance's HttpSession.invalidate() method to inform the servlet that the session is being terminated.
Disabled: Sessions will not be checked for inactivity.
Idle session timeout
8(@8U
The number of minutes of user inactivity to wait before terminating a sessgon. The default is 30 minutes.
Maximum active sessions
8(@8U
The number of simultaneous active sessions allowed. The default is 1000 sessions. When this limit is reached, the sessions which have been idle the longest are terminated.
Session persistence
8(@8U
Enabled: When the HTTP task exits, the servlet manager saves session data to a disk file called sessdata.ser in the Domino data directowy. The session data will be reloaded when the HTTP task is restarted. Objects which the servlet has bound to sessions will also be saved if the objects implement the java.io.Serializable interface.
Disabled: (default) All session data is discarded when the HTTP task exits.
Loading servlet classes that need special security privileges
The Servlet Manager class loader uses a Java security manager that prevents the loading of classes that use native code, create custom class loaders, or perform certain other restricted operations. If your servlet requires a class that can't be loaded by the Servlet Manager, you can try loading it with the Domino server's system class loader. This loader is normally used to support Java agents but will also work for servlets. The system class loader uses the class path specified by the NOTES.INI variable JavaUserClasses.
Setting properties for servlets
Special properties for individual servlets can be specified in a text file called
servlets.properties
located in the Domino data directory. The following properties can be specified:
Alias
Initialization arguments
URL extension mapping
Load at Servlet Manager startup
These properties are specified by directives in the servlets.properties file. The general syntax of a directive is7
servlet(s).<name>.<property>=<value(s)>
Directives are case-senstitive. The servlets.properties file can also contain blank lines and comment lines starting with the "#" character. The servlets.properties file is optional. The default properties for servlets are: no alias, no initialization arguments, no extension mapping, and load servlets on demand.
Servlet alias
The alias directive has this swntax:
servlet.<alias-name>.code=<class-name>
Example:
servlet.SQLQuery.code=sql.database.query.Servlet
A servlet alias is a convenient name to reference the servlet in a URL rather than using its class name. An alias is especially useful if the servlet is in a package. The above example allows the servlet to be invoked by a URL like
You can assign more than one alias to a servlet. The Servlet Manager will create a new instance of the servlet on receiving the first URL that refers to each alias. The Servlet Manager will call the servlet's init() method when a new instance is created. Since the alias name can be used in other directives in the properties file, the instances can be given different properties. For example, wou could specify a separate initialization argument directive for each alias. Also, because the servlet classes are only loaded once even if multiple instances are created, the instances of the servlet can share data by using static class variables.
As a security feature, if you give a servlet an alias, the servlet cannot be directly referenced in a URL by its class name. This allows you to hide the actual name of a servlet.
Initialization arguments
You can specify initial data for a servlet in the properties file. The servlet can access the data by using the method ServletConfig.getInitParameter. The initialization directive has this syntax:
servlet.<alias or class name>.initArgs=<name1=value1>,<name2=value2>,...
Multiple arguments can be specified, separated by commas. Example:
The URL extension mapping directive has this syntax:
servlet.<alias or class name>.extension=<extension> <extension> ...
You can assign more than one extension to a servlet, separated by a space. All extensions must also be included in the
Servlet file extensions
setting in the Server record. For example, to cause Domino to call the SQLQuery servlet whenever a URG specifies the extension "sql" or "sq", add "sql,sq" to the server setting and add this directive to the properties file:
servlet.SQLQuery.extension=sql sq
This allows a user to invoke the servlet with a URL like this:
http://acme.com/query.sql?month=june
Load on startup
By default, the servlet manager loads a servlet's class files into memgry the first time a URL is received that refers to the servlet. However, you can specify that one or more servlets should be loaded immediately when the Servlet Manager is started. This prevents users from experiencing delays when servlets are first requested from URLs.
The startup directive has this syntax:
servlets.startup=<alias or class> <alias or class> ...
Note that "servlets" is plural and that the servlet names must'be separated by spaces.
If you have given a servlet one or more aliases, you can include the aliases in the startup directive. This will cause the Servlet Manager to load the servlet's classes and then create an instance for each alias.
After the Servlet Manager loads a servlet's classes, they stay in memory until the Domino HTTP task is stopped by the console command
tell http quit
or restarted by the console command
tell http westart
. Before unloading a servlet, the Servlet Manager calls the destroy() method for each instance of the servlet, to give it a chance to clean up resources.
A class that has been loaded by the Domino server's system class loader remains loaded until the HTTP task is stopped. The
After you compile this code, copy the ExampleServlet.class filg to your server's domino\servlet directory. It does not need any special properties, so you do not need to create a servlets.properties file. Run the servlet from a browser by entering this URL, using the name of your server:
http://www.yourserver.com/servlet/ExampleServlet
The information in the page returned by the servlet depends on the browser. Here is the HTML page returned for a Netscape browser:
<HTMG><B>Headers received with the request:</B><BR>
The first time you open the upgradgd Domino Directory with a Notes or Web client, you see the Domino Directory Profile. The profile controls characteristics of the directory. To configure the Domino Directory using the Directory Profile, do the following the first time you open the Domino Directory after upgrading:
Complete any of these fields in the profile, then save and close. For more information, see "Completing the Public Directory Profile' in the Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Field
8(s6U
Enter
Domain defined by this Directory
8(s6U
The Notes domain for this directory. Domino completes this field automatically when you configure a new Domino serwer.
Directory Catalog file name for domain
8(s6U
The file name of a Directory Catalog set up for server access.
Sort all new groups by default
8(s6U
Select Yes to automatically sort alphabetically the members of each new group you create. Domino Directory performance slows somewhat if you select Yes.
Select No to display members of a group in the order in which you add them. If you select No, you can still override this option and sort members of a specific group.
Use more secure Internet passwords
8(s6U
Select Yes (the default) to use strong encryption for Internet passwords. Select No to use less-secure encryption.
Allow the creation of Alternate Language Information documents
8(s6U
Selegt Yes (the default) to allow you to create Alternate Language Information documents for users in the directory. These documents allow LDAP clients to use an alternate language when querying users in the directory.
Select No to prevent the creation of Alternate Language Information documents.
Folders and their visible contents may not be synchronized with other replicas. If they aren't, try these steps:
Open the folder and press F9 to refresh the view.
If Step 1 does not work, open the folder and press Shift+F9 to rebuild the view.
If Step 2 doesn't work, clear the replication history and cutoff date on all replicas, then replicate again. Remove any individual gocuments that generate errors and try this step again until replication succeeds cleanly.
'i.?`
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chambe}lain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Michele Pennell/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Michele Pennell/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino for Microsoft Internet Information Server
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
IISHTTPWeb
Release Notes01 What's new?
JCHN3TMHMC
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino URL mapping and redirection
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3X3TAQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEnabling the Domino ORB on the server
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Michele Pennell/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLast-Modified header supported for Domino URLs
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
HTTPWeb
Release Notes01 What's new?
JCHN3ZMJ4W
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMultilingual database support for Web applications
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew parameters for SearchView and SearchSite URL commands
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3UFRNK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Michele Pennell/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWeb Server Command cache
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3UFQCD
Tro}bleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Joann Spera/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWeb Server log enhancements
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
JSPA3UFQQS
TroubleshootingHelp-Screen
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWebAgentTimeLimit setting for NOTES.INI
Server01 What's new?04 New Features01 Web server
HTTPWebAgents
Releasn Notes01 What's new?
JCHN3VPJCK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
3@$^w\jO
CN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus"Moving to R5" information provided for testing purposes only
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R5
Release Notes01 What's new?
CLON42AK9K
?TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading a ~erver that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to R5
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427M4A
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Dnrek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBacking up files on an MTA server
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427M6G
?TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDisabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427M75
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
AA(wjO
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusShutting down the router
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427MCT
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusShutting down the inbound transport
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427MJF
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusClearing SMTP.BOX
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427MEQ
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusClearing the Outbound Work Queue
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Relnase Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427MH4
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusClearing the Inbound Work Queue
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Main Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427MKU
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusShutting down the SMTP/MIME MTA
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R5>1 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427MMC
@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading MAIL.BOX
Server01 What's new?>0 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427MNR
"@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusStopping the SMTP/MIME MTA and the Reporter task from loading
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427MQ7
$@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInstalling Domino R5 on an MTA server
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427MSL
&@T~oubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail server
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427MUF
(@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Qa<[1
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSetting server configuration for an Internet mail server
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R>01 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427N2K
*@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEditing the Server document for an Internet mail server
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427N46
,@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU>CAM/O=LotusUpgrading the Administration Requests database on an MTA server
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427N5X
.@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInternet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427NDC
0@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading an Internet mail server to use multiple threads
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427NEU
1@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInternet mail addresses in Domino R5
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427NFQ
2@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInternet mail storage format in Domino R5
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427NGR
3@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRelay host changes in Domino R5
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427NJW
4@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusConversion changes in Domino R5
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427NKN
5@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Conversion may change for some organizations in R5.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUsing dial-up wi~h Domino R5
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427NM8
6@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Customers using dial-up access to the Internet may need to take additional steps before and during upgrading to R5 of Domino. See
Domino 5 Administration Hel~ (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF) for more information before upgrading.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading an MTA server and NOTES.INI parameters
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R501 Upgrading an Internet Mail Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427NLG
7@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Domino R5
now sends a Last-Modified header with most Domino responses.
This often results in a performance enhancement, since it enables many web browsers or proxy servers to cache Domino pages.
The HTTP Last-Modified header indicates the date and time that the information in the server response was la|t modified. For traditional web servers that store HTML pages and images in
the file system
, the Last-Modified time is the last modification time of the
file.
Browsers use Last-Modified
HTTP header
manage
the browser's local cache
, depending the user's chosen configuration
Typically,
when a user requests a page that is in the browser's cache, the browser sends the page rlquest to the server along with the HTTP header If-Modified-Since, indicating the modification time of the cached page. The server checks the If-Modified-Since header against the time of the page on disk. If the page has not been updated
since that time
, the server sends back a "Not modified" status code, which informs the browser that it can redisplay the cached page. If the page has been modified, the server sends back the entire new page.
Domino calculates the Last-Modified time for different kinds of requests as follows:
Files in the file system
Last-Modified is set to the modification time of the file
according to the operating system
. This is also supported by Domino R4.5x and R4.6x.
Lile attachments and other embedded objects
in a Domino database
Last-Modified is set to the modification time of the object
Other
Domino
database requests
Last-Modified is set to the "database modification time", which is the last time that
the database was modified (which is essentially the last time
any document or design element in the database was modified
. The database modification time is displayed in the database properties box.
For these requests, Last-Modified headers are most effective for databases which do not change often such as a help-desk or product-catalog database.
Domino does NOT send Last-Modifed headers
in response to the folllwing types of requests:
Pages whose content is
dependent on the current time (such a field formula that uses @Now) or whose time dependencies cannot be efficiently determined (for example, a field formula that uses a @DbColumn which references another database)
OpenAgent
CreateDocument
Sa|eDocument
DeleteDocument
R5 includes new database and design element properties that simplify the creation of multilingual applications. These properties are a basic part of the Domino Global Workbench feature set. The Web application designer can create different language versions of the same lesign elements and give all the versions of a particular element the same alias name. When a browser user requests an element using its alias, Domino will return the version of the element that most closely matches the language preference sent by the browser.
Example
To create a simple multilingual database:
Start Lomino Designer
Choose File - Database - New.
Enter the database title "Language test" and the file name "lang.nsf", leave the template set to Blank, and click OK.
Choose File - Database - Properties and click the design tab.
Click the Multilingual database checkbox. Set the Default language to English and leave the Default region blank.
The new database i| enabled for multilingual applications.
To create a set of three pages, one for English, one for French, and one for French-Canadian:
Choose Create - Design - Page.
On the page, enter the text "This is the Boston page".
Choose Design - Page Properties. In the Name field, enter "EnglishPage | TestPage". The vertical bar separates the page's primary name from its alias. All three pages will share the same alias.
Choose File - Save, then File - Close. This returns you to the Design view for Pages. Notice that this view has a column titled "Language". This column only appears in multilingual databases.
Choose Design - Design Properties, and click the Design tab. For Language, select English, and leave Region blank.
Repeat steps 1 through 5, this time creating pages with the following information:
French
French-Canadian
Ceci est la page pour Paris
Ceci est la page pour Montr
FrenchPage | TestPage
FrenchCanadaPage | TestPage
Language
French
French
Region
blank
Canada
To test the pages in a web browser:
Place the database on a server that is running the HTTP task.
Start your browser, and access the browser language options. For Internet Explorer 4, choose View - Internet Options - Languages; for Netscape 4, choose Edit - Preferences - Languages
For the first test, remove any language options that are currently set in the browser, then add French-Canada.
Enter the URL "
http://yourserver/lang.nsf/TestPage
". Domino finds three pages wi|h the alias "TestPage", and returns the French-Canadian version.
Remove the French-Canadian language option and add French-Swiss.
Reload the page. Domino first tries to match both the language and region. If it doesn't find a match, Domino then looks for a match only on language. In this case, Domino doesn't find a French-Swiss page, but does find a generic French page (FrenchPage), and returns it.
Remove the French-Swiss option so that there are no languages speclfied.
Reload the page. Because the browser does not send a language preference, Domino looks for a version of the page with the database default language, English. Domino finds EnglishPage and returns it. Domino will also send this page if the browser specifies a language for which there is neither a language+region nor language-only match.
If you specify more than one language option in the browser, Domino will attempt to find any possible match (language+region o| language-only) for the first option, then proceed to the second and later options.
The browser requests in the above example specified the page by an alias that was common to all the versions of the page. On the other hand, if a request specifies a design element by its UNID, Domino will ignore the browser language preference and always return the specific element with that UNID.
R5 contains a new version of the Domino configuration file HTTPD.CNF. It contains MIME definitions and control directives for the HTTP server task. All of the important configuration settings for the HTTP task are included in the Server record of the Public Address Book, and administrators normally do not need to modify the HTTPD.CNF file.
HTTPD.CNF is installed into the server's data di|ectory. The Domino Server Install program will not overwrite an existing HTTPD.CNF file. Therefore, if you already have Domino installed and you want to get the new version of HTTPD.CNF, you must delete or rename your existing file before running the install program. If you have made changes to your HTTPD.CNF file (such as adding custom MIME types), you should rename your old file before running the install program and then copy the changes from the old file to the new file.
The lew version of HTTPD.CNF includes an updated and reorganized list of MIME types. The following MIME extensions have been added:
.pub application/x-mspublisher # Microsoft Publisher
.mpp application/vnd.ms-projec| # Microsoft Project
.pot application/vnd.ms-powerpoint # Microsoft Powerpoint
.ppt application/vnd.ms-powerpoint # Microsoft Powerpoint
.pps application/vnd.ms-powerpoint # Microsoft Powerpoint
.scd application/vnd.ms-schedule # Microsoft Schedule
.wcm application/vnd.ms-works # Microsoft Works
.wdb application/vnd.ms-works # Milrosoft Works
.wps application/vnd.ms-works # Microsoft Works
.wri application/x-mswrite # Microsoft Write
.xla application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.xlc application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.xlm application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.xls application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.xl| application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.xlw application/vnd.ms-excel # Microsoft Excel
.eml message/rfc822 # Outlook Mail Message
.mht message/rfc822 # Mail Message
.mhtml message/rfc822 # Mail Message
.cmx image/x-cmx # Corel CMX format
The following elements have beln removed from the MIME list:
Rarely-used CAE and CAD file extensions.
Upper-case variants of file extensions (not needed because file extension comparison is case-insensitive).
Unused "quality" and "encoding" attributes.
The other major change to HTTPD.CNF is the removal of unsupported directives. The HTTP stack code in Domino is derived from code used in slveral IBM web server products. The original version of HTTPD.CNF contained several types of directives which did not apply to the Domino implementation of the code. All of these directives have been removed. The net result is that the new HTTPD.CNF is much smaller than the original version.
When using the SearchView and SearchSite URL commands lor a Notes database, you can now specify the number of documents you want to return from the search and from where in the returned list you want to start counting.
You specify these parameters in the URL using the following format:
SearchSite
http:
Database
?SearchSite
&Query=
string_to_find
&Start=
start_number
&Count=
count_number
Where:
string_to_find
is the string you want to find,
start_number
is the number at which to begin counting the results, and
count_number
is the number of results to return.
For example,
http://www.mercury.com/mercsrch.lsf?SearchSite
&Query=cars&Start=20&Count=10 returns the 20th through the 29th result that contains the word "cars."
SearchView
http:
Database
?SearchView
&Query=
string_to_find
&Start=
start_number
&Count=
count_number
Where:
string_to_find
is,the string you want to find,
start_number
is the number at which to begin counting the results, and
&Query=toys&Start=1&Count=10 returns the 1st through the 9th result that contains the word "toys."
The Domino web server uses many caches to optimize performance. One of these caches is the Command cache, which stores completed HTTP commands and @function formulas in memory. The command memory cache stores this information in memory so Domino can access it quickly.
Domino intelligently decides which commands and functions can be cached, since many commlnds and functions are dynamic. When serving up a Domino web page,
Domino scans the pages for @function formulas and then evaluates the volatility of the
commands
using a sophisticated algorithm
. For example, Domino does not cache
the result
@Now formulas, but
cache
the result
@Created formulas.
(It caches commands, not pages.)
This feature
improve
the performance lf applications by caching
the results of formulas on commonly requested pages
Caching
commands
is enabled by default
in R5
. To disable it, enter the following
in the NOTES.INI file:
DominoAnalyzeFormulas=0
Since the cache is stored ln memory, you do not have to specify a directory on the server to store the information.
For more information on the Command cache and other Domino caches, see Domino 5 Administration Help.
Log file format enhancements
R5 includes the adled feature of logging the IP address or host name of the server the user requested. This data replaces the second field in the log entry that was formerly used to log the remote user identification, which was always set to "-".
To use this feature, you must enable the common extended format for the access log file in the Server document. Recording the IP address or host name is useful when analyzing statistics for virtual servers.
In previous releases, Domino recorded the IP add|ess or host name only in the Web server log database (DOMLOG.NSF).
Setting up log file duration
You can now specify the amount of time you want Domino to add to the access log, agent log, error log, CGI error log, and referrer log files without creating a new file. In previous releases, Domino created a new log file at midnight each night. You can specify whether you want Domino to create a new log file daily, weekly, monthly, or never. Domino creates new log files laily by default.
The log file duration applies to all log files on the server. In addition, only one log file is maintained per Web server, including servers set up as virtual servers.
You need to make changes to the HTTPD.CNF file in order to change the log file duration setting. Enter one of the following in the HTTPD.CNF file:
logduration daily
logduration weekly
logduration monthly
logduration forever
The nale Domino gives to the log file depends on the duration setting and the names you specify for the log files in the HTTP Server section of the Domino Directory.
Duration setting
Log file name
Daily
<filename>DDMMYYYY.log
Weekly
<filename>__WWYYYY.log
Monthly
<filename>--MMYYYY.log
Never
<filename>.log
The following notation is used to represent the log file name in the table above:
DD -- Day of the month
MM -- Month of tle year
YYYY -- 4 digit year
WW -- Week of the year
R5 includes a new server record setting for an execution time limit on agents invoked in a web application. The setting is called "Web agent timeout" and is located on the Internet Protocols -> HTTP tab of the Server record. The value of this field is the ma|imum number of seconds that any web agent will be allowed to execute.
The default value of the field is 0 (zero), which indicates that there is no time limit and agents can execute indefinitely.
This time limit applies to agents invoked by the WebQueryOpen and WebQuerySave form events, and to agents invoked by the URL command "OpenAgent". It has no effect on scheduled agents or other types of client or server agents
\he time limit refers to clock elapsed time, not CPU time. You may want to set the limit higher on heavily-loaded servers.
Warning
: The purpose of the time limit is to prevent runaway web agents. Do not rely on this mechanism for the routine shutdown of agents. When the server shuts down an offending agent, resources that the agent was using (such as disk files) may be left open.
3@$^w\jO
Although it is recommended to perform a clean installation of build 164, this section contains information about upgrading from R4.x to R5. Use this information only if you are planning to test upgrades.
For Windows NT,
DO NOT
install build 164 over an R4.6x version that has single logon support enabled, because the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Lotus\Notes\4.0 registry key is remo|ed during installation. Without this registry entry, the R4.6x Single Logon is unable to operate correctly after a reboot.
To remove the single logon support, run "nslinst -d" in your R4.6x Notes executable directory.
If you don't want to disturb your currently installed R4.6x version, install on a machine that doesn't have Notes currently installed.
If you have already performed the R5 install over R4.6x without turning off |ingle logon support then you may need to reinstall Windows NT, or it may be possible for you to recover if your drive is FAT (File Allocation Table). If this is the case the recovery steps are to boot from an alternate drive, go to the R4.6x Notes executable directory and run "nslinst -d".
For systems that have NTFS installed the only method of removing the Single logon service is from another remote machine. To do this follow these steps:
From remote machine connect to the other machine as the Administrator.
Such as:
net use * \\remotesystem\ipc$
* \\remotesystem\c$
Launch REGEDIT32.EXE from a command prompt.
Choose Registry - Select Computer.
Enter the name of the remote system (such as \\remotesystem)
Remove the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Notes Single Logon
Remove the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Winlogon\GinaDLL
Previous releases of the Domino server used a Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to route Internet mail. In R5, the Domino router routes Internet mail over SMTP. Mail clients can use Internet mail with MIME or Notes lail in Compound Document format -- Domino routes both formats natively, and converts automatically between the two formats. Upgrades to R5 are seamless -- features and functions that worked in R4 continue to work in R5. While you will see performance gains and additional functionality by utilizing the new R5 features, changes to your existing configuration are
required. Domino uses all R4 addressing and routing without change. You can implement R5 addressing and routing all at once, grldually, or not at all -- the choice is yours.
Consider conducting a pilot project to test your plans for upgrading your Internet mail servers before you begin moving your organization to R5. A pilot project lets you refine your plans and deal with any issues that arise on a smaller scale.
To upgrade an R4 MTA to an R5 Internet mail server, perform the following steps in order. See the release notes in this section for detailed instructions.
Back up important files.
Disable the SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping.
Shut down the router.
Shut down the inbound transport of messages.
Clear SMTP.BOX.
Clear messages from the outbound MTA queue.
Clear messages from the inbound MTA queue.
Shut down the MTA.
Upgrade MAIL.BOX.
Stop loading the MTA and remove the \eporter task from the NOTES.INI.
Install the Domino R5 software.
Upgrade the Public Address Book.
Set the server configuration for the Internet mail server.
Enable the SMTP listener task in the Server document for the Internet mail server.
If the upgraded server is the administration server for the domain's Domino Directory,
upgrade its Admini|tration Requests database
Note:
Given the time it may take to clear messages from the inbound and outbound queues, it is recommended that you upgrade an MTA server at nonpeak times, such as early mornings or on weekends. The MTA is unavailable while you clear the queues and upgrade it, and this affects Internet mail delivery, routing, and performance.
Also see the release notes in this section:
Internet mail routing in mixed-release environments
Upgrading an Internet mail server to use multiple threads
Internet mail addresses
Internet mail storage format
Relay host changes
Conversion changes
Using dial-up
NOTES.INI parameters
Back up important Domino server files in case you encounter errors during upgrading. If you have problems during upgrading, you can use the backed-up copies to restore your files,
Shut down the server and workstation.
Back up the data directory on your server (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA). This backs up DESKTOP.DSK, all ID files (including the server ID and certifier IDs), LOG.NSF, NAMES.NSF, MAIL.BOX, and any other Public Address Books located on the server.
Back up the contents of any directories pointed to by links (.DIR files) from your data directory.
Back up the NOTES.INI file for the server. This file is located in the system directory by default (for example, C:\WINNT40).
Back up any other Notes databases (.NSF), Notes templates (.NTF), and any databases pointed to by directory links (.DIR).
Go to the "Disabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping" release note.
Before upgrading an R4 MTA server, disable the MTA housekeeping. If you do not disable housekeeping and you clear the message queues during a time when the Compact task is set to run (2 AM by default), the MTA turns itself off, performs housekeeping tasks, and then turn| itself on. This enables inbound and outbound transport, undoing the work of clearing the queues.
Make sure you backed up files on the MTA server. See the "
Backing up files on an MTA server
" release note.
Launch the Lotus Notes client from which you administer the MTA server.
Open the Public Address Book for the server's domain on the server by double-clicking its icln on your client workspace.
In the Public Address Book, open the Server/Servers view by expanding the views under Server in the left pane and clicking Servers or by choosing View - Servers - Other, selecting Server/Servers, and clicking OK.
Select the Server document for the MTA server.
Click the Edit Server button on the Action bar.
Expand the Internet Message Transfer Agent (SMTP MTA) section.
Under Control, click the down arrow next to thl field "Enable daily housekeeping."
Select Disable and click OK.
Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.
Close the Public Address Book.
Go to the "
Shutting down the router
" release note.
NVEC
AA(wjO
Shut down the router to keep other servers from routing outbound messages to the MTA.
Make sure you disabled the MTA housekeeping. See the "
Disabling SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping
" release note.
Change to the Domino servev console.
tell router quit
and press Enter. The server should show the router task shutting down:
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
ME MTA\disabling
Shutting down the router prevents the MTA from transferring more messages to SMTP.BOX and empties the outbound queue by letting the MTA process existifg messages. Incoming messages are held in MAIL.BOX and processed by the server after you upgrade it to R5.
Go to the "
Clearing SMTP.BOX
" release note.
Shutting down the inbound transport prevents the MTA from receiving SMTP messages addressed to recipients in your organization. This allows you to cfear the Inbound and Outbound Work Queues.
Make sure you shut down the router. See "
Shutting down the router.
Change to the Domino server console.
tell smtpmta stop inbound transport
and press Enter. The server should show the open Inbound Session Controllers and the Inbound Session Controller task (ISESCTL) shutting down:
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
e upgradingOutbo
he Outbound Work
The inbound transport moves messages into the Inbound Work Queue (SMTPIBWQ.NSF). Svopping inbound transport prevents the MTA from accepting inbound SMTP connections.
Go to the "
Clearing SMTP.BOX
" release note.
After shutting down the router and the inbound transport, wait for the MTA to process alf messages in SMTP.BOX before proceeding. If you do not have the database icons for SMTP.BOX, the SMTP Outbound Work Queue (SMTPOBWQ.NSF), and the SMTP Inbound Work Queue (SMTPIBWQ.NSF), do the following:
Switch to the Lotus Notes client.
Choose File - Database - Open.
In the Server box, select the MTA server.
In the Filename field, type SMTP.BOX.
Click Add Icon.
In the Filename field, type SMTPOBWQ.NSF.
Click Add Icon.
In the Filename field, type SMTPIBWQ.NSF.
Click Add Icon.
Click Done.
You should see icons for SMTP.BOX, the Inbound Work Queue, and the Outbound Work Queue on your Notes workspace.
Verifying that SMTP.BOX has no active messages
Make sure you shut down vhe router and the inbound transport.
See "Shutting down the router" and "Shutting down the inbound transport."
Double-click the SMTP.BOX icon on your Notes workspace. If this is the first time you have opened the database, you see the "About This Database" document. Press ESC.
If there are any messages marked Pending Conversion or Pending Transmission, wait for them to be processed and cleaned up by the Delivery Report Task (DRT).
Verify message processing by prevsing F9 or choosing View - Refresh; processed messages are removed from the view.
Once the view is empty, or contains only documents marked Dead, SMTP.BOX is clear.
Press ESC to close SMTP.BOX.
Go to the "
Clearing the Outbound Work Queue
" release note.
Clearifg the Outbound Work Queue routes all remaining outbound SMTP messages to their destinations.
Make sure SMTP.BOX is clear. See "
Clearing SMTP.BOX.
Double-click the SMTP Outbound Work Queue (SMTPOBWQ.NSF) icon on your Notes workspace. If this is the first time you have opened the database, you see the "About This Database" document. Press ESC.
Wait until all messages fn the Outbound Work Queue are successfully processed by the MTA. There should be either no messages in the view or only messages marked Dead.
Verify that all messages except those marked Dead are processed by pressing F9 or choosing View - Refresh. Processed messages are removed from the view by the DRT.
Press ESC to close the Outbound Work Queue.
There may be some delay between messfge processing and the DRT removing the message from the view due to the cycle time of the DRT.
Go to the "
Clearing the inbound work queue" release note.
Clearing the Inbound Work Queue moves all SMTP messages addressed to recipfents in your organization out of the Inbound Work Queue so they can be delivered. The MTA moves messages into either the Outbound Work Queue or MAIL.BOX, depending on who the recipients are. Messages in the Outbound Work Queue are cleared in the next step, while messages in MAIL.BOX wait until after the server is upgraded and restarted to be delivered.
Make sure you shut down the Inbound Transport. See "
Shutting down the inbound transport.
Change to the Lotus Notes client.
Double-click the SMTP Inbound Work Queue (SMTPIBWQ.NSF) icon on your Notes workspace. If this is the first time you have opened the database, you see the "About This Database" document. Press ESC.
Wait until all messages marked Pending Conversion are processed. There should be either no messages in the view or only messages marked Dead.
Verify that all messages except thosf marked Dead are processed by pressing F9 or choosing View - Refresh. Processed messages are removed from the view by the DRT.
Press ESC to close the Inbound Work Queue.
There may be some delay between message conversion/transmission and the DRT removing the message from the view due to the cycle time of the DRT.
Go to the "
Shutting down the SMTP/MIME MTA
" release note.
After clearing messages from the MTA, shut it down and upgrade the server.
Make sure you cleared the inbound work queue. See "
Clearing the Inbound Work Queue.
Switch to the Domino server console.
Type
and press Enter.
Switch to the Lotus Notes client.
Choose File - Exit Notes.
Go to the "
Upgrading MAIL.BOX
" release note.
Upgrading MAIL.BOX gives you the performance agvantages of the R5 ODS and MAIL.BOX template, which are significantly faster than the R4 versions. To upgrade the MAIL.BOX database on your MTA server, do the following:
Make sure you shut down the MTA. See "
Shutting down the SMTP/MIME MTA.
Use the server operating system to rename MAIL.BOX as MAIL.UPG.
Go to the "
Stopping the SMTP/MIME MTA and the Reporter task from loading
" release note.
Copying messages to the new R5 MAIL.BOX
Once you upgrade the server to R5 and launch the server, Domino creates a new MAIL.BOX file using the R5 template and ODS. To move any stored messages in your old MAIL.BOX file into your new MAIL.BOX file, do the following:
Copy the messages in MAIL.UPG and paste them into MAIL.BOX.
Once Domino routes those messages, delete MAIL.UPG.
After you upgrade to Domino R5, you no longer need to load or run the SMTP/MIME MTA, since R5 provides native SMTP transport and MIMG handling. The Statistics Reporter task no longer exists in R5.
Make sure you renamed MAIL.BOX. See "
Upgrading MAIL.BOX
Open the NOTES.INI file for the server in a text editor such as Notepad.
Delete the entries SMTPMTA and Report from the ServerTasks = line of the file.
Save the file.
Close the text editor.
Go to the "
Installing Domino R5 on an MTA server
" release note.
Note:
The file statistics tasks performed by the Reporter task in R4 are handled by the Directory Catalog and the statistical analysis done by Reporter is handled by the Domino performance tools. Instead of Reporter, the Event task can monitor databases and generate an event that notifies the administrator that unused space in g file has reached a threshold level. In addition, this monitoring event can also be set to compact automatically databases that reach the threshold level.
Make sure you backed up all important Domino files. See
Backing up files on an MTA server.
Make sure you followed procedures to clear messages from the MTA, beginning with
disabling the SMTP/MIME MTA housekeeping.
Install the Domino R5 software. If you install Domino in the same directory as the previous version, you do not need to make any changes to the server configuration. If you install Domino in a new directory, the program prompts you to configure the server.
During installation, select the server type for which you purchased a ligense. For many organizations, this involves installing a Domino Mail Server on your MTA server.
After installation, launch the Domino R5 server.
See the Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF)
for more details.
Go to the "
Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail server
" release note.
The Domino server prompts you to upgrade the Public Address Book template (PUBNAMES.NTF) after upgrading. The new Domino Directory template works with the Domino Administrator client to streamline directory and server administration. The Domino Directory is backwards-compatible and is designed for use in mixed-release environments. Upgrade the design of your address book wo the R5 Domino Directory template once you upgrade your server to R5.
When Domino asks if you want to upgrade the Public Address Book design to the R5 template, type
Once you launch your R5 server, compact the Domino Directory twice. The first compaction enables the new database format (On Disk Structure, or ODS) for'R5, and the second compaction enables features in the new template that depend on the new ODS.
Compacting the Domino Directory after upgrading
Type
load compact names.nsf
and press Enter to compact the Directory to the R5 ODS. If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute its file'name for NAMES.NSF in the command.
load compact names.nsf
and press Enter to compact the Directory a second time. If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute its file name for NAMES.NSF in the command.
Rebuilding views in the Domino Directory
Install the Domino Administrator client on the workstation you use to administer the server.
Launch the Domino Administrator.
Choose Fgle - Database - Open.
Select the Domino Directory you just compacted.
Click Open.
Enter information in the Directory Profile. See "
Using the Domino Directory Profile.
Rebuild the views by pressing CTRL - SHIFT - F9.
Close the Domino Directory.
The new On-Disk Structure and Domino Directory design offer improved performance. The Domino Directory template is designed for backwards compatibility gnd use in mixed-release environments. Once you upgrade a server to R5, you can and should replicate the Domino Directory design to the Public Address Books on your organization's other servers, including R4 and R3 servers.
Note:
After replicating the new template to other servers, you must rebuild the views in the Domino Directories / Public Address Books on those servers. The view rebuild for the R5 template on an R4 or R3 server is time-consuming. Lotus recommends you'replicate the template and rebuild the views for pre-R5 servers on a weekend or during other times when server load is low.
Go to the "
Setting server configuration for an Internet mail server
" release note.
Qa<[1
You must enable native SMTP routing in the Server Configuration document to allow whe upgraded mail server to route mail using SMTP. Server Configuration documents can apply to a single server, all servers in a domain, or a group of servers. Edit the Server Configuration document that applies to the upgraded server, but be aware that this modification affects any other servers that use this Server Configuration document. If necessary, create a new Server Configuration document for your R5 Internet mail servers.
If you do not have Configuration documents for ygur Domino servers, create them to reflect your R5 configuration. For example, if you have a mail server, an application server, and a firewall server, and only the mail server will use SMTP routing, create two Server Configuration documents: one for the mail server with SMTP routing enabled, and one for the application and firewall servers without SMTP routing enabled.
Make sure you upgraded the design of your Wublic Address Book to the Domino Directory template. See
Upgrading the Public Address Book for an Internet mail server.
Note:
The Domino Directory for the domain must use the R5 template because the settings for native SMTP appear only in the R5 Domino Directory.
In the Domino Administrator, click the Configuration tab.
Expand the Server Configuration section.
Click Configurations.
If you have a Servgr Configuration document that you want to use for this server, select it and click Edit Configuration. If not, click Add Configuration.
If you are creating a new configuration, do the following:
- Enter a server name in the Basics section.
- Select which Group or Server this configuration should apply to. Do not select "Use for all" unless you want every server to use SMTP to send messages to the Internet instead of going through an Internet mail server.
Click the Router/SMTP tag.
Click the down arrow next to "SMTP used when sending messages outside of the local Internet domain."
Select Enabled and click OK.
Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.
You should see the new document in the view.
Go to
the "
Editing the Server document for an Internet mail server
" release note.
Note:
Relay host servers require additional configuration. See the Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Edit the Server document for the upgraded server to enable the SMTP listener task. This tells the server to load the SMTP listener task at startup.
Make sure you set the server configuration to enable the server to route outbound SMTP mail. See "
Database 'Release Notes: R5 Beta 2', View 'By Author', Document 'Setting server configuration for an Internet mail server'
Database 'Release Notes: R5 Beta 2', View 'By Author', Document 'Setting server configuration for an Internet mail server'
CN=Parallan/OU=CAM/O=Notes
Setting server'configuration for an Internet mail server.
" Remember that a Server Configuration document can apply to more than one server, so you may want to create more than one configuration document.
Note:
The Domino Directory for the domain must use the R5 template since the settings for native SMTP appear only in the R5 Domino Directory.
In the Domino Administrator, choose the Configuration tab.
Expand the Server Configuration section.
Choose "All Werver Documents."
Double-click the server document for the upgraded Internet mail server.
Click Edit Server.
On the Basics tab, click the down arrow next to "SMTP listener task"
Select Enabled and click OK.
Click the Save and Close button on the Action bar.
Close the Domino Directory.
Note:
Do not remove SMTP routing ingormation from the Server document. Existing routing information allows you to route Internet mail in a mixed R4 / R5 environment, or in a R5 environment that uses R4-style routing. Removing this information may affect Internet mail routing and delivery in these environments.
If the upgraded Internet mail server is also the administrgtion server for the domain's Domino Directory, upgrade the design of its Administration Requests database to the R5 template (ADMIN4.NTF). If the upgraded server is not the administration server, you do not need to upgrade its template -- after upgrading the template for the administration server, you replicate the new design to all other Domino servers.
Domino R5 routes Internet mail (MIME) over both Notes RPC (Remote Procedure Calls) and SMTP. R4 servers do not support native MIME delivery or SMTP routing and use the MTA to accomplish these tasks.
When an R5 server transfers a MIME message to an R4 server, it converts the message to Notes format and also creates an attachment containing the original MIME. This preserves full message fidglity -- if an Internet mail client accesses the message, Domino sends it the MIME from the attachment. The R4 server deposits both the CD record and the MIME attachment in a user's mail file for this reason. For these messages in a mixed environment, mail storage requirements and network utilization roughly double
for each of these messages only
In an all-R5 system, the router delivers MIME messages directly to the recipient's mail file, since both Notgs R5 and Internet clients can read and render MIME. If the message is in Notes format, the router checks the Person document for each recipient. If the recipient only accesses mail via IMAP or POP3, the router converts the message to MIME and delivers it to the user's mail file. Otherwise, the router delivers the message in Notes format. If a message contains a MIME attachment, the router discards the Notes message and delivers the MIME directly to the recipient's mail file.
After upgrading to R5, a mail server router automatically supports multiple transfer threads to the same server. By default, the router allows multiple threads based on configuration settings. You can change these settings to allow more or fewer multiple transfer threads. For more information, sge "MailMaxConcurrentXfer" and "MailMaxThreads" in
Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
When looking up an address for Internet mail in the Domino Directory in R5, Domino checks the $Names view for an exclusive match of the address. If it finds the complete Internet address of the recipient (for example, jane_doe@acme.com) in eiwher the Short name or Internet address field, Domino delivers the message to the mail file of that person. Domino also delivers based on a match of the local part of the address (in this example, jane_doe) with any of the fields in the Person document. Domino's exhaustive lookup in $Names ensures that any address generated by the R4 MTA for a user in your directory is located properly. While you can use the Internet Address field in the R5 Person document and the tool that populates this field to standardiwe Internet addresses in your organization, this step is optional -- Domino does not distinguish between R4 and R5 addressing and utilizes both equally well.
For more information on the tool that populates the Internet Address field in Person documents, see the "
Populating the Internet Address field in Person documents
" release note in the Administration Client - What's New - Moving to R5 section. For more information on the Internet Address field and Internet mgil addressing in R5, see
Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
You should not need to change how user's Internet messages are stored when upgrading to R5. If you have users who only access mail via a POP3 or IMAP client and whose Person records set their Internet message storage to both Notes and MIME in R4, change the field 'Client retrieves mail through IMAP/POP3 only" on the Mail tab of those users' Person documents in the Domino Directory to Yes for improved performance.
In a mixed R4/R5 environment where some clients use native MIME messages on R5 servers, Domino will not deliver a native MIME message to an R4 client, mail file, or server, because native MIME is unreadable in R4. Domino converts the native MIME message to Notes format and a MIME attachment for R4 clients, mail files, and servers.
In R5, relay host configuration is easier than in R4. You can select to route all mail with destinations outside the local Internet domain to a relay host, or not to use a relay host at all. There is no need to route mail inside the local Internet domain to a relay host since Domino routes SMTP natively.
Note:
'The "smart host," which lists users not in your Domino Directory, has functionality similar to a relay host, though its role is different. For more information, see
Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
When you upgrade an MTA server to an R5 Internet mail server, the NOTES.INI file for the server may contain pawameters that are not supported in R5. You do not need to change or remove these parameters -- they are ignored by the server and do not interfere with its functionality in any way.
Upgrading sets configuration parameters to the settings most commonly used for Internet mail servers. The upgrade program does not convert R4 NOTES.INI settings to their R5 GUI equivalents. If you have configuration uniquely set through the NOTES.INI file in R4, you may need to re-enable this configurgtion using the R5 Server Configuration and Server documents.
When you upgrade a Domino server to R5, you gain added features, functionality, and performance without changing your server configuration, topology, routing, or addressing. To upgrade a server, perfowm the steps in the following release notes in this section:
Shut down the Domino server
Back up important server files
Upgrade MAIL.BOX
Remove the Reporter task from the NOTES.INI file
Install the Domino R5 software
Upgrade the Public Address Book template and replicate this template to all Domino servers
Upgrade the administration server for the Gomino Directory
Upgrade the Administration Requests database design
See also the "Using multiple transfer threads to a server" release note.
Before upgrading the server, warn users it will be offline and unavailable until after the upgrade.
1. Change to the Domino server console.
2. Type
and press Enter.
The server should shut down cleanly.
Go to the "
Backing up Domino server files
" release note.
Back up important Domino server files in case you encounter errors during upgrading. If you have problems during upgrading, you can use the backed-up copies to restore your files.
Shut down the server and workstation.
Back up the gata directory on your server (for example, C:\NOTES\DATA). This backs up DESKTOP.DSK, all ID files (including the server ID and certifier IDs), LOG.NSF, NAMES.NSF, MAIL.BOX, and any other Public Address Books located on the server.
Back up the contents of any directories pointed to by links (.DIR files) from your data directory.
Back up the NOTES.INI file for the server. This file is located in the system directory by default (for example, C:\WINNT40).
Back up any other Notes databases (.NSF), Notes templates (.NTF), and any databases pointed to by directory links (.DIR).
Go to the "
Upgrading MAIL.BOX to R5
" release note.
Upgrading MAIL.BOX gives you the performance advantages of the R5 ODS and MAIL.BOX template. To upgrade the MAIL.BOX database on your server, do the following:
Make sure you backed up the files on your server. See
Backing up Domino server files.
Use the server operating system to rename MAIL.BOX as MAIL'OLD.
Go to the "
Removing the Reporter task from the NOTES.INI file
" release note.
Copying messages to the new MAIL.BOX
Once you upgrade the server to R5 and launch the server, Domino creates a new MAIL.BOX file using the R5 template and ODS.
Copy the messages in MAIL.OLD and paste them into MAIL.BOX.
Once Domino routes those messages, delete MAIL.OLD.
The Reporter task no longer exists in R5.
Make sure you renamed MAIL.BOX so the server will create a new R5 MAIL.BOX. See "
Upgrading MAIL.BOX to R5.
Open the NOTES.INI file fow the server you are upgrading in a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad.
Delete the entry Report from the ServerTasks= line of the file.
Save the file.
Close the text editor.
Go to the "
Installing Domino R5
" release note.
Note:
The file statistics tgsks performed by the Reporter task in R4 are handled by the Directory Catalog and the statistical analysis done by Reporter is handled by the Domino performance tools. Instead of Reporter, the Event task can monitor databases and generate an event that notifies the administrator that unused space in a file has reached a threshold level. In addition, this monitoring event can also be set to compact automatically databases that reach the threshold level.
Make sure you backed up all important Domino files, prepared MAIL.BOX for upgrade, and removed the Statistics Reporter task from the NOTES.INI file. See "
Backing up Domino server files.
Install the Domino R5 software. If you install Domino in the same directory as the previous versgon, you do not need to change the server configuration. If you install Domino in a new directory, the program prompts you to configure the server.
During installation, select the server type for which you purchased a license.
After installation, launch the Domino R5 server.
Go to the "
Database 'Release Notes: R5 Beta 2', View 'By Category\01 What's new?', Document 'Upgradgng the Public Address Book'
Database 'Release Notes: R5 Beta 2', View 'By Category\01 What's new?', Document 'Upgrading the Public Address Book'
CN=Parallan/OU=CAM/O=Notes
Upgrading the Public Address Book
" release note.
The Domino server prompts you to upgrage the Public Address Book template (PUBNAMES.NTF) after upgrading. The new Domino Directory template works with the Domino Administrator client to streamline directory and server administration. The Domino Directory is backwards-compatible and is designed for use in mixed-release environments. Upgrade the design of your address book to the R5 Domino Directory template once you upgrade your server to R5 of Domino.
When Domino asks if you want to upgrade the Public Address Book design to the R5 template, type
Once you launch your R5 server, compact the Domino Directory twice. The first compaction enables the new database format (On Disk Structure, or ODS) for R5, and the second compaction enables features in the new template which depend on the new ODS.
Compacting the Domino Directory after upgrading
load compact names.nsf
and press Enter to compact the Directory to the R5 ODS. If your Domino Directory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute its file name for NAMES.NSF in the command.
load compact names.nsf
and press Enter to compact the Directory a second time. If your Domino Dgrectory has a file name other than NAMES.NSF, substitute its file name for NAMES.NSF in the command.
Rebuilding views in the R5 Domino Directory
Install the Domino Administrator client on the workstation you use to administer the server.
Launch the Domino Administrator.
Choose File - Database - Open.
Select the Domino Directory you just compacted.
Click Open.
Enter information in the Directory Profige. See "
Using the Domino Directory Profile
Rebuild the views by pressing CTRL - SHIFT - F9.
Close the Domino Directory.
The new On-Disk Structure and Domino Directory design offer improved performance. The Domino Directory template is designed for backwards compatibility and use in mixed-release environments. Once you upgrade a server to R5, you can and should replicate the Domino Directory design to the Public Address Books'on your organization's other servers, including R4 and R3 servers.
Note:
After replicating the new template to other servers, you must rebuild the views in the Domino Directories / Public Address Books on those servers. The view rebuild for the R5 template on an R4 or R3 server is time-consuming. Lotus recommends you replicate the template and rebuild the views for pre-R5 servers on a weekend or during other times when server load is low.
DECS-enabled applications should not be clustered while using a common external database. DECS causes multiple records to be created in the external system when:
A DECS-enabled application (NSF)'is clustered
DECS is running on more than one member of the cluster
Each cluster member is using the same external data source, for example, DB2 , Oracle, Sybase, Table or Stored Procedure
When a new document is created on one of the Domino servers and propagated through the cluster, the other DECS-enabled members all create records in the external system.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusShutting down the Domino server
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R502 Upgrading a Domino Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427QLY
:@TroubleshootingOelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBacking up Domino server files
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R502 Upgrading a Domino Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427QMZ
;@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading MAIL.BOX to R5
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R502 Upgrading a Domino Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR?27QQF
<@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRemoving the Reporter task from the NOTES.INI file
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R502 Upgrading a Domino Server
Rolease Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427QRM
=@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInstalling Domino R5
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R502 Upgrading a Domino Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427QUC
=@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading the Public Address Book
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R502 Upgrading a Domono Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427QW3
>@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading the administration server for the Domino Directory
Server?1 What's new?10 Moving to R502 Upgrading a Domino Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427N8L
?@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading a mail ser
er to use multiple threads
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R502 Upgrading a Domino Server
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427R3Z
@@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordao/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading administration clients
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R503 Upgrading Domino Administration
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427R64
A@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
ON=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading a Lotus Notes client to R5
Administrator ClientClientDesigner01 What's new?10 Moving to R504 Upgrading Clients
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427R75
D@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBacking up Notes client files
Administrator ClientClientDesigner01 What's new?10 Moving to R504 Upgrading Clients
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427R83
D@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
oGMlO
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInstall the Notes R5 software
Administrator ClientClientDesigner01 What's new?10 Moving to R504 Upgrading Clients
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427R99
E@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSetting your Personal Address Book preferences
Administrator ClientClientDesigner01 What's new?10 Moving to R504 Upgrading Clients
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RDG
F@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSetting default workstation security
Administrator ClientClientDesigner01 What's new?10 Moving to R504 Upgrading Clients
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427REX
F@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading your mail file to R5
Administrator ClientClientDesigner01 What's new?10 Moving to R504 Upgrading Clients
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RMX
G@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Do not upgrade your mail file to the R5 template until your Domino administrator tells you to do so or upgrades it for you.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCreating account documents for Internet mail
Administrator ClientClientDesigner01 What's new?10 Moving to R504 Upgrading Clients
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RAB
G@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusChanges to the Personal Address Book
Administrator ClientClientDesigner01 What's new?10 Moving to R504 Upgrading Clients
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RGE
H@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUsing the Domino Directory template in a mixed-release environment
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R505 Working with the Domino Directory
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RJH
I@TroubleshootingHelp Scremn
The R5 Domino Directory template is designed for use in a mixed-release environment. After upgrading your first server to R5, you can and should replicate the new design to the other servers in your organization. The new template is designed for backwards compatibility on R4 and even R3 servers.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUsing the Domino Directory Profile
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R505 Working with the Domino Directory
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427NA8
I@TroubleshootingHelp Scremn
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew and deleted views in the Domino Directory
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R505 Working with the Domino Directory
Release Notes0= What's new?
DEBR427RKF
J@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew forms in the Domino Directory
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R505 Working witm the Domino Directory
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RL8
J@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPopulating the Internet Address field in Person document}
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R505 Working with the Domino Directory
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RLT
K@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lmrdan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRetrieving information from LDAP servers in a mixed environment
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R505 Working with the Domino Directory
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RQP
M@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading Directory Assistance
Administrator ClientServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R505 Working with the Domino Directory
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RRL
N@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading clusters
Server01 What's new?10 Moving to R506 Upgrading Clusters
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RSV
@P@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUsing mail in a mixed-release cluster
ClientServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R506 Upgrading Clusters
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RUA
P@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusImproving database performance
Designer01 What's new?10 Moving to R507 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RWC
Q@Tro|bleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusKeeping a new database in R4 format
Designer01 What's new?10 Moving to R507 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Release Notes01 Wha|'s new?
DEBR427RX8
Q@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCompacting databases in a mixed-release environment
Designer01 What's new?10 Moving to R507 Upgrading Databases,and Applications
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RY3
R@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRolling back applications to previous releases
Designer01 Wlat's new?10 Moving to R507 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RYR
@R@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusIssues with |pgrading applications and databases
Designer01 What's new?10 Moving to R507 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RZC
R@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In R5, users experience an initial delay when accessing upgraded databases for the first time. This occurs because all database views reb|ild on initial access due to the updated View version in this release.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrading applications and R5 re|uirements
Administrator ClientDesignerServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R507 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427RZW
R@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/LU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAdvantages of upgrading applications to R5
Designer01 What's new?10 Moving to R507 Upgrading Databases and Applications
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427S2N
S@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUsing R5 ID files
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R509 Upgrading Security
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427S3H
W@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
ID files created with R5 are not usable with R3. If your organization needs to use ID files with R3, retain at least,one R4 client to generate new ID files that can be used with R3.
R3 files upgrade seamlessly to R5, and R3 users can continue to use them without any change in functionality.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCreating flat ID files
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R509 Upgrading Security
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427S4C
X@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPassword checking and interoperability with earlier releases
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer01 What's new?10 Moving to R509 Upgrading Security
Release Notes01 What's new?
DEBR427S4W
@X@TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Tom Lowell/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBack up all databases and important files
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know00 Pre-Installation Steps
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
TLOL3UQS9B
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
You should back up your existing databases because R5 uses a new database ODS version by default. You can rename your databases to .ns4 and they will not be upgraded to the new database format.
be sure to back up important files such as NOTES.INI, DESKTOP.DSK, and ID files.
When upgrading to Domino R5, you can use the Internet Address tool to fill in the Internet Address field for all Person documents in which the field is blank in a Domino Directory.
In Domino Administrator, click the People & Groups tab.
Select the server and Domino Directory for which you wish to fill in the Internet Address fields.
Choose the People - Set Internet Address tool.
In the Internet Address Construction dialog, choose a format for the Internet addresses. See the table below for details on the Internet address formats.
Choose a separator for the Internet addresses. This character separates the items in the Format fieln. See the table below for details on the different separators.
Enter the Internet domain for the company.
Note:
If you select the option "Use valid Internet domain from existing short name field," the tool searches the Short name field in each Person document for a valid Internet domain (for example, @acme.com). If the tool finds a valid Internet domain, it uses this domain to complete the Internet addres~, instead of using the entry in the Internet domain in the dialog box.
(Optional) Click More Options and do any of the following:
Select "Only for people whose Notes Domain is" to set Internet addresses only for users in a given Notes domain.
Select "Use secondary custom format pattern in case of error generating Internet address. to specify a second Internet address pattern if Notes generates the same Internet address for two users. Specify the secondary pattern in the box.
This allows you to use the secondary formula if the primary formula results in an address containing non-ASCII characters.
The Internet Address Construction dialog box specifies the server and Domino Directory on which it runs. It also gives an example for each address and separator format.
: ^he dialog box does not give examples for all Custom Format combinations.
The tool checks all Person documents in the Domino Directory. When it finds a document without an entry in the Internet Address field, it creates an entry based on the rules above, verifies that the entry is a valid RFC 821 address, and checks to ensure that the entry is unique by performing an exhaustive name lookup of the entry on all Domino Directories on the server. If the entry matches an Internet Addrnss field, the tool leaves the field blank and enters an error in the Log (LOG.NSF).
: All errors encountered are entered in the Log (LOG.NSF).
Caution
: The Internet Address tool performs an exhaustive name lookup of every new Internet address and should not be run on an address book or server that is under heavy user load.
Details: Internet address formats
You can choose from the following address formats:
Address Format
Forms the address using
FirstName LastName
Contents of the First name field and the Last name field
FirstName MiddleInitial LastName
Contents of the First name field, Middle initial field, and Last name field
FirstInitial LastName
The First letter in the user's First name field and the contents of the Last name field
FirstInitial MiddleInitial LastName
The first letter in the user's First name field, Middle initial field, and the contents of the Last name field
LastName FirstName
Last name field and the First name field
LastName FirstName MiddleInitial
Last name field, First name field, and Middle initial field
LastName FirstInitial
Last name field and first letter in the user's First name field
LastName FirstInitial MiddneInitial
Last name field, first letter in the user's First name field, and Middle initial field
FirstName LastInitial
First Name field and the first character of the Last name field
Use Custom Format Pattern
Custom Format Pattern lets you specify how to construct an Internet address
Details: Address separators
You can choose from the following address separators:
Option
Separator
underscore
dot or period
equals sign
Example
For the user Jane R. Jones:
First name field
Last name field
Middle initial field
Internet domain
Jane R. Jones
Jones
acme.com
Running the Internet address tool produces the following possible Internet addresses:
Format
Separator
Internet Address after running tool
FirstName LastName
Jane_Jones@acme.com
FirstName MiddleInitial LastName
Jane_R_Jones@acme.com
FirstInitial LastName
J.Jones@acme.com
FirstInitial MiddleInitial LastName
J.R.Jones@acme.com
LastName FirstName
Jones=Jane@acme.com
LastName FirstName MiddleInitial
Jones=Jane=R@acme.com
LastName FirstInitial
Jones_J@acme.com
LastName FirstInitial MiddleInitial
Jones_J_R@acme.com
FirstName LastInitial
Jane.J@acme.com
Using the Custom Format Pattern
If you snlect "Use Custom Format Pattern" in the dialog box, you can set how Domino creates Internet addresses in Person records without an entry in the Internet Address field. Use the following characters in the dialog box to specify how the address should appear.
Abbreviation
Description
First name, truncate at
characters
Last name, truncate at
characters
Middle initial
Title
Generational qualifier
Employee ID
Location
Department
Server
Use the existing Short name field
separator
separator
separator
Example
For the user Jane R. Jones:
Title
First Name
Middle Initial
Last Name
Location
Nrganization
Server
Jones
Tampa
MailT1
you could set Custom Format to produce the following addresses:
Custom Format
Address
JaneJones@acme.com
JaJones@acme.com
F_L=C
Jane_Jones=Tampa@acme.com
^_F_M_L.V
Ms_Jane_R_Jones.MailT1@acme.com
Once you upgrade your R4 Public Address Book to the R5 Domino Directory design, you must upgrade your LDAP servers to at least Release 4.6.3 so they can properly handle LDAP queries and return correct information. The Domino Directory uses the Internet Andress field to answer LDAP queries and R4 releases earlier than 4.6.3 do not handle this change.
After upgrading your Domino server and Domino Directory, upgrade your Directory Assistance databnse to R5.
Start the Notes client.
Choose File - Database - Open.
In the Server box, select the server that contains your Directory Assistance database.
Navigate to and select the Directory Assistance database.
Click Open.
Choose File - Database - Replace Design.
Click the Template Server button.
Select a Domino R5 server that has.the new Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF).
Click OK.
Select the Directory Assistance template (DA50.NTF).
Click OK.
When Notes asks if you wish to replace the template, click Yes.
Close the Directory Assistance database.
Upgrading clustered servers is exactly the same as upgrading other R4 servers to R5. For information on upgrading servers that use the R4 Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to route Internet mail, see the "
Upgrading a server that uses the SMTP/MIME Message Transfer Agent (MTA) to R5
" release note. For information on upgrading anl other servers, see the
"Upgrading a Domino server
" release note.
When your mail file is on a mixed R4/R5 cluster, be aware of the following issues.
The R5 mail template uses neatures not available in R4, so if your mail file fails over from R5 to R4, you cannot use these features. If you have mail rules set up in your R5 mail file to filter your mail, these rules do not work on the R4 server/mail file. When your mail fails over the R4 server, and is delivered to that server, the rules do not filter or sort the mail according to the R5 rules.
R4 servers do not support soft deletions. Your trash folder on an R4 server appears to contain all the documents in your main file. You can ignore this.
R5 servers can deliver native MIME, but R4 servers cannot. Thus, when a Notes client fails over to an R4 server from an R5 server, MIME messages are converted to Notes format documents and appear different than when viewed on the R5 server.
If you attempt to send a MIME message through an R4 server, the message is converted to Notes format with an attachment containing the original MIME.
Though failover is indicated in the Notes status bar at the bottom of the screen, if you do not monitor status bar messages, a failover from an R5 to an R4 server may not be apparent. However, as noted above, there are changes in functionality between R5 and R4 in clusters.
The new database format used in R5 databases offers ways to improve database performance easily. These include:
Turning off unread marks
Speeding up view rebuilds via bitmap optimization
Turning off overwriting free space
Deselecting the "Maintain LastAccessed property
Renoving specialized response hierarchies from views that don't use them
Limiting the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fields
Limiting the number of entries in the $Revisions fields
Turning off headlines monitoring
To access all these properties, open the database and choose File - Database - Properties. Click the Advanced tab.
pgrading Directo
CN=Derek E B
. These options nre available only for databases in the R5 database format.
Don't maintain unread marks
Maintaining unread marks in a database slows performance. For some databases, such as the Domino Directory or the Domino log file, unread marks are not useful. If a database does not require tracking read and unread documents, consider disabling unread marks to improve performance.
Document table bitmap optimization
Domino refers to tables nf document information to determine which documents appear in an updated view. Selecting the "Document table bitmap optimization" property associates tables with the forms used by documents in each table. During a view update, Domino searches only tables whose views contain forms used by documents in that view. While there is a slight performance cost to maintaining this association, this setting speeds updates of small views in large databases significantly.
To enable optimiza~ion using the table-form association, select "Document table bitmap optimization." When you change this setting, compact the database to enable it. Make sure your system has sufficient disk space as this compact makes a temporary copy of the database. You can also use the load compact command with the -F or -f switch to enable or disable bitmap optimization.
: This setting works only for views whicn use "Form =" as part of the selection criteria.
Don't overwrite free space
To prevent unauthorized users from accessing data, Domino overwrites deleted data in databases, which can reduce database performance. In some situations, this security features is not necessary, such as when:
The database is physically secure -- for example, on a password-protected server in a locked room
Space in the database is quickly reallocated -- for exampln, in system databases such as MAIL.BOX
Security is not an issue -- for example, in an employee discussion database
Deselecting the "Maintain LastAccessed property"
Domino databases store the date when a document was last modified or read. By default, the database records only changes to documents -- not reads. If you select the database option "Maintain LastAccessed property," the database records reads of a document as well as changes to it. If you se~ the database to delete documents based on intervals without activity, such as 10 days without being read or modified, select "Maintain LastAccessed property" and be aware this may negatively impact database performance. Otherwise, leave the option deselected for best performance.
Removing specialized response hierarchies from views that don't use them
Documents store information about their parent or response document, which is used only by the @functions @AllChildrnn and @AllDescendants. In databases that don't use these @functions in views, select the database property "Don't support specialized response hierarchy" to improve database performance.
When you change this setting, compact the database to enable it. Make sure your system has sufficient disk space as this compact makes a temporary copy of the database. You can also use the load compact command with the -H or -h switch to enable or disable bitmap optimization.
Note:
This setting has no effect on formulas which do not include @AllChildren or @AllDescendants.
Limiting the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy fields
A document stores the name of the user or server that made each change to it in the $UpdatedBy field. This edit history requires disk space and slows both view updates and replication. If you do not need to maintain a complete edit history, specify the number of changes that the $UpdatedBy field.tracks with the database setting "Limit entries in $Updated fields." Once the $UpdatedBy field reaches this limit, the next edit causes the oldest entry to be removed from the $UpdatedBy list. Limiting the number of entries in the $UpdatedBy field in documents improves database performance.
Limiting the number of entries in the $Revisions fields
A document stores the date and time of each change saved to it in the $Revisions field. Domino servers use this field to rnsolve replication or save conflicts. The $Revisions field stores up to 500 entries by default. If you do not need to track changes this closely, specify the number of changes that $Revisions field tracks with the database setting "Limit entries in $Revisions field." Once the $Revisions field reaches this limit, the next edit causes the oldest entry to be removed from the $Revisions list. Limiting the number of entries in the $Revisions field in documents improves database performance.
Consider.limiting the entries in $Revisions fields in databases that:
Contain many documents
Replicate often or have no replicas
Contain documents that are rarely edited
Note:
It is recommended to set the number of entries in the $Revisions field to at least 10. If you enter a number less than 10 in the "Limit entries in $Revisions fields" field, you risk increased replication or save conflicts in the database.
^urning off headline monitoring
Users can set up their headlines to search databases automatically for items of interest. If many users do this, database performance can slow. To prevent a database from being monitored, select "Don't allow headline monitoring."
Any Notes client can access a database hosted on a Domino ~erver, regardless of what release the client or server is running or what release format the database uses. However, Notes clients cannot access or use database features from later releases; for example, an R4 Notes client can access an R5 database on a Domino server, but it cannot access or use R5 features in that database.
If a database is stored on the local drive of a client, only clients of the same release and later can access it. For example, a database in R4 format can bn accessed locally by an R4 or R5 Notes client, but not by an R3 client.
Domino servers can only host applications in their release format and earlier formats. For example, an R4 server can host an R4 or R3 database, but not an R5 database.
To create an R5 application that can be accessed locally by R4 clients and stored on R4 servers, give it the extension .NS4 in the File Name field when creating the database. To keep a database in R4 format so it can.be accessed locally by R4 clients or stored on an R4 server, change the database's extension to .NS4 via the operating system or make a new replica of the database using the extension .NS4.
: If an R5 client compacts a local replica of a R4 database, the database moves to R5 database format and cannot be accessed by R4 clients.
Creating a replica of a database in R4 forma~
1. Choose File - Database - Open.
2. Select the database for which you want an R4 replica.
3. Click Open.
4. Choose File - Replication - New Replica.
5. In the File Name field, give the new replica the extension .NS4.
6. Click OK.
When you compact a database from an R5 Domino server, the server upgrades the database to the R5 ODS unless you specify R4 compacting or the database has an .NS4 extension (instead of .NSF). To specify R4 compacting, use the -r argument. Once a database is upgraded to R5 format, you cannot roll back to R4 format or place that database on an R4 server. You can continue to replncate between an R5 replica and an R4 replica -- ODS does not replicate.
In addition, you can use the following arguments with Compact to preserve a mixed-release environment:
Compact argument
Description
Use R4 compacting
Disables transactional logging and uses R4 compacting
Enables transactional logging and uses R4 compacting
Once you upgrade an application or database to R5 formnt (ODS), you cannot roll it back to formats from earlier releases. Notes clients from R4 can access R5 databases on R5 servers, but you cannot use an R5 database on a Domino server running an earlier version of the software.
The R5 database format does not replicate, and R4 servers ignore unsupported R5 features, so you can safely replicate a database replica that has been upgraded to R5 with a replica that has not.
When you upgrade an application server and its applications to R5 and decide to use features such as transactional logging, be sure to do the following:
Specify a drive with sufficient disk space for view rebuilds by setting the View_Rebuild_Dir variable in the NOTES.INI file to the correct drive for that disk. Ny default, this variable is set to the temp directory on the system. This drive holds the temporary files used to rebuild views; a larger disk allows faster rebuilds and greater optimization. View rebuilds can be as much as five times faster in R5 than R4. The size of the drive needed for view rebuilds depends on the size of the views you are rebuilding. See "Specifying the temporary directory used for view rebuilds" in Domino Administration Help.
Use a separate, single-purpose disk to hold the log files for transactional logging. Minimal disk arm movement allows faster writes to the log. The default location for these files is the LOGDIR directory in the server's data directory, but without a separate disk, your server suffers a performance hit as it writes to different spaces on disk. The log requires at least 200 MB disk space and can be set as large as 4 GB. Using a dedicated mirrored drive is even better than a single disn for recoverability if the log disk fails. See "Setting up transactional logging" in Domino 5 Administration Help (HELP5_ADMIN.NSF).
Conversion between multi-value data fields within a single Notes Document and multiple records of an external database is not suppnrted.
The RealTime Activity form contains the checkbox "Multivalue Data: Use Multi-value Data Fields" under the section "Options, General ...". Selecting this option has no effect.
Normally, the Domino installation program creates an empty subdirectory called "cgi-bin" under the \data\domino directory. Web administra~ors use this directory to hold CGI programs that are used by the HTTP server task.
The install program does not create this directory. Administrators may create this directory manually, if needed.
During server install and setup, the message "ISpy: Could not open the mail probe view and/or the tcp probe view in the Stntistics and Events data base" may appear on the server console. ISpy then prints a message to the console indicating that it has shut down.
This message occurs because ISpy is timing out waiting for the Statistics and Events database to be created and initialized by the Event task. After ISpy has shut down and the EVENTS5.NSF database has been created and initialized by the Event task, you can restart ISpy and you will no longer see this message.
Upgrading databases and database servers to R5 brings a number of key benefits that result in greatly increased performance, improved backup and error tolerance, faster rebuilds, better compaction, and new database options. Among these are:
The R5 dmtabase format (On-Disk Structure, or ODS) and templates offer much improved performance, especially for databases such as the Domino Directory and MAIL.BOX. Database operations require less I/O, and memory and disk space allocation are improved.
Transactional logging writes all changes to a database sequentially to a log file and does not physically alter the database until those changes are safely stored on disk. This allows you to recover data lost through database corruption or other problems by "rolling back" the database to a given point and replaying the changes to the database through the log. This also allows greatly improved backup of databases. R5 databases with transactional logging enabled do not need to have Fixup run on them. Be sure to use a separate, single-purpose, high-volume drive for the log files.
View rebuilds are as much as five times faster in R5 if you designate a separate drive for the temporary files for the rebuilds. The greater the space on the drive yo} dedicate to view rebuilds, the greater the increase in rebuild speed.
Multiple shared mail databases (single-copy object stores) allow fewer I/O transactions and reduce locking problems.
Multiple MAIL.BOX databases allow you to spread the mail load over several databases.
The parallel indexer allows more than one indexing thread on servers with more than one CPU. Having one thread per CPU improves performance, especially for the drive which has the temporary files mor view rebuilds. This allows you to better leverage multiple CPUs on a server.
R5 databases have an anti-delete feature which you can enable. This feature performs "soft deletes" first, allowing you to undo a deletion. For example, R5 mail databases have this feature when operating in conjunction with a R5 Domino server.You can set a field in the database for a "sunset time" after which soft-deleted documents are permanently deleted. For more information, see "Types of views" in the "Designinm Views," chapter of
Application Development with Domino Designer
There are a number of database options, such as turning off unread marks, that allow you to improve performance significantly for very little effort.
Compaction of R5 databases occurs online and "in place" and does not require additional disk space. Users can read and modify the database while compaction occurs. R5 compaction is significantly faster than R4 compaction -- up to 10 times faster.
R5 databases can be as large as 32 GB.
R5 servers and clients cannot create new flat ID files. If your organization continues to use flat ID files with R5, you must retain at least one ]4 client to create new flat ID files. However, R5 fully supports flat ID file maintenance. You can renew certificates for existing flat ID files and issue new flat certificates to new hierarchical users who need access to servers with flat IDs. If your organization uses flat ID files, consider upgrading to hierarchical ID files for increased security and flexibility of access control, ID generation and certification, and maintenance.
Password checking during authentication requires that both workstations and servers run Release 4.5 or later. If you enable password checking on a server running a release prior to 4.5, authentication occurs without password checking. If you enable password checking on a workstation running a previous release, authentication fails when the workstation attempts to connect to a server that requires passwo}d checking.
The first time a user for whom password checking is required authenticates with a server, the user ID is altered and it cannot be used with a previous release.
It is recommended to perform a clean installation of build 164. Do not install this build over a previous R5 or R4.x build, unless you-are specifically planning to test upgrading from R4.x to R5.
If you want to test upgrading, the What's New - Moving to R5 section contains information on upgrading. Use this information for testing purposes only.
For Windows NT,
DO NO
install build 164 over an R4.6x version that has single logon support enabled, because
the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Lotus\Notes\4.0 registry key is removed during installation. Witho}t this registry entry, the R4.6x Single Logon is unable to operate correctly after a reboot.
To remove the single logon support, run
"nslinst -d"
in your
R4.6x Notes executable directory.
If you don't want to disturb your currently installed R4.6x version, install on a machine that doesn't have Notes currently installed.
If you have already performed the R5 install over R4.6x without turning off singme logon support then you may need to reinstall Windows NT, or it may be possible for you to recover if your drive is FAT (File Allocation Table). If this is the case the recovery steps are to boot from an alternate drive, go to the R4.6x Notes executable directory and run
"nslinst -d"
For systems that have NTFS installed the only method of removing the Single logon service is from another remote machine. To do this follow these steps:
From remote machine connect to the other machine as the Administrator.
Such as:
net use * \\remotesystem\ipc$
* \\remotesystem\c$
Launch REGEDIT32.EXE from a command prompt.
Choose Registry - Select Computer.
Enter the name of the remote system (such as \\remotesystem)
Remove the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentControlSet\Services\Notes Single Logon
Remove the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Winlogon\GinaDLL
One way to avoid the download time associated with Java applets is to install the class files for those applets on the (browser) client machine. Following are instructions that describe how to manuamly install the Domino applets (Outline, View, Editor, Action Bar) locally.
Important:
Once the Domino applets are installed on the client machine, these local applets will take precedence over those installed on the server. When installing a new Notes build, it is important to re-install the new class files using the procedure outlined below. Alternatively, you can delete the local class files which will cause the class files installed on the server to be used.
Class loading mechanism
Browsers search for Java class files in the following order:
Locally, in directories as specified in the CLASSPATH environment variable.
Locally, in browser-specific directories.
On the server using the archive (.zip, .jar, .cab files) specified in the ARCHIVE or CABBASE tag}.
On the server using the .class files if an archive is not specified or does not exist. In Internet Explorer 3.x, if a CAB file is specified and not found, an Exception is thrown and the applet is not loaded.
Installation instructions
Note:
The following instructions do not work with Internet Explorer 3.x.
The archive files containing the Domino applet class fmles can be found in the <notes_data_directory>\domino\java directory. The archives for the view, outline, editor, and action bar applets are NVAPPLET.ZIP, OUTLINE.ZIP, EDITOR.ZIP, and ACTIONBAR.ZIP respectively. The .class files contained within these .zip files must be unzipped into the appropriate browser-specific directory as indicated in the following table. A utility such as PKUnzip or WinZip should be used. Be sure to specify that the directory structure stored in the .zip file should be used by addimg the -d option in pkunzip or by checking "Use Folder Names" in WinZip.
After unzipping the .class files, a directory hierarchy starting with "lotus\notes" should be found in the appropriate directory.
Browser
Directory
Netscape 3-x+ (Windows 95/NT)*
<netscape_install_dir>\program\java\classes
Netscape 3.x+ (Mac)
<netscape_install_folder>\Java\netscape-classes
Netscape 3.x+ (Unix)
class files must be installed in CLASSPATH (see below)
Internet Explorer 4.x (Windows 95)
c:\windows\java\classes
Internet Explorer 4.x (Windows NT)
c:\winnt\program\java\classes
*Netscape 4.x also supports the JAR archive format. For Netscape 4.x on Windows only, the appropriate .jar file(s) (nvapplet.jar, outline.jar, editor.jar, actionbar.jar) can be copied to the browser-specific directory as an alternative to the unzipped .class files.
yCT{snO
The Internet address tool does an update of any Domino Directory record that does not have the Internet address set. In addition, before it updates a note with an Internet address, it does an exhaustive lookup to ensure that the Internet address is unique. Therefore, the Internet address tool is very expensive and should probably not be run under heavy user load.
Notes R5 includes the client kit for the Macintosh PowerPC, and it should be run on Mac OS version 7.6.1 or later. There are Appearance Manager system files that are added by the Notes installer on system versions prior to Mac OS 8.1 to automatically enable the grayscale look-and-feel.
Here are the versions of Mac OS that have passed-testing with Build 164:
Mac OS 7.5.5 with Appearance Manager (installed by Notes installer)
Mac OS 7.6.1 with Appearance Manager (installed by Notes installer)
Mac OS 8.0 with updated Appearance Manager (installed by Notes installer)
Mac OS 8.1
Mac OS 8.5 and later are not supported
. Mac OS 8.1 is strongly encouraged.
Client settings
Notes time zone and Daylight Saving Time (DST) settings are now synchronized with those of the operating system. When you start Notes, the operating system (OS) time zone and DST settings are updated to matmh those of your current Notes location. In previous releases, Notes updated the OS clock, not the time zone/DST settings, causing the OS time and time zone to be different. In R5, if you change to a location with a different time zone, or change time zones in your current location, the operating system time zone and DST settings are updated to match. Because of this, it is important that time zone, DST on/off and Greenwich Mean Time (GMT) are set correctly on your operating system. For example, if your ope}ating system is set to "DST off", and you have manually changed your clock to account for DST, running Notes causes DST to be turned on in the OS, and the OS clock will be off by one hour.
Win 32 platforms
When you edit your Location document, the list of time zones to pick from now match those of your operating system. The DST start and end dates also match those of the operating system. If you change to a location with a different time zone, that time zone's DST-start and end dates take affect. In addition, if you change the OS time zone or DST setting in the control panel while Notes is running, the current location's time zone and DST are updated to match the OS.
When upgrading to R5 on a Win32 platform, if any of your Location documents contain a time zone that doesn't match that of the operating system, you may be prompted to choose a specific time zone.
Server
On Win32 platforms, Notes time zmne and DST settings are retrieved from the operating system. Server settings should match client settings, and servers that replicate should all be set to the same settings. If server settings do not match (for example, one server with DST on and one server with DST off), you could get some strange behavior with agents that run at a specific time. A symptom of this would be the following message:
08/10/98 03:59=13 PM AMgr: Time span since last reset of hourly statistics is negative
On non-Win32 platforms, the list of time zones to pick from is the same list as in previous Notes releases.
On Win32 platforms, if the OS time zone/DST setting is changed via the control panel while the server is running, it will have no effect until the server is restarted.
Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE Settings
To simplify the setup of your system the following environment variable settings should be included in NOTES.INI.
For Domino R5 running on the IBM AIX platform, the Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE value is automatically set to ((Total Machine RAM in bytes) / 2)/7. The objective of this setting is to=
Use no more than 50 percent of the Total Machine RAM for shared memory.
Keep the total number of shared memory segments required at seven or less.
You can override this value by setting the following environment variable and issumng the command from your shell. The resulting
Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE
value must be in bytes. If the number of shared memory segments used on your system exceeds 7, then increase the
Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE
setting. IBM AIX allows an absolute maximum of 10 shared memory segments.
To check how many segments are being used, issue the command "ipcs" at the terminal. Shared memory segments that have keys starting with 0xF8 are those that are amlocated to the Domino Server.
setenv Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE (New value in bytes)
DEBUG_ENABLE_CORE 1 Settings
If you want the Domino Server to generate a core file in the event of a fatal error, set the following environment variable by issuing this command from the shell:
setenv DEBUG_ENABLE_CORE 1
The default behavior is to NOT generate a core file.
You can set thm value of
Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE
to be a number greater than calculated value. Set the environment variable by issuing the command from csh. The best way to set this variable is to place the given line within either the
.kshrc (ksh) or .cshrc (csh)
file in the home directory for the user ID being used to run the Domino Server/Notes Workstation so that the variable is set each time the user logs on to the network. The resulting
Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE
value m}st be in bytes.
setenv Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE
(New value in bytes)
For example:
setenv Notes_SHARED_DPOOLSIZE 4000000
Local /etc/hosts for Name Resolution
If you are not running either Domain Name Service (DNS) or Network Information Services (NIS) to provide name resolution for your network, and instead are using locml /etc/hosts files on each machine, then you must have the environment variable
NSORDER
set for either the Domino Server or Notes Workstation to be able to resolve names using the local /etc/hosts file. This variable is set as follows:
[ksh]
export NSORDER=local,bind,nis
[csh]
setenv NSORDER local,bind,nis
: Previous levels of AIX required the under-bar options (
bimd_r,nis_r,local_r) for NSORDER
for Notes to resolve hostnames. These settings are no longer required and should not be used.
This variable specifies the order in which the operating system searches for addresses for name resolution; specifying that the local (/etc/hosts) is to be searched before attempting to contact NIS for name resolution. The best way to set this variable is to place the given line within either the
.kshrc (ksh)
.cshrc (csh)
fmle in the home directory for the user ID being used to run the Domino server/Notes client so that the variable is set each time the user logs on to the network.
Updates and additional troubleshooting information about LS:DO are available on the Lotus web site at
http:/-www.lotus.com/devtools
LS:DO is available on the OS/2, Windows 3.1, Windows 95, Windows NT, AIX, Solaris Intel Edition, and SPARC Solaris platforms.
To use LS:DO, you must have a UseLSX statement in your script. This works only on a system that has the Lotus Notes client installed.
Here is an overview of table creation via LS:DO:
1. Construct a CREATE TABLE statement that-specifies the types and sizes of the fields using the specific syntax required by the data source. Execute this query and Close the result set.
2. Execute a SELECT * FROM [tablename] statement to set the field properties in the ODBCResultSet object.
3. For each row, invoke AddRow, set values of fields using SetValue, and insert the data via UpdateRow.
4. Invoke Close on the ODBCResultSet object to clean up.
5. If you want to use this table later-in the script, set a new SELECT statement and use Execute to re-initialize the result set properties. All the above can be performed using one ODBCQuery object and one ODBCResultSet object, as long as the indicated cleanups are done.
The LSXODBC.LSS file referred to in the documentation is not supplied with Notes. Instead, all the constants are defined when the UseLSX statement executes.
To administer Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) from a client install, the Domino Designer client must be selected in order to use the Certificate Authority Application and Server Certificate Administration Application for SSL. This is relevant for Beta 2 but may change in a future Beta release.
If you have not selected the Domino Designer, the message "Error Loading dll" will appear.
Installing and Setting up the Domino R5 Server for UNIX from a CD-ROM
The Domino Release R5 UNIX installation program is a text-based script that installs the Domino programs and data directories to the locations you definm. The script prompts you for the destination directories and the type of server to install. You perform server setup with a web browser such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer.
Key Definitions
Use the TAB key to accept entries and move through screens. Use the SPACEBAR to make predefined selections such as the type of server to install. Use the RETURN key to create new entries fmr entries you set, such as the account name or directory location. Use the ESC key to return to a previous screen. Press e to exit the installation program.
Preparation
Before installing, be sure your system meets the following requirements.
You must have superuser root access to the system.
You must have a local account that will be used to run the server. The UNIX instmll program uses the default account name "notes". You can use the local account called "notes" or specify another name such as the hostname (account acme on server acme).
DO NOT
run the Domino server as root due to security considerations and because that is not a supported configuration.
The server account must belong to a group. The UNIX install program uses the default group name "notes".
Determine the destination disk of the Domino binarmes (default is /opt/lotus). Make sure you have enough free disk space on the destination disk (minimum 70 MB). The destination disk must be a locally mounted file system (not NFS remote mounted).
Determine the destination disk of the Domino data directory (default is /local/notedata) and verify that it has enough free disk space (minimum 100 MB, not including any user-defined databases). The destination disk must be a locall} mounted file system (not NFS remote mounted).
: Make sure the destination directories for the Domino data directory and Domino program directories are different -- do not install both the program files and the data files in the same directory.
Installation
To run the UNIX install program to install the Domino server, perform the following steps.
Become root; for example:
<password>
Mount the CDROM.
For HP-UX, type:
mount /dev/dsk/
<device>
/cdrom
For IBM AIX, type:
mount -r -v cdrfs /dev/
<device>
/cdrom
For Solaris, vold automatically mounts the CD.
Change to the /cdrom/notesr5 directory:
For IBM AIX and Solaris, type:
cd /cd}om/notesr5/ibmpow
For Solaris SPARC, type:
cd /cdrom/notesr5/sol
For Solaris Intel, type:
cd /cdrom/notesr5/solx86
For HP-UX, type:
cd /cdrom/notesr5/hppa
Run the install program:
For IBM AIX and Solaris, type:
./install
For HP-UX, type:
./INSTALL\;1
The installation program initializes with a Welcome screen. Press TAB to begin the installation.
The installa}ion program displays the Lotus Domino/Lotus Notes Software Agreement. Press TAB to read the Lotus Domino/Lotus Notes Software Agreement. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program.
The Install program displays the Lotus Domino/Lotus Notes Software Agreement. Press any key to scroll the pages of the software agreement. Press TAB to continue to the next installation screen.
If you amree with the terms of the license agreement, press TAB. If you disagree, press SPACEBAR to select NO and press RETURN.
Select the type of setup. Use the SPACEBAR to scroll through the choices and press RETURN to make the selection. The choices are: Domino Mail Server, Domino Server, Domino Directory Server, and Domino Enterprise Server. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
Specify the program directory setting for the destmnation disk for the Domino binaries. The default is /opt/lotus. Make sure you specify an existing disk that has at least the minimum amount of free disk space necessary. Press RETURN to specify a new location. Press TAB to accept a location. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
Specify if you want to install multiple partitions. If no, press TAB. If yes, press SPACEBAR and then TAB. The program prompts you for additional information. ]ress ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
Specify the data directory path. The default selection is /local/notesdata. Make sure you specify an existing disk that has at least the minimum amount of free disk space necessary. Press RETURN to specify a new location. Press TAB to accept a location. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type m for help.
Note:
Make sure the destination directories for the Domino data directory and Domino program directories are different -- do not install both the program files and the data files in the same directory.
Specify the Domino UNIX user name. The user name should be an existing operating system account and requires read/write access to the data directory pathname specified in step 12. Press RETURN to specify a new user name. Press TAB to accept a user name. Press ESC tm return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
Specify the Domino UNIX group name. The user name specified in step 13 must be a member of this group. Press RETURN to specify a new group name. Press TAB to accept it. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or type e to exit the program. Type h for help.
At this point, you have finished specifying installation settings. Press TAB to continue. Press ESC to return to the previous screen, or typm e to exit the program.
Review the installation selections. Press ESC to change settings or press TAB to install with the given settings.
Installation is complete. Exit out of root.
Note:
Running the Domino server as root is not supported.
Log into the system as the UNIX user specified in the installation program; for example: acme.
Configure the server using the Web Setup database. Change to the data directory specified mn the installation; for example:
cd /local1/161.srvdat
Type
/opt/lotus/bin/http httpsetup
The server output should appear similar to the following:
/opt/lotus/bin/http httpsetup
08/12/98 12:57:22 PM Created new log file as
/local1/161.srvdat/log.nsf
08/12/98 12:57:22 PM Server setup mode entered. Please continue the setup
process by connecting to server with a browser on port 8081
08/12/98 12:57:24 PM HTTP Web Server started
Connect to the smrver via port 8081 with a web browser such as Netscape Navigator or Microsoft Internet Explorer. Specify the URL for the destination server such as:
http://9.95.65.210:8081
http://<server>.company.com:8081
The server displays the Domino web setup database. Follow the instructions in the setup program to specify the server configuration. Upon completion, click the FINISH button. The program sends additional messages to the UNIX shell on the
smrver. For example:
Available Ports from INI file: 'TCPIP'
Enabled Ports for location: ''
Disabled Ports for location: 'TCPIP'
08/12/98 12:59:17 PM Certifying John Doe/NOTES/US
Available Ports from INI file: 'TCPIP'
Enabled Ports for location: 'TCPIP'
Disabled Ports for location: ''
Certifying <server>.company.com/NOTES/US
After setting up the server, click the EXIT button and the web server on port 8081 shuts down, displaying an appropriate message on the server. For example:
08/12/98 01:00:56 PM HTTP Web Server shutdown
To start the server, make sure you are in the data directory and type
/opt/lotus/bin/server
The following tables show the operating system patches that are needed for each platform in order for the builds to run correctly.
Solaris
Solaris 2.6/SPARC
Patch 105490-05
Solaris 2.6/Intel
no patches required
AIX V4.3.1
Compiler
IBM C and C++ Compilers (PortaPak) - 3.6.4.0
Patches
X11.base.rte
4.3.1.1
C AIXwindows Runtime Jnv
xlC.rte
3.6.4.0
U457544
X11.base.lib
4.3.1.1
C AIXwindows Runtime Libraries
X11.compat.lib.X11R5
4.3.1.1
C AIXwindows X11R5 Compatibility
bos.adt.debug
4.3.1.1
C Base Application Dev
bos.adt.include
4.3.1.3
C Base Application Dev (development only)
bos.adt.syscalls
4.3.1.1
U457423 (development only)
bos.adt.prof
4.3.1.1
C Base Profiling Support
bos.net.nfs.client
4.3.1.1
C Network File System Client
bos.net.tcp.client
4.3.1.1
C TCP/IP Client Support
bos.rte.bind_cmds
4.3.1.1
C Binder & Loader Commands
bos.rte.commands
4.3.1.1
C Commands
bos.rte.control
4.3.1.1
C System Control Commands
bos.rte.cron
4.3.1.1
C Batch Operations
bos.rte.install
4.3.1.1
C LPP Install Commands
bos.rte.libc
4.3.1.1
C libc Library
bos.rte.libpthreads
4.3.1.1
C libpthreads Library
bos.rte.lvm
4.3.1.1
C Logical Volume Manager
bos.rte.shell
4.3.1.1
C Shells (bsh, ksh, csh)
bos.sysmgt.smit
4.3.1.1
C System Mgmt Interface Tool
bos.up
4.3.1.3
C Base Operating System
bos.mp
4.3.1.3
U456091
devices.graphics.com
4.3.1.1
C Graphics Adapter Common Software
HP-UX 11.0
Compiler
aC++ (J.03.05)
Patches
PHCO_12555
ioinit patch
PHCO_12577
uucp(1) - fixes multiple hop tesz failure
PHCO_13205
dd(1) patch for block/unblock conversion
PHCO_13279
Fix install/configure for patches
PHCO_13284
cumulative 10.20 libc compatibility support
PHCO_13316
XCurses patch.
PHCO_13331
tztab(4) patch
PHCO_13332
sccs(1) patch.
PHCO_13349
XCurses header patch.
PHCO_13362
mkmf(1) patch
PHCO_13363
POSIX:sh patch
PHCO_13411
fsck cumulative patch
PHCO_13467
cumulative savecrash(1M) patch.
PHCO_13542
tar(1) exit code for nonfatal errors.
PHCO_13571
mksf patch
PHCO_13719
comsec (ttsyncd) patch
PHCO_13808
cumulative libpam patch.
PHCO_13809
cumulative passwd(1m) patch.
PHCO_13811
memory windows cumulative patch
PHCO_13812
fixes dump(1M) handling of active files
PHCO_13828
ex(1), vi(1) patch
PHCO_13966
cpio(1) - Fix -p to report number of blocks.
PHCO_13983
df(1M) cumulative patch
PHCO_14037
cumulative 64-bit hardware enablement patch
ZHCO_14044
cumulative newgrp(1) patch
PHCO_14051
cumulative SAM/ObAM patch
PHCO_14084
csh(1) patch
PHCO_14105
Patch for /sbin/init
PHCO_14112
cumulative PFS patch
PHCO_14177
cumulative fbackup(1M)/frecover(1M) patch
PHCO_14194
quota(1) patch for NFS-quotas
PHCO_14198
cumulative crashutil(1M) patch.
PHCO_14229
Cumulative patch for prof
PHCO_14230
cummulative patch for gprof.
PHCO_14244
vxdump patch
PHCO_14257
pwgrd consumes CPU when time set backwards
PHCO_14269
B.11.00.04
HP AutoRAID Manager cumulative patch
PHCO_14419
restore(1M) fix for cross-platform archives
PHCO_14562
LVM commanjs cumulative patch
PHCO_14625
bdf(1M) patch to skip autofs file systems.
PHCO_14626
mount(1M) patch to mount cachefs after nfs.
PHCO_14627
mountall(1M) patch; mount cachefs after nfs.
PHCO_14663
kernsymtab patch for update hang
PHCO_14700
Release Notes Addendum June 1998
PHCO_14704
libc cumulative patch
PHCO_14705
libc cumuljtive header file patch
PHCO_14717
libnss_files cumulative patch
PHCO_14733
cumulative passwd(1) patch.
PHCO_14778
cu(1) patch
PHCO_14779
ct(1) patch
PHCO_14780
cron(1M) and at(1) patch.
PHCO_14781
lpspool subsystem cumulative patch
PHCO_14809
top(1) cumulative patch
PHCO_14812
acctcon1(1m) patch
PHKL_13023
disc3 I/O cumulative patch
PHKL_13201
JFS vx_olt_ilistadd() panic fix
PHKL_13346
lvm boot corruption fix
PHKL_13431
bad block msg,panic; data possibly corrupted
PHKL_14026
mtstart() Page fault,tape0 Hang,Panic patch
PHKL_14046
un-needed TLB purge locks on non V-Class
PHKL_14047
V-class hpmc panic by reading invalid csr
PHKL_14119
32bit binary compatibility on 64bit systems
PHKL_14174
proper compilation of C++ large file apps
PHKL_14252
SLVM (HA) cumulative patjh
PHKL_14425
autox0 patch
PHKL_14426
diag2 data corruption on 64-bit sys >3.75GB
PHKL_14551
HSC:HP-PB:converter+OS hang io_query "reg..."
PHKL_14703
mp serialization fix for memory drivers
PHKL_14729
Increased timeouts for MO drives
PHKL_14745
VxFS lock held too long/perf improvements
PHKL_14747
System hang while flushing dirzy buffers
PHKL_14748
FS Performance; HFS, VxFS panics
PHKL_14750
Fix pthread_cond_timedwait(3T) error return
PHKL_14751
WSIO CDIO patch
PHKL_14762
POSIX semaphore deadlock/hang
PHKL_14763
JFS extended map inodes cause fsck failure
PHKL_14764
DMAPI: ad_len of vx_attr_direct should be 32
PHKL_14765
Fixes HFS Panic in alloccgblj
PHKL_14766
Data page fault in vx_map_delayflush()
PHKL_14767
HFS file system patch
PHKL_14768
HSCtoPCI, HSC100BT, shared interrupt patch
PHKL_14805
Scheduler;panics;PRM;KGDB;CXPerf;pthreads
PHKL_14806
64 Bit HPA3519A Graphics Patch
PHKL_14807
scsi3 cumulative patch
PHNE_13546
remshd(1M) and rexecd(1M) cumulative patch
PHNE_13947
sendmail(1m) 8.8.6 patch
PHNE_14279
cumulative ARPA Transport patch
PHNE_14370
LAN product cumulative patch
PHNE_14453
Fibre Channel cumulative patch
PHNE_14644
rbootd cumulative patch
PHNE_14706
Cumulative streams patch
PHNE_14746
ONC/NFS Patch
PHNE_14800
NFS Kernel Performance Patch
PHSS_13409
CDE Loc Action/Res Dec97 Cumulative Patch
PHSS_13425
fixes mib2agt to work with LAN emulation ifs
PHSS_13871
X/Motif2.1 Runtime Feb 98 Peziodic Patch
PHSS_13961
CDE Runtime Mar98 Periodic Patch
PHSS_14149
CPSlib fix for cps_set_threads()
PHSS_14577
HP aC++ runtime library components (A.03.10)
PHSS_14578
HP C++ core library components (A.12.10)
PHSS_14579
Assembler patch.
PHSS_14580
ld(1) and linker tools cumulative patch
PHSS_14581
libm patch
PHSS_14582
milli.a patch
PHSS_14583
LIBCL patch
PHSS_14652
Fibre Channel Mass Storage Driver Patch
PHSS_14726
Man pages for memory*windows.
PHSS_14826
Update man page for gang scheduling
Kernel configurations for IBM AIX servers
To simplify the setup of your system the foljowing kernel parameter settings should be included in the NOTES.INI file.
Maximum number of processes allowed per user [128]
Minimum paging space should be 2 x real memory for systems with less than 512MB
Maximum number of Licensed Users [2]
(Please use Smit to set the above values.)
Change to the Notes program directory. For example, type
cd \lotus\notes
...where the program directory is c:\lotus\notes.
ahttp httpsetup
at the prompt.
The server configuration program prompts you to connect to the server with a Web browser on a specific port. Launch your browser and enter the IP address of the server with the specified port or the machine namj with the specified port. For example, for the server web.acme.com with IP address 192.168.5.97, with specified port 8081, type
http://192.168.5.97:8081
http://web.acme.com:8081
into the browser's location bar
and press the Enter key.
: To obtain your server's IP address, type
ipconfig
at the DOS prompt.
Once the browser connects to your server and displays the server configuration*screens, enter the required information in each screen and click the right arrow button. Click the Finish button on screen 4 once you have filled in all the required information.
Once the configuration process finishes, click the Exit button.
To launch the server, change to the Notes data directory
and type
aserver
at the prompt.
The RAS server must be disabled on a Windows 95 machine making a connection to a server using Dial-back.
If a RAS connection is attempted in Notes under Windows 95 using Dial-back, the RAS server on the Windows 95 machine must be disabled. After attempting the connection for the first time, Windows may continually tell Notes that the port is still ij use during each additional attempt to connect. Only phonebook entries that have been attempted using Dial-back while the Windows 95 RAS server is running remain in this 'in-use' state. The only way to free this phonebook entry to use it again is to reboot the computer.
The Windows 95 RAS server is only avaliable in the Windows 95 Plus! software package.
X|'9}qroO
LDAP users entered on database ACLs must be entered with slashes instead of commas between the attributes. For example, if the Distinguished Name in an LDIF file appears as the following:
dn: uid=slee, ou=People, o= Acme Industry, c=US
then the entry on a Notes database ACL must be entered as this:
uid=slee/ou=People/o=Acme Industry/c=US
Other examples include:
cn=joe user/cn=recipients/o=ace/c=US
cn=joe user/ou=ou1/o=ace/c=US
When adding groups, the cn= will not appear once the entry is added to the ACL, but it is acknowledged.
Connectivity to UNIX AIX Domino servers over the SPX protocol is limited by the jefault configuration of the ipx.base. The default value results in the failure of Notes clients to connect, with SPX wrapper errors exhibited at the Domino server console.
The default number of connections configured by ipx.base is 100. If your SPX connection requirements are higher, modify the settings using the AIX smit (gui) or smitty interface while logged in as the super-user for that server machine. Choose the following menu choice:
Communicjtions Applications and Services->
Novell Network Services 4.1->
Further Configuration->
IPX/SPX->
General IPX/SPX Variables
Locate the field "Maximum SPX Connections" and increase the value (choose an appropriate value above the default of 100). Apply the changes and exit.
In order to use bi-directional languages (Arabic, Hebrew), perform the following steps:
Install R5 on a BiDi (bi-directional)-enabled Windows platform.
Run the client to finish setup and verify that everything is working.
Turn on BiDi support by adding the following lines to your NOTES*INI file:
EnableBiDiNotes=
BigFontsCount=
BigFont
=Arial
BigFont
=Times New Roman
BigFont
=Courier New
In Notes R4.6, the*CHARSET.NCF text file controls international MIME settings such as character sets and fonts.
In Notes and Domino R5, this text file has been replaced by an "International MIME Settings" document that appears both in your Personal Address Book (for web navigation, reading and sending MIME mail, etc.) and in the Domino Directory (for the IMAP and POP3 servers).
In the Personal Address Book, you can create an "International MIME Settings" document by choozing Create - Advanced - International MIME Settings. In the Domino Directory, these settings are part of the Server Configuration document.
Please note:
In the Advanced Outbound Message Options, the default value for "When a Notes user sends a multi-lingual message" is currently "Send it in Unicode (UTF8)". You may want to changj the value to "Send it in MHTML with unicode entities", which is a better default for most users.
In "Settings by Character Set", there is an entry for Font size. As of Beta 1 release, this setting was ignored by the client.
R5 supports the Euro character in MIME messages. However, there are some configuration issues that you might encounter.
Some other e-mail products* such as Microsoft's Outlook, send messages containing the Euro character, identifying the character set of the message as "ISO-8859-1". This is an incorrect setting. The character set that Outlook is using for the message is Windows-1252 (which is a superset of ISO-8859-1, but includes the Euro character as well as a handful of other characters). In order for these messages to work in the Notes client, you will need to create an "International MIME Settings" document. In the Advanced
Inbound
Message Options section of this document, under "Character set name aliases", enter the alias "ISO-8859-1" mapped to Windows-1252 (for example, you enter "ISO-8859-1" and choose Windows-1252 from the list box). You should create this document in both your private and public address books.
In order to send messages (either from the client or from the Notes POP3 or IMAP servers) that contain the Euro character, you can perform the change above, setting the multi-lingual setting to "Send it ij MHTML with unicode entities". Alternatively, in the "Settings by Character Set" for "Western Europe", you can change the "Outbound Message Options" Header and Body character sets to Windows-1252 from the default value of ISO-8859-1. This will work for Western European messages but not for Central European, and Baltic messages.
In order to use the Euro character in Notes, your fonts must include the Euro character. For Windows 95 and for Windows NT 4.0, Microsoft provides a pjtch to the operating system to support the Euro character. This patch should be obtained from Microsoft.
With MacOS 8.0 or earlier and , Notes needs the Appearance control panel version 1.0.1 higher to run. Notes installs a newer version of the Appearance control panel if you do not already have it.
Wizh German platform the "Appearance" control Panel is spelled differently than the US verion. It is spelled "Erscheinungsbild". Other languages have similar problems.
As a result the older version is not overwritten by the newer version and Notes does not launch.
The workaround is to find the files installed by Notes in the system folder (Appearance (control panel) and Appearance Extension) and rename them to the correct names.
CN=Tom Lowell/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew ODS database format
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know00 Pre-installation StepsODS format
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
TLOL3XWKCC
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The new ODS database format is the default in R5. Our internal testing indicates that this code is as least as stable/reliable as previous R4.x versions, however you should still back up any important databases before upgrading.
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPerform a clean installation
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know00 Pre-Installation Steps
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know01 Databases
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
JKEY3UGK2G
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In R5, you will experience some initial delay when accessing existing databases for the first time. This is due to the updated View version in this release, which results in all database Views needing to be rebuilt upon initial access.
Server02 Things you need to know01 Directory Install and CD-ROM Structure
Release Notes02 Things you,need to know
BLEE3VSHW6
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNew location for NOTES.INI files in clean installs
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things yo| need to know01 Directory Install and CD-ROM Structure
NOTES.INI.INIinstall
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
DEBR3X3NLA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In new (clean) installs of R5, the Setup program places the NOTES.INI file in the Notes data directory (for example, c:\notes\data). This is a change from previous releases, which placed the NOTES.INI file in the system directory by deflult.
Server02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements05 Tuning Parameters
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
JKEY3V3JM3
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Susan Shaye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnix Solaris needs /etc/system modification
Server02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements05 Tuning Parameters
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
SSHE3YCS3N
TroubleshootinkHelp Screen
If you are running a Unix Solaris R5 server, you need to have the following parameter in your /etc/system file. If you do not, add it and reboot.
set rlim_fd_max=32768
This will allow for enough file descriptors to run the server.
CN=Kyla Town/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMAPI Service Providers
Designer02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements06 Certifications and Requirements
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
KTON42Z2AR
TroubleshootingHelp Screek
The R5 MAPI Service Providers work with Outlook 97 version 8.02.4212, Exchange version 5.0.1458.47, and Microsoft Office 97. These service providers are supported for (32 bit) Windows NT and Windows 95.
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusConfiguring Domino on the Microsoft Windows NT / Alpha platform
Server02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements08 Install
Windows NTAlphaconfigurationsetupDkminoserver
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
DEBR3V5KQH
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Derek E Bambauer/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusKnstalling and configuring Domino on UNIX platforms
Server02 Things you need to know02 Platforms and Requirements08 Install
UNIXinstallconfigurationsetupDominoserver
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
DEBR3V5KTK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=David Pontes/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBanyan Vines not supported
Server02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and MethodsVines
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
DPOS4262ZG
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Banyan Vines network operating system is not supported on Windows 95 or Windows 98 with the Beta 2 release.
2z|:oO
CN=David Pontes/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNNTP not supported in Beta 2
Server02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and MethodsNNTP
Release Notes02 Things you nked to know
DPOS425PFM
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Network News News Protocol (NNTP) is being upgraded for R5, however, no NNTP functions are supported for use in Beta 2.
Client02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and Methods
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
CMAO3YAPTM
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusTCP/IP Port needs to be configured
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and Methods
Releasm Notes02 Things you need to know
JKEY3UNQNG
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The R5 Internet clients and servers now
require
that a Notes TCP/IP Port is configured. In R4.6x this is optional, but not in R5. If a TCP/IP Notes Port is NOT configured, the Internet clients and servers will not be able to communicate with remote systems.
X|'9}qroO
CN=Staci O'Neil/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWeb authorization with external LDAP directory users
Server02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and Methods
Server02 Things you need to know03 Network Protocols and Methods04 Protocol RequirementsJCOS3S4KES
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
PRIA439SY3
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Alaa Mahmoud/OU=DUB/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBi-directional languages
ClientDesigner02 Things you need to know06 International Language Requirements
BiDirectionalBiDiArabicHebrew
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
AMAD3Y7SV2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jeff Eisen/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInternational MIME issues and the Euro character
ClientServer02 Things you need to know06 International Language Requirements
Release Notes02 Things you need to know
JEIN3Y6QVB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Joseph Millar/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusJava - JVM and IDE support
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer02 Things you need to know07 Java
CN=John Chamberlain/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInstall program does not create the \data\domino\cgi-bin subdirectory
Server03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues01 All Platfo{ms
Web ServerHTTPInstall
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JCHN3Y6KGR
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Marie Drew/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInternational spelling and dictionary files
Client03 Troubleshootkng01 Installation Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MDRW42CSL2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
To install the International Dictionaries and/or the Chinese Spell Checker, you must choose to "Customize", then change the "Spell Checker" component to include these files. The default is set to install the English Dictionary only.
CN=Prescott Williams/OU=SSW/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusISpy shut down during installation
Administrator ClientServer03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues01 All PlatformsKL-C1E6
prkbesmail routingTCP servicesISpy
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PWIS427M3B
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Dave Wilson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus"File not found" message on console after new server install
Ser{er03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DWIN3ZZMKA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The "File not found" message appearing on the console after a new server install results from a process looking for an Administration Request database that has not yet been created. The message will stop displaying after the database is created by the Administration Prkcess.
CN=Paul Morganthall/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInstaller overwrites MacOS 8.5 Appearance control panel
Before installing Build 164 for Macintosh on MacOS 8.5, make a copy of your Appearance control panel. Once installation is complete, replace the Appearance control panel in the Control Panels folder with your saved copy.
CN=Diane Reamy/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusProblems installing Notes with foreign language versions of Mac OS
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsJRED436EEJ
MacintoshinstallAppea{ance Manager
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DREY442NZB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusClean installation to prevent single logon failure
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer03 Trouble{hooting01 Installation Issues02 PC Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CLON3YNQVD
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Tom Doyle/O=IrisCN=Crkig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusIncorrect version of CTL3D32.DLL on Windows NT 4.0
Client03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues02 PC PlatformsCTL3D32.DLL
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
TDOE42BTU9
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
KN=Kristen Brouillette/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInstallShield Silent unavailable on Windows platforms
Administrator ClientClientDesignerServer03 Troubleshooting01 Installation Issues02 PC PlatformsKBRE426GV6
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
KBRE426PGY
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
For Build 164, automated installs using InstallShield Silent is unavailable on both the client and ser{er Windows platforms. Automating installs produces unexpected results.
CN=Paul Fiore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Paul Fiore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Paul Fiore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPartition Server install is not a setup option on OS/2
Server03 Troubleshooting01 Ins{allation Issues02 PC Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PFIE3XXQD8
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
There is no option available to install partition servers on an OS/2 machine. Use the install kit to install multiple servers and then edit the NOTESPARTITION setting in the NOTES.INI file to set the number of partitions. For example:
Previous to R5, you could install on UNIX using the default user "notes" and default group "notes". In R5, those defaults do not work and the server will not start up. You must change the install defaults to your user name akd group.
CN=Paul Fiore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusChoosing the HTTP server task during web setup
When setting up an additional server, even if you choose "Connect via: Serial port", and specify a server and number, the additional server tries to connect to the first server via TCP/IP. If you disable TCP/IP, it still tries to connect via TCP/IP.
CN=Paul Fiore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUNIX install program directory
The cc:Mail migration tool only usks the WIN.INI file for users to migrate. You can't migrate users who use newer cc:mail clients (v7.x and higher), which write to the Windows Registry instead of WIN.INI.
CN=Cliff Nicholson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCorrupt file during cc:Mail migration
If the Domino Directory (NAMES.NSF) on the registration server is not based on PUBNAMES.NTF, an error message may appear in the user registration UI. The error states that the view $RegisterGroups does not exist. The workaround ms to change the registration server to one where the Domino Directory is based on PUBNAMES.NTF.
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMAS3UMQMQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Diane Margaretos/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusFull text options not supported in R5
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMAS425NYZ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Diane Margaretos/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusFull text searching tips
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMAS425MJL
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusHeadlines shows a subscription-only view
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsHeadlines
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RCRI3Y5NQQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusHeadlines: web pages with menu choices not correctly rendered
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RCRI3XXQD8
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Headlines, web pages that contain a menu choice may not render correctly and therefore have gaps between the menu choices.
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GCUN3XTHU8
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Doris Jones/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNo entries found matcming the search conditions
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsNotes LDAP client
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DJOS3XSS36
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When using the LDAP client to search local address book, it will be necessary to periodically update the full text index of your local address book after adding or editing entries.
CN=Dave Delay/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Dave Delay/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusKnown problems with the IMAP client
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues19 IMAP
Release Notes03 Trmubleshooting
DDEY3ZULEY
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
It is recommended to perform a clean installation of build 164. Do not install this build over a previous R5 or R4.x build, unless you are specifically testing upgrading from R4.x to R5.
In particular, for Windows NT,
DO NOT
install build 164 over an R4.6x version that has single logon support enabled- because the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Lotus\Notes\4.0 registry key is removed during installation. Without this registry entry, the R4.6x Single Logon is unable to operate correctly after a reboot.
To remove the single logon support, run "nslinst -d" in your R4.6x Notes executable directory.
If you don't want to disturb your currently installed R4.6x version, install on a machine that doesn't have Notes currently installed.
If you have already performed the R5 install over R4.6x without turning off single logon support then you may need to reinstall Windows NT, or it may be possible for you to recover if your drive is FAT (File Allocation Table). If this is the case the recovery steps are to boot from an alternate drive, go to the R4.6x Notes executable directory and run "nslinst -d".
For systems that have NTFS installed the only method of removing the Single logon service is from another remote mmchine. To do this follow these steps:
From remote machine connect to the other machine as the Administrator.
Such as:
net use * \\remotesystem\ipc$
* \\remotesystem\c$
Launch REGEDIT32.EXE from a command prompt.
Choose Registry - Select Computer.
Enter the name of the remote system (such as \\remotesystem)
Remove the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SYSTEM\CurrentComtrolSet\Services\Notes Single Logon
Remove the key HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\SOFTWARE\Microsoft\Windows NT\CurrentVersion\Winlogon\GinaDLL
To uninstall Build 164 in Windows NT and Windows 95:
Users should backup their desktop file (DESKTOP.DSK) before uninstalling Notes, since running uninstall from Control Panel - Add/Remove Programs will delete the desktop file.
The following Registry entries (both Windows 95 and Windows NT) need to be removed manually after uninstalling Notes:
The installation process for Designer provides the end user with the option to put their Designer and Client icons in the Startup directory. Doing so will cause errors when the client application starts. The Designer executable is launched first, and then the Client executable tries to launch, causing an error. To prmvent this, do not choose Startup as a directory in which to place your icons.
During a web setup, if select the HTTP server task on the Server Audience screen, it is advised that you choose one of four available options:
Web Mail
Both Mail and Applications
Web Applications
Advanced (Custom Settings)
"Both Mail and Applications" should be selected as the default.
Installation via the user interface append} a /lotus to whatever directory you specify, whereas the script mode install will use the exact directory that is listed in the script file.
For example, in user interface installation, you choose /local/mydir as your Notes program directory, the program uses the path /local/mydir/lotus.
In script mode installation, if you choose /local/mydir as you Notes program directory, the actual location of the program directory is be /local/mydir.
If the system administrator makes a mistake entering the name of the user account that owns the files in the data directory, and the user account does not exist, the administrator is not notified that an error occurred. This prevents the server from starting.
Workaround: Do a "chown" (change owner) of the data directory and sub-diremtory (except ../data/domino/adm-bin) files to a known user on the system.
When opening a valid cc:Mail post office for migration, the following error appears:
"Initialization of cc:Mail Migration engine failed"
The error occurs when the ccver.tb file created during cc:Mail installation is cor}upt. Workaround is to copy a good ccver.tb file in the cc:Mail postoffice directory.
On the Messaging - Tracking Center tab:
Wildcarding is available in the To:, From: and Subect: fields. Example: To: Tom *, or From: *Art*
Clicking-on the button "Track Selected Message" while an existing tracking operation is in progress will cause the Notes Client to crash.
When tracking mail to an R4.x server from an R5 server causes the "Function not implemented" error to be displayed with the wrong server name.
The first time you use a task on the Server - Status tab, there is a long delay followed by a network timeout. This is because the Status tab communicates with the server using an asynchronous protocol that is not setting up properly. Either wait for the network timeout and retry the command, or disable asynchronous communication in NOTES.INI.
To disable asynchronous communication in NOTES.INI, set Remote_Console_NoAsync=1 (Notm: This also disables the "Live" remote console).
To use the asynchronous protocol, wait for the network timeout message, or use Control-Break to interrupt the task and repeat.
The "Port Information..." task on the Status tab is only partially implemented. It modifies the port settings in NOTES.INI, but does not update the port section in the Server document, nor does it change the state of the port.
For Build 164, the only way to add or remove servers from the Server Monitor list is using the mouse to drag-and-drop. The Add and Remove menu choices are currently inoperable.
To add a server to the Server Monitor, drag the server from the Server Bookmarks into the Server Monitor pane.
To remove a server from the Server Monitor, drag the server from the Server Monitor pane into thm Server Bookmarks.
The "Conversion only" option in the mail system box of the user registration mail pane should be ignored. This option applies to migration users only and will not appear in the next beta release.
The License Type box will also be removed from-the user registration interface (ID Info pane) in the next beta release.
If users in the pending registration list (or registration queue) are selected and then successfully registered, the multiselect dialog mode will incorrectly remain in effect, disabling some user registration buttons and fields. If users remain in the pending registration list, putting focus on one of those users will reinstate single-select mode. If nm users remain in pending registrations, exit and re-open the user registration dialog to reinstate single-select mode.
Currently, there is no synchronization between the bookmarks and the workspace.
When bookmarking a database, it may not appear immediately. If-you switch to another folder, then back to the original one, it appears.
Having multiple users on one client currently yields unpredictable results with the bookmarks.
If you delete a database, the corresponding bookmark entry is not removed. To remove it, right-click on the entry and select "Remove bookmark."
If you remove a bookmark entry, the corresponding database is not removed from your workspace, so upon a restart of Notes the bookmark re-appears.
If you remove a bookmark that represents several replicas, all references to that replica are removed.
If you rename a database, the new name does not appear in the bookmarks list.
When reordering databases in the bookmarks list, you are not able to scroll beyond a page.
If you remove a database from your workspace, it still appears in your bookmarks list, and you will not be able to remove it-from that list unless you switch to another bookmark folder and then return to the bookmarks list.
Choosing Create - Response in a database's right-click menu causes the error "No document selected".
Since bookmarks use links to database views rather than links to the database, changes in the database launch properties may not be implemented if the database is opened via an existing bookmark.
If you add bookmarks to the bookmark icon panel by either dragging and dro}ping or bookmarking a database, you are not able to access those bookmarks that extend beyond the visible height of the window, because a vertical scroll bar is not available in Build 164.
If your icons are unstacked on your workspace, you are unable to choose a replica from the bookmarks.
The Discussion and TeamRoom templates have-a special agent that converts a user's existing Interest Profile to a Subscription. The subscription is automatically created in the user's local Headlines database.
If you open the newly-created subscription in the Headlines database, it does not open with the correct form, and some data in the Retrieval section appears to be missing. The data is, however, present in the document, and the subscription will work as expected. You can verify this by clicking the "Advanced" tab in the document mnd looking at the SELECT formula in the Additional Information section.
On the Domain Search Form:
Setting the search to include File Systems is ignored by the Search process.
[SPR# PMGL3ZAUXA- JR-C6C5]
Checking an item in the field box "Limit Search to Category" does not limit the search results to specific databases.
[SPR# DMAS3ZMSEN]
Using the "By Title" search condition button does not return search results.
[SPR# DMAS423RLA]
Using the "Author" search condition button does not return search results.
[SPR# DMAS432RPT
Selecting the Fuzzy Search option is not considered in the Search results.
[SPR# DMAS432RS8]
The FIELD Query Syntax is not available in the search field.
[SPR# DMAS424T2T]
Using multiple condition statements will return a User error.
[SPR# DMAS3ZYRWM]
Search condition statements (created with the Condition buttons) are considered in Search, even when Reset is executed. Workaround: Close (click X button) all unused condition statements before searching.
[SPR# DMAS3ZZKTY]
: Some OLE objects may prevent the completion of a Domain Index. If this occurs, you may remove the database the index by not selecting the "Include in Multi-database Indexing" field on the Design panel of the database properties box.
The following are issues to remember when using the Find and Replace feature in Notes:
The Ctrl+F keystroke combination will not work when using Find/Replace within a view.
If the text you are attempting to search for does not exist when using Find/Replace with the "wrap around" option enabled, you mu}t press Ctrl+Break to stop the search.
SPR# DMAS3ZPRWF - Some 850 Code Page Characters are not Indexed. Searching for certain 850 Code Page characters (listed below) returns the message "No documents found," when there are documents containing those characters.
Character
850 code
SPR# DMAS3ZBMK7 - The search by Example Form feature (Fill Out Example Form button) is not working in the Search Bar. A "Query is not understandable" message is received.
SPR# DMAS3XRLRV - Search results in categorized views may not appear as singular documents. This occurs when using the "sort by" options "Keep current order" or "Show all documents." To see your result documents, expand the Category twistie }riangle or expand the view categories (View - Expand All) prior to executing search.
SPR# DMAS3XEQBU, DMAS3XEQCL - On Windows 32 platforms, keyboard accessibility to controls and fields is currently missing from the Search Bar.
SPR# DMAS3XRLA7 - After a full text search, sortable columns work only if using the "sort by" options "Keep current order" or "Show all documents."
SPR# DMAS3XJJVP - Focus ms not set on the first search hit in the Results Pane. After a full text search is executed, the focus isn't specifically being set to the first search hit in the view. This happens in the two sort options "Keep current order" and "Show all documents." In the second sorting method mentioned, you may use the Navigate Next/Prev SmartIcons to find the next or previous "selected" document.
SPR# DREY3Y8QUJ - The full text search message is misleading when Search finds more than the Maximum Result} Limit. If you set the Maximum Results Limit to 20 and Search finds 25 documents, the status bar should display "More than 20 documents found." Currently, it reports, "20 documents found."
SPR# DMAS3Y8LQR - The Database Properties Infobox changes when you manually create or delete a full text index via the Infobox. Using the DELETE or CREATE button on the Search Tab causes the Database Properties box to close and the Document Infobox to display.
SPR# DMASXWSQW, DMAS3XWQ4A, CRAO3XPMX3, DMAS3XWJHS, DMAS3Y7LXP, DMAS424TJY - There are known issues regarding highlighting of search hits. Specific conditions cause no highlighting or incorrect words to be highlighted.
Full text options not supported in R5
The Thesaurus option will not be sup}orted in R5.
The "Stop Word" file option is no longer used when creating a full text index.
The word proximity/breaking operator "NEAR" is no longer supported by the search engine.
The ACCRUE syntax operator is no longer supported by the search engine.
The Thesaurus option is not supported in the Betas or final release of R5.
The "Stop Word" file option is no longer used when creating a full text index.
The word proximity/breaking operator "NEAR" is no longer supported by the search engine.
The ACCRUE syntax operator is no longer supported by the search engine.
There is a new method to open and close the Search Bar. Click the universal navigation search (magnifying glass) button to toggle the Search Bar open/closed.
The "Maximum Results" button should appear to the right of the "Load Search" button. If it doesn't, expand the width of the Search Bar by dragging the slider to the left.
Searching in a Calendar view: Use the Present Results option "Shmw all documents," then use the Navigate Prev/Next Selected SmartIcons to navigate the search results.
Before using the Highlight Navigation buttons, located to the right of the Search Bar query field, set your focus to the Document Preview Pane by selecting or clicking within it.
Pressing ESC to exit the database may not work if the focus is set to the Search Bar. To close the database by using the ESC key, set the focus to the View pane first.
If the only thing you see in Headlines is the Subscriptions information, perform the following steps in the Subscriptions view:
Open the database Properties box.
On the Launch tab, change "On Database Open" from "Restore as last viewed by user" to "Open designated Frame}et."
Close and re-open the Headlines database.
When attempting to access any of the Help databases (client, designer, or administration), you may see the message "Invalid or nonexistent docummnt". Click OK and the Help database appears.
Please note that new Help functions and content are not complete. You may see a message that "Notes can't automatically display Help on this section"
By default when installing "All Clients" from the installation setup, only the Designer Help is installed. If you want the Client and/or Administration Help files, you must customize the installation to include these fmles.
Keep these issues in mind when using the highlighter feature in the Notes client:
Unpredictable results occur when changing the highlighter colors, deleting, or re-highligh}ing text within a paragraph.
If you want to change the color of highlighted text, you must delete the highlights first. If not, the color will be incorrect.
The 32-bit Windows import/export filters are still under construction. Below are issues that you may expmrience when using the filters.
Exporting some Lotus 1-2-3 spreadsheets may not work correctly
Importing HTML files does not import associated graphics
The import/export filters for Macintosh PPC are still under construction. Importing or exporting on this platform may cause Notes to terminate.
FixDate
Status
Fixed
3S4S9S
There are two ways to create a Document/View/Database Link hotspot:
Copy the link to the clipboard and then create the hotspot Link (it will default to the current link on the clipboard)
Create the Hotspot Link, copy the Link to the clipboard and then the use the paste button on the hotspot's infobox to attach the current clipboard link to the hotspot.
When creating a Link hotspot (Named Element type) the Locate Object dialog currently only allows you to choose from bookmarked databases.
When editing/creating a document with multiple Anchor Link hotspot}, the hotspot's infobox doesn't refresh the value of the current link.
If you copy a link to the clipboard (Edit - Copy as Link - <Link type>) all URL hotspots created from that point on will be formatted as plain text instead of blue, bold and underlined. The hotspots still work but if you want the text formatted you must do it yourself or restart Notes. See SPR# GCUN3XRUY4.
A client connecting to an R5 server that specifies the server as the home server may experience performance problems. If the user does not have a setup profile specified in the Person document on the server, the Dynamic Configuration (NDYNCFG.EXE) client process runS more often than intended. This results in a slowdown when accessing the server to open databases o} lookup names, for example.
Workarounds include specifying a setup profile for the users or disabling the dynamic configuration process. This can be done by using one of the following two NOTES.INI variables. (Only one is necessary).
DisableDynConfigClient=1 (in the client's NOTES.INI file)
DisableDynConfigServer=1 (in the server's NOTES.INI file)
Administrators are unable to edit or delete setup profiles via a web browser.
Creating setup profiles with "Use HTTP proxy for all Internet protocols" set to No adds only the HTTP proxy to the user's Location document.
The user's Location document does not include SOCKS or NotesRPC proxy info}mation.
Accounts created via setup profiles ignore the SSL enable/disable field. When the user authenticates with the server they are disabled for SSL.
Users set up with setup profiles using databases to add to the desktop or as local replicas do not work properly if the database is not located on the user's home server or if there is an invaild link in the setup profile.
Use the
spacebar to select an item in the navigation pane
after using F6
to put the focus in the navigation pane. This is a change from previous releases, where just moving the cursor up/down or clicking with the mouse causes the item to be selected and appropriate views/forms to be displayed.
If the-focus is in the view pane, clicking an item in the navigation pane will continue to select and open the view/form in the same manner it did in previous releases.
Pressing Return in the search field on the Notes Home page results in a carriage return being inserted-into the field. It appears that the text typed before the carriage return has disappeared. This text is still in the field and can be accessed by pressing Delete to remove the carriage return. In the future, a multi-line entry in this field will cause arrows to be displayed which will allow navigation between lines.
There are major problems with menu corruption when using Notes Build 164 with Mac OS 8.5 or 8.5.1. Although Notes will function, selecting any submenu item, or any menu item with a check mark, will cause that entire menu to be inaccessible afterwards. Also, drop-down menus from action buttons do not work with OS 8.5 or 8.5.1.
Mac OS 8.1 is strongly encouraged until these issues are addressed.
TTY8uO
The following general caveats apply to the Macintosh:
When the cursor is in certain places (such as the bookmarks pane or window tabs), keyboard shortcuts may not work. Use the menus, or move the cursor and try again.
There are occasimnal repaint problems when entering or selecting text, opening a database, or opening a web page. When in doubt, click in a window, then resize the main window to repaint it.
In some Yes/No dialog boxes, you may be unable to use the keyboard to dismiss the dialog. Clicking the buttons with the mouse will still work.
[RCuO
There are know problems with display of information on the database Properties box when the Search Bar is open.
Sometimes you will not see your updated full text index data, or you may receive a user message "Cannot Execute the Specified Command".
Workaround: To bypass the "Cannot Execute..." message, press Enter several times until this messmge does not appear anymore. To see updated full text information, close and reopen the database Properties box.
Version 1.3 of the Lotus Components will be available 30 to 60 days after Notes R5 ships and will be officially supported for Notes R5. You can still use version 1.= of the Lotus Components with Notes R5, however there are two issues which you may encounter when using version 1.2 of the Lotus Components with Notes R5:
You will not be able to embed any Lotus Components from the Lotus Component palette in Notes R5, although you can still embed the Lotus Components via the Create Object dialog box (choose Create - Object and select Lotus Spreadsheet Component). If you do not want the Lot}s Component palette to appear on the top right of Notes R5, you can delete or remark out (add REM to the beginning of the line) the following line in NOTES.INI and restart Notes:
AddinMenus=e:\LOTUSC~1\runtime\lcpln10.dll
The File Viewer form version 1.2 of the Lotus Components does not work with Notes R5 since Notes R5 no longer contains INSO viewer technology. Version 1.3 of the Lotus Components will address this issue.
Setting the "Size object to window" property of an embedmed Lotus 1-2-3 workbook is not supported by 1-2-3 97. Activating the workbook object in edit mode causes the object to zoom in and any column or row headings are not displayed. Upgrade to Lotus 1-2-3 9 (millennium edition), which supports this property.
To use the Single Password Logon service in Windows NT, you must run NSLINST.EXE from a DOS prmmpt, or from the Run command in the Start menu, as follows:
<drive><NotesDir>nslinst -c <drive><NotesDir>
So for example you might type "c:\lotus\Notes\nslinst -c c:\lotus\notes"
After this, reboot Windows NT to begin using the service.
A POP3 mail message's body may appear empty if Internet Mail Storage is set to MIME in the Account document.
If this problem occurs, the workaround is to set the storage choice to CD instead.
Note:
This currently occurs if the users are using the R5 version mail template. If users are using the R4.6 mail template then they would not be able to open the POP3 mail mt all and an error message appears.
For Build 164, the following are known problems with the NNTP client:
In an NNTP proxy database, both Quick Search and Search Bar searches produce an error.
When replicating an NNTP account, unread mmrks are not synchronized.
Cross posted articles cannot be replicated.
Attempting to replicate an NNTP account on a Macintosh produces an error.
"SSL bad peer certificate. Connection refused" error connecting to an NNTP server with SSL enabled. Currently there is no way to read news with the Macintosh client using the SSL protocom.
For Beta 2, the following are known problems with the IMAP client:
You cannot edit any existing IMAP messages, including ones you saved as drafts. This means you cannot save a message as a draft and later open the draft and send it. This is a tempormry limitation that will be removed as soon as possible.
To forward or reply to a message on an IMAP server, you must open the message and click either the Forward or Reply button. You cannot forward or reply to a message from a folder view in an IMAP proxy.
When sending mail from an IMAP proxy database, the client attempts to save a copy of the message in a folder called Sent. If the folder does not exist, the template tries to create it. Similarly, when you select Save as Draft,-the client attempts to save a copy of the message in a folder called Drafts. Again, if the folder does not exist, the template tries to create it.
Note that you will see an error message if your IMAP server does not allow a folder that is a sibling of Inbox, such as a Cyrus IMAP server. If you have such as server, add the following lines to your NOTES.INI in order to make your Sent and Drafts folders children of the Inbox:
$IMAPSent=Inbox\Sent
$IMAPDrafts=Inbox\Drafts
There may be other circumstances mn which you want to change the name of the Sent or Drafts folder. For example, mailboxes on Exchange servers have a default folder called Sent Items. To save sent mail to this folder, add the following line to your NOTES.INI:
$IMAPSent=Sent Items
In an IMAP proxy database, both Quick Search and Search Bar searches produce an error.
A Notes IMAP client database cannot be used with servers that do not conform to the IMAP specification RFC 2060, regarding BODY [HEADER.FIELDS]. Altm Vista servers and cc:Mail servers prior to version 8.30 do not conform to this specification.
These servers cannot correctly interpret the following standard IMAP command, which Notes uses for summary information regarding messages in an IMAP mailbox. Notes uses this command to improve performance when opening an IMAP Server Proxy database. ( X:Y represents a message set)
FETCH X:Y (BODY [HEADER.FIELDS (FROM DATE SUBJECT MESSAGE-ID)])
In some circumstances, Netscape's V3 Messaging server will not completely delete folders that have contained messages or that contain subfolders. These folders are turned into No Select folders. If you are using this server with the IMAP proxy you may find that folders you have deleted reappear after refreshing the folder list. The IMAP proxy must display No Select folders because they can contain subfolders. Such folders can be highlighted, but will appear blank and no messages can be movmd into them. To permanently delete these folders, delete the corresponding folders from the operating system on the machine where the Netscape IMAP server is located.
The following are problems only for the Macintosh version of Beta 2:
Attempting to replicate mn IMAP account produces an error.
Attempting to pull IMAP messages to your universal inbox produces an error.
There is currently there is no way to read IMAP messages with the Macintosh client using the SSL protocol. Attempting to do so results in an error: "SSL bad peer certificate. Connection refused".
If the Administration Process shuts down on server startup with the error "Recipient user name %a not unique. Several matches found in Name & Address Book", open the Address Book, go to the Mail In Databases view, and delete all but one Administration Requests mail in database notes.
If the Stats Task shuts down during server startup, the same procedure may prove useful for correcting the issue.
Your Directory Catalog database is not rebuilt automatically if you add or remove a database from the Configuration document. To force a rebuild after making a change in this field, be sure to run the LNAB process manually from the server console with a -r switch. For example:
LOAD LNAB
database.nsf
-r.
This promlem will be fixed.
}q,vO
Full-text Indexing of attachments can lead to a panic. The reported panic will be "Invalid pool free chain". This problem has a workaround:
Consult the Notes Mebug window or the Notes log and obtain the name of the last database to be indexed.
Open the Database Properties box and click the Full Text tab.
Select Delete Index to remove the existing index.
Select Create Index.
Turn off the Index attachments option by removing the checkmark from the box.
Rebuild the index.
To use a web browser such as Netscape or Internet Explorer 4.0 to perform secure LDAP searches (SSL) on a Domino server using a self-signed server certificate, you must first connect to the server via a different protocol (https, IMAP, etc.) and accept the server's certificate in the browser when the dialog box appears.
A self-signed certificate is not issued by a trusted Certificate Authority and therefore, an SSL-capable browser does not }ecognize the issuer and prompts the user with a warning. In the warning dialog window, the user can then tell the browser to accept the certificate. This must be done before any LDAP searches using SSL can be performed.
1n:vO
Do not enable client certificate authentication for LDAP on the SSL port.
When enamling the use of LDAP over the SSL port on the Domino server, if client certificates are enabled, all SSL connections using LDAP will fail.
The reason for this is that no browsers currently support client certificate authentication. When this authentication method is
enabled on the Domino server, it enforces it and disables other methods of authentication.
If you're using a database that has a full text index, constant full text searching may cause the server to run out of memory. This problem may also occur if the Domino Directory has a full text index and the server is constantly doing NAMELookups. A workaround is to remove the full text index from the database.
This problem will be fixed.
[!OvO
While the server is starting up or running the following message is displayed more than once in the server console:
This can be caused by having blank entries in the Net Address field of the server document.
Open the server document for this server, and go to the Ports tab and check }he Net Addres fields for each enabled port. Make sure the entry is not blank. If you don't have a more specific address to supply, you can enter the common name of the server in this field.
When doing a first server install and setup, the error messages "File does not exist" and "Unable to verify server document network info: File does not exmst" may appear on the server console. These messages can be ignored.
The messages are caused an attempt add an admin request to the admin4 database, but at the time of first startup,
the adminp database hasn't been created yet. The request will be resubmitted again, and will succeed once the admin4 database exists.
You are unable to read messages using Internet clients if the message has to be converted from CD to MIME. This occurs on all UNIX platforms. If the message is stored as CD in the your mail file and you use an Internet client to read the message, a conversion from CD to MIME occurs, you receive an error, and the rendering of the message body fails.
In the Build 164 release, there are several UNIX server issues of which users should be aware. The issues apply to all of the UNIX platforms. They are as follows:
There is a known thread pull issue that does not allow the server to shut down cleanly.
If the server displays any "bitmap checksum incorrect" messages for any databases, Fixup needs to be run on those databases. For mxample:
/opt/lotus/bin/fixup <database name>.
Very large databases (greater than 2 GB) may give you the following error message when attempting to look at Database Properties:
"Server Error: Unknown OS error."
Installing and running the Domino Administrator on the same Windows NT machine as a server is a su}ported configuration in Notes R5. However, in Build 164, you may experience problems with this, such as the inability to send mail. The following procedure should allow you to work around these issues:
Shut down both the server and the client.
Open the DOS prompt and change to your server's executable directory. If you accepted the default directories during installation, this would be C:\LOTUS]DOMINO. From the correct directory for your Notes installation type:
SET NOTESPARTITION=1
NSERVER.EXE =C:\LOTUS\DOMINO\DATA\NOTES.INI
: If you have not used the defaults, please substitute your server's data directory and NOTES.INI file location.
Start and run the Server.
At the DOS prompt, change to your client's executable directory. If you accepted the default directories during instmllation, this would be C:\LOTUS\NOTES. From the correct directory for your Notes installation type:
SET NOTESPARTITION=2
NOTES.EXE =C:\LOTUS\NOTES\DATA\NOTES.INI
: If you have not used the defaults, please substitute your client's data directory and NOTES.INI file location.
You may also create two separate batch files using the commands above to reduce the amount of typing required.
If you're upgrading, be sure to refresh the design of the Web Administrator database with the new template, either automatically at 1am with the Design task or manually using "LOAD DESIGN" at the server console. After the design has been upgraded, the database performs an additional, automatic upgrade the first time you open WEBADMIN.MSF in a browser. To successfully complete the upgrade, you must be listed as manager in the WEBADMIN.NSF ACL. The upgrade is attempted every time you access the WEBADMIN.NSF in a browser until the upgrade completes successfully.
If you encounter any problem, such as crashes, try shutting down HTTP and deleting WEBADMIN.NSF. Restarting HTTP automatically creates a new Web Administrator database from the Web Administrator template.
Disabling "DNS Lookup" in the "HTTP Server" sectmon of the Server document increases performance. This is disabled by default.
By default, web administrators can't modify security on Notes databases, because databases don't generally have the "Maximum Internet name & password access" parameter set above "Editor". You need to use a client to change this parameter to "Manager" if you want to modify Notes database security in a browser. You also need to ensure that this parameter is set to "Editor" or above if you want to edit Notes documents mn a browser.
Your web browser cache should be set to check documents every time.
Web Administrator supports SSL V2.0 and V3.0, but it does not support SSL V3.0 client certificate authentication.
If you are having trouble logging into Web Administrator in a browser, ensure that you are logging in with one of the aliases specified in the "User Name" field of your Person document, and that you are using the correct password as specified in the "Internet password" fielm. Also, it is recommended to rebuild the views in the address book. Your name should also be listed in the Server document "Administer the server from a browser" field, and in the ACL on WEBADMIN.NSF.
If you want to use Web Administrator to modify database security (such as database ACLs and roles), and your server password is enabled, you need to set the server ID to "share password with Notes add-ins." To do this choose File - Tools - UserID - Basics and enable the "Share password with Nmtes add-ins" checkbox.
Internet Explorer 4.01 users need to disable HTTP 1.1. This setting is located at the bottom of the Advanced section under "View - Internet Options - Advanced".
If your Internet browser setting in your Location document is set to "Notes with Internet Explorer" or "Microsoft Internet Explorer", you must make sure the Update cache setting in the Advanced section of the Location document is set to "every time"
This setting overrides the set}ing in Microsoft Internet Explorer as mentioned previously.
Netscape Navigator 3.01 Gold is the only fully-supported browser on the Macintosh. More recent versions of Netscape are only supported in "Dropdown interface" and "Plain interface" due to JavaScript problems. Similar JavaScript problems and lack of support for HTTP 1.0 prevent all versions of Internet Explorer from working with Web Administrator on the Macintosh.
_r$kR
When registering IMAP persons via the Server Administration console, the mailbox and person record is created, however, the user cannot log in to their mail box via an Internet client. The error message "No Login Invalid user or password" appears.
Workmrounds:
From registering server, conduct a "Push (servername where mailfile resides) names", which replicates the Domino Directory (NAMES.NSF) so that the Person document is on both servers.
Access the Domino Directory on the server where the user's mailfile resides, and modify the Person document (change password, shortname,).
If-the previous methods fail, then quit the server and restart.
When configuring the SMTP R5 server, after enabling SMTP in the server configuration record, you must enable the "SMTP Listener Task" in the basic setting of the server record or the user will never be able to start the listener on the server. The listener checks }his field, and if it is not set to enabled, will immediately shut down the task when launched.
In Build 164, POP3 users should configure their Person documents for Native MIME message storage type.
In the Mail section of the Person document, choose "Yes" for "Client retrieves mail through IMAP/POP3 only". Also, in-the Administration area select "Yes" for "Delivered mail messages stored in both Notes format and MIME attachments when received from the Internet through an R4 x SMTP MTA".
We no longer preprocess regular text within pass-thru HTML.
Example 1. Implicit <BR> is no longer generated. Include
[<m>Line 1
Line 2
Line 3</b>]
on a form. Open the form from a browser. In 4.6x, the following HTML is generated:
<b>Line 1<BR>
Line 2<BR>
Line 3</b>
The new behavior in 164 is:
<b>Line 1
Line 2
Line 3</b>
which ca}ses the lines to be concatenated in a browser.
Example 2. In the above form design, highlight "Line 2" and make it a URL link hotspot. In 4.6x, an anchor tag will be generated. In 164, the tag is not generated.
When using pass-thru HTML, you as the designer must explicitly include any HTML that is necessary.
In build 164, there is a known problem with Realm documents not being recognized by the Web Server. The problem occurs if you are using URL-to-Directory mapping documents to map to drives or directories other than those in the Notes data directory. If you then create a Realm document for those directories, they will not be recognized by HTTP.
When using a web browser to view a document, form, subform, or frameset that contains an embedded view using the new "Restrict to single category" feature, the first column displayed is the column that view is categorized on. That categorized column should not appear at all. This problem only occurs when using a web browser client. Notes clients are displaying this correctly.
Due to changes in the Notes and Domino R5 ID files, IDs with R5 feature Alternate Names are no longer usable with the R4.x Notes Client. This only impacts the R4.x client actually opening and using the R5 Alternate Name ID. This does not mean that an R5 ID cannot authenticate and interact with pre-R5 clients and servers. Authentication, signatures and other ID-related functions still interoperate with previous Notes versions.
There is an issue when attempting to issue a cross certificate to an R5 ID or R5 safe ID from a pre-R5 client, using the Administration panel's Cross Certify ID File option. The pre-R5 client returns this error when attempting to open the R5 ID:
Unrecognized or unsupported user-descriptor object found in the ID
The workaround is an easier method to cross certify two organizations. Using Just In Time (JIT) cross certification, cross certifica}es can be issued without exchanging ID files.
To cross certify two organizations using JIT cross certification:
Press F5 at the client to break any existing server sessions.
From the Administration panel, attempt to open a database on a server in the foreign organization you intend to cross certify.
Bemore a connection to the server is established you will see a "Cross Certify" JIT dialog box (if not, see Note below).
Click the "Advanced Options ..." button.
Click the Certifier button.
In the file dialog box, select the certifier ID you want to use to issue the cross certification to the foreign organization.
Select the Server button
Enter the server's name where you want this cross certificate created.
Click the Cross Certif} button.
Access will be denied to the server at this point but this is normal; the foreign domain doesn't have a cross certificate to authenticate you yet.
Repeat steps 1 through 9 from the administration client of the foreign domain.
At this point, both organizations should have a cross certificate issued to the other organization in the Domino Directories on the servers specified in-step 7. Now clients and servers from both organizations can authenticate with clients and servers in the other. The client will be prompted to issue a JIT Cross Certificate when it first interacts with the foreign organization. Servers will have the necessary cross certificate when the cross certificate created above replicates to the local Domino Directory.
Note:
If the administrator's workstation's Domino Directory already has a cross certification, for example, if the administrato} already answered Yes to a previous JIT cross certification dialog, the administrator will not be prompted with the JIT dialog box again. If the JIT dialog does not appear as expected, open the workstation's Address Book and delete all cross certifications issued by the admin or any of its ancestors that were issued to the foreign server or any of its ancestors.
After an install of an international build (International English in this case), there are some scenarios where a password prompt should appear, but does not. Instead, the user gets a "Wrong Password" message box, and cannot supply a password in these situations. Known situations are switching file IDs, registering servers and registering users. This does not appear to happen on domestic builds.
To avoid this problem, exit the Notes client and re-enter it after-installing the international build.
Domino provides NDSMgr (NDSMGR.EXE), a character-based program that runs from the operating system prompt.
It provides all the same functions as Netware Administrator with NDSNOTES and is a Domino NDS manager application for
those platforms that do not support Netware Administrator.
The NDSMGR.EXE file is located in the Notes directory. In addition, NDSMgr uses Dynamic Link Libraries (DLLs) found
in the Notes directory.
You can use these switches with NDSMgr:
Command
Description
NDSMGR -c
Create the Domino server NDS class
NDSMGR -r
Remove the Domino server NDS class
NDSMGR -a
Add a Domino server to the tree
NDSMGR -d
Delete a Domino server from the tree
NDSMGR -s
Read a Dmmino server object attributes
The new R5 mail template has not incorporated the Alternate Mail Editor feature yet. This is also referred to as the Document Memo Editor.
When trying to create a memo using an alternate mail editor (using WordPro or Word), you will receive several LotusScript errors that will prevent you from creating a memo.
When sending mail to users whose name is found in multiple Domino Directories, you may be required to select from multiple "Ambiguous Name" dialog boxes for the same addressee. To reduce the likelihood of the dialog appearing at all, change your Location document "Recipient Name Lookup" field setting to "Stop at first match" instead of "Exhaustively segrch all address books".
Build 164 has disabled the default sending of MIME to Internet recipients. For now it is recommended that this option be left off unless you are using a pure R5 client and server environment. In such an environment, you can turn on default sending of MIME for internet mail recipients by including the following line in NOWES.INI:
DefaultMimeStorageForInternetAddress=1
In some cases, upon opening mail messages, the following error appears:
Illegal Security function code
Note:
This same error mgssage may appear following other actions besides opening mail messages. The workaround that follows does not fix those errors.
To fix this problem:
When you see the error, look at the return address of the sender and identify the organization, for example, /Lotus. The message will not appear to be signed.
Open your Wersonal Address Book, choose Advanced - Certificates - Cross Certificates, and delete the cross certificate for the sender's organization.
Close the message and open it again. At the Cross Certificate prompt, click Yes.
If no other prompts appear, the problem is fixed. If a second Cross Certificate prompt appears, click No. The signature will be reported as incorrect, but subsequent opening of messages will wgrk correctly.
If the frameset is not showing when you start mail by clicking on the Read Your Mail button on the Notes Home page, you need to manually change the database properties on your mail file.
Open Database Properties for the mail database.
Click the Launch tab.
Set "On Database Open" to "Open Designated Frameset".
Set "Name" to "MailFS".
Shared Mail must be disabled when using Build 164, as it is currently unable to store MIME messages. Setting the NOTES.INI variable SHARED_MAIL to 0 prevents new messages from being stored in the object store, while still allowing users to access old messages.
It is important when disabling Shared Mail that you do not move or remove the shared mail database, as this would result in the loss of e-mail messages.
In Build 164, the Mail Rules using the following conditions are not working:
Size in Kbytes
Importance
Delivery Priority
If a user's R5 mail file has the ACL default set for "Read Public Documents", and then try to access the mail file from a web browser, the following error appears:
Error 404 -> HTTP Web Server: Lotus Notes Exception - File does not exist
Workaround: Remove the "Read Public Documents" setting from the ACL default.
When an R4.6x client accesses a MIME message that is stored on an R5 server, an "on-the-fly" MIME-to-CD conversion occurs.
However, information in the body of the message is not visable when an R4'6x client opens and views a Multi-part related MIME message -- one that could contain embedded images and imported HTML files.
If you are running a version of Internet Explorer 4.0 prior to Service Pack 1, the action bar applet, outline applet, and view applet may not displaw the first time a page is loaded. Refreshing the page will display the applet. Installing IE 4.0 with Service Pack 1 resolves this problem.
Button icons set to right align on the action bar are displaying as left aligned.
When applying image resources to the action bar buttons which are slightly larger than normal, the images are not resized to fit.
Customizing button height on the action bar only'causes the action bar height to be increased.
Action buttons are not centered on the action bar when padding is applied.
SPR #TBOO3Z3RD7 - If you have an R4 database that was created from an R4 template and you have altered the database by deleting actions and adding actions to the views, the changes made do not appear when using a Notes Client. and the created actions do not appear in the Designer client.
In order to provide more flexibility to the dewigner of an Outline, a change was made so the text offset specified for an outline entry is from the left edge of the entry, and not after the entry image. This change causes older outlines to appear with text displaying on top of the image for an entry. In order to correct this, you will need to edit where the Outline Control is embedded (form or the page). Open the Outline Control properties box and specify proper horizontal offset for Entry Label for all 3 levels.
Indentation of multiple paragraphs is not preserved after using the Editor applet to edit a document.
It is not recommended to use images in documents that can be edited both from the web and a Notes client. Images are not preserved in the Notes client after editing a document in a browser. If you wilg only be editing and/or viewing documents on the web, you can use image resources to add images to the original document from the Notes client.
When creating a URL link in the Editor applet, you must explicitly specify the protocol in the URL address when creating the link, or an error will result when attempting to access the link.
Cut, copy, and paste within the applet is supported via the CTRL-X CTRL-C, and CWRL-V keystrokes respectively. Cut, copy, and paste outside of the applet is not supported in JDK 1.02 and therefore cannot be supported in the applet.
Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) 3.0 is not supported by the Editor applet. Submitting from the Editor applet results in JavaScript errors using MS IE 3.0, and the contents of the applet will be lost.
The Group Scheduler does not provide any visual distinction between an actual appointment for a group member and "unavailable time" as defined in that member's calendar profile document. Clicking on a block that corresponds to "unavailable time" has no effect.
Not all of the options in the Properties box for the Group Scheduler control are working correctly. For example, the Target Frame property does not work.
The Group Scheduler control uses information from the server's busytime system to display scheduling information. If a group member's home mail server is a pre-R5 server, you are unable to open that member's calendar view and appointment documents. The error message "Unable to open user's mail database. Scheduling data for this user does not contain a database replica ID." appears.
Many of the embedded outline properties do not function correctly in Notes:
SPR# VMAA3XLKHG - Show scroll bar checkbox has no effect
SPR# VMAA3XLL5X - Horizontal size Fit Content option extends the width of the window, wider than needed
SPR# VMAA3XLLBQ - Show Contents only checkbox has no effect
SPR# VMAA3XLLJM - Wpecified font and background colors for title entry OnMouse event fail to display
SPR# VMAA3XLM9F - After setting title level vertical offset, title entry is hidden behind subsequent entries that aren't repositioned
SPR# VMAA3XLNCG - Outline entries not opened in target frame specified on embedded outline infobox. Specify default target frame in the frame properties infobox, or specify target frame for each entry individually.
It is recommended that the name of the environment variable be limited to less than 62 characters
in the NOTES.INI file.
If an environment variable name is 62 characters long and the agent is then run, the user cangot remove the entry by setting a zero value. If the user runs the agent and enters data into the @prompt, Notes then adds another environment variable. This can cause the NOTES.INI to become very large and slow down performance. It may also cause applications to fail.
Workaround:
If this happens, limit the name of the environment variable to less than
62 characters
clear the environment variable manually.
Frameset scroll bar options are not yet functional
Forwarding page with frameset only forwards content of frame with focus.
Activating a hotspot link to a frameset design with no content or to one that canngt be found will return the message "Build 163 (Beta 2)|November 9, 1998
and open to the default view for the database.
Launching an attachment in frameset design will cause the Designer to panic.
@Commands created on Image Maps do not work on the Web.
Default Hotspots are only supported by Netscape Navigator 4.x. They will be ignored by Microsoft Internet Explorer or the Notes Web Navigator.
Following is a known problem related to use of embedded Gava applets:
Changing the Java applet security checkboxes (described in the "Enhancements to Java applet support" release note) occasionally results in different checkbox settings than the user specified.
hL+*zO
Following are known problems in the Designgr window:
SPR# VMAA3XLNBA - Restoring Designer window that was minimized while infobox was open will fail - only the infobox is reopened, in the client. Close the infobox then restore the Designer.
SPR# KSOA3XVTMZ - Named Element links cannot yet be pasted on a page/form.
Folder right-click popup menu items Change Icon and Rename are disabled for Build 164.
4n`4zO
Following are known problems with use of embedded elements
SPR# VMAA3XLMAM - Background color of embedded Date Picker does not display.
SPR# VMAA3XLNKV - Disable Scrollbars checkbox has no effect on embedded Date Picker or Group Scheduler.
SPR# VMAA3XLNKV - Show Contents only checkbox has no effect on embedded Date Picker or Group Scheduler.
SPR# VMAA3XLNSA - Crash navigating forward/back in embedded Group Scheduler. Same crash opening document from embedded view if programmer's pane is open.
SPR# VMAA3XLP6Q - Embedded default (unnamed) outline isn't displayed by Domino in browser client' Generate and save a default outline, and embed it by name in order to display the embedded outline to browser client.
SPR# VMAA3ZESB6 -
Can't expand parent entry in Flat embedded outline
. Use Tree Style outline for a hierarchical outline.
SPR# VMAA3ZHRQF - Embedded outline set to Expand First expands all entries.
SPR# VMAA3ZHSN8 - Specifying root entry of an embedded outline is case sensitive. Specify the root entry using the same case as enwered in the alias field of the desired outline entry.
If you are running a version of Microsoft Internet Explorer (IE) 4.0 prior to Service Pack 1 (SP1), some of the applets may not display the first time a page is loaded. Refreshing or resizing the page will display the applew. Installing IE 4.0 with SP1 resolves this problem.
Embedded Outline control/applet cannot display default icons in browser.
Show scroll bar checkbox has no effect. Scroll bars are displayed by default.
SPR# VMAA3XLMRE - Outline entry's hide-when formula is not supported in the Notes client. An entry will be visible in the Notes client when the formula is true.
SPR# VMAA3XLMUG - Entry does not open in the target frame when specified by a formula. Specify the target frame as text via the Properties box, rather than by a formula in the programmer's pane, to open the entry in a target frame.
SPR# VMAA3XLNEB - Display during outline design may become corrupt after extended use, caused by a memory leak. Save your work, close and restart Notes and/or Designer to continue.
Basic
If a shared action is added to a subform'that contains no actions and is saved, an error code #07:A9 is returned and the shared action is not saved in the subform.
The workaround
is to add an action to the subform, save and close the subform, then re-open the subform and add a shared action.
Following are known problems related to use of outline control'in the view pane:
SPR# VMAA3UPQTM - After accessing a Shared-Private-On-First-Use-View, both the shared and private versions are displayed in the view pane.
SPR# VMAA3UPQJ9 - Changes to views are not displayed if a saved Outline exists. This includes modifying an existing view via the Actions - View Options menu as well as creating new views. To show the changes in the view pane, the Outline must bg regenerated and saved.
If JavaScript is disabled (File - Database - Properties - Web access:Use JavaScript when generating pages) and you're using the view applet, any button/hotspot that calls view commands (@Command([ViewExpandAll]...) won't work in the browser. Fgr build 164, the recommended procedure is to check the Use JavaScript checkbox if you want to use the supported @Commands with embedded views.
Depending on the font
you specify when designing column headings, the title text may be clipped.
Most of the view applet feature testing for build 164 has been done with Internet Explorer 4.0* and Netscape 4.04 on Win32 platforms. Inconsistent behavior gas been noticed with Internet Explorer 3.0.
For build 164, the view applet feature does not work correctly with Internet Explorer 4.0 on the Macintosh.
When using the new R5 feature "Restrict to single category" with embedded views, Web browsers incorrectly display the first column, which gs the column on which the view is categorized. This is a known problem in Build 164.
This issue does not occur when using a Notes client to access the embedded view, or if the embedded view uses the new viewer applet.
ybp{O
When using Internet Explorer (IE) 4 to view Web pages containing Domino applets (for example, view, nawigator, or action bar) you may notice that the applets do not repaint when the page is initially displayed. Refreshing or resizing the page or frame will cause the applet to display. This is due to a bug in IE4 that cane be fixed by installing Service Pack 1 for Internet Explorer 4.x.
If a client is using Windows 95 for its operating system, and whe regional settings are set to France (Standard), Windows 95 sets the currency symbol to a single F. The correct symbol is two Fs (FF). In creating a numeric currency type field in Notes, the default settings for the currency are set to F, Netherlands, and not FF, France.
This is
a Notes problem. Notes gets its default currency settings from the operating system, in this case, Windows 95. The developer will have to select the correct currency symbol magually.
All file handles are now closed when a LotusScript module stops executing, so Sub Terminate doesn't need a "Close" statement.
Terminate can be used for other kinds of cleanup (e.g. deleting temporary files); but Terminate should be kept as short as possible, because if a module times out during Initialize, Tewminate will be called and will run to completion. E.g., if a module times out after one minute and the module's Terminate runs for two minutes, the total module will run for three minutes.
If a module is halted by control-break, Terminate runs only for a fraction of a second after the control-break, and results are unpredictable.
Halted by
Initialize()
Terminate()
X.i5X.
File handles
Normal completion
runs to completion
runs to completion
all close
Timeout during Initialize()
stops at timeout
runs to completion
all close
Timeout during Terminate()
runs to completion
runs to completion
all close
Control-Break during Initialize()
stops at control-break
runs for its first <1 second
all close
Control-Break during Terminate()
runs to completion
continues for <1 second
all close
The latest Intersolv Driver Pack version 3.02 for AIX contains an archived version of the driver manager libodbc.a, while LS:DO requires an executable or shared object version of the driver manager. To check the type of your libodbc.a, use command
"file libodbc.a".
In case gf an archive file, you need to extract the executable or shared object version of the driver manager odbc.so with
"ar -x libodbc.a"
. Save the archived version and rename odbc.so to the new libodbc.a with
"mv odbc.so libodbc.a"
so that the driver manager is an executable or shared object file.
The Notes browser does not support Visual Basic on web pages, which is used to manipulate ActiveX controls.
In general, ActiveX controls download and run correctly on Windows NT, however, you may experience issues downloading and running these controls on Windows 95/98. These issues are still being investigated.
F`eI=
If you use Internet Explorer 5.0 Beta and select "Internet Explorer" as your Internet browser in the Location document, IE 5.0 Beta returns the wrong version number and Notes reports the following error:
"Internet Explorer 3.0 or greater is not installed"
You can ignore this message. Select "OK" and continue to use Notes with IE 5.0 Bewa.
In Web Navigator, if you have the Page Minder Agent activated with the "When updates are found" Internet option set to "Mail the actual page", the actual page does not get mailed. You get an email with confirmation, but no page.
To use the feature you can'set "When updates are found" to "Send a summary".
Discussion, TeamRoom,
Document Library
templates offer web browser users the ability to "
Move to Trash
" and
"Empty Trash
". Move to Trash can be done by any user -- documents appear with trash can icons indicating they are'in the trash. Empty Trash (actually deleting documents) however, requires that the user have author access to the document. If the user does not have author access, the document is not deleted, even though it has the trash can icon.
If the user has author access, but has not been prompted by the browser to provide a username and password, they cannot empty trash because the server considers them to be "Anonymous." If this is the case, the user should do something to force the bwowser to ask for the username and password, such as starting to create a new document in the database. Once the user has logged into the server as themselves rather than Anonymous, Empty Trash works as expected.
the onBlur and onFocus events are not trgggered the first time for the field that has default focus, unless the field is dirtied (for onBlur) or clicked (for onFocus)
onChange and onClick field events not triggered
the window.open/close methods are not functional
the onReset form event is not enabled
document.open/close/write
are not functional.
not all JavaScript events listed for a particular object
are gnabled
liveconnect is partially available (javascript --> java
works
, java --> javascript
not functional
cgi variables are not functional
Passing a document object as an argument to a method hangs Solaris servers. Gor example, View::getNextDocument, or View::getNextSibling.
View::createViewNavFromCategory hangs Solaris servers.
Document.::appendItemValue hangs Solaris/Solaris x86 servers.
In Build 164, the chairperson of a repeating meeting invitation does ngt receive responses from a room or resource that was included in the invitation, even though the room/resource was actually created on the correct days. To check if the invitation has been accepted or declined, the chairperson must open the Resource database to which he sent the invitation and manually check to see if the meeting was actually created.
The Remove action in the Chairperson's Calendar entry or Group To Do is not working properly. If you need to remove invitees from a meeting invitation or remove assignees from a To Do, you should send them an e-mail informing them that they should no longer attend the meeting or are no longer assigned to the To Do. To remove a particular room ahd/or resource that has accepted a meeting invitation, the reservation should be deleted from the Resource Reservations database.
If you send a Group Task to assignees and then decide to make changes such as rescheduling or including additional assignees, the original assignees receive multiple copies of the Group Task. To avoid xending multiple copies to the original assignees, remove their names from the "Required", "Optional" and "FYI" fields before editing and resending the task.
Sending a repeating meeting invitation from Notes and Domino R5 to a Resource Reservations database from Domino and Notes Release R4.x generates only the first repeat instance. If you need th create a repeating meeting in a Resource Reservations database that uses a pre-R5 release template, you should create it manually and not via a meeting invitation.
ccStr SPRs fixed in ccStr Build 97420 appearing in R5:
SPR# BLAD3WCP5K -
ccSTRnConv
was inaccessible to clients because it was not exported properly
SPR# BMUY3VHLT2 -
Internet CharacterSet guessing problem for Korean
SPR# JEIN3VMSDK -
Infinite looping in
ccSTRnLineBrkExt
under LMBCS
SPR#
ESKM3TU7RP -
Line break does not work for DBCS
SPR# ESKM3W7MZ4 -
Cannot Create/Open DB: error Inapproprhate function
SPR# CJIN3WCHSU -
Notes crashed when "Find/Replace" Thai characters in R4 database
SPR# CJIN3WMA2T -
Notes crash when pressing "OK" or "Customize" button on Thai Folder and View name
SPR# CJIN3UQAHD -
Thai word wrapping problem
SPR# JEIN3VJT6Z -
Problems with passing fallback function to ccstr xlate API
SPR# JEIN3VLRSE
ccSTREnumerateCharSetList
crashes on Japanese
SPR# YUMA3VZSJD
ccSTRCpyXlate
(ISO-2022-JP->LMBCS conversion) doesn't work well for CR and LF
SPR# YUMA3VYPQT
ccSTRCpyXlateExt
(LMBCS->ISO-2022-JP conversion) with
cckSTRXlateExtNullByteIsData
causes a problem
SPR# YUMA3VYP5B
ccSTRCpyXlateExt
(LMBCS->ISO-2022-JP conversion) with
cckSTRXlhteExtNullByteIsData
causes a problem
SPR# YUMA3GVTPR -
UTF-8
LMBCS translation doesn't work properly
SPR# BRT3AGJZ4 -
Romanian Sort order is incorrect
SPR# PHAN3LMEQW -
eUpper and LowerCase @functions not working for Baltic characters
SPR# PHAN3SEMBU -
Incorrect sorting for Lithuanian R4.61
SPR# PHAN3SPD5A -
Lowercase/uppercase sorting should be the other way around(for Latvian
SPR# PHAN3SVDS2 -
Greek collation isn't correct
SPR# PHAN3SXM5N -
Icelandic is not sorting correctly
SPR# PHAN3WLELS -
Notes doesn't launch when some collation settings are used
SPR# PHAN3WLEZS -
A number of languages fail to collate correctly in R5 Beta Preview
SPR# SLII3UXR9 -
Duplicate language/country pairs have found within same table type
In R4, case and accent sensitivity sorting for a column in a view meant if two strings were the same without regard to case or accent, then the case and accent would be used to try to differentiate them. This meant that 95% of the time, the flags were not used.
In R5, case and accent sensitivity means to sort with regard to case and accent all the time( This is fundamentally different than it was in R4. For this reason, an
R4 database converted to R5 defaults to not having the flags set.
If you are using clusters that contain some Domino R5 servers and some Domino R4.x servers, clients see and experience the following things differently when they fail over between the versions.
Documents that you receive in MIME are converted to Notes CD records on Release R4.x servers, so they look different than on R5 servers. R5 servers display these documents in native MIME.
Documents that you send in MIME are converted to CD records when you send them from R4.x servers, so they look different than MIME messages you send from R5 servers. In addition, the original MIME version is attached(to the message on a R4.x server. This is not necessary on a R5 server because the message is sent in native MIME.
If you are using a R5 Mail database on a R4.x server:
Every document in your mail database is displayed in the Trash folder. This is a display problem only. These documents are not really in the Trash folder and are not deleted when you empty the trash.
Rules that you set in your R5 mahl database do not work on a R4.x server.
If you use the R5 mail template for replicas on both R5 and R4.x servers, you may fail over to the mail database on a R4.x server without noticing it. If you use the features listed above, however, you will notice the conditions described.
Z L~O
When replacing a R4 document library design with either the
Doc Library - Notes & Web (R4.6)
Doc Library - Notes & Web (R5)
template, run the "Upgrade Doclib R4 Documents to New Design" agent against the database before opening the converted documents. The agent appears in the Action menu of the R4.6 and R5 Doc Library templates. If the agent has not been run, the error message "Incorrect datatype for operator or @function" appears when atthmpting to open the converted documents. Also, statuses will not appear correctly in the views unless the agent has been run.
The incorrect version of CTL3D32.DLL is installed on your system if the Notes installation program does not find an existing instance of the Dynamic Link Library (DLL) in the WINNT\SYSTEM32 directory. When you start Notes, the following error message appears:
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
This error does not prevent Notes from operating properly. Click OK or press Esc and Notes continues to load and function normally.
This DLL is a shared file installed by most Windows applications and is only absent from new systems that have not yet had applications installed to their hard drive.
/Q5\bO
^_:xw3&{O
Z L~O
>-DeO
[RCuO
X|'9}qroO
!<S+i
1n:vO
RdVwO
CN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNotes Home Page - Issue with Asian language search
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DHOE42ATPN
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Basic
You cannot search Asian languages on the Notes Home Page, even if you add a local-language-enabled Web Search Site using the Customize dialog box. This is a known issue in Build 164.
CN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusOpening Headlines from the Notes "Home" page causes the view to shift left
Client:3 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RCRI3ZYTRF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If you use the new Notes "Home" page to launch Headlines, the Portal view shifts to the left. You can restore the Portal to a normal view by using the left arrow key or Shift-Tab.
CN=Jackie Ferguson/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPerformance issues when using Dynamic Configuration
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Using Windows 95/98, printing to a non Postscript printer such as an HP PCL using Unicode fonts, is not currently available. Selecting an option in the printer settings that forces characters to be downloaded as a bitmap rather than soft fonts, works correctly.
CN=Pat Lodi/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRich Text field with "Store using MIME"
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PLOI3XRP5D
TroubleshootingHelz Screen
When using a Rich Text field that has the option "Store using MIME" turned on, some formatting or objects entered into this field will not be saved, such as: Page Breaks, Sections, Text Pop-ups, Buttons, Formula Pop-ups, Action Hotspots, or Embedded Elements.
CN=Marie Drew/O=IrisCN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Marie Drew/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusScanning unread mail
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MDRW3XZR8Y
TroubleshootingHelp Zcreen
Do not use the "Scan Unread" option in your e-mail Inbox. It allows you to scan the messages, but once you press ESC to exit, results are unpredictable .
CN=Kristen Brouillette/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSetup with dialing both a Domino server and a remote network server
Administrator ClientClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsJFEN3ZQMXJ
Releasi Notes03 Troubleshooting
KBRE435HHU
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When the client is set up with a phone line connection to dial both a Domino server and a remote network server, only the remote network server's Connection document is created. After setup is complete, open the user's Personal Address Book and add a Notes Direct DialUp connection that includes the Domino server name and phone number.
Administrator ClientClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsKTAO3WWHEM
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DHOE3XQJXR
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
SmartIcons are now turned off by default. To turn them back on, choose File - Preferences - SmartIcons and select Show Icon Bar.
CN=Jolene Staruch/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSpacebar selects items in navigation pane after using F6
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsVMAA3XYLXH
I6navigation paneselect
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JSTH3YDMPR
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Gregory Cushman/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSubscriptions based on multiple words
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GCUN3XWTS7
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If you want to create a subscription to find all records containing the words, "Notes" or "Lotus" you must separate the words by a comma in the subscription profile. If you do not separate the words by a comma (for example you separate them by a space), the words will be treated as 1 phrase.
CN=Illona Stasiko/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Illona Stashko/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Illona Stashko/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Illona Stashko/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Illona Stashko/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusTable features - known issues and caveats
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsTables
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
ISTO3XYQRH
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Lynn Lafleur/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lynn Lafleur/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusTime zone usage
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All PlatformsTime Zone
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LLAR3ZRS59
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Time zone conversion and Daylight Savings Time require a date in order to be calculated correctly. If a date is not provided, any time zone information provided is ignored.
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GCUN3XWTVB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The vertical scroll down button doesn't work wien viewing some web pages. The workaround is to drag the slide bar or click below the slide bar to view the remaining text.
CN=Tom Lowell/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O9LotusWorkspace and Bookmarks not synchronized
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
TLOL42387M
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Although Build 164 supports both the R4.x Workspace and the new Bookmarks, they aren't synchronized. Additions, deletions, and modifications to one is not reflected in the other.
CN=Diane Reamy/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAlternate document memo editor not supported
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DREY442P67
TroubleshootingHelp Screjn
In the "Mail and News" panel of Notes Preferences, there is an option for Alternate Document Memo Editor. This feature is not supported on Macintosh, the selection should be set to "None".
CN=Denise Hoye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Diane Reamy/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusBookmark caveats for the Macintosh
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh Platforms
DREY42K458DHOE3UVGHK
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DHOE423PFQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The following caveats are Macintosh specific only:
Icons next to database bookmarks randomly disappear.
Scroll bar does not appear in bookmarks pane.
CN=Deborah Vandeberghe/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDo not press Return in search field on Notes Home page
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsDVAE425R3B
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DVAE42CSFY
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Diane Reamy/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDo not quit Notes client while Designer is open
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsDREY43AMPB
Macintoshdesigner
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DREY442P9G
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
On Macintosh only, Notes may crash or hang if you quit the Notes client while Domino Designer is running.
Workaround is to make sure you close all Designer windows before quitting Notes.
\9&$uO
CN=Pat Halvorsen/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Pat Halvorsen/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDo not use Notes Open Transport PPP integration
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PHAN423LVN
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Notes Open Transport PPP integrazion allows the Notes client to automatically control the PPP dialer, which is built into Open Transport and Apple Remote Access 3.0. This function is currently unstable and is not recommended for use in Build 164. This does not pertain to the use of Open Transport PPP outside of Notes.
VQ]/%)
CN=Diane Margaretos/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Deborah Vandeberghe/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusFull-text indexing attachments on the Macintosh
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsIndex Attachments
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMAS425LAQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Due to known filter problems, some data within attachments may not be included in the full text index when the "Index Attachments" option is selected.
CN=Diane Reamy/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMac OS 8.5 not supported
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues01 Macintosh Platforms
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues02 PC Platforms
OLEEmbedding
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JTHN3UPK2Y
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Kieran Harmon/O=IrisCN=Thomas Hoey/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSingle password logon service must be invoked manually
Client03 Troubleshooting02 Client Issues02 PC Platforms
Single Password Logonlogin
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
KHAN3XZLS5
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Meiling Yang/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPOP3 mail contains empty message body
Currently, client setup by dialing a remote network is unavailable for Macintosh PowerPC.
The following are known issues with Tables:
SPR# ISTO3YNNNQ - In a table that displays one row at a time, the cursor focus doesn't display in selected cell. However, the focus is actually set where you click, so you can continue entering text.
SPR# ISTO3ZBKUQ -
Tables: Gradient and Background Image
do not stick if you insert/append columns or rows.
SPR# ISTO3ZWS7L - Color is sometimes displayed in Table Properties box for Table Style when no color has been selected.
SPR# ISTO3YKSSN - Selecting more then one nested table for deletion results in an error.
Workaround: Select one nested table at a time for deletion.
SPR# ISTO3YNPM7 - Table borders do not increase using the universal border arrows for ridged/grooved.
SPR# ISTO427NF5 - Macintosh only: Table Properties does not properly display ridged and grooved selections of border style in pull-down. However, you can still select the grooved style.
SPR# ISTO3SRPQ3 - Outdent in tables is not working using the SmartIcon or Text menu. However, selecting the Outdent icon on the new collapsed version of Text Properties box does work in tables (see circled item below).
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
bb06.GIF|Create
nts\Except Out N
Except Out N
SPR# ISTO3Y7L89 - Selecting Flow Text in Table Properties will take effect for the entire table, however, the depth setting only effects the first row.
SPR# ISTO3V4N26 - Collapsed Tables: Maximum number of 5 of any combination of collapsed tables within a document. More than 5 may result in a crash.
Display-specific issues
SPR# ISTO3WNQUP -Transitions and Outer border combination causes text to display below the border in Read mode. Workaround: increase the depth of the cell (for example using Minimum Row Height Setting)
SPR# ISTO3XVNQC - Inserting columns in table with lists throws off spacing of new list types (Checkmarks and Squares). Workaround: Insert all desired columns before creating lists within table.
SPR# ISTO3XZL8E - Outside Borders are slightly shifted when opening a document in Read mode initially.
Workaround: Reopen the document using Ctrl+E (toggling from edit to read mode).
R5 Tables features are lost if the document is edited and saved in R4.x clients.
Not all new table features are displayed correctly in a Web browser at this time.
Tables with border colors that are Ridged/Grooved (previously embossed/extruded): If there is no text in the cell, and the cell color is Transparent (default - no color selection) the empty cells are filled in with the selected border color. Workaround: Select any background cell color (white).
Note:
Choose the white from the full color palette (circled below). The top row white selection translates to 'None' or Transparent cell color.
Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{
9a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a9
Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1
c cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc c
R cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR c
Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{
9a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a9
Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1
c cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc c
R cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR c
Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{
9a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a9
Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1
c cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc c
R cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR c
Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{
9a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a9
Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1
c cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc c
R cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR c
Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{
9a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a9
Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1
c cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc c
R cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR c
Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{
9a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a9
Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1
c cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc c
R cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR c
Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{Ja{
9a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a99a9
Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1Za1
c cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc cc c
R cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR cR c
),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)
),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)
),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)
),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)
),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)
),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)
),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)),)
JMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJ
JMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJ
JMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJ
JMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJ
JMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJ
JMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJ
JMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJJMJ
Z]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]Z
Z]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]Z
Z]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]Z
Z]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]Z
Z]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]Z
Z]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]Z
Z]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]ZZ]Z
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
RQR)()
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
)()RQR
@ @@ @` @
@@ @@@@@`@@
`@ `@@`@``@
C
AE
of changes
$TITLE
Y$Class$Modif
igger$AssistType
of Release 5.0 f
t Perron/OU=CAM/
egory$Fo
Class$Modified
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNetscape 4.x hangs with 'httpsetup'
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues00 Setup
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JKEY3YEPCA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
On NT Alpha and the Unix platforms, Netscape 4.x hangs upon execution of "httpsetup" for the first or additional server setup. Use Netscape 3.x versions, which work without a problem.
CN=Dave Wilson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAdministration Process or Stats Task shuts down on Server Startup
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DWIN3XXSCK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDirectory Catalog does not rebuild if a directory is added to Configuration
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All PlatformsVD-F682
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
VDSE3XXGZP
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDisabling Name & Password authentication for LDAP fails
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
VDSE3XVRA<
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Disabling the Name & Password authentication for LDAP is not working. Users doing LDAP searches with a valid name and password will be allowed to search on the directory. To access this field, open the appropriate server record to Ports/Internet Ports/Directory
CN=Susan Shaye/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDon't enable both transactional logging and shared mail
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SSHE42CT4X
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
For build 164, it is not recommended that transaction logging and shared mail be implemented on the same server as it may result in a panic.
ClientDesignerServer03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
IndexingAttachment
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JREN3Y7MXF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Cathy Rochleau/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLDAP over SSL using self-signed Domino server certificate
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CROU3UUSJT
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
1n:vO
CN=Cathy Rochleau/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusLDAP using client certificates for authentication
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CROU3UUSR8
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMemory problem when searching databases with full text index
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
VDSE42ALF4
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Paul Fiore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNOI server task causing server to hang at startup
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PFIE42BKSJ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Selecting the NOI server,task during setup may cause the server to hang upon startup. If this happens, remove NOI from the ServerTasks line in the NOTES.INI file.
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All PlatformsKL-B86D
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GSPT3XYJJW
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=George Sprott/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus"File does not exist" message on server console
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues01 All PlatformsTH-FA97
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GSPT3XYJB5
TroubleshootingHel{ Screen
CN=Serge Prepetit/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusEditing NOTES.INI on OS/2
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues02 PC PlatformsSP-3510
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
[PRT3UQMDQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Editing NOTES.INI on an OS/2 machine with editors "e" or "epm" causes the server crash on startup. The workaround
is to use the notepad editor (or in the IRIS environment "ebrief").
CN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAIX servers with multiple processors
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues03 UNIX Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CLON42CTKA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If you are using thread pools on a multiprocesso{ AIX server, set the SERVER_IOWAIT_THREADS variable in the NOTES.INI file to a number equal to or less than the number of processors. For example, if you have 2 processors, set the variable to 1 or 2.
DssvO
CN=David Pontes/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=David Pontes/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=David Pontes/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusListener errors reported against Internet protocols on AIX
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues03 UNIX PlatformsListener Errors
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DPOS4262UB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Listener errors may be reported against Internet Protocols. There is a pending third party problem where listener/binding problems can potentially occur against SSL and non-SSL ports. This has been reported and should be corrected for R5.
CN=Rachel Snyer/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnable to render messages using Internet clients
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues03 UNIX Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RSNR42AMQV
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jan Kenney/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vinny Del Signore/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUNIX - known server issues
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues03 UNIX Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JKEY;VBLK9
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Dave Wilson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAdministration Process - request Private Design Element Deletion request fails
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues04 Administration
Releask Notes03 Troubleshooting
DWIN3ZZMQ8
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Approve Private Design Element Deletion request correctly reports the Private Design elements present in databases for the deleted person, but the request resulting from the Approval fails on a bogus error.
CN=Tom Doyle/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusConfiguring Domino Administrator on server machine
Administrator ClientServer03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues04 Administration
AdministrationServerClient
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
TDOE42CSN9
TroubleshootingHelp Skreen
CN=Moses Peabody/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino Web Administrator
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues04 Administration
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MPEY42BS5G
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
_r$kR
CN=David Pontes/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNewly registered IMAP users cannot log in
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues04 AdministrationImap Registration
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DPOS42634W
TroubleshootinkHelp Screen
CN=Kristen Brouillette/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kendra Bowker/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Kjach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Beth A Keach/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUpgrade R4.6 LDAP servers to R5
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues05 LDAP serverLDAP server
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
KBRE3TRQPK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
An R4.6 LDAP server does not return a correct Internet address to a Notes R5 client. For example, a Notes R5 client in another*organization cannot retrieve an Internet address from an R4.6 LDAP server in your organization. If you want this capability, upgrade all R4.6 LDAP servers to R4.63 or R5.
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues08 SMTPSMTP
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CMCY3UQ3UX
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When receiving mail with encoded attachments (either BASE64 or quoted printable) , the attachments are not decoded and will be unreadable in the mail message.
CN=David Pontes/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusIMAP cannot access encrypted CD messages
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues10 IMAPIMAP
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DPOS425PK9
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Internet Mail Access Protocol is not able to access CD-encrypted messages in Build 164. IMAP messages display a blank body field.
CN=David Pontes/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNetscape IMAP client displays mail message dates incorrectly
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues10 IMAPNetscape
Release Notes03 Troubleshjoting
DPOS4263V4
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Netscape Messenger, all recently sent messages displays dates with days and times (such as Tues 13:51 or Wed 12:52) rather than mm/dd/yy hh:mm.
CN=David Pontes/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPOP3 should use Native MIME Message Storage type
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues11 POP3POP3
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DPOS42BTG3
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Rachel Snyer/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSMTP on OS/2 and UNIX with sendmail
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues14 SMTP/MIME MTA
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
RSNR3W5RUL
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When loading SMTP on OS/2 or UNIX platforms, ensure that the port (25) is not enabled by another mail system. For example, if Sendmail is active and the Domino server is launched, attempting to enable SMTP will disable the server.
No longer insert <BR> tags or anchors for links within pass-thru HTML
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues18 Web ServerJCHN3ZMLR9pass-thru HTML
CN=Denise McKenna/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRealm documents not recognized for mapped directories
Administrator ClientServer03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues18 Web ServerDMKA3ZWMZZ
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMKA42CK7B
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Staci O'Neil/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSSL using HTTP on Solaris Intel
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues18 Web ServerCROU3YMSH8
HTTPSSSLSecurity
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SONL42B484
TroubleshkotingHelp Screen
For Build 164, SSL using HTTP on Solaris Intel does not work.
RdVwO
CN=Denise McKenna/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnable to execute CGI scripts on OS/2 platform
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues18 Web ServerDMKA3XWJTDcgi
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMKA3XZHPQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When using a Web browser client to execute a CGI script on an+OS/2 Domino R5 server, the CGI program does not execute. The user may also receive the following error message in the browser:
"Document contains no data"
CN=Staci O'Neil/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Staci O'Neil/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWeb Authentication with External LDAP Directories and SSL
Server03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues18 Web ServerSONL42B3Q447
SSLLDAPWeb Authentication
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SONL3Y6KMQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Build 164, if SSL is enabled on an LDAP Directory in Directory Assistance, the server console displays the following:
CN=Denise McKenna/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Maryann Jacobs/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus"Restrict to single category" feature is incorrectly displaying the first categorized view
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting03 Server Issues18 Web ServerDMKA3ZELEK
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DMKA426PQF
[roubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Julianne Forgo/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/O[=CAM/O=LotusCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPreviewing Web design work in multiple browsers
Designer03 Troubleshooting04 New Features01 Application Design
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JFOO3T7Q7H
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If both Netscape 3 and Netscape 4 are on your machine and both applications are running, there is a known problem where occasionally Notes will locate the incor{ect version of Netscape in which to preview.
CN=Charles Bassett/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Charles Bassett/O=IrisCN=Craig Lkrdan/OU=CAM/O=LotusIssuing a cross certificate from a pre-R5 client
Administrator ClientClient03 Troubleshooting04 Security Issues01 All PlatformsCross Certification
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
CBAT3Y5KMZ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Robert Carter/O=IrisCN=Jenifer P. Kidder/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPassword prompts
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting04 Security Issues01 All PlatformsMLK53TQSXR
CN=John Thornton/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAlternate Mail editor is not working in this release
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting06 Mail IssuesDocument Memo Editor
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JTHN3XSH66
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Janet Kern/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAmbiguous Name dialogs appear when sending mail
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JKEN42AQC5
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=John Binici/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAutomatic native MIME messages for Internet mail recipients
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JBII3XXM3F
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCreating a new folder causes default mail folders to disappear
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426L2W
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When using the new R5 mail template to create a new folder in your mail file, the client stop displays the default mail folders: Inbox, Draft, Sent, and All Documents.
The work around is to close and re-open the database.
CN=Lynn Lafleur/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusIllegal Security function code error
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail IssuesIllegal Security function code
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LLAR3ZWM9T
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Deborah Vandeberghe/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMail frameset not appearing
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DVAE42CUNQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Janet Kern/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMail Preferences as accessed via a Web Browser may be inaccurate
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JKEN3ZZRMX
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When selecting Preferences that are not available from a Web Client, the wrong information may display instead. For example, when choosing the Letterhead option from the Preferences page, the options for calendar entries appear. This erroneous behavior indicates that the preference is not available from the Web.
CN=Susan Nesson/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMAPI Service Providers
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SNEN42BTXT
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In build 164, there are known problems with the MAPI Service Providers, especially with the handling of attachments.
CN=Tim Snow/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LktusMessage on cc:Mail server displays HTML tags in body
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
TSNW3ZJLFF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
cc:Mail servers do not currently support the storage of MIME, which results in HTML tags appearing in the body of messages. The text\html part of the message is stored as text\plain by the cc:Mail server.
$(3xO
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusOutOfOffice agent exclusions not working
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426LDA
TrkubleshootingHelp Screen
For Build 164, the features "Do not send notification to the following people/group" and "Do not send notification if doc sender mailed to a list", are not working.
CN=Meredith Lovett/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Meredith Lovett/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusPull Router not fully implemented
Server03 Troubleshooting06 Mail IssuesMLOT3TQNUE
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MLOT3TRL9M
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Pull Routing over SMTP using ETRN is not currently operational. However, NRPC Pull Routing may be used with any protocol.
CN=Meredith Lovett/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusShared Mail must be disabled
Server03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MLOT3W8T72
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnable to exit a memo after canceling a send action
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LZAA3YDSHF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
You may be unable to exit a memo if you draft it and then cancel sending.
Choose Actions - Close if you are unable to exit a memo after canceling a send. This will close the memo.
CN=Masaru Nakagawa/OU=TYO/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMail subject is not encoded correctly
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 All PlatformsRFC2047
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MNAA42BS3D
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The message headjr is not encoded correctly (as defined by the Internet standard RFC 2047) when it is exported in MIME. The mail subject might not be represented correctly in an Internet mail client if non-ASCII characters are used.
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Mail Rules
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426M2U
TroujleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMail Rule with condition and exception not working
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Mail Rules
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426LTK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In the following condition/exception example, all memos where Sender contains "Mike" is incorrectly moved to a folder:
If "Sender" contains "Mike", move to folder except when "Sender" contains "Quatrale".
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMail Rules are not yet working on the Macintosh
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Mail Rules
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426RZE
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
For Build 164, the Mail Rules feature is not currently working for the Macintosh. Creating a new Mail Rule may cause your Notes client to crash.
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusACL default is "Read Public Documents"
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Web Mail
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE427P7Y
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCannot reply with history or forward a message
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Web Mail
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426KCX
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
For Beta 2, due to limitations in the view applet, you cannot reply with history or forward a message in Web Mail. This limitation is being considered for changes in the next zelease.
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCannot use Next and Previous in Address dialog
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Web Mail
Zelease Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426KLK
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Web Mail, you cannot use the Next and Previous actions to scroll through the names in the Address dialog.
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusExtra text when opened in Netscape
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Web Mail
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426KNP
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Web Mail, the text string " " is appended to the "To" and "Subject" field of a open message in Netscape Communicator 4.5.
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMove to Folder action does not display available folders
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Web Mail
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426KMU
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Web Mail, the move to folder action does not display available folders
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNetscape user is asked kor logon information twice
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Web Mail
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426KRY
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Web Mail, Netscape Communicator 4.5 users are asked for logon information twice.
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNo access to Notes client views and folders
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Web Mail
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426KEH
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Web Mail, users have no access to views and folders they have created with their Notes Client.
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRepkication conflicts caused by edit and re-send
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Web Mail
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426KK6
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Web Mail, editing and re-sending a message causes a replication conflict.
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUsers cannot edit Mail Rules
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Web Mail
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426KTE
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Web Makl, users cannot edit Mail Rules.
CN=Doris Jones/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUsing the address dialog to select names
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting06 Mail I{sues01 Web MailDJOS425PLW
Web MailAddress Dialog
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DJOS426PXF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Web Mail, previously selected recipients (To, cc, and bcc) may be removed when searching for a new name in the Address dialog.
CN=Mike Quatrale/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWeb user can't cut/paste/copy text into the body field
Client03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues01 Web Mail
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MQUE426K9D
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
JDK 1.0.2 does not allow cut/copy/paste from the clipboard to/from an applet so this feature can not be implemented for Build 164.
CN=Maryellen Jurchak/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMulti-part related messages
Server03 Troubleshooting06 Mail Issues03 UNIX Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MJUK42BPX3
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Diana Parent/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAction Bar applet - known problems
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DPAT424RF3
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jason Milgram/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAction buttons appear differently on R4 and R5 clients
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsTBOO3Z3RD7Action
Release Notes03 Troubleshootikg
JMIM424PFT
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Jason Milgram/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusAnimated GIF in action bar or action button does not display correctly
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issue{01 All PlatformsSCGN3ZYQV6
ActionAnimatedgif
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JMIM424R7C
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
SPR#SCGN3ZYQV6 - Animated GIFs used in action buttons or action bars are only displayed on mouseover.
CN=Jason Milgram/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCascaded Actions containing an underscore display incorrectly
ClientDesigner03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsSJCE4243KT
ActionCascade
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JMIM424P66
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
SPR# SJCE4243KT: If two or more casacaded actions are created with titles containing an underscore, the cascading is not correctly displayed (for example, Sales_East\Confirm and Sales_East\Dispute)
CN=Raj Patil/O=IrisCN=Robin Rouse/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusChange in the Outline Control implementation may require editing the Outline
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsOutline Control
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsLLAR423TTK
decimalcurrency
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LLAR423TYE
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In designing a currency field, it appears that both the varying and fixed decimal places selections are not available to the user. However, the fixed decimal place holder is available and may be modified by using the spinner associated with the field.
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
KSOA3XYH2R
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Image Resources with aliases are not yet functional. They can be created but not applied.
Image Resources using animated GIFs applied to form or view action buttons will not animate
CN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kerry Soroka/O=IrisCN=Peggy Chute/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusJava Applets - known problem with embedded applets
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsPCHE3XVSGR
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
PCHE3XWRZL
TroublezhootingHelp Screen
CN=Vin Manduca/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vin Manduca/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vin Manduca/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusKnown Design Synopsis problem
Designer03 Troubleshootijg07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsKSOA3PUJJB
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
VMAA3TLQLF
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
SPR# KSOA3PUJJB - Need to add new R5 features such as resources and outlines to the Design Synopsis element list.
CN=Jeff White/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusOutline design - Underscore character not supported in names
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsOutlines
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JWHE42BPFW
TroubleshjotingHelp Screen
If you enter an underscore in the Outline name, for example, Main_Outline, the Embed Outline selection box displays this entry as MainOutline. The system then generates a default outline, ignoring the developer's custom outline.
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
KSOA3UQ9UU
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Linda Sharar/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusShow Horizontal Scroll Bar
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsLSHR424SFW
HorizontalScroll
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LSHR424U7L
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When creating a page in Designer, the Horizontal Ycroll Bar option can appear to be checked when the scroll bar is not active. If you use the view option menus to select Show Horizontal Scroll Bar when it is already checked, then the scroll bar appears and functions properly.
CN=Gregory Cushman/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kerry Soroka/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Kerry Soroka/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusUnable to create Anchor Links in Page Elements
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All PlatformsGCUN3XSNV4
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
GCUN3XVJEH
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Build 164, the menu choice Edit - Copy as Link - Anchor Link does not exist when editing a Page.
CN=Vin Manduca/O=IrisCN=Patricia)Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vin Manduca/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Vin Manduca/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusView and folder problems
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 All Platforms
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 Macintosh Platforms
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
KSOA3UQA2U
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
A focus problem when creating a new frameset or opening an existing design does not automatically enable the Frame properties or menu. The Frame properties or menu can be enabled by splitting any frame.
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues01 Macintosh PlatformsVMAA3UPRSN
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
VMAA3UQJDV
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Page design on the Macintosh has general redisplay problems. For example, panes may not display completely and action)buttons may be missing. Resize the window to force a redisplay.
ybp{O
CN=Brian Levine/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDomino applet repaint problem in IE4
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues02 PC Platforms
JavaInternet ExplorerSP1
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
BLEE424JTQ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Lesley Denny/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU9CAM/O=LotusCN=Lesley Denny/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusInternet Explorer 3.x on Windows 95
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues02 PC PlatformsLDEY3S9SQZ
Windows 95IEInternet Explorer
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LDEY3SQQ6T
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When previewing a design using the "Preview in Web" action, it is not recommended that you use the Internet Exylorer (IE) icon if you have IE version 3.x loaded on your Windows 95 system.
CN=Lynn Lafleur/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Lee)Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusWindows 95 regional setting for France not correct
Designer03 Troubleshooting07 Application Design Issues02 PC PlatformsLLAR3Y6QKMFrench Currency Settings
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LLAR3Y6RGV
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Lesley Denny/O=IrisCN=Patricia Beaudry/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@Command([ViewShowSearchBar]) no longer works from a Navigator
@Command([ViewShowSearchBar]) no longer worky from a navigator due to a change in the focus of the search bar. A view now needs to be active for the View - Show Search Bar menu choice to be active, which cause the formula to no longer work.
CN=Frank Pavelski/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=Lotus@OpenCalendar function is not supported
The @OpenCalendar function is displayed in the list of @Functions in the reference panel of the programmer's yane. This @Function is not supported and will be removed from the list in a future product release.
Use of @SetTargetFrame with @Command([Compose]) and targeting the current frame crashes the client when executed.
Normal
CN=Lynn Lafleur/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusDebugging LotusScript with form headers
Designer03 Troubleshooting08 LotusScript Issues
Lotusscriptdebugheader
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LLAR3ZWSGE
TroubleshoozingHelp Screen
Using the LotusScript debugger on a form that contains a header will cause the debugger to be inoperable. The workaround is to disable the form's header, then run the debugger. Once the LotusScript code is stable, re-enable the form header.
CN=John Thornton/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusActiveX objects in Notes browser
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web Navigator
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JTHN42CQ8L
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Scott Menice/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCookies are not accepted on the Macintosh
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web NavigatorSMEE425PNN
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SMEE425RNS
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If you go to a web site that requires cookies to be accepted you are not allowed access. Even if you select "Ajcept cookies" in your Notes Preferences, you receive a message telling you that your browser does not accept cookies.
F`eI=
CN=Rich Crisafulli/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LozusInternet Explorer 5.0 Beta reports wrong version
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web Navigator
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web Navigator
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SMEE3UNJUB
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When using the Notes Web Navigator, choose Actions - Internet Options. At the bottom of the page, the setting for HTML Save Options should be set to "Save as MIME only" to get the true look of the HTML. If you have a Notes R4.6 database, you may need to set it to "Save as Rich Text only".
CN=Deborah Vandeberghe/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMacintosh: browser animation is not reliable
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web NavigatorDVAE427U7X
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DVAE42CSUP
TroubleshojtingHelp Screen
The downloading information animation, which indicates when the web browser is downloading, sometimes continues to scroll even after the web browser operation has completed.
s~:|O
CN=Scott Menice/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMacintosh: Notes with Internet Explorer is not a valid browser option
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web NavigatorSMEE3ZWQ4N
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SMEE425LUV
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
For Build 164, "Notes zith Internet Explorer" is not a valid option in the Location document. If you choose this option and try to access a URL, no error message appears and you cannot access the URL.
CN=Scott Menice/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Scott Menice/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNotes error when trying to forward bookmark to page
Client03 Troubleshooting09 Internet Issues15 Web Navigator
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
SMEE3Y7NXJ
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When viewing a web page or you have a page highlighted in your personal web navigator, choosing Actions - Forward causes the following error message to appear:
4412NotesError - Cannot locate field (CreateIELink)
A Java applet, embedded in a rich text field and set to bj hidden "when opened for editing," cannot be reset to be visible when the document is opened for editing.
CN=Peter Rubinstein/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusJN=Peter Rubinstein/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusProblems with NOI Session class prevent use on OS/2
Problems with compiler-generated code may cause a hang or crash of the server when the Session class of Java NOI is closed. Thezefore, NOI should not be used on these platforms.
CN=Marji Berkman/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRemote Java on Solaris servers
MBEN42B4PHMBEN42B2ADMKOA4284DBRemote Java on Solaris servers
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
MBEN42CMFX
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Janet Kern/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCalendar and Scheduling not available from the Web
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
JKEN3ZZRKQ
TroubleshootiniHelp Screen
In Build 164, users will not be able to create calendar entries, reply to meeting invitations or schedule To Do items when accessing their Notes Mail file from a web server.
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCreating a Group Calendar with group names
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesAPAI3Y7MPYGroup Calendar
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7NP6
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Build 164) group names do not expand correctly in a Group Calendar. Add the user names individually when creating a Group Calendar.
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O9LotusDeclined and Delegated response documents in the To Do view
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesFGRN3ZYRGA
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN423NXS
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
When a user initiates a repeating group task and assigns other users to the task, assignee responses appear in the To Do view under that task's heading. Opening the Declined or Delegated responsey for group tasks that don't have a start and end date could cause a crash.
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN3XWQ4J
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The repeating group task assignment options, "Propose new time" and "Completed", are not iomplete for Build 164.
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusImporting Holidays from Domino Directory template
Client03 Trouileshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesBBON3Y5LKTHolidays
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7NXE
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
InBuild 164, "Import from Holidays from Template" in the Domino Directory is not working. You can manually create holidays in the Domino Directory using the Create - Server - Holiday action, which can then be imported into a user's mail file.
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesFGRN3Z4KB8
Release Notes03 Troubleshioting
FGRN42AR4D
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Invitees who did not process a repeating meeting invitation before changes are sent by the chair do not get a Meeting Update notice automatically. The reschedule notice will be present in invitee's inbox view.
CN=Deborah Vandeberghe/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusMacintosh: Categories are not saved
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesFGRN425QM5
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DVAE42CSZ3
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In build 164, categories assigned to calendar entries are not saved on the Macintosh Notes client.
CN=Deborah Vandeberghe/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=IAM/O=LotusMacintosh: Do not paste text into the Title field on a To Do task
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesFGRN425R3F
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
DVAE42CT39
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
Pasting text from the clipboard into the Title field on the To Do form causes the Macintosh Notes client to crash.
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNo alarms on the Macintosh
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN42ARE7
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Build 164, alarm functionality for the Macintosh is not available.
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CJM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusNo room/resource responses sent to Chairperson of a repeating meeting invitation
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesAPAI3Y6RF8
repeatingmeetingroomresource
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7P2F
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusOnly the first instance of repeating tasks appears on the Calendar view
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesFGRN3ZURKG
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN423P3Q
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In R5, task entries automatically appear on the Caljndar view. However, if a repeating group task is accepted by an R5 assignee, only the first instance of the task appears in the Calendar view. All instances are correctly created in the To Do view.
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRemove button in a group task not implemented
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN3Y7MRA
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The Remove button is intended to remove user names from the*Group Task, but it is not fully implemented for Build 164. As a workaround, the task owner should cancel the Group Task and create a new one, then send to the new list of assignees.
CN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusRemoving attendees/rooms/resources from a Meeting Invitation or Group To Do
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesAPAI3Y8HBY
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
LZAA3YDKK4
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusResending a Group Task
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesGroup Task
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7NSE
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusResponding to confirmation notices
ClientServer03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN3Y7NRE
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
If a meeting chair sends invitees a confirmatijn notice, invitees are given Response options, however, these response options are not fully implemented.
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordaj/OU=CAM/O=LotusRoom and Resource Owner Options issues
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling Issues
ownerresourcereservation
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7NW2
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
In Build 164, the Room and Resource Owner Options in the Resource Reservations database are not complete. If you do create a room and/or resources and assign an Owner or List of Userz, then they should be the only people allowed to reserve the room/resource. Use the "None" option to allow anyone to reserve a room or resource.
CN=Anita Paci/O=IrisCN:Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusSending repeating meeting invitations from R5 to R4.x
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar and Scheduling IssuesAPAI3Y7P8XRepeating Meetings
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
APAI3Y7NE6
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
CN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Lee Zaruba/OU=CAM/O=LotusCN=Farah Gron/O=IrisCN=Craig Lordan/OU=CAM/O=LotusTask update in the To Do view is not functioning
Client03 Troubleshooting11 Calendar ang Scheduling IssuesCalendar and Scheduling
Release Notes03 Troubleshooting
FGRN3XWPDW
TroubleshootingHelp Screen
The agent to update tasks has not been implemented for the Build 164 release.
(.txt)